Title: Sanskrit Primer

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 11
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 5. According to the Hindu mode of dividing syllables, each syllable must end in a **vowel**, or **risarga**, or **anusvara**^ except at **the end of the word**; and as ordinary Hindu usage does not divide the words of a sentence in writing, a final consonant is combined into one syllable with the initial vowel or consonant of the following word, so that a syllable ends in a consonant only **at the end of the sentence**.
5. According to the Hindu mode of dividing syllables, each syllable must end in a **vowel**, or **risarga**, or **anusvara**^ except at **the end of the word**; and as ordinary Hindu usage does not divide the words of a sentence in writing, a final consonant is combined into one syllable with the initial vowel or consonant of the following word, so that a syllable ends in a consonant only **at the end of the sentence**.
Thus the sentence ksetresu siktabhir meghanam adbhir dhanyam prarudham—* by the water which drops from the clouds upon the fields the grain grows tall’ — would be considered as consisting of the syllables kse tre su si kta bhi rme gha nd ma dbhi rdha nyam pra ru dham. Each of these syllables would be indicated by a single group of signs, without any reference whatever to the division of the words composing the sentence; and the syllables are always written independently, with more or less closeness of approach; either like this: % tj fa TFT fa MT MT U fa MT TT OI" thus: faîTfaHMTMTMfaMTMTM^K-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 20
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 43. D. Aspiration: h. This is usually pronounced like the ordinary European surd aspiration h. But its true value in the euphony of the language is that of a **sonant**. It is not an original sound of the language, but comes in most cases from an older **gh**, in some few cases from **dh** or **bh**. It appears to include in itself two stages of corruption of **gh**’ . one corresponding with that of **1c to c**, the other with that of **k to p**.
43. D. Aspiration: h. This is usually pronounced like the ordinary European surd aspiration h. But its true value in the euphony of the language is that of a **sonant**. It is not an original sound of the language, but comes in most cases from an older **gh**, in some few cases from **dh** or **bh**. It appears to include in itself two stages of corruption of **gh**’ . one corresponding with that of **1c to c**, the other with that of **k to p**.

Q: [...] (in all cases) by a special sign hi, from the anusvara [...], represented by n.
A: the assimilated in; of more independent origin
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 20
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 47. It is convenient in transliteration to distinguish the assimilated in (in all cases) by a special sign hi, from the anusvara of more independent origin, represented by n.
47. It is convenient in transliteration to distinguish the assimilated in (in all cases) by a special sign hi, from the anusvara of more independent origin, represented by n.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 21
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Light and Heavy Syllables. 48. For metrical purposes syllables (not vowels) are distinguished as ‘heavy’ and ‘light’. A syllable is heavy if its vowel is **long**, or short and followed by **more than one consonant** (“long by position ”). Visarga and anusvara are here counted as **full consonants**. The aspirated mutes, of course, do not count as double letters.
Light and Heavy Syllables. 48. For metrical purposes syllables (not vowels) are distinguished as ‘heavy’ and ‘light’. A syllable is heavy if its vowel is **long**, or short and followed by **more than one consonant** (“long by position ”). Visarga and anusvara are here counted as **full consonants**. The aspirated mutes, of course, do not count as double letters.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 21
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 52. In all gunating processes a remains **unchanged** — or. Introduction. 13 as it is sometimes expressed, a is **its own guna**; sjn a remains unchanged for **both guna and vrddhi**.
52. In all gunating processes a remains **unchanged** — or. Introduction. 13 as it is sometimes expressed, a is **its own guna**; sjn a remains unchanged for **both guna and vrddhi**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 22
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 53. The guna- increment does not, except in exceedingly rare instances, take place in a **heavy** syllable (see § 48) ending in a **consonan**t: e. g., fWR cit may become cet, and rii may become **H ne**; but tint or nind or <=t jtv may not become «r( cent or nend or al<^ jev.
53. The guna- increment does not, except in exceedingly rare instances, take place in a **heavy** syllable (see § 48) ending in a **consonan**t: e. g., fWR cit may become cet, and rii may become **H ne**; but tint or nind or <=t jtv may not become «r( cent or nend or al<^ jev.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 23
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Accent 56. The phenomena of accent are, by the Hindu grammarians of all ages alike, described and treated as depending on a variation of tone or pitch; of any difference of stress involved, they make no account. These accents are marked oidy in certain Vedic texts, and employed only in their recitation, whereas the accents used nowadays by Hindus in the pronunciation of Sanskrit (and left undenoted in writing) are mainly ictus-accents, i. e. variations of stress. The principles of the latter system will be given in an appendix. The older system of accents has **great etymological importance**; the latter none whatever; and only the older system will be referred to in the following. Here it will be enough to state that the primary tones or accent-pitches of the older system are two: a **higher, or acute**; arid a **lower, or grave**. A third, called svarita^ is always of **secondary** origin, being ordinarily the result of actual combination of an **acute** vowel and a **grave** vowel into one syllable. It is uniformly defined as compound in pitch, a union of higher and lower tone within the limits of a single syllable. It is thus identical in physical character with the Greek and Latin **circumflex**, and fully entitled to be called by the same name. Whenever, in the sequel, accent is mentioned, without further definition, the acute accent is to be understood; and it will be designated by the ordinary acute sign.
Accent 56. The phenomena of accent are, by the Hindu grammarians of all ages alike, described and treated as depending on a variation of tone or pitch; of any difference of stress involved, they make no account. These accents are marked oidy in certain Vedic texts, and employed only in their recitation, whereas the accents used nowadays by Hindus in the pronunciation of Sanskrit (and left undenoted in writing) are mainly ictus-accents, i. e. variations of stress. The principles of the latter system will be given in an appendix. The older system of accents has **great etymological importance**; the latter none whatever; and only the older system will be referred to in the following. Here it will be enough to state that the primary tones or accent-pitches of the older system are two: a **higher, or acute**; arid a **lower, or grave**. A third, called svarita^ is always of **secondary** origin, being ordinarily the result of actual combination of an **acute** vowel and a **grave** vowel into one syllable. It is uniformly defined as compound in pitch, a union of higher and lower tone within the limits of a single syllable. It is thus identical in physical character with the Greek and Latin **circumflex**, and fully entitled to be called by the same name. Whenever, in the sequel, accent is mentioned, without further definition, the acute accent is to be understood; and it will be designated by the ordinary acute sign.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 25
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 64. The only logical arrangement of the inodes and tenses in Sanskrit is shown in the following table (which includes only the classical speech): I. Present-System: a. **Indicative**, b. **Imperfect**, c. **Imperative**, d. **Optative**, e. Participle. II. Perfect-System, a. Indicative, b. Participle. III. Aorist Systems (of triple formation), a. Indicative, b. Optative (sometimes = “**Precative**”). IV. Future Systems. A. Sibilant Future, a. Indicative, b. **Pteterit**(- “**Conditional**’’). C. Participle. B. Periphrastic Future, a. Indicative.
64. The only logical arrangement of the inodes and tenses in Sanskrit is shown in the following table (which includes only the classical speech): I. Present-System: a. **Indicative**, b. **Imperfect**, c. **Imperative**, d. **Optative**, e. Participle. II. Perfect-System, a. Indicative, b. Participle. III. Aorist Systems (of triple formation), a. Indicative, b. Optative (sometimes = “**Precative**”). IV. Future Systems. A. Sibilant Future, a. Indicative, b. **Pteterit**(- “**Conditional**’’). C. Participle. B. Periphrastic Future, a. Indicative.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 32
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 90. Case-endings. The normal scheme of case - endings, as recognized by the native grammarians (and conveniently to be assumed as the basis of special descriptions), is this: Singular Dual Plural in. f. n. in. f. n. in. f. n. N. s m du i as i A. am m du i as i 1. a bhyam bhis D. e bhyam bhyas A b. «.s bhyam bhyas G. as os dm L. i os su It applies entire to consonant-stems, and to the radical division of Z and M-stems; and toother vowel-stems,with considerable variations and modifications. The endings which have almost or quite unbroken range, through stems of all classes, are bhyam and os of the dual, and bhis, bhyas, am, and su of the plural. 91. Pada-endings. The case-endings bhyam, bhis, bhyas, and su — i. e. those of the middle cases — are called pada (“word”)- endings. The treatment of stem-finals before them is generally the same as in the combinations of words with one another.
90. Case-endings. The normal scheme of case - endings, as recognized by the native grammarians (and conveniently to be assumed as the basis of special descriptions), is this: Singular Dual Plural in. f. n. in. f. n. in. f. n. N. s m du i as i A. am m du i as i 1. a bhyam bhis D. e bhyam bhyas A b. «.s bhyam bhyas G. as os dm L. i os su It applies entire to consonant-stems, and to the radical division of Z and M-stems; and toother vowel-stems,with considerable variations and modifications. The endings which have almost or quite unbroken range, through stems of all classes, are bhyam and os of the dual, and bhis, bhyas, am, and su of the plural. 91. Pada-endings. The case-endings bhyam, bhis, bhyas, and su — i. e. those of the middle cases — are called pada (“word”)- endings. The treatment of stem-finals before them is generally the same as in the combinations of words with one another.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 33
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson 1. 92. Verbs, Present Indicative active. Unaccented A-class. A number of roots conjugated in this class have medial short «• Inasmuch as a is **its own (/uwa**”, these roots merely add an ^81 a to form the present-stem; e. g., vad, present-stem vada. The final a of the stem is lengthened in the three first persons. Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. 2. vadami vada si 3. vadati vddavas ?" ci da / has vddalas vadamas vddatka ^f’rT vadanti
Lesson 1. 92. Verbs, Present Indicative active. Unaccented A-class. A number of roots conjugated in this class have medial short «• Inasmuch as a is **its own (/uwa**”, these roots merely add an ^81 a to form the present-stem; e. g., vad, present-stem vada. The final a of the stem is lengthened in the three first persons. Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. 2. vadami vada si 3. vadati vddavas ?" ci da / has vddalas vadamas vddatka ^f’rT vadanti

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 33
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 93. The ending of the 3rd plur. is properly ^5rf«rT anti’ , it suffers abbreviation, however, by the loss of its a, in verbs whose stem ends in a.
93. The ending of the 3rd plur. is properly ^5rf«rT anti’ , it suffers abbreviation, however, by the loss of its a, in verbs whose stem ends in a.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 33
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 94. As a heavy syllableending in a consonant cannot be gunated, a root like jw makes its 3rd sing. jivati ; nind makes nindati, etc. See § 53.
94. As a heavy syllableending in a consonant cannot be gunated, a root like jw makes its 3rd sing. jivati ; nind makes nindati, etc. See § 53.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 33
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 95. Euphonic rule. At the end of a word standing in the final position of a sentence, or alone, s and T r always become visarga ; A; and generally also before k, kh, x^ p, pZi, and before sibilants [77 s, s], whether these stand in the same word, or as initial in the following word; e. g. 2 * ^1: vadatas punar becomes always vadatah punah.
95. Euphonic rule. At the end of a word standing in the final position of a sentence, or alone, s and T r always become visarga ; A; and generally also before k, kh, x^ p, pZi, and before sibilants [77 s, s], whether these stand in the same word, or as initial in the following word; e. g. 2 * ^1: vadatas punar becomes always vadatah punah.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 33
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 96. Force of the present. The present indicative signifies 1. Present time. 2. Immediate **futurity**. 3. Past time, in **lively** narration (“**historical** present”).
96. Force of the present. The present indicative signifies 1. Present time. 2. Immediate **futurity**. 3. Past time, in **lively** narration (“**historical** present”).

TextBack: नद्याः वहति (nadyāḥ vahati) = “It flows by (or through) the river.”
• नद्याः (nadyāḥ) is in the instrumental case, indicating that the river is the medium through which the flowing occurs.
Here, √vah with the instrumental case emphasizes the action of flowing via or through something, typically referring to water or liquids moving through a channel, river, or similar medium.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 34
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary I. Verbs to be conjugated like **car** (**intr**.) go, wander, graze (of cattle) ; (**tr**.) perform, commit. **fiv** live. X **tyaj** leave, abandon. **dah** burn. **dhav** run. nam (**intr**.) bow, bend one’s self; (**tr**.) honor, reverence. ira **pac** cook. vadt **pat** fall; fly. Zpaf **yaj** sacrifice (c. acc. pers. et instr, rei). **raks** protect. **vad** speak, say. **vas** dwell. **vah** (**tr**.) carry, bear; (**intr**.) flow, blow, proceed. 7T1T **fans** praise.
Vocabulary I. Verbs to be conjugated like **car** (**intr**.) go, wander, graze (of cattle) ; (**tr**.) perform, commit. **fiv** live. X **tyaj** leave, abandon. **dah** burn. **dhav** run. nam (**intr**.) bow, bend one’s self; (**tr**.) honor, reverence. ira **pac** cook. vadt **pat** fall; fly. Zpaf **yaj** sacrifice (c. acc. pers. et instr, rei). **raks** protect. **vad** speak, say. **vas** dwell. **vah** (**tr**.) carry, bear; (**intr**.) flow, blow, proceed. 7T1T **fans** praise.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 34
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Adverbs and Conjunctions. atasitas hence thence therefore thereupon whence wherefo atra I here If iha | hither tatra there thither where < whither in this way so cfMT tatha in that way so in which wa5 as whence? why ? kutra gi kva where? whither? katham how? kada when? ’’SIMM I adhuna now adya to-day er a m so, thus IR eva just, exactly cf^T tada then sarvatra everywhere TfW iti so, thus ca (postpos.) -que yada when, if sad a always tu but, however n
Adverbs and Conjunctions. atasitas hence thence therefore thereupon whence wherefo atra I here If iha | hither tatra there thither where < whither in this way so cfMT tatha in that way so in which wa5 as whence? why ? kutra gi kva where? whither? katham how? kada when? ’’SIMM I adhuna now adya to-day er a m so, thus IR eva just, exactly cf^T tada then sarvatra everywhere TfW iti so, thus ca (postpos.) -que yada when, if sad a always tu but, however n

Back: 1 Now we live.
2 You both cook always.
3 He protects here.
4 I protect now.
5 When you run, then you fall.
6 Where do they sacrifice?
7 You both wander there.
8 Why do you praise?
9 How do I leave?
10 We both fall again.
11 You bum.
12 They speak again.
13 We both dwell there.
14 They live everywhere.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 35
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 26 Lesson I. NI. Exercise I.
26 Lesson I. NI. Exercise I.

Back: 15 adya tyaianti.
16 adhuna caratha.
17 sada raksami.
18 namavah punah.
19 kutra dhavasi.
20 yaiamah
21 pacatah.
22 tyaiatha.
23 dahati.
24 adhuna iivamah.
25 samsathah.
26 namatha kutah.
27 tatra pacanti.
28 kva vasatha.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 35
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 15. * Today 1 they abandon3. 16. Now’ ye go2. 17. Always1 1 protect3. 18. We two bow1 again3. 19. Whither1 runnest2 thout 20. We sacrifice. 21. They two cook. 22. Ye abandon. 23. He burns. 24. Now1 we live2. 25e/ Ye two praise. 26. Why2 do ye bend1? 27. There1 they fly2. 28. Where1 do ye dwell2?
15. * Today 1 they abandon3. 16. Now’ ye go2. 17. Always1 1 protect3. 18. We two bow1 again3. 19. Whither1 runnest2 thout 20. We sacrifice. 21. They two cook. 22. Ye abandon. 23. He burns. 24. Now1 we live2. 25e/ Ye two praise. 26. Why2 do ye bend1? 27. There1 they fly2. 28. Where1 do ye dwell2?
* The superior figures indicate the position in the Sanskrit sentence of equivalents for the words so designated. By this indication is avoided the necessity of applying euphonic rules which have not yet been stated. The order of words in Sanskrit is very free, and rarely influences the meaning of the sentence. From the figures the number of words required in the Sanskrit sentence will readily be seen. Words in Italics are not to be translated.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 35
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 97. Verbs. Unaccented a- class, cont’d. Roots of this class which end in a vowel, and consonant - roots not forming heavy syllables (§53), gunate their vowels in forming their present-stems; e. g., and «ft m form je and H nt; drv and \^bhu form yY dro and bho-, W smr forms ^7“ smar; cit and budh form ^fcf. cet and bodh ; forms vars.
97. Verbs. Unaccented a- class, cont’d. Roots of this class which end in a vowel, and consonant - roots not forming heavy syllables (§53), gunate their vowels in forming their present-stems; e. g., and «ft m form je and H nt; drv and \^bhu form yY dro and bho-, W smr forms ^7“ smar; cit and budh form ^fcf. cet and bodh ; forms vars.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 35
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 98. With the class-sign a, a final V e of the gunated root unites to form — see § 159; so 0 with a becomes ’’Sjrq ava; ar with ^5J a yields ara. Thus, fol yz, 3rd sing. jaya-ti; H hhu H^frT bhavati; smr smaraZz. 99. Roots in consonants: budh, 3rd sing. bodhati ; f^<T. ctY, WrrfW cetati ; Tt rarsata* . 100. The roots 9am and Vam malce ttie present-stems gdccha and <4 yaccha . ** 4
98. With the class-sign a, a final V e of the gunated root unites to form — see § 159; so 0 with a becomes ’’Sjrq ava; ar with ^5J a yields ara. Thus, fol yz, 3rd sing. jaya-ti; H hhu H^frT bhavati; smr smaraZz. 99. Roots in consonants: budh, 3rd sing. bodhati ; f^<T. ctY, WrrfW cetati ; Tt rarsata* . 100. The roots 9am and Vam malce ttie present-stems gdccha and <4 yaccha . ** 4
** As a rule, the grammarians do not allow tip ch to stand in
that form after a vowel, but require it to be doubled, becoming cch. An aspirate is doubled by prefixing the corresponding non-aspirate. Cf. § 165.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 36
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 101. The root sad, ‘sit’, makes the present-stem slda. The root guh, ‘hide’, makes guhati.
101. The root sad, ‘sit’, makes the present-stem slda. The root guh, ‘hide’, makes guhati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 36
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 102. Several roots in final « form their present-stem by a peculiar process of reduplication; thus, st ha, 3rd sing. tisthati ; pa, fp^frT plbatiTIT ghra, f^TTlfH jighrati. The final a of the root is shortened, in the reduplicated stem, except in the first persons. **
102. Several roots in final « form their present-stem by a peculiar process of reduplication; thus, st ha, 3rd sing. tisthati ; pa, fp^frT plbatiTIT ghra, f^TTlfH jighrati. The final a of the root is shortened, in the reduplicated stem, except in the first persons. **
** The dental sibilant s is changed to the lingual * •, if immediately preceded by any vowel save a and or by k or T r — unless the s be final, or followed by r. Thus, ti-stha-ti becomes tisthati (the change of th to th — a process of assimilation — will be explained below). So agni-su becomes agnisu; and dhanus-a becomes VJ<T^TT dhanusa. The nasalization of the alterant vowel, or in other words, its being followed by anusvara, does not prevent its altering effect upon the sibilant; thus, havznsi. And the alteration takes place in the initial of an ending after the final U s of a stem, whether the latter be regarded as also changed to Xf s or as converted into visarga; thus, havis-su or havih-su instead of havis-su.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 36
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 103. Masculines and Neuters in a. a. M asculines deva, 4 god Singular. Dual. N. devas devau Acc. dev am n Voc. deva b. Neuters: phala, ‘fruit’. N. phalam phale (a + z) Plural. dev an phalani Acc. Voc. phala In the dual and plural of **all** declensions the vocative is like the nominative.
103. Masculines and Neuters in a. a. M asculines deva, 4 god Singular. Dual. N. devas devau Acc. dev am n Voc. deva b. Neuters: phala, ‘fruit’. N. phalam phale (a + z) Plural. dev an phalani Acc. Voc. phala In the dual and plural of **all** declensions the vocative is like the nominative.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 37
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 104. Force of cases. 1. The nominative is casus subjectivus. 2. The accusative is casus objectivus, denoting chiefly the nearer or direct, sometimes however the more remote, object; sometimes also the terminus ad quern, and extent of time and space.
104. Force of cases. 1. The nominative is casus subjectivus. 2. The accusative is casus objectivus, denoting chiefly the nearer or direct, sometimes however the more remote, object; sometimes also the terminus ad quern, and extent of time and space.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 37
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 105. Euphonic combination of vowels. 1. a or a + or e. g. ^TcTT guta api = gala "pi-2. ^qor^SITH- «or e- g- ^TcfT + ’= "H-3. or ^5(1 4- u or ^3T u = e. g. ^TcTT + = ^TrftH gato "ta-4. ^5T or ^SFT + T = ar e- £• maha + * = maharsih. 5. or W + V e or dii = Tr di. e. g. eva = gatai "va. 6. or ^5FT + ^5Tt o or ^5Tt du = d,u. e. g. TTcTT + ^Tl MfV‘ osadhih = r
105. Euphonic combination of vowels. 1. a or a + or e. g. ^TcTT guta api = gala "pi-2. ^qor^SITH- «or e- g- ^TcfT + ’= "H-3. or ^5(1 4- u or ^3T u = e. g. ^TcTT + = ^TrftH gato "ta-4. ^5T or ^SFT + T = ar e- £• maha + * = maharsih. 5. or W + V e or dii = Tr di. e. g. eva = gatai "va. 6. or ^5FT + ^5Tt o or ^5Tt du = d,u. e. g. TTcTT + ^Tl MfV‘ osadhih = r

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 37
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 106. It will be the practice everywhere in this work to separate independent words in transliteration, but not in the deva- nagarz text; and if an initial vowel of a following word lias coalesced with a final of the preceding, this will be indicated by an apostrophe — single if the initial vowel be the shorter, double if it be the longer, of the two different initials which in every case of combination yield the same result. To aid the beginner, a point ♦ will sometimes be placed, in the devanagarz, under a long vowel formed by two coalescing vowels; thus, •rrOÛTK. cignina Jrinam.
106. It will be the practice everywhere in this work to separate independent words in transliteration, but not in the deva- nagarz text; and if an initial vowel of a following word lias coalesced with a final of the preceding, this will be indicated by an apostrophe — single if the initial vowel be the shorter, double if it be the longer, of the two different initials which in every case of combination yield the same result. To aid the beginner, a point ♦ will sometimes be placed, in the devanagarz, under a long vowel formed by two coalescing vowels; thus, •rrOÛTK. cignina Jrinam.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 37
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary II. Verbs, a- class: gam **Qgdcchati**) go. "5TT ghra (**jighrati**) smell. fol ji (**tr**. and **intr**.) conquer, win. dru run. nz lead, guide. Lesson II. 29 rn P& (**pibatP**) drink. bhu become, be, exist. o. yam (**yacchati**) furnish, give. vrs rain, give rain; (fig.) **shower down; overwhelm. smr remember, think on. stbd (**tisfhatz**) stand (intr.). Subst. **Masc**.: gaja elephant. gandha odor, perfume. 1TRT grama village. nara man (vir and homo* )
Vocabulary II. Verbs, a- class: gam **Qgdcchati**) go. "5TT ghra (**jighrati**) smell. fol ji (**tr**. and **intr**.) conquer, win. dru run. nz lead, guide. Lesson II. 29 rn P& (**pibatP**) drink. bhu become, be, exist. o. yam (**yacchati**) furnish, give. vrs rain, give rain; (fig.) **shower down; overwhelm. smr remember, think on. stbd (**tisfhatz**) stand (intr.). Subst. **Masc**.: gaja elephant. gandha odor, perfume. 1TRT grama village. nara man (vir and homo* )

Back: 1 They always remember the gods.
2 We go to the house.
3 The son drinks water.
4 The two kings conquer.
5 When do you both give the fruits?
6 Where do I take the elephant now?
7 The gods lead.
8 0 gods, all of you lead.
9 A man gives two fruits.
10 Now I smell perfume.
11 We both worship god.
12 0 son, they go to the village.
13 Two houses are there.
14 The kings scatter alms everywhere.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 38
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise II. ^TTf^T i q i i r i I $ l •nft i 8 i ^rrf^r i n i ^rsrrfH i $ i r ^rr: i i H ^rc i i i Q. i v * n fWrf * r i ro i ^tpt: i aa i i RR i H^cf: i A$ i ii A8 ii
Exercise II. ^TTf^T i q i i r i I $ l •nft i 8 i ^rrf^r i n i ^rsrrfH i $ i r ^rr: i i H ^rc i i i Q. i v * n fWrf * r i ro i ^tpt: i aa i i RR i H^cf: i A$ i ii A8 ii

Back: 15 naraḥ kṣīraṃ pibati.
16 gajaṃ nayati nṛpaḥ.
17 gṛhe patataḥ.
18 jalaṃ yacchati devaḥ.
19 devau smarathaḥ.
20 grāmaṃ jayati nṛpaḥ.
21 gajau gandhaṃ jighrataḥ.
22 phalāni pacanti.
23 devān namati naraḥ.
24 gajau jivataḥ.
25 varṣanti devāḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 38
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 15. The man1 drinks3 milk2. 16. The king3 leads2 the elephant1. 17. Two houses1 fall2. 18. The god3 gives2 water1. 19. Ye both think2 on (^) the two gods1 (accus."). 20. The king3 wins2 the village1. 21. The two elephants1 smell3 the perfume2. 22. They cook2 fruits1. 23. The man3 reverences2 the gods1. 24. The two elephants1 live2. 25. The gods2 give1 rain Cj^)*
15. The man1 drinks3 milk2. 16. The king3 leads2 the elephant1. 17. Two houses1 fall2. 18. The god3 gives2 water1. 19. Ye both think2 on (^) the two gods1 (accus."). 20. The king3 wins2 the village1. 21. The two elephants1 smell3 the perfume2. 22. They cook2 fruits1. 23. The man3 reverences2 the gods1. 24. The two elephants1 live2. 25. The gods2 give1 rain Cj^)*

TextBack: Radical m:
1) -m + k > -ṅk
2) -m + s > -ṃs
Radical n:
-n + s > -ṃs
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 38
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Final m is commonly written as anusvara if the following word begins with a consonant; but the Hindus pronounce it as H m in such cases. At the end of a sentence anusvara should not be written for my though this is a habit common in the MSS* Final radical m, in internal combination, is assimilated to a following mute or spirant. In the former case it becomes the nasal of the same class with the mute; in the latter it becomes anusvara.— Final radical n, in internal combination, becomes anusvara before a sibilant.
* Final m is commonly written as anusvara if the following word begins with a consonant; but the Hindus pronounce it as H m in such cases. At the end of a sentence anusvara should not be written for my though this is a habit common in the MSS* Final radical m, in internal combination, is assimilated to a following mute or spirant. In the former case it becomes the nasal of the same class with the mute; in the latter it becomes anusvara.— Final radical n, in internal combination, becomes anusvara before a sibilant.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 39
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson III. 107. Verbs. Accented ez-class. Roots of this class form their present-stem by adding an accented a to the root, which is not **gunated**. The inflection of these stems is precisely like that of stems belonging to the preceding class, except as to the position of the accent; thus, ksip. present-stem ksipa, pres. ind. f^xrrfH ksipasi. f**^rxrfn ksipati**, etc.
Lesson III. 107. Verbs. Accented ez-class. Roots of this class form their present-stem by adding an accented a to the root, which is not **gunated**. The inflection of these stems is precisely like that of stems belonging to the preceding class, except as to the position of the accent; thus, ksip. present-stem ksipa, pres. ind. f^xrrfH ksipasi. f**^rxrfn ksipati**, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 39
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 108. Several roots in r of this class (by the Hindus written with f) form stems in ira\ e. g., kr. ‘ strew’, tora"fc* . The roots in i and u and u change those vowels into iy and uv. respectively, before the class-sign; thus, ksi. fvfEjfcf ksiyati; 1R su. suvdti ; dhu, Vplfa dhuvati.
108. Several roots in r of this class (by the Hindus written with f) form stems in ira\ e. g., kr. ‘ strew’, tora"fc* . The roots in i and u and u change those vowels into iy and uv. respectively, before the class-sign; thus, ksi. fvfEjfcf ksiyati; 1R su. suvdti ; dhu, Vplfa dhuvati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 39
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 109. For the root ^X{ is. ‘desire’, ich is regarded as a substitute in the present-stem; thus, icchdti (§ 100, note). Likewise, r makes its present <T rcchdti; and prach. sometimes given as prch. makes 7T prcchdti.
109. For the root ^X{ is. ‘desire’, ich is regarded as a substitute in the present-stem; thus, icchdti (§ 100, note). Likewise, r makes its present <T rcchdti; and prach. sometimes given as prch. makes 7T prcchdti.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 39
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: HO. A number of roots following this class are strengthened in the present by a **penultimate** nasal; thus, "sic. present ind. sincdti. The nasal is always assimilated in class to the following consonant; thus n is used before **palatals**, n before **dentals**, m before **labials**; and _L_ n before **sibilants** and h.
HO. A number of roots following this class are strengthened in the present by a **penultimate** nasal; thus, "sic. present ind. sincdti. The nasal is always assimilated in class to the following consonant; thus n is used before **palatals**, n before **dentals**, m before **labials**; and _L_ n before **sibilants** and h.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 39
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: jont’d. Plural. devais devebhyas ^rFTTJC dev an dm ^3 devesu b. Neuters follow exactly the declension of masculines in the above cases ; thus, phalena, Mi’sl I <4 ph al ay a, etc. III. Masculines and Neuters in a. a. Masculines: Singular. Dual. devena 2 * crR^TT^ devabhyam Ab. »dev ay os devasya
jont’d. Plural. devais devebhyas ^rFTTJC dev an dm ^3 devesu b. Neuters follow exactly the declension of masculines in the above cases ; thus, phalena, Mi’sl I <4 ph al ay a, etc. III. Masculines and Neuters in a. a. Masculines: Singular. Dual. devena 2 * crR^TT^ devabhyam Ab. »dev ay os devasya

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 40
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 112. Force of cases 1. The instrumental answers the questions wherewith? and whereby? and expresses accompaniment, agent, or means. 2. The dative denotes the remoter object, and direction. It is also used as dativus com mo di ; very frequently also to denote end or purpose. Sometimes (and oftenest with copula omitted) it is predicative, in the sense of ‘makes for, tends toward’. 3. The ablative answers the question whence? and very frequently denotes cause. 4. The genitive is casus adjectivus, denoting all kinds of belonging (e. g. gen. subjectivus, objectivus, partitivus). 5. The locative denotes the place where, or the time when, an action occurs. It is often used absolutely, in agreement with a participle expressed or understood, as the ablative is used in Latin and the genitive in Greek. It is also used as terminus ad quern. *
112. Force of cases 1. The instrumental answers the questions wherewith? and whereby? and expresses accompaniment, agent, or means. 2. The dative denotes the remoter object, and direction. It is also used as dativus com mo di ; very frequently also to denote end or purpose. Sometimes (and oftenest with copula omitted) it is predicative, in the sense of ‘makes for, tends toward’. 3. The ablative answers the question whence? and very frequently denotes cause. 4. The genitive is casus adjectivus, denoting all kinds of belonging (e. g. gen. subjectivus, objectivus, partitivus). 5. The locative denotes the place where, or the time when, an action occurs. It is often used absolutely, in agreement with a participle expressed or understood, as the ablative is used in Latin and the genitive in Greek. It is also used as terminus ad quern. *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 40
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary 111. Verbs, a-class: •fax sic (**sincdti**) drip, drop; is (**icchdti**) wish, desire. krs (**krsdti**) plough. f^TT ksip (**ksipdti**) hurl, cast, throw. dip (**dipati**) show, point out. m^prach (**prcchafi**) ask, ask about. vip (**vipati**) enter. moisten. srj (**srjdti**) let go; (**sprpati**) touch; (in create. certain connections) wash. a- class: "1["%guh (**guhati**, § 101) hide, conceal. sad (**sldati**, § 101) sit.
Vocabulary 111. Verbs, a-class: •fax sic (**sincdti**) drip, drop; is (**icchdti**) wish, desire. krs (**krsdti**) plough. f^TT ksip (**ksipdti**) hurl, cast, throw. dip (**dipati**) show, point out. m^prach (**prcchafi**) ask, ask about. vip (**vipati**) enter. moisten. srj (**srjdti**) let go; (**sprpati**) touch; (in create. certain connections) wash. a- class: "1["%guh (**guhati**, § 101) hide, conceal. sad (**sldati**, § 101) sit.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 40
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst* Masc* : kata mat. kunta spear. bala child, boy. marga road, way, street. megha cloud. VT fara arrow. hasta hand. Neut.: ksetra field. dhana money, riches. langala plough. visa poison. sukha fortune, luck, happiness.
Subst* Masc* : kata mat. kunta spear. bala child, boy. marga road, way, street. megha cloud. VT fara arrow. hasta hand. Neut.: ksetra field. dhana money, riches. langala plough. visa poison. sukha fortune, luck, happiness.

Back: 1 The hide much money in the houses.
2 We throw spears with both hands.
3 Two men point the way to the king
4 We both go to the village by way.
5 The son is in the house here with happiness.
6 Cloud drops water.
7 The men desire happiness with money.
8 Both fruits are in both hands.
9 You touch the water with (your) hand
10 Two men sit on the mat.
11 They plow the fields with the ploughs.
12 The two kings enter the city.
13 The man goes on the road with (his) son.
14 God creates man.
TextBack: In same word :
( ṣ/r./ṛ/ṝ —at whatever distance— -n- followed immediately by -V/-n/-m/-y/-v )
⤵︎ ṇ
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 42
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise III. "tpnfrr ’jjOn a i i r i ’rrt wtf fû
Exercise III. "tpnfrr ’jjOn a i i r i ’rrt wtf fû
* See note to § 102. ** The dental nasal n, when immediately followed by a vowel, or by n or m or y or cf v, is turned into the lingual n if preceded in the same word by the lingual sibilant or semivowel or vowels — i. e. by l( s, y r, f, or ?• and this, not
only if the altering letter stands immediately before the nasal, but at whatever distance before the latter it may be found: unless, indeed, there intervene a palatal (except y), a lingual, or a dental. Thus, <1*1 XW nag arena, margena, puspani.

Back: - 15 narān mārgaṃ pṛcchati bālaḥ.
- 16 meghāḥ kṣetreṣu jalaṃ siñcanti.
- 17 narau mārgābhyāṃ nagaraṃ gacchataḥ.
- 18 narābhyāṃ dhanaṃ yacchati nṛpaḥ.
- 19 narasya putrāḥ kaṭeṣu sīdanti.
- 20 meghānāṃ jalaṃ yacchanti devāḥ.
- 21 jalena hastau spṛśāmaḥ.
- 22 narau putrau gṛhaṃ nayataḥ.
- 23 nagarasya mārgaṃ bālau diśataḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 42
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 15. The boy4 asks3 the men1 about the road2 face.). 16. The clouds1 drop4 water3 on the fields2 (Zoe.). 17. The two men1 go4 by two roads2 (instr.) into the city3. 18. The king4 gives3 the two men1 money2. 1SK The man’s1 sons2 sit4 on mats3. 20. The gods4 give3 the water2 of the clouds1. 21. We wash3 (use both hands2 with water1. 22. Both men1 lead4 their sons2 (dual) home3 23. The two boys3 point out4 the road2 to the city1 (gen.).
15. The boy4 asks3 the men1 about the road2 face.). 16. The clouds1 drop4 water3 on the fields2 (Zoe.). 17. The two men1 go4 by two roads2 (instr.) into the city3. 18. The king4 gives3 the two men1 money2. 1SK The man’s1 sons2 sit4 on mats3. 20. The gods4 give3 the water2 of the clouds1. 21. We wash3 (use both hands2 with water1. 22. Both men1 lead4 their sons2 (dual) home3 23. The two boys3 point out4 the road2 to the city1 (gen.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 42
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson IV. 113. Masculines Singular. N. agnis A. agnim I. agnina D. agnaye A. agnes G. » »L. agnau V. agne in «• "^Srfa agni, ‘fire Dual. agnl, jf n agnibhyam n r> n r> agnyos n n Plural. aâyas agnln agnibhis agnibhyas T agninam agnisu*
Lesson IV. 113. Masculines Singular. N. agnis A. agnim I. agnina D. agnaye A. agnes G. » »L. agnau V. agne in «• "^Srfa agni, ‘fire Dual. agnl, jf n agnibhyam n r> n r> agnyos n n Plural. aâyas agnln agnibhis agnibhyas T agninam agnisu*

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 43
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 114. Neuters in i. ‘water’. Singular. n. Dual. varinz Plural. cf | <3faU varzni A. r> r> I- 3 I fX<ffT varina * D. varine Ab. v^r^as G. r> 55 l. ^rfvfar v ar ini •n y) varibhyam <rf<3!h^: v ar in os * * •n 55 varibhis varibhyas 55 55 varznam ^TTfX^J varisu V. vare or ^Tfr vari
114. Neuters in i. ‘water’. Singular. n. Dual. varinz Plural. cf | <3faU varzni A. r> r> I- 3 I fX<ffT varina * D. varine Ab. v^r^as G. r> 55 l. ^rfvfar v ar ini •n y) varibhyam <rf<3!h^: v ar in os * * •n 55 varibhis varibhyas 55 55 varznam ^TTfX^J varisu V. vare or ^Tfr vari

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 43
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 115. Masculine and neuter **adjectives** in i are declined like the substantives above. But neuter **adjectives** (never **substantives**) may, in the **dat**., **abl**., **gen**., and **loc**. **sing**., and the **gen**. and **loc**. **dual**, substitute the corresponding forms of **masculines**.
115. Masculine and neuter **adjectives** in i are declined like the substantives above. But neuter **adjectives** (never **substantives**) may, in the **dat**., **abl**., **gen**., and **loc**. **sing**., and the **gen**. and **loc**. **dual**, substitute the corresponding forms of **masculines**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 43
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 116. Euphonic changes of s and 77 r. These two sounds stand to each other in the practical relation, in external combination, of corresponding surd and sonant: in countless cases 7^ s becomes y r in situations requiring or favoring the occurrence of a **sonant**; and, less often, 77 r becomes 7^ s where a **surd** is required. In **internal** combination the two are far less **interchangeable**. The s is extremely common as an **etymological final**, the r not common.
116. Euphonic changes of s and 77 r. These two sounds stand to each other in the practical relation, in external combination, of corresponding surd and sonant: in countless cases 7^ s becomes y r in situations requiring or favoring the occurrence of a **sonant**; and, less often, 77 r becomes 7^ s where a **surd** is required. In **internal** combination the two are far less **interchangeable**. The s is extremely common as an **etymological final**, the r not common.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 43
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 117. A. Final 7( s. 1. Before a sonant, either vowel or consonant (except 77 — see below is changed to the sonant T r — unless, indeed, it be preceded by a or a; thus,
117. A. Final 7( s. 1. Before a sonant, either vowel or consonant (except 77 — see below is changed to the sonant T r — unless, indeed, it be preceded by a or a; thus,
agnis atra becomes agnir atra; agnis dahati becomes agnir dahati. See also § 95.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 44
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 118. 2. Final as’> before any sonant consonant or before initial short a, is changed to o — and the initial U a is **dropped** ; thus, nrpas jayati becomes <fX?T nrpo jayati; nrpas atra — <rcff nrpo ‘tra.
118. 2. Final as’> before any sonant consonant or before initial short a, is changed to o — and the initial U a is **dropped** ; thus, nrpas jayati becomes <fX?T nrpo jayati; nrpas atra — <rcff nrpo ‘tra.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 44
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 119. It is the practice in our system of transliteration to render the sign which denotes this dropping of an initial ^5T «, by an inverted comma. 120. 3. Before any initial vowel other than short ^5T a, final as loses its s, becoming simple a; and the **hiatus** thus occasioned remains; thus, nrpas icchati becomes nrpa icchati; cTcT^ tatas udakam = rJTT tata udakam.
119. It is the practice in our system of transliteration to render the sign which denotes this dropping of an initial ^5T «, by an inverted comma. 120. 3. Before any initial vowel other than short ^5T a, final as loses its s, becoming simple a; and the **hiatus** thus occasioned remains; thus, nrpas icchati becomes nrpa icchati; cTcT^ tatas udakam = rJTT tata udakam.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 44
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 121. 4. Final ^5TT^ as before any sonant, whether **vowel** or **consonant**, loses its 5, becoming simply a; and the hiatus thus occasioned remains ; thus, nrpas icchanti = •jm wrpa icchanti; nrpas jay anti = <t M I 5nrfs?i nrpa jay anti.
121. 4. Final ^5TT^ as before any sonant, whether **vowel** or **consonant**, loses its 5, becoming simply a; and the hiatus thus occasioned remains ; thus, nrpas icchanti = •jm wrpa icchanti; nrpas jay anti = <t M I 5nrfs?i nrpa jay anti.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 44
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 122. B. Final r. 1. Final r in general shows the same form which s would exhibit under the same conditions: thus TT»T^ punar standing at the end of a sentence becomes TJwj: punah; ’Ft: gih. But original final r, after a or ^5TT <z, maintains itself before **vowels** and **sonant consonants**; thus, punar atra, punar jayati.
122. B. Final r. 1. Final r in general shows the same form which s would exhibit under the same conditions: thus TT»T^ punar standing at the end of a sentence becomes TJwj: punah; ’Ft: gih. But original final r, after a or ^5TT <z, maintains itself before **vowels** and **sonant consonants**; thus, punar atra, punar jayati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 44
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 123. 2. A double r is **nowhere** admitted: if such would occur, either by retention of an original 7^ r or by conversion of s to T r, the first X? r is **omitted**, and the preceding vowel, if **short**, is made **long** by compensation; thus, TT
123. 2. A double r is **nowhere** admitted: if such would occur, either by retention of an original 7^ r or by conversion of s to T r, the first X? r is **omitted**, and the preceding vowel, if **short**, is made **long** by compensation; thus, TT

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 45
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary IV. Verbs: rub (**rohati**) grow. krt (**krntdti**) cut, cut off. lip (**limpati**) smear nine (**muncati**) free, deliver, release. lup (**lumpati**) break to pieces, devastate, plunder. Subst.: agni, **m**., fire; (as proper VTfllT pani, **m**., hand. name) Agni, the god of fire, wfx: ari, **m**., enemy. asi, **m**., sword. ? * **^5** seer. HTQ papa, **n**., sin. rama, **m**., nom. pr.^ name of a hero. vrksa, **m**., tree. kavi, **m**., poet. fjrfx; giri, **m**., mountain. jana, **m**., man; (pL) people. giva, **m**., nom. pr. name of a god. Jffllsatya, **n**., truth, righteousness. duhkha,**n**., misery, mis-hari, **m**., nom. pr.. * name of fortune. a god.
Vocabulary IV. Verbs: rub (**rohati**) grow. krt (**krntdti**) cut, cut off. lip (**limpati**) smear nine (**muncati**) free, deliver, release. lup (**lumpati**) break to pieces, devastate, plunder. Subst.: agni, **m**., fire; (as proper VTfllT pani, **m**., hand. name) Agni, the god of fire, wfx: ari, **m**., enemy. asi, **m**., sword. ? * **^5** seer. HTQ papa, **n**., sin. rama, **m**., nom. pr.^ name of a hero. vrksa, **m**., tree. kavi, **m**., poet. fjrfx; giri, **m**., mountain. jana, **m**., man; (pL) people. giva, **m**., nom. pr. name of a god. Jffllsatya, **n**., truth, righteousness. duhkha,**n**., misery, mis-hari, **m**., nom. pr.. * name of fortune. a god.

Back: - 1 The gods release the men from sin at all times.
- 2 Where do the king"s two sons dwell?
- 3 The hermit protects (his) son from suffering.
- 4 The king cuts off both the hands of the enemy with sword.
- 5 Poets praise Hari.
- 6 The enemies plunder the people"s property.
- 7 Water falls from the mountain.
- 8 You (all) smear the arrows with poison.
- 9 The trees grow on the mountain.
- 10 Two sons of both seers stand on the road there.
- 11 Hari gives the awards to the two poets.
- 12 Rama dwells with the seers.
- 13 The kings bum houses of the enemies with fire.
- 14    They two sacrifice Hari with milk.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 45
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise IV. ufrai golla gat
Exercise IV. ufrai golla gat
* Modifiers Generally precede the. word which is modified.

Back: - 15 śivo giriṣu vasati.
- 16 arī kuntān nṛpāya kṣipataḥ.
- 17 rāmo hastābhyāṃ putrau spṛśati.
- 18 agnir vṛkṣān dahati.
- 19 ṛṣayo vadanti satyam.
- 20 satyena janānāṃ sukhaṃ bhavati.
- 21 ṛṣer hastau jalaṃ spṛśataḥ.
- 22 phalāni vṛkṣeṣu tiṣṭhanti.
- 23 janā hariṃ smaranti.
- 24 rāmo hastād asiṃ kṣipati.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 45
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: I A3 I wft ’HW II *18 II 15. Civa1 dwells3 in the mountains2. 16. Both enemies1 hurl4 spears2 ot the king1 It. Rama1 touches4 his tivo sons with his hands2. 18. Fire" burns3 the trees2. 19. Seers1 speak" the truth3. 20. Through righteousness1 happiness3 arises4 (lj) for man-* Modifiers Generally precede the. word which is modified. 36 Lesson IV. V. kind2 gen, pl.}. 21. The seer’s1 two hands2 touch4 water8. 22. Fruits1 are3 (use on the trees2. 23. People1 remember3 Hari2. 24. Rama1 hurls4 the sword3 from his band2 (abl.}.
I A3 I wft ’HW II *18 II 15. Civa1 dwells3 in the mountains2. 16. Both enemies1 hurl4 spears2 ot the king1 It. Rama1 touches4 his tivo sons with his hands2. 18. Fire" burns3 the trees2. 19. Seers1 speak" the truth3. 20. Through righteousness1 happiness3 arises4 (lj) for man-* Modifiers Generally precede the. word which is modified. 36 Lesson IV. V. kind2 gen, pl.}. 21. The seer’s1 two hands2 touch4 water8. 22. Fruits1 are3 (use on the trees2. 23. People1 remember3 Hari2. 24. Rama1 hurls4 the sword3 from his band2 (abl.}.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 46
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 124. Verbs. Unaccented ya-class. Roots of this class form their present-stem by adding Zf ya to the root, which bears the **accent**. Thus from nah is made the present-stem nahya\ from lubh, lubhya. 125. The inflection of stems of this class follows the model of vad.
124. Verbs. Unaccented ya-class. Roots of this class form their present-stem by adding Zf ya to the root, which bears the **accent**. Thus from nah is made the present-stem nahya\ from lubh, lubhya. 125. The inflection of stems of this class follows the model of vad.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 46
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 126. Certain ^5TT a-roots, because of their peculiar exchanges with i and z-forms, especially in the formation of the presentstem, are given by the Hindu grammarians as ending in If e or di or 0 (cf. § 132), and by them assigned to the bhuy or a-class. Thus ‘suck’ (Hindu dhe), forms dhayati; the root or JI hva (Hindu hoe} fo ITT g& (Hindu ?T gai} makes iJTZrfTf gdyati.
126. Certain ^5TT a-roots, because of their peculiar exchanges with i and z-forms, especially in the formation of the presentstem, are given by the Hindu grammarians as ending in If e or di or 0 (cf. § 132), and by them assigned to the bhuy or a-class. Thus ‘suck’ (Hindu dhe), forms dhayati; the root or JI hva (Hindu hoe} fo ITT g& (Hindu ?T gai} makes iJTZrfTf gdyati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 46
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 127. For the root ^TT ‘see’, is substituted in the presentsystem another rootTHU which makes *Wfcf pa$yati.
127. For the root ^TT ‘see’, is substituted in the presentsystem another rootTHU which makes *Wfcf pa$yati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 46
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 128. Masculines Singular. N. bhanus A. bhanum I. bhanuna D. bhanave Ab. bhanos G. „ r> L. | <ft bhanau V. n * ft bhdno in u. bhanu, ‘Dual. bhanu bhanubhyam 55 »5) »95 »un’. Plural. bhanavas bh anun bhanubhis l^st^"^bhanubhyas •n 55 |4I bh anun dm ex. bhanusu Lesson V. 37 Masculine adjectives in u are similarly declined.
128. Masculines Singular. N. bhanus A. bhanum I. bhanuna D. bhanave Ab. bhanos G. „ r> L. | <ft bhanau V. n * ft bhdno in u. bhanu, ‘Dual. bhanu bhanubhyam 55 »5) »95 »un’. Plural. bhanavas bh anun bhanubhis l^st^"^bhanubhyas •n 55 |4I bh anun dm ex. bhanusu Lesson V. 37 Masculine adjectives in u are similarly declined.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 47
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 129. Euphonic Changes of 5, cont’d. 1. Final s, the dental sibilant, whether original or representing final yr, before the palatal surd mutes c, cA], is assimilated, becoming palatal 7^ Thus naras carati becomes narag carati; naras chalena becomes narag chalena. 2. Before a lingual surd mute [<r £, th], in like manner, it would become lingual TJ f, but the case almost **never** occurs. 3. Before the dental surd mutes t, th], since it is already of the same class with theiâ, it of course remains **unchanged**; thus, rdmas tisthati.
129. Euphonic Changes of 5, cont’d. 1. Final s, the dental sibilant, whether original or representing final yr, before the palatal surd mutes c, cA], is assimilated, becoming palatal 7^ Thus naras carati becomes narag carati; naras chalena becomes narag chalena. 2. Before a lingual surd mute [<r £, th], in like manner, it would become lingual TJ f, but the case almost **never** occurs. 3. Before the dental surd mutes t, th], since it is already of the same class with theiâ, it of course remains **unchanged**; thus, rdmas tisthati.

TextBack: 1. Ā with the Ablative (in the sense of ‘hither from’, ‘all the way from’):
a) आ पर्वतात् गच्छति “He goes all the way from the mountain.”
b) आ गृहात् आगत्य शालाम् प्रविशति “He comes all the way from the house and enters the hall.”
2. Ā with the Accusative (in the sense of ‘hither to’, ‘all the way to’):
a) आ नगरम् गच्छति “He goes all the way to the city.”
b) आ पार्श्वम् आगच्छति “He comes up to the side (of someone).”
3. Ā meaning ‘all the way to’, ‘until’:
a) आ यावत् रात्रिः भवति, सोऽपि प्राप्तः “Until the night arrives, he too will have come.”
• ā meaning “until.”
b) आ शिवम् गच्छति “He goes all the way to Shiva.”
• ā meaning “all the way to” in a spiritual context.
4. Ā as a prefix to verbs (meaning ‘to’, ‘unto’, ‘at’):
a) आगच्छति “He comes to.”
• ā as a prefix to gacchati (to go), forming āgacchati (“to come”).
b) आप्नोति “He attains.”
• ā as a prefix to āpnoti (from the root √āp meaning “to attain”).
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 47
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 130. The preposition "53TT « is sometimes used with the **ablative** (much less often with the **accusative**), in the sense of ‘**hither from**’, ‘**all the way from**’; but far more usually to signify ‘**all the way to’, ‘until**’. As a prefix to verbs, "!5Sn « means ‘**to**’, ‘**unto**’, ‘**at**’.
130. The preposition "53TT « is sometimes used with the **ablative** (much less often with the **accusative**), in the sense of ‘**hither from**’, ‘**all the way from**’; but far more usually to signify ‘**all the way to’, ‘until**’. As a prefix to verbs, "!5Sn « means ‘**to**’, ‘**unto**’, ‘**at**’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 47
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary V. Verbs: as (**asyati**) throw, hurl. kup (**kupyati** — w. **gen**. or **dat**.) be angry. krudh (**krudhyati** — w. **gen**. or **dat**.) be angry. gam + a (**agacchati**) come, rf tr (**tarati**) cross over. •HO na^ (**nd^yati**) perish. "Q’TT (**pa$yati**) see. ruh (**rohati**) rise, spring up, grow. + ^TT a (**arohati**) climb, mount, ascend. (**likhati**) scratch; write. vpT lubh (**lubhyati** — w. **dat**. or **loc**.) desire, covet. Vjq
Vocabulary V. Verbs: as (**asyati**) throw, hurl. kup (**kupyati** — w. **gen**. or **dat**.) be angry. krudh (**krudhyati** — w. **gen**. or **dat**.) be angry. gam + a (**agacchati**) come, rf tr (**tarati**) cross over. •HO na^ (**nd^yati**) perish. "Q’TT (**pa$yati**) see. ruh (**rohati**) rise, spring up, grow. + ^TT a (**arohati**) climb, mount, ascend. (**likhati**) scratch; write. vpT lubh (**lubhyati** — w. **dat**. or **loc**.) desire, covet. Vjq

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 48
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Snbst.: ^^4 anna, **n**.5 food, fodder. *41 acva. **in**., horse. ZfTM bhanu, **m**., sun. mani, **m**., jewel. udadhi, **in**., ocean. guru, **m**., teacher. qyy pattra, **n**., leaf, letter. pada, **m**., foot; ray, beam. jyg bahu, **m**., arm. bindu, **in**., drop. quarter; Trftr raff, **m**., heap. vayu, **in**., wind. fWw visnu, **m**., nom. pr. name of a god. vg patru, **m**., enemy. fÎ^T tfkhara, **m**., summit. f^T^T **ni**., pupil, scholar. sukta, **n**., Vedic hyrnn.
Snbst.: ^^4 anna, **n**.5 food, fodder. *41 acva. **in**., horse. ZfTM bhanu, **m**., sun. mani, **m**., jewel. udadhi, **in**., ocean. guru, **m**., teacher. qyy pattra, **n**., leaf, letter. pada, **m**., foot; ray, beam. jyg bahu, **m**., arm. bindu, **in**., drop. quarter; Trftr raff, **m**., heap. vayu, **in**., wind. fWw visnu, **m**., nom. pr. name of a god. vg patru, **m**., enemy. fÎ^T tfkhara, **m**., summit. f^T^T **ni**., pupil, scholar. sukta, **n**., Vedic hyrnn.

Back: 1 Poets desire money.
2 The hermit sees the Vedic hymns.
3 Two teachers are angry with both students.
4 Kings are angry with (their) enemies.
5 Fire is in the ocean.
6 You (all) cut down the trees with axe.
7 Drops of water fall from the mountain.
8 Hermit worships Lord Visnu for the king.
9 The king mounts the horse.
10 The water in the fields dries up.
11 Teachers love (their) students.
12 The enemies of the kings perish with the sword.
13 The child writes a letter to (his) teacher.
14 The people desire the heaps of gems.
15 The trees grow from the mountain.
16 People cross the water with both arms.
17 The man calls two children in the house.
18 The poet"s two sons see an elephant in the street of the village.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 48
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise V.
Exercise V.

Back: - 19 bhānoḥ pādā girīnadhunārohanti.
- 20 jalasya bindur meghāt patati.
- 21 he narā, nagaraṃ paśyāmaḥ.
- 22 nṛpau kavīnāṃ snihyataḥ.
- 23 vāyur girīṇāṃ śikharebhyo vahati.
- 24 nṛpo’riṣu kuntān kṣipati (asyati).
- 25 śiṣyo guruṃ namati.
- 26 narau putrair āgacchataḥ.
- 27 nṛpau kaver maṇibhyo lubhyataḥ.
- 28 he ṛṣe, viṣṇuṃ yajāmaḥ.
- 29 annam agninā pacataḥ.
- 30 ṛṣayo viṣṇuṃ sūktaiḥ śaṃsanti.
- 31 nagare nṛpaḥ śatrūn hvayati.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 48
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: A 19. Now4 the sun’s1 rays2 climb5 the mountains3. 20. A drop* of water1 falls4 down from, the cloud3. 21. O1 men , we see the city3. 22. Both kings1 love3 poets2 (gen. or loc.). 23. The wind1 blows4 (M<) from the summits3 of the mountains2. 24. The king1 hurls4 spears3 at his enemies2 (dat. or loc.). 25. T. he scholar bows3 before his teacher2 (acc.). 26. Two men1 come3 with their sons2 (instr.). 27. The two kings1 desire4 the poet’s2 jewels (dat. or loc.). 28. O1 seer,2 we sacrifice4 to Visnu3 (acc.). 29. 1 he two
A 19. Now4 the sun’s1 rays2 climb5 the mountains3. 20. A drop* of water1 falls4 down from, the cloud3. 21. O1 men , we see the city3. 22. Both kings1 love3 poets2 (gen. or loc.). 23. The wind1 blows4 (M<) from the summits3 of the mountains2. 24. The king1 hurls4 spears3 at his enemies2 (dat. or loc.). 25. T. he scholar bows3 before his teacher2 (acc.). 26. Two men1 come3 with their sons2 (instr.). 27. The two kings1 desire4 the poet’s2 jewels (dat. or loc.). 28. O1 seer,2 we sacrifice4 to Visnu3 (acc.). 29. 1 he two
* Orthodox Hindus maintain that the Vedic hymns, etc., were revealed to their reputed authors, who thus ‘saw’ them.
cook3 food1 with fire2. 30. The seers1 praise4 Visnu2 with hymns3. 31. In the city1 the king2 calls4 his enemies3.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson VI. 131. Verbs. ?/cr-class, cont’d. The roots of this class which end in O1H lengthen their in forming their present-stem; thus, cfF[ tam, cTT^Tfa tdmyati\ bhram^ XT^fcf bhrdmyati—but this last makes also forms according to the unaccented a-class; thus bhrdmati, etc. The root mad has the same lengthening : ^RT<rfW m&d/yati.
Lesson VI. 131. Verbs. ?/cr-class, cont’d. The roots of this class which end in O1H lengthen their in forming their present-stem; thus, cfF[ tam, cTT^Tfa tdmyati\ bhram^ XT^fcf bhrdmyati—but this last makes also forms according to the unaccented a-class; thus bhrdmati, etc. The root mad has the same lengthening : ^RT<rfW m&d/yati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 132. Certain a-roots (five — by the Hindus written with final o) make present-stems with an accented yd; thus, da, dyati.
132. Certain a-roots (five — by the Hindus written with final o) make present-stems with an accented yd; thus, da, dyati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 133. The root vyadh is abbreviated to vidh in the present-system : vidhyati.
133. The root vyadh is abbreviated to vidh in the present-system : vidhyati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 134. The root kram, said by the natives to form its present-stem according to this class, really forms it only according to the a-class, and the root-vowel is lengthened in the active voice, but not in the middle; thus, krdmati, but middle kramate.
134. The root kram, said by the natives to form its present-stem according to this class, really forms it only according to the a-class, and the root-vowel is lengthened in the active voice, but not in the middle; thus, krdmati, but middle kramate.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 135. The root
135. The root

TextBack: बाहु
Declension table of [Mas.] bāhu
Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | bāhuḥ | bāhū | bāhavaḥ
Vocative | bāho | bāhū | bāhavaḥ
Accusative | bāhum | bāhū | bāhūn
Instrumental | bāhunā | bāhubhyām | bāhubhiḥ
Dative | bāhave | bāhubhyām | bāhubhyaḥ
Ablative | bāhoḥ bāhutaḥ | bāhubhyām | bāhubhyaḥ
Genitive |  | bāhvoḥ | bāhūnām
Locative | bāhau | bāhvoḥ | bāhuṣu
Compound bāhu-
Adverb -bāhu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 49
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 136. Neuters in u. Singular. madhu, ‘Dual. honey ’. Plural. madhuni y> madhuna madhune Ab. madhurfas niadhubhyain T) . T) T> "L. madhuni madhunos •n ”madhubhis madhubhyas y> ”madhunam niadhusu
136. Neuters in u. Singular. madhu, ‘Dual. honey ’. Plural. madhuni y> madhuna madhune Ab. madhurfas niadhubhyain T) . T) T> "L. madhuni madhunos •n ”madhubhis madhubhyas y> ”madhunam niadhusu

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 50
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 137. Neuter adjectives (but not substantives) in u may take the forms proper to the masculine in the **dat**., **abl**.-**gen**., **loc**. **sing**.? and **gen**.-**loc**. **dual**.
137. Neuter adjectives (but not substantives) in u may take the forms proper to the masculine in the **dat**., **abl**.-**gen**., **loc**. **sing**.? and **gen**.-**loc**. **dual**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 50
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 138. Changes of final n. Before initial j and TT n becomes n; thus, ^T<TT* t tdn janan becomes 7TT-tanjanan; TTFt idn Vatrdn - cn^lTJ^ £atrun-the last case, however, ch is almost always substituted for the initial H c; thus, Zan chatrun.
138. Changes of final n. Before initial j and TT n becomes n; thus, ^T<TT* t tdn janan becomes 7TT-tanjanan; TTFt idn Vatrdn - cn^lTJ^ £atrun-the last case, however, ch is almost always substituted for the initial H c; thus, Zan chatrun.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 50
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 139. Final n, before an initial Z, is assimilated and becomes nasalized Z, which is written wZ, or (what is the same thing) — n,- thus tdn lokan becomes td^l lokan or
139. Final n, before an initial Z, is assimilated and becomes nasalized Z, which is written wZ, or (what is the same thing) — n,- thus tdn lokan becomes td^l lokan or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 50
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 140. Before the surd palatal, lingual, and dental mutes there is inserted after final n a sibilant of each of those classes respectively, before which •y n becomes anusvara; thus for tan ca we find cfT^T tan$ ca; for cTETT tan tathay tatha*
140. Before the surd palatal, lingual, and dental mutes there is inserted after final n a sibilant of each of those classes respectively, before which •y n becomes anusvara; thus for tan ca we find cfT^T tan$ ca; for cTETT tan tathay tatha*
* This rule really involves an historic survival, the large majority of cases of final n in the language being for original ns. Practically, the rule applies only to n before c and t9 since cases involving the other initials are excessively rare.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 50
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * This rule really involves an historic survival, the large majority of cases of final n in the language being for original ns. Practically, the rule applies only to n before c and t9 since cases involving the other initials are excessively rare. Vocabulary VI. Verbs: r (**rcchati** — § 109) go to; fall to one’s lot, fall upon. kram + ^STT « (**akramati**) stride up to, attack. cam + ^sn a (**acamati**) sip, drink, rinse the mouth. cfjy tarn (**lamyati**) be sad. tus (**tusyati**) rejoice, take pleasure in (w. instr.). div (**dzvyatij** play. Lesson VI. 41 bhram (**bhrdmyati** — § 131) wander about. mad (**madyati**) get drunk. vyadh (**vidhyati**) hit, pierce. fam (**famyati**) become quiet, be extinguished, go out. pram (**pramyati**) become weary. hr (**harati**) take away, steal, plunder.
* This rule really involves an historic survival, the large majority of cases of final n in the language being for original ns. Practically, the rule applies only to n before c and t9 since cases involving the other initials are excessively rare. Vocabulary VI. Verbs: r (**rcchati** — § 109) go to; fall to one’s lot, fall upon. kram + ^STT « (**akramati**) stride up to, attack. cam + ^sn a (**acamati**) sip, drink, rinse the mouth. cfjy tarn (**lamyati**) be sad. tus (**tusyati**) rejoice, take pleasure in (w. instr.). div (**dzvyatij** play. Lesson VI. 41 bhram (**bhrdmyati** — § 131) wander about. mad (**madyati**) get drunk. vyadh (**vidhyati**) hit, pierce. fam (**famyati**) become quiet, be extinguished, go out. pram (**pramyati**) become weary. hr (**harati**) take away, steal, plunder.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 51
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: aksa, **m**., die, dice. adharma, **m**., injustice, wrong. ’^Srf^T **m**., bee. apru, **n**., tear. rksa, **m**., bear. kopa3 **in**., anger. ksatriya, **m**., warrior, man of the second caste. nrpati, **m**., king. netra, **n**., eye. madhu, **n**., honey. mukha, **n**., mouth, face. ^9 mrtyu, **m**., death. vasu, **n**., wealth, money.
Subst.: aksa, **m**., die, dice. adharma, **m**., injustice, wrong. ’^Srf^T **m**., bee. apru, **n**., tear. rksa, **m**., bear. kopa3 **in**., anger. ksatriya, **m**., warrior, man of the second caste. nrpati, **m**., king. netra, **n**., eye. madhu, **n**., honey. mukha, **n**., mouth, face. ^9 mrtyu, **m**., death. vasu, **n**., wealth, money.

Back: - 1 Bears desire honey.
- 2 Now the hermit drinks water with (his) hand.
- 3 The kings play with dices there.
- 4 The bee gets drunk with honey.
- 5 The men smear (their) swords with poison.
- 6 Rama attacks the warriors with (his) axe.
- 7 We praise the teachers and disciples.
- 8 The enemies plunder people"s wealth.
- 9 Both of men reach (their) death.
- 10 Tears fall from the boy"s two eyes.
- 11 Fire is extinguished by water.
- 12 The seer"s two horses become weary.
- 13 The teacher is sad because of the evil of (his) student.
- 14 The elephants wander about in the city.
- 15 The children are delighted with honey and milk.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 51
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise VI. i 3 i i 8 i mtt fWjrr^t * i q i vw i £ i if-hth: i "a i •^rr^rr ^nmn i i * ranp^
Exercise VI. i 3 i i 8 i mtt fWjrr^t * i q i vw i £ i if-hth: i "a i •^rr^rr ^nmn i i * ranp^

Back: - 16 kṣatriyā vasunā dīvyanti.
- 17 adya nṛpasyāśvā mārge śrāmyanti.
- 18 kṣatriyaḥ kuntenāriṃ vidyati.
- 19 alayo madhunā tuṣyanti.
- 20 aśrūṇāṃ jalaṃ pādau siñcati.
- 21 alayas tatra bhrāmyanti.
- 22 narau madhu phalāni ca pacataḥ.
- 23 yadā guroḥ kopaḥ śāmyati, tadā tuṣyanti śiṣyāḥ.
- 24 aśrūṇi kṣatriyāṇāṃ netrayos tiṣṭhanti.
- 25 arayo nṛpaṃ śarair varṣanti.
- 26 adharmasya pādo nṛpam ṛcchati.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 51
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: T16. The warriors1 play3 for money2 (instr."). 17. 1 be king’s horses3 become weary5 on the road* to-day1. 18. The warrior * pierces4 his enemy3 with the spear2. 19. Bees1 are fond of3 (cj^x) honey2. 20. The water2 of his tears1 moistens4 (fH^) his feet3. 21. There2 bees1 are flitting about3 22. Two men are cooking5 honey2 and4 fruits3. 23. When1 the teacher’s2 anger3 ceases4, then5 the scholars’ rejoice6. 24. Tears1 stand4 in the warriors’8 42 Lesson VI. VII. eyes8. 25. The enemies1 overwhelm4 ) the king- with arrows3. 26. A quarter2 of the injustice1 falls upon4 (^3) the king3 (ace.).
T16. The warriors1 play3 for money2 (instr."). 17. 1 be king’s horses3 become weary5 on the road* to-day1. 18. The warrior * pierces4 his enemy3 with the spear2. 19. Bees1 are fond of3 (cj^x) honey2. 20. The water2 of his tears1 moistens4 (fH^) his feet3. 21. There2 bees1 are flitting about3 22. Two men are cooking5 honey2 and4 fruits3. 23. When1 the teacher’s2 anger3 ceases4, then5 the scholars’ rejoice6. 24. Tears1 stand4 in the warriors’8 42 Lesson VI. VII. eyes8. 25. The enemies1 overwhelm4 ) the king- with arrows3. 26. A quarter2 of the injustice1 falls upon4 (^3) the king3 (ace.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 52
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson VII. 141. Causative Verbs (native “**cur**-class ”). The Hindu grammarians describe a certain present-system which they assign to a so-called “**cur**-class”. This is, however, in fact no present-class at all, but a **causative** or **secondary** conjugation, which is not confined to the present-system. But many formations of this sort have no **causative** value; and it is chiefly these that are grouped by the Hindus in their **cur**-class, which also includes some **denominative**- stems in **aya**, with **causative** accent. For practical purposes it is well enough to consider these verbs here.
Lesson VII. 141. Causative Verbs (native “**cur**-class ”). The Hindu grammarians describe a certain present-system which they assign to a so-called “**cur**-class”. This is, however, in fact no present-class at all, but a **causative** or **secondary** conjugation, which is not confined to the present-system. But many formations of this sort have no **causative** value; and it is chiefly these that are grouped by the Hindus in their **cur**-class, which also includes some **denominative**- stems in **aya**, with **causative** accent. For practical purposes it is well enough to consider these verbs here.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 52
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 142. The causative-stem is formed by adding aya to the root, which is usually strengthened; and the strengthening process is in the main as follows: 143. 1. Medial or initial C «, u, and r have the **guna**-strengthening, if capable of it; thus, cur, cordyati ; vid, vedayati; but xftlJ pid, plddyati. 144. 2. A final vowel has the vrc?c?A«-strengthening; thus, dhr, VTT’ErfH dhardyati. Before "^pQaya, Tjua and du become ay and dv respectively; thus, bhi, bhayayati; V^bhu, bhavayati. 145. 3. Medial or initial a in a metrically **light** syllable is sometimes **lengthened**, and sometimes remains **unchanged**; thus, ksal, caus. ^T^RTfrl ksaldyati; but jan, cans. **janayati**, 146. The inflection is the usual one of u-steins.
142. The causative-stem is formed by adding aya to the root, which is usually strengthened; and the strengthening process is in the main as follows: 143. 1. Medial or initial C «, u, and r have the **guna**-strengthening, if capable of it; thus, cur, cordyati ; vid, vedayati; but xftlJ pid, plddyati. 144. 2. A final vowel has the vrc?c?A«-strengthening; thus, dhr, VTT’ErfH dhardyati. Before "^pQaya, Tjua and du become ay and dv respectively; thus, bhi, bhayayati; V^bhu, bhavayati. 145. 3. Medial or initial a in a metrically **light** syllable is sometimes **lengthened**, and sometimes remains **unchanged**; thus, ksal, caus. ^T^RTfrl ksaldyati; but jan, cans. **janayati**, 146. The inflection is the usual one of u-steins.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 52
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Rules of euphonic combination. In external combination sonant of whatever class (even a vowel or semivowel or 147. an initial nasal) requires the conversion of a preceding final surd to a sonant. Lesson VII. 43 148. Final cf t. 1. Final t becomes d, before any initial sonant, except the palatals, the nasals, and I: thus, UMlcf meghat atra becomes meghad atra; papat rakxali or bhramyati or iffUl "Mf?T gopayati becomes papad raksati or papad bhramyati or mvisfnn-^fcf papad gopayati. 149. 2. Final t is assimilated to an initial palatal, lingual, or Z in the next word; thus it becomes c before and ch, j before K J, and I before I: e. g., meghat ca becomes ITEnÎ meghac ca; meghat jalam becomes meghaj jalam; TTHTTct P^pat lokat becomes papal lokat. 150. 3. Before initial 7T £, final t becomes c, and the 71 f then becomes ch; thus, nTPdt $atruh becomes 151. 4. Before initial nasals t becomes l^n; thus, ifUfTT grhat nayati becomes iJ^j-pEl’fTT grhan nayati. But the change into d is also **permitted**, though hardly used; thus, ( (H grhad nayati.
Rules of euphonic combination. In external combination sonant of whatever class (even a vowel or semivowel or 147. an initial nasal) requires the conversion of a preceding final surd to a sonant. Lesson VII. 43 148. Final cf t. 1. Final t becomes d, before any initial sonant, except the palatals, the nasals, and I: thus, UMlcf meghat atra becomes meghad atra; papat rakxali or bhramyati or iffUl "Mf?T gopayati becomes papad raksati or papad bhramyati or mvisfnn-^fcf papad gopayati. 149. 2. Final t is assimilated to an initial palatal, lingual, or Z in the next word; thus it becomes c before and ch, j before K J, and I before I: e. g., meghat ca becomes ITEnÎ meghac ca; meghat jalam becomes meghaj jalam; TTHTTct P^pat lokat becomes papal lokat. 150. 3. Before initial 7T £, final t becomes c, and the 71 f then becomes ch; thus, nTPdt $atruh becomes 151. 4. Before initial nasals t becomes l^n; thus, ifUfTT grhat nayati becomes iJ^j-pEl’fTT grhan nayati. But the change into d is also **permitted**, though hardly used; thus, ( (H grhad nayati.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 53
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary VII. Verbs: kathaya (**denom**. stem — **kathayatV**) relate, tell. ksal (**ksalayati**) wash. ganaya (**denom**. — **ganayati**} number, count. cur (**corayati**) steal. cf^T tul (**toldyati**} weigh. dandaya (**denom**. — **da**- **nddyatr**) punish. + **m** + **a** {**anayatP**) bring. P^d (**pidayati**) torment, vex. **pwj** (**pujayati**) honor. tj **pr** (**pardyaii**) overcome evils; tad (**tadayatt**) strike, beat.
Vocabulary VII. Verbs: kathaya (**denom**. stem — **kathayatV**) relate, tell. ksal (**ksalayati**) wash. ganaya (**denom**. — **ganayati**} number, count. cur (**corayati**) steal. cf^T tul (**toldyati**} weigh. dandaya (**denom**. — **da**- **nddyatr**) punish. + **m** + **a** {**anayatP**) bring. P^d (**pidayati**) torment, vex. **pwj** (**pujayati**) honor. tj **pr** (**pardyaii**) overcome evils; tad (**tadayatt**) strike, beat.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 54
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: aTwfcfi janaka, **m**., father. Janricz, **in**., stick ; punishment. rupaka, **n**., gold-piece. loka, **m**., world, people (**sing**, and **pl**.). phala, **n**., fruit; reward. TT^rnEmr **ramdyana**, **n**., a noted sadhu, **m**.. holy man, saint. suvarna, **n**., gold. suta, **in**., driver, Ok charioteer. poem. stena, **m**., thief. Adverb: iva as, like (postpos.).
Subst.: aTwfcfi janaka, **m**., father. Janricz, **in**., stick ; punishment. rupaka, **n**., gold-piece. loka, **m**., world, people (**sing**, and **pl**.). phala, **n**., fruit; reward. TT^rnEmr **ramdyana**, **n**., a noted sadhu, **m**.. holy man, saint. suvarna, **n**., gold. suta, **in**., driver, Ok charioteer. poem. stena, **m**., thief. Adverb: iva as, like (postpos.).

Back: - 1 The thief steals gold from the king"s palace.
- 2 The teacher strikes (his) students with a stick.
- 3 The charioteer torments the horses.
- 4 The seer washes (his) two hands with water.
- 5 The lead the people from the village to the city.
- 6 Two men count the gold-pieces.
- 7 There is a punishment of the enemies from the king.
- 8 Two sons of Rama tell the Ramayana to the people.
- 9 We weigh the gold with both hands.
- 10 The father punishes (his) sons in anger.
- 11 The people come from the house.
- 12 The saint overcomes sufferings with merit.
- 13 The people honor (their) kings as gods.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 54
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise VII. ^r: i r i i r. i 4^ IH4l4<l(4 I 3 I muft I 8 I ©< x wf^rF i m i w«
Exercise VII. ^r: i r i i r. i 4^ IH4l4<l(4 I 3 I muft I 8 I ©< x wf^rF i m i w«

Back: - 14 stenā janānāṃ vasu corayanti.
- 15 bālau mukhaṃ kṣālayataḥ.
- 16 janakaḥ putrebhyaḥ pāpasya phalaṃ kathayati.
- 17 śiṣyā guruṃ pūjayanti namanti ca.
- 18 phalāni hastābhyām ānayatho gaṇayathaś ca.
- 19 puṇyaṃ duḥkhād rakṣati.
- 20 sutā aśvān daṇḍais tāḍayanti.
- 21 kopān nṛpaḥ stenaṃ kuntena vidhyati.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 54
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 14. Thieves1 steal4 the people’s2 money3. 15. The two boys1 wash3 their mouths2. 16. The father1 tells5 his sons2 (dat.) the reward4 of sin3. 17. The scholars1 honor3 and5 reverence4 their teacher2. 18. Ye both bring3 fruits1 in your handsz and5 count4 them. 19. Merit1 protects3 from misfortune2 (a6L). 20. The charioteers1 strike4 the horses2 with sticks3. 21. In anger1 (a5Z.) the king2 pierces5 the thief3 with a spear1.
14. Thieves1 steal4 the people’s2 money3. 15. The two boys1 wash3 their mouths2. 16. The father1 tells5 his sons2 (dat.) the reward4 of sin3. 17. The scholars1 honor3 and5 reverence4 their teacher2. 18. Ye both bring3 fruits1 in your handsz and5 count4 them. 19. Merit1 protects3 from misfortune2 (a6L). 20. The charioteers1 strike4 the horses2 with sticks3. 21. In anger1 (a5Z.) the king2 pierces5 the thief3 with a spear1.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 54
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson VIII. 152. Verbs, a-conjugation. Present Indicative Middle. The present indicative middle of verbs whose stems end in a is inflected as follows: Lesson VIII. 45 Singular. Dual. Plural. 1. vdde vadavahe ^^W^vadamahe 2. vadase vadethe cpjjr"BEj" vadadhve 3. vadate vadete q^<n vadante
Lesson VIII. 152. Verbs, a-conjugation. Present Indicative Middle. The present indicative middle of verbs whose stems end in a is inflected as follows: Lesson VIII. 45 Singular. Dual. Plural. 1. vdde vadavahe ^^W^vadamahe 2. vadase vadethe cpjjr"BEj" vadadhve 3. vadate vadete q^<n vadante

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 55
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 153. The ending of the 3rd pl. is properly ^•rj ante (of. firT nti for f<vt anti in the act.); before the If e of the 1st sing, the stem-final is **dropped**. ethe and IJ^ ete are **hard** to explain.
153. The ending of the 3rd pl. is properly ^•rj ante (of. firT nti for f<vt anti in the act.); before the If e of the 1st sing, the stem-final is **dropped**. ethe and IJ^ ete are **hard** to explain.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 55
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 154. With verbs inflected in both voices, the chief force of the middle is this, that the action is performed for the benefit of the actor himself; thus, ZpiffTf ydjati ‘he sacrifices’ (for some one else); ydjate ‘he sacrifices for **himself**’. But many verbs are conjugated only in the middle, like the Latin and Greek **deponents**.
154. With verbs inflected in both voices, the chief force of the middle is this, that the action is performed for the benefit of the actor himself; thus, ZpiffTf ydjati ‘he sacrifices’ (for some one else); ydjate ‘he sacrifices for **himself**’. But many verbs are conjugated only in the middle, like the Latin and Greek **deponents**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 55
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 155. The verb mr ‘die’, makes mriydte in the pres-ent; and jan, ‘give birth’, substitutes as present mid. **jayate**, ‘be born’.
155. The verb mr ‘die’, makes mriydte in the pres-ent; and jan, ‘give birth’, substitutes as present mid. **jayate**, ‘be born’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 55
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 156. Combination of final and initial vowels. Two simple vowels, either or both of them short or long, coalesce and form the corresponding long vowel. For the a-vowels, see above, § 105. Thus: 1. Tior fi+ fior fi= fi; e.g. mrefa rfa gacchati iti becomes Mweafa gacchati "ti. 2. B u or F B u or 51 ü =E ü; e. g. aTy BMF sádhu uktam becomes ETETF sadht "ktam* •
156. Combination of final and initial vowels. Two simple vowels, either or both of them short or long, coalesce and form the corresponding long vowel. For the a-vowels, see above, § 105. Thus: 1. Tior fi+ fior fi= fi; e.g. mrefa rfa gacchati iti becomes Mweafa gacchati "ti. 2. B u or F B u or 51 ü =E ü; e. g. aTy BMF sádhu uktam becomes ETETF sadht "ktam* •
* And theoretically 3. r + r = but probably this has no occurrence.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 55
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 157. The 2-vowels, the u-vowels, and r, before a dissimilar vowel or diphthong, are regularly converted each into its own corresponding semivowel, "S} y or v or r. Thus, tisthati atra becomes tisthaty atra (four syllables); <14) nadl atra becomes nady atra; madhu atra becomes madhv atra; ofirj kartr iha becomes kartr iha.
157. The 2-vowels, the u-vowels, and r, before a dissimilar vowel or diphthong, are regularly converted each into its own corresponding semivowel, "S} y or v or r. Thus, tisthati atra becomes tisthaty atra (four syllables); <14) nadl atra becomes nady atra; madhu atra becomes madhv atra; ofirj kartr iha becomes kartr iha.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 56
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 158. Final V e an^ 0 remain unchanged before an initial short a, but the a disappears. Thus, vane atra becomes vane ‘tra; bhano atra becomes HT* Tt bhano ‘tra. By far the commonest case of final "=3Tt o is where it represents final os (9ee § US).
158. Final V e an^ 0 remain unchanged before an initial short a, but the a disappears. Thus, vane atra becomes vane ‘tra; bhano atra becomes HT* Tt bhano ‘tra. By far the commonest case of final "=3Tt o is where it represents final os (9ee § US).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 56
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 159. The final i or ^-element of a **diphthong** is changed to its corresponding semivowel y or before any **vowel** or **diphthong**, except when the rule of § 158 would apply. Thus, IJ e becomes ay, and V ay; o becomes av, and du, "^Tc| av. Thus, in **internal** combination, ne-a becomes •fZl naya ; bho-a becomes bhava; so nai-aya yields vlTtJl) nay-aya, and bhau-aya yields bhav-aya.
159. The final i or ^-element of a **diphthong** is changed to its corresponding semivowel y or before any **vowel** or **diphthong**, except when the rule of § 158 would apply. Thus, IJ e becomes ay, and V ay; o becomes av, and du, "^Tc| av. Thus, in **internal** combination, ne-a becomes •fZl naya ; bho-a becomes bhava; so nai-aya yields vlTtJl) nay-aya, and bhau-aya yields bhav-aya.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 56
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 160. In **external** combination, the resulting semivowel is in general **dropped**; and the resulting **hiatus** remains. Thus, vane iti becomes vana iti (through the intermediate stage vanay iti); bhano iti becomes bhana iti (through bhanav iti). The case of final If e is by far the more **frequent**. See also § 164.
160. In **external** combination, the resulting semivowel is in general **dropped**; and the resulting **hiatus** remains. Thus, vane iti becomes vana iti (through the intermediate stage vanay iti); bhano iti becomes bhana iti (through bhanav iti). The case of final If e is by far the more **frequent**. See also § 164.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 56
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 161. Certain final vowels maintain themselves unchanged be fore any following vowel. Such are 1. i, w, and V e as **dual** endings, both of **declension** and of **conjugation**; thus, f^TTt * iha, sadhu atra; phale atra. 2. The final, or only, vowel of an interjection; thus, be indra, he agne.
161. Certain final vowels maintain themselves unchanged be fore any following vowel. Such are 1. i, w, and V e as **dual** endings, both of **declension** and of **conjugation**; thus, f^TTt * iha, sadhu atra; phale atra. 2. The final, or only, vowel of an interjection; thus, be indra, he agne.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 56
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary VIII. Verbs (deponents): arthay a (**denom**. — **artha**-**yate**) ask for (w. **two** accus.). tks (**iksate**) see, behold. kamp (**kdmpate**) tremble. Jan (**Jayate**) be born, arise, spring up (mother in **loc**.). bhas (**bhdsate**) speak. w?r (**mriyate**) die. yat(**yatate**) strive for (w. **dat**.). yudh (**yudhyate**) fight (w. **instr**, of accompaniment).
Vocabulary VIII. Verbs (deponents): arthay a (**denom**. — **artha**-**yate**) ask for (w. **two** accus.). tks (**iksate**) see, behold. kamp (**kdmpate**) tremble. Jan (**Jayate**) be born, arise, spring up (mother in **loc**.). bhas (**bhdsate**) speak. w?r (**mriyate**) die. yat(**yatate**) strive for (w. **dat**.). yudh (**yudhyate**) fight (w. **instr**, of accompaniment).

TextBack: 1. √ रभ् rabh [relié à labh ] v. [1] pr. md. (rabhate) pp. (rabdha) pf. (ā, sam) s'emparer de, saisir; étreindre | désirer ardemment — dés. md. (ripsate) désirer saisir.
2. √ रभ् rabh [related to labh] v. [1] pr. (rabhate) pp. (rabdha) pf. (ā, sam) 抓住、掌握；擁抱 | 渴望 - des. md. (ripsate)渴望抓住。
3. आरभ् ārabh [ ā - rabh ] v. [1] pr. md. (ārabhate) pp. (ārabdha) pfp. (ārabhya) pf. (pra) tenir ferme | entreprendre; commencer.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 57
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: rabh 4- ® (**arabhate**) take hold on, begin. ruc(**rdcate**) please (**dat**., **gen**.). labh (**labhate**) receive, take. vand (**jvandate**) greet, honor. piks (**giksate**) learn. sah [**sdhate**) endure. sev (**sevate**) serve, honor.
rabh 4- ® (**arabhate**) take hold on, begin. ruc(**rdcate**) please (**dat**., **gen**.). labh (**labhate**) receive, take. vand (**jvandate**) greet, honor. piks (**giksate**) learn. sah [**sdhate**) endure. sev (**sevate**) serve, honor.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 57
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst* : anartha, **m**., misfortune. •"35pI* T udyoga, **m**., diligence. cfi^TRir kalydna, **n**., advantage ; salvation. man (homo). qvT yajna, **m**., sacrifice. vana, **n**., woods, forest. vinaya, **m**., obedience. cftf^ vici, **m**., wave. taru, **m**., tree. dvija, **m**., Aryan. f^^rrfrT dvijati, **in**., Aryan. dharma, **m**., right; law ; virtue. dhairya, **n**., steadfastness. **in**., beast. bala, **n**., strength, might. $astra,**n**,} science; text-book. 5 * 4 g" $udra, **m**., man of the fourth caste. f^rT hita, **n**., advantage. Adverb: * T na, not. “ E T r I E p (P p r I f y
Subst* : anartha, **m**., misfortune. •"35pI* T udyoga, **m**., diligence. cfi^TRir kalydna, **n**., advantage ; salvation. man (homo). qvT yajna, **m**., sacrifice. vana, **n**., woods, forest. vinaya, **m**., obedience. cftf^ vici, **m**., wave. taru, **m**., tree. dvija, **m**., Aryan. f^^rrfrT dvijati, **in**., Aryan. dharma, **m**., right; law ; virtue. dhairya, **n**., steadfastness. **in**., beast. bala, **n**., strength, might. $astra,**n**,} science; text-book. 5 * 4 g" $udra, **m**., man of the fourth caste. f^rT hita, **n**., advantage. Adverb: * T na, not. “ E T r I E p (P p r I f y

Back: 1 The trees tremble because of the power of the wind.
2 “Today the enemies will die with a sword” thus the king speaks here.
3 Poets ask the kings for the heaps of wealth.
4 “We learn two subjects now” thus Hari writes in his letter.
5 The misfortune arises from sin.
6 The obedience and diligence of the disciples are pleasing to the teachers.
7 Both of you do not strive for injustice, but strive for justice.
8 Both seers receive two Vedic hymns from Visnu.
9 The hermit pays homage to the sun here.
10 The child sees the two fires.
11 You (all) get the beasts for sacrifice with money.
12 The children always pay homage to the teacher"s two feet.
13 Here two fruits are in the man"s both hands.
14 Both holy men endure misfortune.
15 The bears dwell in the forest here.
16 The warriors worship two hermits.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 57
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: q-KriWpf rrrq: i r i «JTTt HTT?T I R I I 3 I (§ 161) fTrvrT^? tTh qi? i 8 i xmrr^^f i m i fTr^Twi tKh i € i m i "o i Kwr; (abl ) i = i I Q i "spft ^T^f: I ro i vrq-q i RR i ^rrt: qr^t ^rav- i Rp i qiR^rKt^cr: i r? | 1 1 i rm i ^rfqqT II R$ II
q-KriWpf rrrq: i r i «JTTt HTT?T I R I I 3 I (§ 161) fTrvrT^? tTh qi? i 8 i xmrr^^f i m i fTr^Twi tKh i € i m i "o i Kwr; (abl ) i = i I Q i "spft ^T^f: I ro i vrq-q i RR i ^rrt: qr^t ^rav- i Rp i qiR^rKt^cr: i r? | 1 1 i rm i ^rfqqT II R$ II
* ‘thus’, is very commonly used as a particle of quotation, following the words quoted.

Back: - 17 udadher vīcīnāṃ balena gṛhe iha kampete.
- 18 putrasya mukhaṃ janaka īkṣate.
- 19 śiṣyāṇāṃ hitāya yatāmaha iti guravo bhāṣante.
- 20 janakaṃ bālā annamarthayante.
- 21 vana iha gajā ṛkṣair yudhyante.
- 22 dvijātī iha śūdrau sevete.
- 23 phalāni bālebhyo rocante.
- 24 kuto vasu labhadhve.
- 25 adhunarṣī yajñamārabhete.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 57
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * ‘thus’, is very commonly used as a particle of quotation, following the words quoted. .17. The two houses4 yonder6 tremble6 by the power3 (instr.) 48 Lesson VIII. IX. of the ocean’s1 waves2. 18. The father3 beholds4 his son’s1 face.2 19. GWe strive3 after the advantage2 of the scholars1;” thus4 (TfiD speak6 the teachers5. 20. The children2 ask4 their father1 for food3 (accus.}. 21. In the forest1 yonder2 elephants3 are fighting5 with bears4. 22. The two Qudras3 serve4 the two Aryans1 here2. 23. Fruits1 please3 the children2. 24. Whence1 do ye receive3 money2? 25. Now1 the two seers2 begin4 the sacrifice3.
* ‘thus’, is very commonly used as a particle of quotation, following the words quoted. .17. The two houses4 yonder6 tremble6 by the power3 (instr.) 48 Lesson VIII. IX. of the ocean’s1 waves2. 18. The father3 beholds4 his son’s1 face.2 19. GWe strive3 after the advantage2 of the scholars1;” thus4 (TfiD speak6 the teachers5. 20. The children2 ask4 their father1 for food3 (accus.}. 21. In the forest1 yonder2 elephants3 are fighting5 with bears4. 22. The two Qudras3 serve4 the two Aryans1 here2. 23. Fruits1 please3 the children2. 24. Whence1 do ye receive3 money2? 25. Now1 the two seers2 begin4 the sacrifice3.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 58
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson IX. 162. Feminines in W a, declined like 4{TT send, ‘army.’* Singular. Dual. N. send sene (**a** + «) A. set? am n n I. sen ay a sendbhyam D. senayai t> r> Ab. 41 1senay&s » ”G. r * senayos L. senayam » y> Plural. senas senabhis sen abb yas •n senanam senasu V. WW sene
Lesson IX. 162. Feminines in W a, declined like 4{TT send, ‘army.’* Singular. Dual. N. send sene (**a** + «) A. set? am n n I. sen ay a sendbhyam D. senayai t> r> Ab. 41 1senay&s » ”G. r * senayos L. senayam » y> Plural. senas senabhis sen abb yas •n senanam senasu V. WW sene

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 58
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 163. **Adjectives** in ^5T a are declined in the masc. like in the fem. like in the neuter like But often the fem. stem ends in % t, and is declined like (in Less. XI).
163. **Adjectives** in ^5T a are declined in the masc. like in the fem. like in the neuter like But often the fem. stem ends in % t, and is declined like (in Less. XI).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 58
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 164. Final XT di and du, according § 159, become &y and av respectively before any following **vowel** or **diphthong**. The or may then be **dropped**, leaving a **hiatus**. The is in fact **always** dropped, but the not **often**. Thus, becomes, through the medium of 5 becomes
164. Final XT di and du, according § 159, become &y and av respectively before any following **vowel** or **diphthong**. The or may then be **dropped**, leaving a **hiatus**. The is in fact **always** dropped, but the not **often**. Thus, becomes, through the medium of 5 becomes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 58
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 165. Initial gr, after **short** vowels, the preposition tSTT, and the Lesson IX. 49 prohibitive particle TFT, becomes ^3? : thus, 1 <41 becomes + efT^rM =
165. Initial gr, after **short** vowels, the preposition tSTT, and the Lesson IX. 49 prohibitive particle TFT, becomes ^3? : thus, 1 <41 becomes + efT^rM =

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 59
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 166. An initial »T of a root generally becomes TH after a verbal prefix containing either original or representing ; such as ‘ between HXT etc- Thus,
166. An initial »T of a root generally becomes TH after a verbal prefix containing either original or representing ; such as ‘ between HXT etc- Thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 59
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 167. The following prefixes are often used before verbs: MJW ‘**after, along, toward**’; ‘**down, off**’; ‘**up, up forth or out**’; •^q ‘**to, toward**’; fwf‘down; in, into’; ‘out, forth’; M <,1 ‘**to** a distance, away’; qft ‘round about, around’; W ‘forward, forth’; ‘ along with, completely.’
167. The following prefixes are often used before verbs: MJW ‘**after, along, toward**’; ‘**down, off**’; ‘**up, up forth or out**’; •^q ‘**to, toward**’; fwf‘down; in, into’; ‘out, forth’; M <,1 ‘**to** a distance, away’; qft ‘round about, around’; W ‘forward, forth’; ‘ along with, completely.’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 59
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary IX. Active Verbs: 4-^5^ (**avagacchati**) understand. cT 4- ^5T^ (**avatar** ati) descend. 4_ **Qupandyati**) intioduce, consecrate. 4- lift (**parinayati**) lead about; marry. 4- (**utpdtati**) fly up. 4- ^5^ descend. Deponents: 774-^ 4- ‘H’H. (**saingacchate**) come together, meet (w. **instr**.). 4- T, ^7 (**parajayate**) be conquered (rarely w. **act**. sense: I conquer). ’ HcT 4- IT (prapadyate) flee for re- fuge (**acc**.) to (**acc**. of person). ^^(bhiksate) beg, get by begging, (**denom**. — **mrgayate**) hunt for, seek. Tt (**yartate**) exist, subsist, be, become. (**qobhate**) be brilliant, shine; be eminent.
Vocabulary IX. Active Verbs: 4-^5^ (**avagacchati**) understand. cT 4- ^5T^ (**avatar** ati) descend. 4_ **Qupandyati**) intioduce, consecrate. 4- lift (**parinayati**) lead about; marry. 4- (**utpdtati**) fly up. 4- ^5^ descend. Deponents: 774-^ 4- ‘H’H. (**saingacchate**) come together, meet (w. **instr**.). 4- T, ^7 (**parajayate**) be conquered (rarely w. **act**. sense: I conquer). ’ HcT 4- IT (prapadyate) flee for re- fuge (**acc**.) to (**acc**. of person). ^^(bhiksate) beg, get by begging, (**denom**. — **mrgayate**) hunt for, seek. Tt (**yartate**) exist, subsist, be, become. (**qobhate**) be brilliant, shine; be eminent.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 59
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: WT ganga **f**., n. pr.y the Ganges. TTJ **m**., arrow. **f**-9 daughter maiden. family. householder, head of Perry, Sanskrit Primer.
Subst.: WT ganga **f**., n. pr.y the Ganges. TTJ **m**., arrow. **f**-9 daughter maiden. family. householder, head of Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 60
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: **f**-9 shade. 1^1 **m**-> nom- pr., Prayaga (a city, Allahabad). **n**., fear. HT^T **f**., wife, woman. >4 | Ml **f**., speech, language. f»r^T **f**., alms. w.pr., Yamuna (a river, the Jumna). **m**., **n**., battle. 4^7 **f**., street. fWÎT **f**., knowledge, learning. f^’T **m**"., bird. **m**., hunter. IJ^TTT **n**., protection. HWT **f**-, twilight. **m**., heaven. **n**., heart. Adj HTQ, f. bad, wicked. 3TH<T, f- °^T, much, abundant; (Xpl. many. Adv.: together with (**postpos**. , W. **instr**.). suddenly, quickly.
**f**-9 shade. 1^1 **m**-> nom- pr., Prayaga (a city, Allahabad). **n**., fear. HT^T **f**., wife, woman. >4 | Ml **f**., speech, language. f»r^T **f**., alms. w.pr., Yamuna (a river, the Jumna). **m**., **n**., battle. 4^7 **f**., street. fWÎT **f**., knowledge, learning. f^’T **m**"., bird. **m**., hunter. IJ^TTT **n**., protection. HWT **f**-, twilight. **m**., heaven. **n**., heart. Adj HTQ, f. bad, wicked. 3TH<T, f- °^T, much, abundant; (Xpl. many. Adv.: together with (**postpos**. , W. **instr**.). suddenly, quickly.

Back: 1 Jewel meets with jewel.
2 When the birds see the hunter, then they fly up suddenly.
3 The seers seek the truth in (their) hearts.
4 Rama marries Hari"s daughter.
5 Two wives of Visnu and Hari come together with (their) daughters.
6 Rama and Visnu revere the gods as (their) refuge.
7 Two disciples of Rama live on alms.
8 When the men die in the Ganges river, then they will attain paradise.
9 The seer"s wife gives food to (her) daughter.
10 The hunter shoot the arrows at the bears in the forest and the two black bears die.
11 Sudras do not understand the Aryan"s language.
12 0 students, today all of you will get alms from the wives of the pious in the streets of the city.
13 Many birds stand in the shade here.
14 The seer consecrates two sons of the warrior.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 60
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise IX.
Exercise IX.
* “Birds of a feather flock together”.

Back: - 15 śiṣyau prabhūtā bhikṣā gṛhasthānāṃ bhāryābhyo bhikṣete.
- 16 prayage gaṅgā yamunayā saṃgacchate.
- 17 pāpā narāḥ svargaṃ na labhante.
- 18 he viṣṇo, śivo’dya hareḥ kanyāṃ gaṅgāṃ pariṇayati.
- 19 raṇe śarair nṛpā yudhyante’rīṃśca jayanti ca.
- 20 nṛpatī iha rathyāyāṃ kṛṣṇāv aśvau avarohataḥ.
- 21 vidyayarṣeḥ putrau sobhete.
- 22 pāpebhyo vyādhebhyo bhayād vihagāv utpatataḥ.
- 23 sandhyayor ṛṣayo devān namanti.
- 24 grāmasya rathyāyāṃ guruś śiṣyaśca saṃgacchete.
- 25 devān yajāvahe haraye na yajāvaḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 60
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * “Birds of a feather flock together”. 15. The two scholars1 beg6 much® alms3 from the wives8 of the householders4. 16. At Prayaga’ the Ganges2 unites4 with the Yamuna3. 17. Bad1 men2 do not4 reach8 (RTHj heaven3. 18. O Visnu1, to-day3 Qiva2 marries7 Ganga6, Hari’s4 daughter5. 19. In the battle1 the kings3 fight4 with arrows2 and6 conquer7 t/ieir enemies8. Lesson IX. X. 51 20. Here2 in the street3 the two kings1 dismount6 from their black4 horses5. 21. The seer’s2 two sons3 are eminent4 in learning1 (tnstr.). 22. From fear3 of the wicked1 hunters2 (abl.) two birds4 fly up5. 23. At twilight1 (loc. du.) the seers2 (§ 13, 3) reverence4 the gods3. 24. In the street2 of the village1 the teacher3 and5 the scholar4 meet6. 25. We two sacrifice2 to the gods1 for ourselves; we do not4 sacrifice5 for Hari3.
* “Birds of a feather flock together”. 15. The two scholars1 beg6 much® alms3 from the wives8 of the householders4. 16. At Prayaga’ the Ganges2 unites4 with the Yamuna3. 17. Bad1 men2 do not4 reach8 (RTHj heaven3. 18. O Visnu1, to-day3 Qiva2 marries7 Ganga6, Hari’s4 daughter5. 19. In the battle1 the kings3 fight4 with arrows2 and6 conquer7 t/ieir enemies8. Lesson IX. X. 51 20. Here2 in the street3 the two kings1 dismount6 from their black4 horses5. 21. The seer’s2 two sons3 are eminent4 in learning1 (tnstr.). 22. From fear3 of the wicked1 hunters2 (abl.) two birds4 fly up5. 23. At twilight1 (loc. du.) the seers2 (§ 13, 3) reverence4 the gods3. 24. In the street2 of the village1 the teacher3 and5 the scholar4 meet6. 25. We two sacrifice2 to the gods1 for ourselves; we do not4 sacrifice5 for Hari3.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 61
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson X. 168. Verbs. Passive Inflection. A certain form of presentstem, inflected with middle endings, is used only with a **passive** meaning, and is formed from all roots for which there is occasion to make a passive conjugation. Its sign is an **accented** ZJ yd added to the root, without any reference to the classes according to which the active and middle forms are made. The inflection is precisely like that of other
Lesson X. 168. Verbs. Passive Inflection. A certain form of presentstem, inflected with middle endings, is used only with a **passive** meaning, and is formed from all roots for which there is occasion to make a passive conjugation. Its sign is an **accented** ZJ yd added to the root, without any reference to the classes according to which the active and middle forms are made. The inflection is precisely like that of other

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 61
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 169. Outside the present-system **middle** forms may be used in a passive sense; but there is a special form for the **aor**. **pass**, in the 3rd sing.
169. Outside the present-system **middle** forms may be used in a passive sense; but there is a special form for the **aor**. **pass**, in the 3rd sing.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 61
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 170. The form of root to which the passive-sign is appended is usually a **weak** one. Thus a penultimate nasal is **dropped**; and certain abbreviations which are made in the weak forms of the **perfect**, or in the **past passive participle**, are found also in the passive present-system. E. g. from ^^4 , pass. from
170. The form of root to which the passive-sign is appended is usually a **weak** one. Thus a penultimate nasal is **dropped**; and certain abbreviations which are made in the weak forms of the **perfect**, or in the **past passive participle**, are found also in the passive present-system. E. g. from ^^4 , pass. from

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 61
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 171. In the roots and the va becomes w in the pres.; thus, ci, "dUlcT, (see note to § 102), Similarly, makes and and make arare and makes
171. In the roots and the va becomes w in the pres.; thus, ci, "dUlcT, (see note to § 102), Similarly, makes and and make arare and makes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 172. Final T and of roots are generally **lengthened**; thus, 4 f^r,
172. Final T and of roots are generally **lengthened**; thus, 4 f^r,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 173. Final is in general changed to fx? thus, eg, ; but if preceded by **two** consonants it takes **guna**; thus, The roots in “variable r”, which the natives write with f, change to or, if a **labial** letter precede, to >3TT; thus, 7J, cft’EtW; ‘strew’, but TJ, ^fW-
173. Final is in general changed to fx? thus, eg, ; but if preceded by **two** consonants it takes **guna**; thus, The roots in “variable r”, which the natives write with f, change to or, if a **labial** letter precede, to >3TT; thus, 7J, cft’EtW; ‘strew’, but TJ, ^fW-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 174. Final ^TT of roots is usually changed to thus, ^T, VT, But makes I24 | i|d; and so some other roots in
174. Final ^TT of roots is usually changed to thus, ^T, VT, But makes I24 | i|d; and so some other roots in

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 175. The roots cf<^ and usually form their passives from parallel roots in ^5H; thus, fl (’Mcf. But and occur.
175. The roots cf<^ and usually form their passives from parallel roots in ^5H; thus, fl (’Mcf. But and occur.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 177. The **personal** passive construction, with the logical subject in the **instrumental**, is particularly common with **transitive** verbs; and not less so the **impersonal** passive construction, both with **transitive** and **intransitive** verbs. Thus, ^’rf ‘ **Heaven is reached by the man**’; ‘**one comes hither**’; ‘**one sleeps**’; **6it is beard**’, i. e. ‘**they say**’. The **predicate** to the instrumental subject of such a construction is of course also instrumental; thus, ‘**Rama lives as a seer**’.
177. The **personal** passive construction, with the logical subject in the **instrumental**, is particularly common with **transitive** verbs; and not less so the **impersonal** passive construction, both with **transitive** and **intransitive** verbs. Thus, ^’rf ‘ **Heaven is reached by the man**’; ‘**one comes hither**’; ‘**one sleeps**’; **6it is beard**’, i. e. ‘**they say**’. The **predicate** to the instrumental subject of such a construction is of course also instrumental; thus, ‘**Rama lives as a seer**’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 62
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary X. Verbs, with passives: efi (p. **kriydte**) make, do, perform. x^* {(khdnati; p. khaydtejchanydte) dig. ^TT jayati; p. **giydte**) sing. take, receive, seize. (**dahati**; p. **dagyate**) bite. 2^T (**dydti**; p. **dlyate**) cut. (**dlvyati**; p. **dtvydte**} play. 1VT (p- **dhlyate**) put, place.
Vocabulary X. Verbs, with passives: efi (p. **kriydte**) make, do, perform. x^* {(khdnati; p. khaydtejchanydte) dig. ^TT jayati; p. **giydte**) sing. take, receive, seize. (**dahati**; p. **dagyate**) bite. 2^T (**dydti**; p. **dlyate**) cut. (**dlvyati**; p. **dtvydte**} play. 1VT (p- **dhlyate**) put, place.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 63
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2VT (**dhayati** ; p. **dhlyate**) suck. I2TT (**dhyayati**; p. **dhyayate**) think, ponder. ITU (p- **piydte**) drink. ITT (Hindu V; p. **puryate**) fill. (p.£«c^<fre) bind ; entangle ; catch. ITTT (p- **Tiizy ate**) measure. (p. **ucyate**) speak. (**yapati**; p. **upydte**) sow, scatter, (p- **Qisyate**) rule; punish. (p. **$ruyate**) hear. (p. **stuyate**) praise. (p. **supyate**) sleep. 1?T (p- hlyate) abandon, give up; neglect. or ^\{**hvdyati**\ p. **huydte**) call. + ^5JT call, summon.
2VT (**dhayati** ; p. **dhlyate**) suck. I2TT (**dhyayati**; p. **dhyayate**) think, ponder. ITU (p- **piydte**) drink. ITT (Hindu V; p. **puryate**) fill. (p.£«c^<fre) bind ; entangle ; catch. ITTT (p- **Tiizy ate**) measure. (p. **ucyate**) speak. (**yapati**; p. **upydte**) sow, scatter, (p- **Qisyate**) rule; punish. (p. **$ruyate**) hear. (p. **stuyate**) praise. (p. **supyate**) sleep. 1?T (p- hlyate) abandon, give up; neglect. or ^\{**hvdyati**\ p. **huydte**) call. + ^5JT call, summon.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 63
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **f**., command. ^TUT **f**-, hope. ctTHJ **n**., fagot; wood. *ftcT **n**., song. **m**., pot, vessel. ^Tcf **n**., melted butter; qhee. **n**., grain. mir **m**., noose, cord, snare. **m**., burden. **m**., beggar? ascetic. **m**., servant. HHT **f**-, garland. kingdom. **m**., child. **m**., snake. Adj.: fqVM- * "• obedient.
Subst.: **f**., command. ^TUT **f**-, hope. ctTHJ **n**., fagot; wood. *ftcT **n**., song. **m**., pot, vessel. ^Tcf **n**., melted butter; qhee. **n**., grain. mir **m**., noose, cord, snare. **m**., burden. **m**., beggar? ascetic. **m**., servant. HHT **f**-, garland. kingdom. **m**., child. **m**., snake. Adj.: fqVM- * "• obedient.

Back: - 1 “Today two sons are consecrated by Rama” thus it is heard.
- 2 The hermit is asked about the dharma by the king.
- 3 Two pots are filled with melted butter.
- 4 The birds are caught by the snares.
- 5 Men go to the city.
- 6 0 students, you all are called by the teacher.
- 7 The mats are made by the men.
- 8 Kings are always glorified by poets.
- 9 A large amount of food is given to the monks by the layman"s wife.
- 10 The song is sung by two maidens.
- 11 The treasure of the people is stolen by the thieves.
- 12 In battle, the enemies are conquered by the king with arrows
- 13 O two gods, both of you are always remembered by good people.
- 14 The children are punished with a rod.
- 15 The burden of fagots is carried forward by man.
- 16 Water was drunk by the horse.
- 17 The kingdom is ruled according to dharma by a king.
- 18 Two people are bitten by a snake.
- 19 The horse is struck by the driver.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 63
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise X. TlW xtn 1 ** ’i mW I^mt: i « " mis fspsiT i $ I * rt: i I i i I Q. 1 rT ’ffant I I I 99 I i 99 i < i 93 i 1 1h1h: ^"r3T’Tt 9TTun^H I 94 I I 9$ I VJTW TT^ MW i 93 I MW MTt I i MWrwmna n 9Q h
Exercise X. TlW xtn 1 ** ’i mW I^mt: i « " mis fspsiT i $ I * rt: i I i i I Q. 1 rT ’ffant I I I 99 I i 99 i < i 93 i 1 1h1h: ^"r3T’Tt 9TTun^H I 94 I I 9$ I VJTW TT^ MW i 93 I MW MTt I i MWrwmna n 9Q h

Back: - 20 vihagebhyo dhānyamupyate.
- 21 mālāḥ kanyābhir badhyante.
- 22 hariḥ punā rāmeṇa stūyate.
- 23 viṣṇunā hastāj jalaṃ pīyate.
- 24 sukhena chāyāyāṃ supyata iti vadanti narāḥ.
- 25 ṛṣibhyām ijyate.
- 26 janakenāsāḥ śiśau dhīyante.
- 27 gurorājñā śiṣyeṇa hīyate.
- 28 śiṣyābhyāṃ śāstraṃ dhyāyate.
- 29 kṣetreṣu dhānyam upyate.
- 30 akṣair dīvyate.
- 31 nṛpasyājñā vidheyair bhṛtyair gṛhyante.
- 32 nareṇa kṣetraṃ khāyate. (khanyate)
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 64
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: (Use passive constructions throughout.} 20. Grain2 is scattered3 for the birds1. 21. Garlands1 are twined3 (use ) by the maidens2. 22. Again2 Hari1 is praised4 by Rama3. 23. Visnu1 drinks4 water3 from his hand2. 24. ‘Pleasantly1 one sleeps3 in the shade2’; so4 say5 the people6. 25. Both seers1 sacrifice2. 26. The father1 sets4 hopes2 on his child3 (loc.}. 27. The scholar3 neglects4 rhe teacher’s1 command2. 28. The two scholars1 think3 about their text-book2 (nom.}. 29. Grain2 is sown3 in the fields1. 30. They play2 with dice1 (impers. pass.}. 31. The king’s1 commands2 are received5 by the obedient3 servants4. 32. The man1 digs3 in the field2.
(Use passive constructions throughout.} 20. Grain2 is scattered3 for the birds1. 21. Garlands1 are twined3 (use ) by the maidens2. 22. Again2 Hari1 is praised4 by Rama3. 23. Visnu1 drinks4 water3 from his hand2. 24. ‘Pleasantly1 one sleeps3 in the shade2’; so4 say5 the people6. 25. Both seers1 sacrifice2. 26. The father1 sets4 hopes2 on his child3 (loc.}. 27. The scholar3 neglects4 rhe teacher’s1 command2. 28. The two scholars1 think3 about their text-book2 (nom.}. 29. Grain2 is sown3 in the fields1. 30. They play2 with dice1 (impers. pass.}. 31. The king’s1 commands2 are received5 by the obedient3 servants4. 32. The man1 digs3 in the field2.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 64
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XL 178. Verbs. Imperfect Active, «-conjugation. The imperfect is formed from the present-stem by prefixing the augment and adding a set of secondary endings. 179. If the present-stem begin with a vowel, the augment unites with it to form always the **vyddfo**-vowel, not the **guna**: thus^R + ^ or or V = If; or = ’’Sft; 180. If a preposition be prefixed, the augment comes **between** preposition and verb, as in Greek; thus, from impf.-stem i. e. + ’TO; impf.-stem 2. 3. in the active is as follows: Dual. avadatam avadatam is the tense of **narration** ; it expresses past Plural. avadama dvadan 181. The inflection Sing. dvadam dvadas avadat 182. The imperfect time **simply**, without any further **implication**.
Lesson XL 178. Verbs. Imperfect Active, «-conjugation. The imperfect is formed from the present-stem by prefixing the augment and adding a set of secondary endings. 179. If the present-stem begin with a vowel, the augment unites with it to form always the **vyddfo**-vowel, not the **guna**: thus^R + ^ or or V = If; or = ’’Sft; 180. If a preposition be prefixed, the augment comes **between** preposition and verb, as in Greek; thus, from impf.-stem i. e. + ’TO; impf.-stem 2. 3. in the active is as follows: Dual. avadatam avadatam is the tense of **narration** ; it expresses past Plural. avadama dvadan 181. The inflection Sing. dvadam dvadas avadat 182. The imperfect time **simply**, without any further **implication**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 64
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 183. Polysyllabic Feminines in t, declined like ‘river? Ijesson XI. 55 Sing. N. nadl A. nadim I. nadya D. nadyai Ab. •rani^ nadyas G. n y> •ran$^ nadyam V. •rf^ nadi Dual. nadyau r> nnadtbh y am T) r> » V nadyos Plural. nadyas nadis nadzbhis nadibhyas r> »nadinam nadzsu
183. Polysyllabic Feminines in t, declined like ‘river? Ijesson XI. 55 Sing. N. nadl A. nadim I. nadya D. nadyai Ab. •rani^ nadyas G. n y> •ran$^ nadyam V. •rf^ nadi Dual. nadyau r> nnadtbh y am T) r> » V nadyos Plural. nadyas nadis nadzbhis nadibhyas r> »nadinam nadzsu

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 65
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 184. Final nasals. The nasals n^, 1!T, and occurring as finals after a **short** vowel, are. **doubled** before **any** initial vowel: thus, becomes
184. Final nasals. The nasals n^, 1!T, and occurring as finals after a **short** vowel, are. **doubled** before **any** initial vowel: thus, becomes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 65
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XI. Verbs: + ^5ra (**avakrntati**) cut off or down. f^VT + TT (**pravipdti**) enter. 4- seat oneself. < + ^5TT (**aharati**, -**te**) fetch, bring. (**jpathati**) recite, read.
Vocabulary XI. Verbs: + ^5ra (**avakrntati**) cut off or down. f^VT + TT (**pravipdti**) enter. 4- seat oneself. < + ^5TT (**aharati**, -**te**) fetch, bring. (**jpathati**) recite, read.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 65
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst* : **m**., purpose; meaning; wealth. **f**., wife, consort. **f**., daughter. **m**., nom. pr. the god Indra. ^•5^ IbTl nom. pr., the goddess Indranl. ^RT^l **n**., poem. TZTsfcfi **n**., book (manuscript). TfT **m**., flood, high water. **f**., earth ; ground. Of **m*** 9 Priest, Brahman. **m**., literary work, book. **f**., mother. **f**., female slave, servant. **f**«, goddess, queen. **f**., city. **m**., fish. **f**., cistern. council, meeting. **f**-> army- **n**-> song of praise. •ITTt **f**., woman, wife.
Subst* : **m**., purpose; meaning; wealth. **f**., wife, consort. **f**., daughter. **m**., nom. pr. the god Indra. ^•5^ IbTl nom. pr., the goddess Indranl. ^RT^l **n**., poem. TZTsfcfi **n**., book (manuscript). TfT **m**., flood, high water. **f**., earth ; ground. Of **m*** 9 Priest, Brahman. **m**., literary work, book. **f**., mother. **f**., female slave, servant. **f**«, goddess, queen. **f**., city. **m**., fish. **f**., cistern. council, meeting. **f**-> army- **n**-> song of praise. •ITTt **f**., woman, wife.

Back: 1 The king conquered the city with his army.
2 The poets recited the poems in the council.
3 The maids brought food.
4 Hari worshiped the goddesses and gods.
5 Gold-pieces are given to the ascetic by the wife of pious man.
6 We all saw the fishes in the rivers.
7 Visnu gave the book to his daughter.
8 Two elephants wandered about in the streets of the city.
9 Many birds flew up from the ground.
10 The house is carried away by the flood the river.
11 Men came to the city with their wives.
12 When Siva and Visnu read the literary book, then both of us did not understand its meaning.
13 The students entered the teacher"s house and sat on the mats on the ground.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 66
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XI. TOfHTO"C *1 I A | *RTRH I A { ^n?fr i 3 i 1 # 1 f»T^ ^TWrfT’T < M I I § I M+r1<+ y=4T -^q^fûu: i "o i to4t T * 4T^ TOn^wrwirnn i c i ^fw^rn TTHHT f^^’n I Q. I TO TOTT ^XXVg|d I AO I ^cFlfa^TT <x ° ♦ .? i i ftr^r h^t*t ^tt^t-ip^T^ I I flT^TT JFTt^t ’<*2^ II II
Exercise XI. TOfHTO"C *1 I A | *RTRH I A { ^n?fr i 3 i 1 # 1 f»T^ ^TWrfT’T < M I I § I M+r1<+ y=4T -^q^fûu: i "o i to4t T * 4T^ TOn^wrwirnn i c i ^fw^rn TTHHT f^^’n I Q. I TO TOTT ^XXVg|d I AO I ^cFlfa^TT <x ° ♦ .? i i ftr^r h^t*t ^tt^t-ip^T^ I I flT^TT JFTt^t ’<*2^ II II

Back: - 14 yadā nṛpaṃ śaraṇaṃ prāpadyadhvaṃ, tadā duḥkhe ’tiṣṭhata.
- 15 nadyor gaṅgāyāṃ yamunāyāṃ ca pūro vartate.
- 16 nāryau rāmasya stotram agāyatām.
- 17 he ṛṣī, kuta indrānīr ghṛtena yajathaḥ.
- 18 devyā dāsyo ratnāni maṇīṃścānayan. (maṇīn ca ānayan)
- 19 kopād gurur hastenātāḍayacchiṣyam. (hastena atāḍayat śiṣyam)
- 20 mṛtyau ghaṭair vāpya jalam ānayatam.
- 21 paraśunā vṛkṣebhyaḥ kāṣṭham avākṛntata.
- 22 ṛṣir indrasya patnīm indrāṇīṃ suktair aśaṃsat.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 66
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 14. When1 ye besought4 (THT^) the king2 for protection3 (acc.) then5 ye were7 (T^TI) in misfortune6. 15. In the two rivers Ganga and4 Yamuna3 it is6 (^cTFl) high-water5. 16. The two women1 sang4 a song of praise3 about Rama2 (grew.). 17. O1 seers2, why3 do ye both sacrifice6 to the goddesses4 with melted butter5? 18. The queen’s1 women-servants2 brought6 jewels3 and5 precious stones4. 19. In anger1 (a5Z.) the teacher2 struck4 the scholar5 with his hand3. * 20. The two servants1 brought5 water4 from the cistern3 in pots2. 21. Ye cut off4 (impf.") wood3 from the trees2 with the axe1. 22. The seer1 praised6 Indranl4, Indra’s2 consort3, with hymns5.
14. When1 ye besought4 (THT^) the king2 for protection3 (acc.) then5 ye were7 (T^TI) in misfortune6. 15. In the two rivers Ganga and4 Yamuna3 it is6 (^cTFl) high-water5. 16. The two women1 sang4 a song of praise3 about Rama2 (grew.). 17. O1 seers2, why3 do ye both sacrifice6 to the goddesses4 with melted butter5? 18. The queen’s1 women-servants2 brought6 jewels3 and5 precious stones4. 19. In anger1 (a5Z.) the teacher2 struck4 the scholar5 with his hand3. * 20. The two servants1 brought5 water4 from the cistern3 in pots2. 21. Ye cut off4 (impf.") wood3 from the trees2 with the axe1. 22. The seer1 praised6 Indranl4, Indra’s2 consort3, with hymns5.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 66
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XII. 185. Feminine Substantives in T i and B u are declined as in the paradigms on the next page. The two series of forms exhibit complete parallelism: where the one shows i, y, e, or ay, the other shows respectively u, , o, or av; cf. §§ 50, 5l. In the D., Ab.- G., and L. sing., these stems sometimes follow wat; thus malyai, -yas, -yam ; dhenväi, -vās, -vām. 186. Feminines in f i and gu: afa "opinion"; ay "cow". Lesson XII. Dual. нat mati 57 N. A. I. D. Ab. G. L. V. N. A. I. D. Ab. G. L. V. Sing. afaR matis afaR matim нчт matyã нaй mataye mates wat matãu aÑ mate aua dhenus aye dhenum SraT dherva AuÑ dhenave are dhenos Hu dhenar Be dheno matibhyam matyos Plural. matayas matis afafHE matibhis matibhyas matinam afag matisu ]g dhent dhenavas aga dhenus araaTe dhenubhyam agfatt dhenubhis agzt dhenubhyas Tra dhenros ayaTf dhentinam aag dhenusu
Lesson XII. 185. Feminine Substantives in T i and B u are declined as in the paradigms on the next page. The two series of forms exhibit complete parallelism: where the one shows i, y, e, or ay, the other shows respectively u, , o, or av; cf. §§ 50, 5l. In the D., Ab.- G., and L. sing., these stems sometimes follow wat; thus malyai, -yas, -yam ; dhenväi, -vās, -vām. 186. Feminines in f i and gu: afa "opinion"; ay "cow". Lesson XII. Dual. нat mati 57 N. A. I. D. Ab. G. L. V. N. A. I. D. Ab. G. L. V. Sing. afaR matis afaR matim нчт matyã нaй mataye mates wat matãu aÑ mate aua dhenus aye dhenum SraT dherva AuÑ dhenave are dhenos Hu dhenar Be dheno matibhyam matyos Plural. matayas matis afafHE matibhis matibhyas matinam afag matisu ]g dhent dhenavas aga dhenus araaTe dhenubhyam agfatt dhenubhis agzt dhenubhyas Tra dhenros ayaTf dhentinam aag dhenusu

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 67
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 187. Adjectives in i and ^3 w are often inflected in the fe minine like and But adjectives in "3 u preceded by one **consonant** often form a **derivative** feminine stem by adding ?. Thus, ‘much’, N. masc. f- n< ^^"5 ‘heavy , m. f. n. TT^. This fem. is then declined like
187. Adjectives in i and ^3 w are often inflected in the fe minine like and But adjectives in "3 u preceded by one **consonant** often form a **derivative** feminine stem by adding ?. Thus, ‘much’, N. masc. f- n< ^^"5 ‘heavy , m. f. n. TT^. This fem. is then declined like

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 67
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XII. Verbs: be in order; tend struct. or conduce to (w. **datJ**). 2f4^r(**yindati**^ **vindate**) acquire.
Vocabulary XII. Verbs: be in order; tend struct. or conduce to (w. **datJ**). 2f4^r(**yindati**^ **vindate**) acquire.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 68
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **m**., quarrel. ^RT^T **n**., poem. **f**., glory. ifYq **m**., cowherd, guardian. snfa **f**., birth; caste; **f**., decision of courage. TTfvH **m**., prince. ^ * flT **f**., prudence, intelligence. **f**., devotion, honor. *TPT **m**., part, piece. **f**., prosperity, blessing. CN **f**., earth, ground, land. shepherd; kind. character; *rRîT **f**-, Ay, gnat. **f**., salvation, deliverance. **f**., stick, staff. m., ray; rein. **f**„ night. **m**., wound. **f**-, repose. ^fcl **f**; hearing ; holy writ, ^jfrf **f**., tradition; law book. **m**., sleep; dream. **f**., jaw. Adj.: f. °^rr, low. f. °^TT- principal, first. m., f., n., or f. light.
Subst.: **m**., quarrel. ^RT^T **n**., poem. **f**., glory. ifYq **m**., cowherd, guardian. snfa **f**., birth; caste; **f**., decision of courage. TTfvH **m**., prince. ^ * flT **f**., prudence, intelligence. **f**., devotion, honor. *TPT **m**., part, piece. **f**., prosperity, blessing. CN **f**., earth, ground, land. shepherd; kind. character; *rRîT **f**-, Ay, gnat. **f**., salvation, deliverance. **f**., stick, staff. m., ray; rein. **f**„ night. **m**., wound. **f**-, repose. ^fcl **f**; hearing ; holy writ, ^jfrf **f**., tradition; law book. **m**., sleep; dream. **f**., jaw. Adj.: f. °^rr, low. f. °^TT- principal, first. m., f., n., or f. light.

Back: Flies desire a wound.
Princes desire wealth.
Lower class people desire quarrel.
Good people desire peace.
- 1 The seers are eminent with repose here.
- 2 The virtue is taught in the Sruti (holy writ) and in many Smrtis (law books).
- 3 We do not get sleep at night.
- 4 The king acquired much glory because of his courage.
- 5 You all get salvation because of merit.
- 6 The king shot many arrows at the enemies in the battle.
- 7 I struck the horses at their jaws with a light stick.
- 8 The quarrel of the warriors ceased by the king"s wisdom.
- 9 The castes of the Sudras are counted as low.
- 10 The Brahmanas are the first among the castes of the Aryan.
- 11 Dharma (the right) induces to prosperity.
- 12 Both of you are the warriors by birth.
- 13 The prince gave a part of land to the Brahmana.
- 14 The horses became weary and fell down on the ground.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 68
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 98
98

Back: - 15 sadhūnāṃ bhaktyā viṣṇus tuṣyati muktiṃ ca yacchati.
- 16 bahūnāṃ jātīnāṃ janā nagare ’vasan.
- 17 vihagā vyādhaṃ paśyanti bhūmeścotpatanti. (bhūmes ca utpatanti)
- 18 buddher balena duḥkham apārayāma.
- 19 gopo vane dhenū rakṣati.
- 20 buddhyodyogena ca bahvīṃ kīrtiṃ labhadhve. (buddhyā udyogena)
- 21 kāvyaṃ kavaye kīrtaye kalpate.
- 22 bhūtaye śivaṃ namāmaḥ.
- 23 raśmayo ’śvasya hanvāṃ badhyante.
- 24 rātrau śrutim apaṭhāva.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 68
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: n A8 ii 15. Visnu3 rejoices4 at the devotion2 (instr.) of the pious1 (pl-), and6 gives7 deliverance5. 16. Men3 of many1 castes2 dwelt5 in the city4. 17. The birds1 see3 the hunter2, and5 fly up6 from the ground4. 18. By the power2 of intelligence" we overcame4 advers Lesson XII. XIII. 59 ity3. 19. The cowherd1 guards4 the cows3 in the wood2. 20. By intelligence1 and3 diligence2 ye acquire6 much4 glory5. 21. The poem1 tends4 to the poet’s2 glory3 (two datives). 22. For prosperity1 we bow before3 Qiva2 (acc.). 23. The reins1 are being fastened4 ) to the horse’s2 jaws3 (loc.). 24. In the night1 we both read3 (impf.) holy writ2.
n A8 ii 15. Visnu3 rejoices4 at the devotion2 (instr.) of the pious1 (pl-), and6 gives7 deliverance5. 16. Men3 of many1 castes2 dwelt5 in the city4. 17. The birds1 see3 the hunter2, and5 fly up6 from the ground4. 18. By the power2 of intelligence" we overcame4 advers Lesson XII. XIII. 59 ity3. 19. The cowherd1 guards4 the cows3 in the wood2. 20. By intelligence1 and3 diligence2 ye acquire6 much4 glory5. 21. The poem1 tends4 to the poet’s2 glory3 (two datives). 22. For prosperity1 we bow before3 Qiva2 (acc.). 23. The reins1 are being fastened4 ) to the horse’s2 jaws3 (loc.). 24. In the night1 we both read3 (impf.) holy writ2.

Back: Active | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | avadam | avadāva | avadāma
Second | avadaḥ | avadatam | avadata
Third | avadat | avadatām | avadan
Middle | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | avade | avadāvahi | avadāmahi
Second | avadathāḥ | avadethām | avadadhvam
Third | avadata | avadetām | avadanta
Passive | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | audye | audyāvahi | audyāmahi
Second | audyathāḥ | audyethām | audyadhvam
Third | audyata | audyetām | audyanta
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 69
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XIII. 188. Verbs, a-conjugation. Imperfect Middle. The imperfect middle of verbs in a is as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. dlabhe (**a** + **0** alabhavahi alabhamahi 2. **dlabhathas** alabhetham alabhadhvam 3. **alabhata** dlabhetam alabhanta With IfWTK and TjcfTK the dual, cf. TTW and of the pres. ind. mid. The impf. **pass**, is similarly inflected.
Lesson XIII. 188. Verbs, a-conjugation. Imperfect Middle. The imperfect middle of verbs in a is as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. dlabhe (**a** + **0** alabhavahi alabhamahi 2. **dlabhathas** alabhetham alabhadhvam 3. **alabhata** dlabhetam alabhanta With IfWTK and TjcfTK the dual, cf. TTW and of the pres. ind. mid. The impf. **pass**, is similarly inflected.

Back: नदी (nadī́)
 | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | नदी nadī́ | नद्यौ / नदी¹ nadyaù / nadī́¹ | नद्यः / नदीः¹ nadyàḥ / nadī́ḥ¹
Vocative | नदि nádi | नद्यौ / नदी¹ nádyau / nádī¹ | नद्यः / नदीः¹ nádyaḥ / nádīḥ¹
Accusative | नदीम् nadī́m | नद्यौ / नदी¹ nadyaù / nadī́¹ | नदीः nadī́ḥ
Instrumental | नद्या nadyā́ | नदीभ्याम् nadī́bhyām | नदीभिः nadī́bhiḥ
Dative | नद्यै nadyaí | नदीभ्याम् nadī́bhyām | नदीभ्यः nadī́bhyaḥ
Ablative | नद्याः / नद्यै² nadyā́ḥ / nadyaí² | नदीभ्याम् nadī́bhyām | नदीभ्यः nadī́bhyaḥ
Genitive | नद्याः / नद्यै² nadyā́ḥ / nadyaí² | नद्योः nadyóḥ | नदीनाम् nadī́nām
Locative | नद्याम् nadyā́m | नद्योः nadyóḥ | नदीषु nadī́ṣu
- ¹Vedic
- ²Brāhmaṇas
Feminine ī-stem declension of धी (dhī́)
 | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | धीः dhī́ḥ | धियौ dhíyau | धियः dhíyaḥ
Vocative | धीः dhī́ḥ | धियौ dhíyau | धियः dhíyaḥ
Accusative | धियम् dhíyam | धियौ dhíyau | धियः dhíyaḥ
Instrumental | धिया dhiyā́ | धीभ्याम् dhībhyā́m | धीभिः dhībhíḥ
Dative | धिये / धियै¹ dhiyé / dhiyaí¹ | धीभ्याम् dhībhyā́m | धीभ्यः dhībhyáḥ
Ablative | धियः / धियाः¹ / धियै² dhiyáḥ / dhiyā́ḥ¹ / dhiyaí² | धीभ्याम् dhībhyā́m | धीभ्यः dhībhyáḥ
Genitive | धियः / धियाः¹ / धियै² dhiyáḥ / dhiyā́ḥ¹ / dhiyaí² | धियोः dhiyóḥ | धियाम् / धीनाम्¹ dhiyā́m / dhīnā́m¹
Locative | धियि / धियाम्¹ dhiyí / dhiyā́m¹ | धियोः dhiyóḥ | धीषु dhīṣú
Notes
- ¹Later Sanskrit
- ²Brāhmaṇas
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 69
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 189. Root-words in i are declined as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. N. V. dhls dhiyau dhiyas A. dhiyam n r> 75 n I. dhiya dhtbhydm dhzbhis D. dhiye ft n dhibhyas Abl. dhiyas r> n 75 ”G. r> n dhiyos dhiyam L. dhiyi t> n dhzsu In the **D**., **Ab**.-**Gen**., and **L**. **sing**., and **G**. **pl**-9 these stems sometimes follow ; thus, dhiyai, dhiyas, dhiyam, dhlnam. Cf. § 185. Observe that where the case-ending begins with a **vowel** the stem-final i is * plit into **ty**.
189. Root-words in i are declined as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. N. V. dhls dhiyau dhiyas A. dhiyam n r> 75 n I. dhiya dhtbhydm dhzbhis D. dhiye ft n dhibhyas Abl. dhiyas r> n 75 ”G. r> n dhiyos dhiyam L. dhiyi t> n dhzsu In the **D**., **Ab**.-**Gen**., and **L**. **sing**., and **G**. **pl**-9 these stems sometimes follow ; thus, dhiyai, dhiyas, dhiyam, dhlnam. Cf. § 185. Observe that where the case-ending begins with a **vowel** the stem-final i is * plit into **ty**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 70
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 190. The following additional prefixes are used with verbs: wfv ‘ **over, above, on** ’; ‘**unto, close upon**’” ‘ **to, unto 4against**’ (often with implied **violence**) ; fsj ‘**down, into, in**’; ‘**back to, against, in return**’; f^“ ‘**apart, away, out**’.
190. The following additional prefixes are used with verbs: wfv ‘ **over, above, on** ’; ‘**unto, close upon**’” ‘ **to, unto 4against**’ (often with implied **violence**) ; fsj ‘**down, into, in**’; ‘**back to, against, in return**’; f^“ ‘**apart, away, out**’.
* Sometimes, with the verbs and abbreviated to fQ; but in classical Skt. most commonly used as a conjunction; ‘also’, ‘ too

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 70
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 191. Both in verbal forms and in derivatives, the final or of a prefix ordinarily **lingualizes** the initial of a root to which it is prefixed; and, in a few cases, the Tf remains even after an interposed of **augment** or **reduplication**; thus, from ^TT+’SrfM, pres. pass. impf. pass. ^nr-
191. Both in verbal forms and in derivatives, the final or of a prefix ordinarily **lingualizes** the initial of a root to which it is prefixed; and, in a few cases, the Tf remains even after an interposed of **augment** or **reduplication**; thus, from ^TT+’SrfM, pres. pass. impf. pass. ^nr-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 70
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 192. The final of prefixes in and becomes before initial T^, TR; thus, from 4 1 *
192. The final of prefixes in and becomes before initial T^, TR; thus, from 4 1 *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 70
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XIII. Verbs: 4- ^5lf rf -**krarriate**) pass beyond or by, transgress. oFt + QuJj^Jat^ be born, arise from (**abl**.). 4- p arise, come into existence. vt + cover, keep shut. -f- TTfW (**pratibhasate**) answer (w. **acc**, of **pers**.). ^J4-T[ arise; rule. (**racayati**) arrange, compose (a literary work). fHV 4- Tlfh (**pratisedhati**) hold back; forbid. + fW (**vindpyati**)disappear, equip. (**samnahyati**") gird; arise from (**nispddyate**) (abl.f grow; fiff (**m senate**) dwell; devote oneself to; attend. mount, stand above or over; rule, govern. +HfW hinder; injure; offend.
Vocabulary XIII. Verbs: 4- ^5lf rf -**krarriate**) pass beyond or by, transgress. oFt + QuJj^Jat^ be born, arise from (**abl**.). 4- p arise, come into existence. vt + cover, keep shut. -f- TTfW (**pratibhasate**) answer (w. **acc**, of **pers**.). ^J4-T[ arise; rule. (**racayati**) arrange, compose (a literary work). fHV 4- Tlfh (**pratisedhati**) hold back; forbid. + fW (**vindpyati**)disappear, equip. (**samnahyati**") gird; arise from (**nispddyate**) (abl.f grow; fiff (**m senate**) dwell; devote oneself to; attend. mount, stand above or over; rule, govern. +HfW hinder; injure; offend.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 71
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.:permission. **m**., god; lord. **m**. , dove. **m**., ear. **m**., love, desire. **n**. , reason, cause, jfitv **m**-, anger. **f**-> girdle. **m**., infatuation. **m**., wagon. **m**., desire, avarice. ^rf?T **f**-, dwelling. **f**., luck, fortune, riches; as nom. pr., goddess of fortune. , ocean **n**., net. creation. vt **f**., understanding, insight. jff **f**., modesty, bashfulness. ^rnr **m**., destruction. **m**., **n**., lotus. **m**., man {homo). H<TTT5T **m**., great king. **m**., sage; ascetic. Adj.: cJu^T, f. ®^n, whole. c. f. beautiful. yftT, f- °^rr steadfast, brave, f °^rr, white. **f**”
Subst.:permission. **m**., god; lord. **m**. , dove. **m**., ear. **m**., love, desire. **n**. , reason, cause, jfitv **m**-, anger. **f**-> girdle. **m**., infatuation. **m**., wagon. **m**., desire, avarice. ^rf?T **f**-, dwelling. **f**., luck, fortune, riches; as nom. pr., goddess of fortune. , ocean **n**., net. creation. vt **f**., understanding, insight. jff **f**., modesty, bashfulness. ^rnr **m**., destruction. **m**., **n**., lotus. **m**., man {homo). H<TTT5T **m**., great king. **m**., sage; ascetic. Adj.: cJu^T, f. ®^n, whole. c. f. beautiful. yftT, f- °^rr steadfast, brave, f °^rr, white. **f**”

Back: Anger arises from desire.
Love arises from desire.
Infatuation and destruction arise from desire.
Desire is the cause of sin.
1 The king was forbidden from sin by the hermit.
2 The beautiful sons were bom of Dari"s wife.
3 The fortunes always dwell in the steadfast man.
4 The two enemies have transgressed the king"s command.
5 The lotus is the seat of Sri (goddess of fortune).
6 Men overcome the misfortune by the power of their intelligence.
7 The chariot was mounted by Rama.
8 The poet"s house was brilliant with riches.
9 0 children, both of you were called by your mother.
10 The seer look at the sun.
11 Two students seated themselves on the mat by the teacher"s permission.
12 The ascetic meditated on the God"s creation of the world.
13 The rice grain grows in the fields
14 Teachers compose the textbooks and students write the books.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 71
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XIII. ^THT’Jrr^ 5TT5T^ UPHSI ^TXTJTK H R II ^fcFSfwr ’rnTT<nwfSrsT7r i a i -mk^: jtwt w-i r i Tr^-q i 3 i ^rf>5 i i iri i 8 i f^rsrr (gen.) ^rnfcr: i m i ynMT TTTT’rf^r i i xr * rt ttWht i "O i f^rsrr-iftHH I * = I I Q. I I RO | 5-firtznjMir^YTelT?! | AR I ’tqi-^rfir 1 ar 1 vt^4 fiT-cq^rn 1 a? i fv-xzrrv 11 A8 h
Exercise XIII. ^THT’Jrr^ 5TT5T^ UPHSI ^TXTJTK H R II ^fcFSfwr ’rnTT<nwfSrsT7r i a i -mk^: jtwt w-i r i Tr^-q i 3 i ^rf>5 i i iri i 8 i f^rsrr (gen.) ^rnfcr: i m i ynMT TTTT’rf^r i i xr * rt ttWht i "O i f^rsrr-iftHH I * = I I Q. I I RO | 5-firtznjMir^YTelT?! | AR I ’tqi-^rfir 1 ar 1 vt^4 fiT-cq^rn 1 a? i fv-xzrrv 11 A8 h

Back: 15 srīḥ samudrādudajāyata.
16 kutah karnavapyadhiyetam. (kamau apyadhiyetam)
17 sudra dviiatmam bhasam abhasanteti pratyabhasyata brahmanaih.
18 dhiya kapoto ialad amucyata
19 gurur mekhalaya balau samanahyat.
20 yada sisyasya hrrr vyanasyat, tada dharmah pratihanyate. (or pratyahanyata / pratyahayata)
21 kutah sveta dhenur alabhadhvam.
22 krtsna bhumir maharaienadhyasthiyata. (maharaiena adhyasthiyata)
23 bhutaye nrpatim saranam prapadyamahi.
24 smrti visnunaracyetam. (visnuna aracyetam)
25 krsnaya dhenoh ksiram balabhyam ply ate.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 71
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * As the principal euphonic rules have now been stated and 15. * The goddess of fortune was born from the ocean. 16. Why did ye hold your ears shut? {pass, constr.} 17. “The Qudras spoke 62 Lesson XIII. XIV. the language of the Aryans”: thus answered (wipers. pass.) the Brahmans. 18. By its cleverness the dove was freed from the net. 19. The teacher girded both boys with the girdle. 20. When the scholar’s modesty disappeared, then the law was offended against. 21. Whence did ye get (<5fHx) the white cows? 22. The whole earth was ruled by the great king. 23. For prosperity (dat.) we took refuge with the king 2^. Two law-books were composed by Visnu. 25. The milk of the black cow is drunk by both children.
* As the principal euphonic rules have now been stated and 15. * The goddess of fortune was born from the ocean. 16. Why did ye hold your ears shut? {pass, constr.} 17. “The Qudras spoke 62 Lesson XIII. XIV. the language of the Aryans”: thus answered (wipers. pass.) the Brahmans. 18. By its cleverness the dove was freed from the net. 19. The teacher girded both boys with the girdle. 20. When the scholar’s modesty disappeared, then the law was offended against. 21. Whence did ye get (<5fHx) the white cows? 22. The whole earth was ruled by the great king. 23. For prosperity (dat.) we took refuge with the king 2^. Two law-books were composed by Visnu. 25. The milk of the black cow is drunk by both children.
exemplified in the exercises, no further indication need be made, except in special instances, of the position of the words in the Sanskrit.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 72
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XIV. 193. Verbs, a-conjugation. Present Imperative Active. The inflection of this mode is as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. vddani 2. vdda 3. vddatu vddava vddatam ^T3AT vddama ej vadata vadantu
Lesson XIV. 193. Verbs, a-conjugation. Present Imperative Active. The inflection of this mode is as follows: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. vddani 2. vdda 3. vddatu vddava vddatam ^T3AT vddama ej vadata vadantu

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 72
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 194. The threefirst persons are properly **subjunctive** forms, and accordingly often express a **wish** or **future** action. 195. The second and third persons of the imperative express oftenest a **command**; sometimes a **wish** or **future** action. The negative used with the imv. is **HT**-196. A rare imv. form, either 2nd or 3rd pers. sing, (or plur.), is made with the ending cfTcfj thus, Its value is that of a **posterior** or **future** imv. (like the Latin forms in to and tote).
194. The threefirst persons are properly **subjunctive** forms, and accordingly often express a **wish** or **future** action. 195. The second and third persons of the imperative express oftenest a **command**; sometimes a **wish** or **future** action. The negative used with the imv. is **HT**-196. A rare imv. form, either 2nd or 3rd pers. sing, (or plur.), is made with the ending cfTcfj thus, Its value is that of a **posterior** or **future** imv. (like the Latin forms in to and tote).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 72
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 197. Root-words in u, inflected like H f., ‘earth’. exemplified in the exercises, no further indication need be made, except in special instances, of the position of the words in the Sanskrit. Lesson XIV. 63 Sing. NV. I. D. Ab. G. bhus bhuva bhuve bhuvas bhuvi Dual. bhuvau Plural. bhuvas T) 7)bhubhyam Cn. bhuvos 7)7i 7i 7) bhubhis bhubhyas 7) bhuvam 7)7) In the D., Ab.-G., and L. sing., and G. ph, these stems sometimes follow thus, bhuvai, bhuvas, bhuvam, bhunam. Cf. §§ 185, 189. 198. Polysyllabic Feminines in u, inflected like f., ‘ woman ’. Sing. Dual. Plural. vadhus vadhvau ^4^ vadhvas vadhvai vadhum vadh va r, n vadh™vadhubhyam vadhubhis C\ ____ ______ vadhubhyas Ab. vadhvas •n * G. t> * n vadhvos J B vadhvam 7> 7> vadhu 7> 7> ^5* 1144 vadhunam vadhusu*
197. Root-words in u, inflected like H f., ‘earth’. exemplified in the exercises, no further indication need be made, except in special instances, of the position of the words in the Sanskrit. Lesson XIV. 63 Sing. NV. I. D. Ab. G. bhus bhuva bhuve bhuvas bhuvi Dual. bhuvau Plural. bhuvas T) 7)bhubhyam Cn. bhuvos 7)7i 7i 7) bhubhis bhubhyas 7) bhuvam 7)7) In the D., Ab.-G., and L. sing., and G. ph, these stems sometimes follow thus, bhuvai, bhuvas, bhuvam, bhunam. Cf. §§ 185, 189. 198. Polysyllabic Feminines in u, inflected like f., ‘ woman ’. Sing. Dual. Plural. vadhus vadhvau ^4^ vadhvas vadhvai vadhum vadh va r, n vadh™vadhubhyam vadhubhis C\ ____ ______ vadhubhyas Ab. vadhvas •n * G. t> * n vadhvos J B vadhvam 7> 7> vadhu 7> 7> ^5* 1144 vadhunam vadhusu*

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 73
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XIV. Verbs: (**abhyasyatf**) repeat, study, learn. 4- K (**prdyjatr**) throw forward or in **pass**. (dr$yate) seem, look. ^^4- (**nivasatf**) inhabit; dwell. 4- TT ^**pravdrtate**) get a-going, break out, arise. into. 4- fif (**ntfida**#) seat oneself.
Vocabulary XIV. Verbs: (**abhyasyatf**) repeat, study, learn. 4- K (**prdyjatr**) throw forward or in **pass**. (dr$yate) seem, look. ^^4- (**nivasatf**) inhabit; dwell. 4- TT ^**pravdrtate**) get a-going, break out, arise. into. 4- fif (**ntfida**#) seat oneself.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 74
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.:gfa f., song of praise; praise. afafe **m**., guest. g9т f., daughter-in-law. ayd n, untruth. Adj.: зaT® **m**, study; recitation. muT, f. oaT, lower; other. aTêT **m**., command, prescription. AT. f. oatt, highest; other. aт9 D., seat, chair. añ. f. oat, crooked, bent. Ja f., spoon, esp. sacrificial yreT. f. £, beautiful. spoon. Adv.: ATZ **m**., lecture, lesson. aERTA under, underneath (**gen**.). waT f., creature; subject. faTe long (of time). ag f., earth, ground. aar far, afar. yaЧ n., ornament. AT prohibitiveparticle, like Greek u f, eyebrow. un, Latin ne. Te f, woman, wife. aт (postpos.) or. afg f., altar. aaR near by. aaf., mother-in-law.
Subst.:gfa f., song of praise; praise. afafe **m**., guest. g9т f., daughter-in-law. ayd n, untruth. Adj.: зaT® **m**, study; recitation. muT, f. oaT, lower; other. aTêT **m**., command, prescription. AT. f. oatt, highest; other. aт9 D., seat, chair. añ. f. oat, crooked, bent. Ja f., spoon, esp. sacrificial yreT. f. £, beautiful. spoon. Adv.: ATZ **m**., lecture, lesson. aERTA under, underneath (**gen**.). waT f., creature; subject. faTe long (of time). ag f., earth, ground. aar far, afar. yaЧ n., ornament. AT prohibitiveparticle, like Greek u f, eyebrow. un, Latin ne. Te f, woman, wife. aт (postpos.) or. afg f., altar. aaR near by. aaf., mother-in-law.

Back: - Behave right (dharma). Don"t behave wrong (adharma). Speak the truth. Don"t speak untruth.
- Look far. Don"t look close. Look high. Don"t look down.
1 May the king triumph and reign over the whole world for long time.
2 Both of you should to the city of Prayaga and live there happily.
3 The beautiful woman"s two eyebrows are seen to be arched.
4 May the teachers sit on the seats, but the disciples sit on the ground.
5 The quarrel of the mothers-in-law and the daughters-in-law happened.
6 Out of the anger the king said thus “0 warriors, throw the spears, shoot the arrows, punish the wicked enemies”.
7 Let him ask the guest thus “where did you stay last night?”
8 Two daughters-in-law grieve because of their mothers-in-law"s anger.
9 The hermit loves his wife.
10 “Two students must come to study the lesson” thus the teacher"s command.
11 Let me throw ghee in the fire with a spoon.
12 0 woman, bring water from the well.
13 Ghee is in the spoon.
14 Both eyes are under both eyebrows.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 74
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XIV. VH ^TVT ’7TVH7 Heit 1 STSTcJ I 9 I W^TRT ’T^ct fsrsrerm; i i ’fp^Tri (^” ) i a i nf^r fsr^T: i 8 I JTT^TT I M I t ^fÊrr: a?rvT^nf7TT»n^
Exercise XIV. VH ^TVT ’7TVH7 Heit 1 STSTcJ I 9 I W^TRT ’T^ct fsrsrerm; i i ’fp^Tri (^” ) i a i nf^r fsr^T: i 8 I JTT^TT I M I t ^fÊrr: a?rvT^nf7TT»n^

Back: - 15 vadhubhir indranyah stutir giyate.
- 16 śrutij śastrani cābhyasyata satyaj vadata gurūn pujayateti śisyanam śastrānām ādeśah.
- 17 nrpāh prajāj raksantu pāpābśca dandayantviti dharmo na hiyate.
- 18 he vadhvah, śvaśrūr namata.
- 19 sūto ’śvān mā tadayatu pidayatu vā.
- 20 ratnānyānayatam iti dāsyau devyādiśyetām.
- 21 vedua jalaṃ juhūbhyāṃ siñcāma.
- 22 vasunākṣair dīvyāveti kṣatriyābhyām abhāṣyata.
- 23 adya putrāvupanayānīti bhrāhmaṇo vadati.
- 24 narā vāpīṃ khanantu.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 74
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: II 98 II 15. The women sing the praises (singular} of Indrani (pass, constr.}. 16. “ Study ye holy writ and the sciences, speak the Lesson XIV. XV. 65 truth, honor your teachers ” : thus1 is the prescription3 of the text-books2 for scholars4 (gen.). 17. Let kings protect their subjects and punish the wicked: thus is the law not offended (^TTpass.). 18. O women , reverence your mothers-in-law. 19. Let not the coachman strike or torment the horses. 20. “ Bring the jewels”: thus the two maid-servants were commanded by the queen. 21. Let us with two spoons drop water on the altar. 22. “Let us play with dice for money” (instr.): thus spoke the two warriors (pass.). 23. “To-day let me initiate (imv.) my two sons”: thus says the Brahman. 24. Let the men dig a cistern.
II 98 II 15. The women sing the praises (singular} of Indrani (pass, constr.}. 16. “ Study ye holy writ and the sciences, speak the Lesson XIV. XV. 65 truth, honor your teachers ” : thus1 is the prescription3 of the text-books2 for scholars4 (gen.). 17. Let kings protect their subjects and punish the wicked: thus is the law not offended (^TTpass.). 18. O women , reverence your mothers-in-law. 19. Let not the coachman strike or torment the horses. 20. “ Bring the jewels”: thus the two maid-servants were commanded by the queen. 21. Let us with two spoons drop water on the altar. 22. “Let us play with dice for money” (instr.): thus spoke the two warriors (pass.). 23. “To-day let me initiate (imv.) my two sons”: thus says the Brahman. 24. Let the men dig a cistern.

Back: Active | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | vadāni | vadāva | vadāma
Second | vada | vadatam | vadata
Third | vadatu | vadatām | vadantu
Middle | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | vadai | vadāvahai | vadāmahai
Second | vadasva | vadethām | vadadhvam
Third | vadatām | vadetām | vadantām
Passive | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | udyai | udyāvahai | udyāmahai
Second | udyasva | udyethām | udyadhvam
Third | udyatām | udyetām | udyantām
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 75
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 199. Verbs, a- conjugation. Present Imperative Middle. The present imperative middle is inflected thus: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. labhai labhavahai Idbhamahai 2. labhasva labhetham Idbhadhvam 3. labhatam Idbhantam 200. The first persons are really **subjunctive** forms. The inflection of the **passive** imv. is precisely similar; thus, etc.
199. Verbs, a- conjugation. Present Imperative Middle. The present imperative middle is inflected thus: Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. labhai labhavahai Idbhamahai 2. labhasva labhetham Idbhadhvam 3. labhatam Idbhantam 200. The first persons are really **subjunctive** forms. The inflection of the **passive** imv. is precisely similar; thus, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 75
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 201. Nouns in r. These stems, like many belonging to the **consonant**-declension, exhibit in their inflection a difference of stem-form: **strong**, **middle**, and **weak**. (For the cases called strong, etc., see Jntrod., § 87). In the weak cases (except loc. sing.) the stem-final is which in the weakest cases is changed naturally to Jr. But as regards the strong cases, the stems of this declension fall into two classes: in the one — which is much the larger, comprising all the **nomina agentis**, and a few others — the is **vriddhied**, becoming ar\ while in the other class, containing Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 66 Lesson XV. most nouns of **relationship**, the is **gunated**, becoming ar. In both classes, the **loc**. **sing**, has ar as **stem**-**final**. The **abl**.- **gen**. **sing**, is of **peculiar** formation; and the final X r ’s dropped in the **nominative** singular. 202. Nomina agentis in r, like cfiH m., c doer ’. Sing. N. kart a A. =fiHTT?T kartaram i. kartra D. kartre Ab. kartur (or -us) Gr. fl T) l. kartari V. kartar Dual. Plural. kartarau kartaras kartrn 6 n r> -trbhyam kartrbhis „ „ kartrbhya n r> kartros y> »203. Two nouns of relationship, f., “sister”, and m., c grandson’, follow this declension; but makes the acc. pl. 204. The nouns of agency are sometimes used **participially**, or with **adjective** value. The corresponding feminine-stem is made in ^2, and declim"d like ; thus, k ar tri. 205. The grammarians prescribe a complete neuter declension also for bases in cl. precisely analogous with that of or but such forms are **rare**.
201. Nouns in r. These stems, like many belonging to the **consonant**-declension, exhibit in their inflection a difference of stem-form: **strong**, **middle**, and **weak**. (For the cases called strong, etc., see Jntrod., § 87). In the weak cases (except loc. sing.) the stem-final is which in the weakest cases is changed naturally to Jr. But as regards the strong cases, the stems of this declension fall into two classes: in the one — which is much the larger, comprising all the **nomina agentis**, and a few others — the is **vriddhied**, becoming ar\ while in the other class, containing Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 66 Lesson XV. most nouns of **relationship**, the is **gunated**, becoming ar. In both classes, the **loc**. **sing**, has ar as **stem**-**final**. The **abl**.- **gen**. **sing**, is of **peculiar** formation; and the final X r ’s dropped in the **nominative** singular. 202. Nomina agentis in r, like cfiH m., c doer ’. Sing. N. kart a A. =fiHTT?T kartaram i. kartra D. kartre Ab. kartur (or -us) Gr. fl T) l. kartari V. kartar Dual. Plural. kartarau kartaras kartrn 6 n r> -trbhyam kartrbhis „ „ kartrbhya n r> kartros y> »203. Two nouns of relationship, f., “sister”, and m., c grandson’, follow this declension; but makes the acc. pl. 204. The nouns of agency are sometimes used **participially**, or with **adjective** value. The corresponding feminine-stem is made in ^2, and declim"d like ; thus, k ar tri. 205. The grammarians prescribe a complete neuter declension also for bases in cl. precisely analogous with that of or but such forms are **rare**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 76
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XV. Verbs: + (**anugdcchati**) follow. . (**samac<fra^**)commit, | (**yivddate**) dispute, argue. + ^5TT (**ctyrayate**) go for protection to, take refuge with (**acc**.).
Vocabulary XV. Verbs: + (**anugdcchati**) follow. . (**samac<fra^**)commit, | (**yivddate**) dispute, argue. + ^5TT (**ctyrayate**) go for protection to, take refuge with (**acc**.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 77
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Sub st.: I MTM **m**-> teacher. ^7? **m**., doer, maker, author; as <£**adj**., doing, making. **m**-> time. **n**., step. JCT^rf^TT **n**., penance, expiation. **m**., supporter, preserver; lord, husband; master. cfcICT **£**«» graciousness, pity. **m**., gi ver; as **adj**., generous. **m**., scamp, rogue. seer, author (of Vedic books); as **adj**., seeing. **m**., protector. **m**., trial, law-suit. **m**., punisher, governor. **m**., creator. Mira; **n**., honor, glory (often as indecl., w. folVg **dat**.). **m**., creator. **m**., decision; certainty. leader. xrfqgcf **m**., learned man; pandit. Adj.;f. o^rr, poor. f. °^TT, best, most excellent; better (w. foWg **abl**.).
Sub st.: I MTM **m**-> teacher. ^7? **m**., doer, maker, author; as <£**adj**., doing, making. **m**-> time. **n**., step. JCT^rf^TT **n**., penance, expiation. **m**., supporter, preserver; lord, husband; master. cfcICT **£**«» graciousness, pity. **m**., gi ver; as **adj**., generous. **m**., scamp, rogue. seer, author (of Vedic books); as **adj**., seeing. **m**., protector. **m**., trial, law-suit. **m**., punisher, governor. **m**., creator. Mira; **n**., honor, glory (often as indecl., w. folVg **dat**.). **m**., creator. **m**., decision; certainty. leader. xrfqgcf **m**., learned man; pandit. Adj.;f. o^rr, poor. f. °^TT, best, most excellent; better (w. foWg **abl**.).

Back: Among the roque and the serpent the latter is better, the former is not. The serpent bites on time but the roque destroys every step.
1 The Aryans command the wicked man thus “You should get the teacher and perform the expiation”.
2 “Let us compose the poems, let us obtain glory, let us rely on the kings, let us get acquire prosperity” thus the poets say.
3 Two maidens dwelt in their sister"s house.
4 When the king is the protector, his people will live happily.
5 “Let two of us sacrifice the god for virtue, let two of us debate with the graduates in the assembly for wealth and glory” thus is the decision of two sons of the Brahmin.
6 For salvation, the God who is the author of creation is reverenced by men with devotion.
7 The kings are the protectors of their subjects and they are the punishers of the rogues.
8 (Let us) salute to Panini, who is the author of the text-book.
9 (Let us) salute again and again to the gods who are the givers of wealth and the creators of the world.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 77
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XV. * Words are often repeated, to give an intensive, a distributive, or a repetitional meaning. So here: "at every step". The po- sition of w is very unusual; it would naturally follow aie. #* Loc. absol. - supply "being".
Exercise XV. * Words are often repeated, to give an intensive, a distributive, or a repetitional meaning. So here: "at every step". The po- sition of w is very unusual; it would naturally follow aie. #* Loc. absol. - supply "being".

Back: 10　patnī bhartari snihyatu.
11　kṣatriyā netṝn anugacchantu śatrubhiśca yudhyantām.
12　nadyāṃ bālaḥ svasṛbhyāṃ saṃgacchatām.
13　lokaḥ sraṣṭrāsṛjyata. (sraṣṭrā asṛjyata)
14　sādhūnāṃ dātfṇāṃ gṛheṣu bhikṣā munibhyo dīyate.
15　bhojo nṛpaḥ strotrāṇāṃ kartari dātāvartata. (dātā avartata)
16　bhṛtyāḥ sadā bhartfn sevantām.
17　sādhūnāṃ rakṣitfn devān śaraṇaṃ prapadyadhvam.
18　narā dhātuḥ kṛpayā jīvanti.
19　he dātar, daridrā namanti.
20　nareṇa svasāro nagaraṃ nīyante.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 78
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 10. Let the wife love her husband. 11. Let the warriors follow their leaders and fight with the enemy (pl.). 12. At the river the boy is to meet his two sisters (instr.). 13. The world was created by the creator. 14. In the houses of pious givers alms is given to ascetics. 15. King Bhoja was (^generous toward the author (loc.) of the eulogies. 16. Let servants always be useful to (^T^) their masters (acc.). 17. For protection * (acc.) betake yourselves5 to the gods3, the protectors2 of the pious1. 18. Men live by the graciousness of the creator. 19. O generous one, the poor bend before thee\ 20. The man leads his sisters to the city (pass, constr.).
10. Let the wife love her husband. 11. Let the warriors follow their leaders and fight with the enemy (pl.). 12. At the river the boy is to meet his two sisters (instr.). 13. The world was created by the creator. 14. In the houses of pious givers alms is given to ascetics. 15. King Bhoja was (^generous toward the author (loc.) of the eulogies. 16. Let servants always be useful to (^T^) their masters (acc.). 17. For protection * (acc.) betake yourselves5 to the gods3, the protectors2 of the pious1. 18. Men live by the graciousness of the creator. 19. O generous one, the poor bend before thee\ 20. The man leads his sisters to the city (pass, constr.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 78
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 206. Verbs, a-conjugation, present optative is formed from Present Optative Active. The the general present-stem by the addition of a mode-sign, after which are used secondary endings (in 3rd pl. act. ust 1st sing. mid. a, in 3rd pl. mid. ran). After an a-stem, this mode-sign, in all voices, is unaccented, which blends with the final a to If e (accented, or not, according to the accent of the a): and the If is maintained / unchanged before a vowel-ending (^* L hy means of an interposed euphonical y. The inflection in the active voice is as follows: Sing. 1. vddeyam 2. vades 3. vadet Similarly, Dual. vadeva vadetam ^cTTK vipeyam, vadetam Plural. vadema vadet a vddeyus nahyeyam, xft <51 cor dyeyam, etc.
206. Verbs, a-conjugation, present optative is formed from Present Optative Active. The the general present-stem by the addition of a mode-sign, after which are used secondary endings (in 3rd pl. act. ust 1st sing. mid. a, in 3rd pl. mid. ran). After an a-stem, this mode-sign, in all voices, is unaccented, which blends with the final a to If e (accented, or not, according to the accent of the a): and the If is maintained / unchanged before a vowel-ending (^* L hy means of an interposed euphonical y. The inflection in the active voice is as follows: Sing. 1. vddeyam 2. vades 3. vadet Similarly, Dual. vadeva vadetam ^cTTK vipeyam, vadetam Plural. vadema vadet a vddeyus nahyeyam, xft <51 cor dyeyam, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 79
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 207. The optative expresses: 1. wish or desire; 2. request or entreaty; 3. what is desirable or proper; 4. what may or might, can or could be. It is also largely used in conditional sentences. The subject is often indefinite and unexpressed. The negative used with the opt. is na. Both the prescriptive and the prohibitive are very common. optative
207. The optative expresses: 1. wish or desire; 2. request or entreaty; 3. what is desirable or proper; 4. what may or might, can or could be. It is also largely used in conditional sentences. The subject is often indefinite and unexpressed. The negative used with the opt. is na. Both the prescriptive and the prohibitive are very common. optative

TextBack: Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | kartā | kartārau | kartāraḥ
Vocative | kartaḥ | kartārau | kartāraḥ
Accusative | kartāram | kartārau | kartṝn
Instrumental | kartrā | kartṛbhyām | kartṛbhiḥ
Dative | kartre | kartṛbhyām | kartṛbhyaḥ
Ablative | kartuḥ | kartṛbhyām | kartṛbhyaḥ
Genitive | kartuḥ | kartroḥ | kartṝṇām
Locative | kartari | kartroḥ | kartṛṣu
Compound kartṛ-
Declension table of [Fem.] svasṛ
Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | svasā | svasārau | svasāraḥ
Vocative | svasaḥ | svasārau | svasāraḥ
Accusative | svasāram | svasārau | svasṝḥ
Instrumental | svasrā | svasṛbhyām | svasṛbhiḥ
Dative | svasre | svasṛbhyām | svasṛbhyaḥ
Ablative | svasuḥ | svasṛbhyām | svasṛbhyaḥ
Genitive | svasuḥ | svasroḥ | svasṝṇām
Locative | svasari | svasroḥ | svasṛṣu
Compound svasṛ-
Adverb -svasṛ
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 79
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: The nouns of relationship in (except ^7? and •f"ff — § 203) gunate in the strong cases; thus, fOrJ m-> ‘father’ f., ‘mother’, declined as follows: 208. see * Sing. N. ftrcKT TTTHT A. fxTFTTK * <• !<* <. i. ftnrretc. V. Dual. Plural. fqrrO htnrr etc.
The nouns of relationship in (except ^7? and •f"ff — § 203) gunate in the strong cases; thus, fOrJ m-> ‘father’ f., ‘mother’, declined as follows: 208. see * Sing. N. ftrcKT TTTHT A. fxTFTTK * <• !<* <. i. ftnrretc. V. Dual. Plural. fqrrO htnrr etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 79
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 209. Sing. gaits J| | gam gava gave 90s gam The stem 7ft m., f., ‘bullor ‘cow NV. A. I. Ab. G. Dual. gavau gobhyam , is declined thus: Plural. TTIaT^ gavas g^s gobhis gobhyas T> 7) gavam ifig 9°§u
209. Sing. gaits J| | gam gava gave 90s gam The stem 7ft m., f., ‘bullor ‘cow NV. A. I. Ab. G. Dual. gavau gobhyam , is declined thus: Plural. TTIaT^ gavas g^s gobhis gobhyas T> 7) gavam ifig 9°§u

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 79
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XVI. Verbs: (smdrati;p.smarydte)re- (mdnyate)think,suppose. member;think of;teach,esp.in (modate)rejoice. pass.it is taught",i.e.tra- 重(cansati)）proclaim(see also ditional". in Vocab.I.).
Vocabulary XVI. Verbs: (smdrati;p.smarydte)re- (mdnyate)think,suppose. member;think of;teach,esp.in (modate)rejoice. pass.it is taught",i.e.tra- 重(cansati)）proclaim(see also ditional". in Vocab.I.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 80
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: apt m., f., bull, steer, cow ; f., meal and gifts to the Brahmans. speech. **n**-5 ox-nature; stupidity. Adj.:f. °^TT, more, greater, VTW **m**., fodder, hay. son-in-law. **n**., mud, bog. ftpcf **m**., father; du., parents; pl., manes. TTlftTfi **m**., user, arranger. it**m**., wise man, sage. **m**., brother. A THH **f**., mother. **m**. , month. **n**. , pair. "OUST **n*** 9 protection. **n**., an oblation to the manes, accompanied by a sacrificial greatest. f.°^n, granting wishes; as f., sc. th® fabulous Wonder-cow. f. or used. badly arranged arranged, used. f. ^n, best. Pron.: 4(1 f«9 she, it. Adv. and Conj.: if-always, daily. if. well, properly. TTg^T, f.
Subst.: apt m., f., bull, steer, cow ; f., meal and gifts to the Brahmans. speech. **n**-5 ox-nature; stupidity. Adj.:f. °^TT, more, greater, VTW **m**., fodder, hay. son-in-law. **n**., mud, bog. ftpcf **m**., father; du., parents; pl., manes. TTlftTfi **m**., user, arranger. it**m**., wise man, sage. **m**., brother. A THH **f**., mother. **m**. , month. **n**. , pair. "OUST **n*** 9 protection. **n**., an oblation to the manes, accompanied by a sacrificial greatest. f.°^n, granting wishes; as f., sc. th® fabulous Wonder-cow. f. or used. badly arranged arranged, used. f. ^n, best. Pron.: 4(1 f«9 she, it. Adv. and Conj.: if-always, daily. if. well, properly. TTg^T, f.

Back: - The well-used speech is considered by the wise as the fabulous cow.
- The speech that is improperly used declares the stupidity of the user.
- 1 Wife must honor her husband and his parents like gods.
- 2 “One should protect cows. Merit arises through the protection of cows.” thus the Aryans think.
- 3 If both of us come to the city of Prayaga, then we will write a letter to the father.
- 4 Ones should offer oblation to the ancestors every month.
- 5 “Today both of you must go to the village.” thus two mothers speak to their sons.
- 6 Let the children rejoice with the cow"s milk.
- 7 “Let us cook the cow"s milk for the guest.” thus the seer spoke to his wife.
- 8 Parents should protect their daughter, brothers should protect their sister and sons should protect their mother.
- 9 If I study science then teachers will be pleased.
- 10 O sister, you must stay in the parents" house.
- 11 A person should not cross the river with both arms.
- 12 O children, honor your ancestors and love your brothers.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 80
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Predicate. Play upon words throughout the verse. Exercise XVI. z arnrf: I ihrfH Il M II -farTt ’TTriT ^^1 AI tWsT ygi fÎrr^fT I R 1 ^fT’r" I ? I f^T^r 3TRI i 8 i XTRTTRT ^rTfHfcl ATcT^t I Ml tH- Lesson XVI. XVII. 71 *SUH< MTcfTt ’TTH-- JMTg I « I HTwrer^ni rrî i q. i % i "io i ^nsnjli «T^f «T
* Predicate. Play upon words throughout the verse. Exercise XVI. z arnrf: I ihrfH Il M II -farTt ’TTriT ^^1 AI tWsT ygi fÎrr^fT I R 1 ^fT’r" I ? I f^T^r 3TRI i 8 i XTRTTRT ^rTfHfcl ATcT^t I Ml tH- Lesson XVI. XVII. 71 *SUH< MTcfTt ’TTH-- JMTg I « I HTwrer^ni rrî i q. i % i "io i ^nsnjli «T^f «T

Back: - 13 nahapānasya jāmātrārṣabhadattena bahūni gāvo grāmā vasūni ca brāhmaṇebhyo ’dīyanta.
- 14 svasṛbhyo mātū ratnāni yaccha. (or yaccheḥ).
- 15 sūto ’śvebhyo ghāsam āharatu mā ’śvān pīḑayatu.
- 16 pitur vasūnām adhiko bhāgo bhrātṝṇām jyeṣṭhāya dīyatām.
- 17 he putrāḥ, kāṣṭhaṃ jalaṃ ca gṛhaṃ nityam ānayateti pitur ājñābhavat.
- 18 gāvo vane carantu.
- 19 kṛṣṇāyā goḥ kṣīreṇa jīvatām. (or jīvetām)
- 20 ratho gobhyām uhyate.
- 21 ṛṣiḥ śvetayor gavor yugmena tuṣyati. (or modate)
- 22 hariś śivaśca rāmasya duhitarau svasārau pariṇayataḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 81
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 13. By Rsabhadatta, son-in-law of Nahapana, many cattle and villages and much money were given to the Brahmans. 14. Thou shalt give the mother’s jewels to the sisters (opt. or imv,). 15. Let the coachman bring (^5TT“I|) fodder for the horses ; let him not torment the horses. 16. Of the father’s property a greater part is to be given (imv.} to the eldest of the brothers. 17. “Children, bring wood and water into the house daily”; thus was the father’s command. 18. Let the cows graze in the forest. 19. Let both live on the milk (instr.} of the black cow. 20. The wagon is drawn by two steers. 21. The seer rejoices over the pair (instr.} of white steers. 22. Hari audCiva marry two sisters, the daughters of Rama.
13. By Rsabhadatta, son-in-law of Nahapana, many cattle and villages and much money were given to the Brahmans. 14. Thou shalt give the mother’s jewels to the sisters (opt. or imv,). 15. Let the coachman bring (^5TT“I|) fodder for the horses ; let him not torment the horses. 16. Of the father’s property a greater part is to be given (imv.} to the eldest of the brothers. 17. “Children, bring wood and water into the house daily”; thus was the father’s command. 18. Let the cows graze in the forest. 19. Let both live on the milk (instr.} of the black cow. 20. The wagon is drawn by two steers. 21. The seer rejoices over the pair (instr.} of white steers. 22. Hari audCiva marry two sisters, the daughters of Rama.

TextBack: Active | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | vadeyam | vadeva | vadema
Second | vadeḥ | vadetam | vadeta
Third | vadet | vadetām | vadeyuḥ
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 81
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 210. Verbs, a- conjugation. Present Optative Middle. The optative middle (and passive) of a-stems , formed as shown in the preceding lesson, is inflected as follows : Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. labheya labhevahi labhemahi 2 * MHWTM. labhethas labheyatham Idbhedhvam 3. labheta Idbheyatam labheran Similarly corayeya, samgacc7ieyay etc.
210. Verbs, a- conjugation. Present Optative Middle. The optative middle (and passive) of a-stems , formed as shown in the preceding lesson, is inflected as follows : Sing. Dual. Plural. 1. labheya labhevahi labhemahi 2 * MHWTM. labhethas labheyatham Idbhedhvam 3. labheta Idbheyatam labheran Similarly corayeya, samgacc7ieyay etc.

TextBack: Declension table of [Fem.] nau_1
Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | naus | nāvau | nāvas
Vocative | naus | nāvau | nāvas
Accusative | nāvam | nāvau | nāvas
Instrumental | nāvā | naubhyām | naubhis
Dative | nāve | naubhyām | naubhyas
Ablative | nāvas | naubhyām | naubhyas
Genitive | nāvas | nāvos | nāvām
Locative | nāvi | nāvos | nauṣu
Declension table of [Fem.] go
Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | gaus | gāvau | gāvas
Vocative | gaus | gāvau | gāvas
Accusative | gām | gāvau | gās
Instrumental | gavā | gobhyām | gobhis
Dative | gave | gobhyām | gobhyas
Ablative | gos | gobhyām | gobhyas
Genitive | gos | gavos | gavām
Locative | gavi | gavos | goṣu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 81
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 211. Declension. The stem Mt f., ‘ship, boat’, is entirely regular, taking throughout the normal endings, as given in § 90. Thus : MT^T, etc.; etc.; etc.
211. Declension. The stem Mt f., ‘ship, boat’, is entirely regular, taking throughout the normal endings, as given in § 90. Thus : MT^T, etc.; etc.; etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 82
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 212. The stems ending in long vowels (^TT, ^fl) fall into two well-marked classes: A. root-stems — mostly monosyllabic — and their compounds, with a comparatively small number of others inflected like them; B. derivative feminine stems in and with a few in inflected like and The stems of class A take the normal endings throughout, with optional exceptions in dat., abl.-gen., and loc. sing, fem., and with inserted before of the gen. pl. The simple words are as nouns with few exceptions fern.; as adjectives (rare), and in adjective compounds, they coincide in masc. and fem. forms. The declension of the simple words in and has been given (in §§ 189, 197); those in ^50" are so rare that it is not possible to make up a whole scheme of forms in actual use.
212. The stems ending in long vowels (^TT, ^fl) fall into two well-marked classes: A. root-stems — mostly monosyllabic — and their compounds, with a comparatively small number of others inflected like them; B. derivative feminine stems in and with a few in inflected like and The stems of class A take the normal endings throughout, with optional exceptions in dat., abl.-gen., and loc. sing, fem., and with inserted before of the gen. pl. The simple words are as nouns with few exceptions fern.; as adjectives (rare), and in adjective compounds, they coincide in masc. and fem. forms. The declension of the simple words in and has been given (in §§ 189, 197); those in ^50" are so rare that it is not possible to make up a whole scheme of forms in actual use.

Back: Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | viśvapāḥ | viśvapau | viśvapāḥ
Vocative | viśvapāḥ | viśvapau | viśvapāḥ
Accusative | viśvapām | viśvapau | viśvapāḥ
Instrumental | viśvapā | viśvapābhyām | viśvapābhiḥ
Dative | viśvape | viśvapābhyām | viśvapābhyaḥ
Ablative | viśvapaḥ | viśvapābhyām | viśvapābhyaḥ
Genitive | viśvapaḥ | viśvapoḥ | viśvapām
Locative | viśvapi | viśvapoḥ | viśvapāsu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 82
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 213. When any root in or or Is found as final member of a compound word, these root-finals are treated as follows: 1. Roots in lose that vowel before vowel-endings, except in the strong cases and in the acc. pl., which is like the nominative. Thus, m., f., ‘all-protecting’: Sing. Dual. n.v. -p^s -p*u A. -pam fq MI I. vi$vap-a vi^vap-os Plural. •pas n n etc.
213. When any root in or or Is found as final member of a compound word, these root-finals are treated as follows: 1. Roots in lose that vowel before vowel-endings, except in the strong cases and in the acc. pl., which is like the nominative. Thus, m., f., ‘all-protecting’: Sing. Dual. n.v. -p^s -p*u A. -pam fq MI I. vi$vap-a vi^vap-os Plural. •pas n n etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 82
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 214. 2. Roots in and change their final vowel, before vowel-endings, into and if but one consonant precede the final vowel * but if two or more consonants precede, the change is into and Thus, “>•> f-» ‘corn-buying’: norn.-voc. , acc. “* •> ‘street-sweeper’: nom. sing. acc*
214. 2. Roots in and change their final vowel, before vowel-endings, into and if but one consonant precede the final vowel * but if two or more consonants precede, the change is into and Thus, “>•> f-» ‘corn-buying’: norn.-voc. , acc. “* •> ‘street-sweeper’: nom. sing. acc*

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 83
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XVII. Verbs: + HfH (pratiksate) expect. 4- (abhindndati, poet. -te) rejoice in, greet with joy (**acc**.). 7^ (ramate) amuse oneself. 4- fatviramatt) cease from (**a6Z**.); cease. ■^n 4- (anutisthati) follow out, accomplish.
Vocabulary XVII. Verbs: + HfH (pratiksate) expect. 4- (abhindndati, poet. -te) rejoice in, greet with joy (**acc**.). 7^ (ramate) amuse oneself. 4- fatviramatt) cease from (**a6Z**.); cease. ■^n 4- (anutisthati) follow out, accomplish.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 83
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: n., garden. **f**., agriculture. n., life. **m**., command. TTpg^TTÎ n., cattle-raising. JTtf^rTm., domestic priest, chaplain. **n**., eating. **m**. , servant. d n. , death. f’T’W n., friend. n., battle. ^TfiSFST n., trade. fWfil **m**., rule; fate. JAJX; **m**., father-in-law. Adj.: f- °WT g°°d5 pleasant, dear; as n. subst,, fortune. f- °^FT, doubtful; unsteady.
Subst.: n., garden. **f**., agriculture. n., life. **m**., command. TTpg^TTÎ n., cattle-raising. JTtf^rTm., domestic priest, chaplain. **n**., eating. **m**. , servant. d n. , death. f’T’W n., friend. n., battle. ^TfiSFST n., trade. fWfil **m**., rule; fate. JAJX; **m**., father-in-law. Adj.: f- °WT g°°d5 pleasant, dear; as n. subst,, fortune. f- °^FT, doubtful; unsteady.

Back: - A person should not rejoice in death. A person should not rejoice with life.
- A person should only wait for the time, like a servant waiting for order.
- 1 Thieves shot the arrows at the brother.
- 2 If people obey the laws of the the Sruti and Smrtis then they will be praised by the holy man.
- 3 The Vaisyas should live by agriculture and trad or animal husbandry.
- 4 A person should not embark on an unstable boat.
- 5 If you die in the water of the Ganges river then you will receive paradise.
- 6 A son-in-law should respect his father-in-law, a daughter-in-law should respect her mother-in-law, and daughters and sons should respect their parents.
- 7 The ocean should not be crossed by the Brahmins by boat.
- 8 “May you not be defeated by the enemies.” thus the people speaks to their king.
- 9 May the two kings fight against their enemies.
- 10 There was a light in the ships. (The light took place in the ships.)
- 11 Both children should have fun in the garden.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 83
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XVII. ’TlfiT’r^cT WG!! I "^"err* 11 $ 11 urr’njg’Uai ^Twfn: i a i ^t: xrrgTr^M ®tt i ? i i 3 1 ^Tfvfvr f^r-
Exercise XVII. ’TlfiT’r^cT WG!! I "^"err* 11 $ 11 urr’njg’Uai ^Twfn: i a i ^t: xrrgTr^M ®tt i ? i i 3 1 ^Tfvfvr f^r-

Back: - 12 ghāso bhrātrā viśvapo nṛpater aśvebhya āhriyatām. (or āhriyeta - optative).
- 13 bhadrāṇī paśyata kīrtiṃ labhadhvam.
- 14 kṣatriyaiḥ saha nṛpo nāvā samudram atarat.
- 15 kutra mitrāṇi bhrātṛbhiḥ saṃgaccherann iti vada. (or vadeḥ - optative)
- 16 udyāne ramedhvaṃ phalānāṃ bhakṣaṇāt tu virameta.
- 17 duḥkhād viśvapoddhriyethāḥ.
- 18 adya nṛpasya putrau purohitenopanīyetām.  (opt. nīyeyātām)
- 19 Pitarāvabhinandetam. (pitarau abhinandetam)
- 20 yadyasatyaṃ vadeva, tadā nṛpeṇa daṇḑyevahi.
- 21 dhīraiḥ kṣatriyaiḥ śatrūñ jayeyam iti nṛpeṇeṣyate. (nṛpeṇa iṣyate)
- 22 dharmasya phalaṃ labhāmahai. (labhemahi - optative)
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 84
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 12. Let fodder be brought C^TT-^) (opt., imv.) by the brother for the horses of the all-protecting king. 13. May ye see good fortune (pl.); may ye acquire (
12. Let fodder be brought C^TT-^) (opt., imv.) by the brother for the horses of the all-protecting king. 13. May ye see good fortune (pl.); may ye acquire (

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 84
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 215. Causative. The chief points to be noticed in the formation of causative-stems have been given already (in Less. V11) ; * some additional ones follow. 216. Most roots in and add before the conjugation-sign; thus, from l^T; vnWSjfcf ; ÎT^fTi; from makes ^TT^fri ; ’sfTand ^T, sometimes etc., sometimes etc. OH, ‘drink’, makes m^’ETTrf (as though from ift). A few roots in and take the same with various irregularities ; thus, from
215. Causative. The chief points to be noticed in the formation of causative-stems have been given already (in Less. V11) ; * some additional ones follow. 216. Most roots in and add before the conjugation-sign; thus, from l^T; vnWSjfcf ; ÎT^fTi; from makes ^TT^fri ; ’sfTand ^T, sometimes etc., sometimes etc. OH, ‘drink’, makes m^’ETTrf (as though from ift). A few roots in and take the same with various irregularities ; thus, from

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2(8. Final vowels take vrddhi before thus, 1J, I d <4 fd ?
2(8. Final vowels take vrddhi before thus, 1J, I d <4 fd ?

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 219. Some verbs of causative meaning are by formation denominatives; thus 141<«1‘protect’, called causative to 2Tn»to 3ft; to ^ft; **MTd"qfW**, to
219. Some verbs of causative meaning are by formation denominatives; thus 141<«1‘protect’, called causative to 2Tn»to 3ft; to ^ft; **MTd"qfW**, to

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 220. For the passive of causatives, see Less. X.
220. For the passive of causatives, see Less. X.
176. Verbs of causative inflection, and denominatives in form their passive by adding to the causative or denominative stem after has been dropped; thus, ‘ is stolen ‘ is counted ’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 221. The causatives of intransitive verbs are transitive. The causatives of transitive verbs are construed sometimes (<z) with two accusatives, sometimes (b) with an acc. of the object and an instrumental of the agent. Thus, “ he causes the birds to eat the cakes” may be rendered either (a) : or (ft) ft|’ T3T°-
221. The causatives of intransitive verbs are transitive. The causatives of transitive verbs are construed sometimes (<z) with two accusatives, sometimes (b) with an acc. of the object and an instrumental of the agent. Thus, “ he causes the birds to eat the cakes” may be rendered either (a) : or (ft) ft|’ T3T°-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 222. Participles. The general participial endings are -^«d (weak form *or ^ie actlve, and ’’’STPT for the middle. But after a tense-stem in the active suffix is virtually one of the two being lost; and the middle suffix is (except ^5TT<T sometimes in causative forms). Thus, ^<q«dx bhavant, mana. etc. For the declension of the participles in «d see below. tuddnt. dzvyant, -q) cor ay ant; bhava Less XXIII.
222. Participles. The general participial endings are -^«d (weak form *or ^ie actlve, and ’’’STPT for the middle. But after a tense-stem in the active suffix is virtually one of the two being lost; and the middle suffix is (except ^5TT<T sometimes in causative forms). Thus, ^<q«dx bhavant, mana. etc. For the declension of the participles in «d see below. tuddnt. dzvyant, -q) cor ay ant; bhava Less XXIII.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 85
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 223. Pronoun of the First Person. The pronominal declension exhibits some striking peculiarities which are not easily explained. The pronoun of the first person is declined thus: Dual. Plural. Sing. N. A. HTH" ’TT I. TT’TT D. Ab. 44 cb G. 5T* T, «L. ’ft
223. Pronoun of the First Person. The pronominal declension exhibits some striking peculiarities which are not easily explained. The pronoun of the first person is declined thus: Dual. Plural. Sing. N. A. HTH" ’TT I. TT’TT D. Ab. 44 cb G. 5T* T, «L. ’ft

TextBack: - mā, me, nau, nas
- tvā, te, vām, vas
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 86
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 224. The forms HT, W, ^t, are enclitic, and are never used at the beginning of a sentence, or before the particles ITT, ^fT.
224. The forms HT, W, ^t, are enclitic, and are never used at the beginning of a sentence, or before the particles ITT, ^fT.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 86
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 225. In pronouns of the first and second persons the plural is often used for the singular. Pronouns (and other words as well) show in Sanskrit a curious tendency to agree in form with the predicate rather than with the subject to which they refer.
225. In pronouns of the first and second persons the plural is often used for the singular. Pronouns (and other words as well) show in Sanskrit a curious tendency to agree in form with the predicate rather than with the subject to which they refer.

TextBack: Caus. vardháyati, °te
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 86
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XVIII. Verbs, with causatives: eat; caus. (aydyati) make eat; give to eat. 4- study, read; caus. (a- dhyapdyati) teach. cîn caus. (kalpdyati,-te) make; ordain, appoint. in caus. (Janayati) beget. vr + in caus. (ajnapayati) command. give; caus. (dapayati) make give or pay. ^s^see ;in caus. (daiydyati)show, ivn 4- trfv, ’n caus. ( dhapayati) make put on, clothe in(fwo acc.). 1ft + lead away (caus. apa- nayayati). in caus. (jprathayati) spread, proclaim. die; caus. (marayati) kill, sacrifice; caus. (yajdyati) make to sacrifice; offer sacrifice for (acc. * ). * The priest who performs sacrifice for the benefit of another person is said to “make that person sacrifice”, as though the latter (who is called were celebrating the sacrifice for himself. in caus. (abhivadayati) greet. know; caus. (yedayati) inform (dat."). + fn in caus. inform (dat.). (vdrdhate) grow; caus. (**var- dhayati**, ~te) make grow; bring up. in caus. (vyathdyatV) torment, hear ; in caus. (yravayati) make hear, i. e. recite, proclaim (acc. of pers.f stand; in caus. (sthapayati) put, place; appoint; stop. + IT (jpratisthate) start off; in caus. (prasthapdyati) send.
Vocabulary XVIII. Verbs, with causatives: eat; caus. (aydyati) make eat; give to eat. 4- study, read; caus. (a- dhyapdyati) teach. cîn caus. (kalpdyati,-te) make; ordain, appoint. in caus. (Janayati) beget. vr + in caus. (ajnapayati) command. give; caus. (dapayati) make give or pay. ^s^see ;in caus. (daiydyati)show, ivn 4- trfv, ’n caus. ( dhapayati) make put on, clothe in(fwo acc.). 1ft + lead away (caus. apa- nayayati). in caus. (jprathayati) spread, proclaim. die; caus. (marayati) kill, sacrifice; caus. (yajdyati) make to sacrifice; offer sacrifice for (acc. * ). * The priest who performs sacrifice for the benefit of another person is said to “make that person sacrifice”, as though the latter (who is called were celebrating the sacrifice for himself. in caus. (abhivadayati) greet. know; caus. (yedayati) inform (dat."). + fn in caus. inform (dat.). (vdrdhate) grow; caus. (**var- dhayati**, ~te) make grow; bring up. in caus. (vyathdyatV) torment, hear ; in caus. (yravayati) make hear, i. e. recite, proclaim (acc. of pers.f stand; in caus. (sthapayati) put, place; appoint; stop. + IT (jpratisthate) start off; in caus. (prasthapdyati) send.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 87
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: n., nectar. "dB-id * 1 n., initiation, investiture. cfiT **m**., hand; trunk (of elephant); ray; toll, tax. di I Gd^ IH **ni**., nom. pr.^ a noted poet. ^rnft **f**., nom. pr., the city of Benares. TpJTm., quality ; excellent quality, excellence. **m**., nom. pr. (Rama’s father). **m**. , messenger, envoy. nM nom- pr., the city of Patna. **m**-> wish. n. , merit. fqfv **m**., Brahman (the deity). **m**., wolf. **m**., science, knowledge; esp. sacred knowledge, holy writ. Adj.: ^Tcft^T. f. °^T, new. f. °^TT, own, one’s own.
Subst.: n., nectar. "dB-id * 1 n., initiation, investiture. cfiT **m**., hand; trunk (of elephant); ray; toll, tax. di I Gd^ IH **ni**., nom. pr.^ a noted poet. ^rnft **f**., nom. pr., the city of Benares. TpJTm., quality ; excellent quality, excellence. **m**., nom. pr. (Rama’s father). **m**. , messenger, envoy. nM nom- pr., the city of Patna. **m**-> wish. n. , merit. fqfv **m**., Brahman (the deity). **m**., wolf. **m**., science, knowledge; esp. sacred knowledge, holy writ. Adj.: ^Tcft^T. f. °^T, new. f. °^TT, own, one’s own.

Back: 1 O driver, stop the chariot now.
2 As the god command. (As your majesty command)
3 King Dasaratha begot the beautiful sons.
4 Please let me hear the poem of Kalidasa.
5 The king should have the Vaisaya-castes pay their taxes.
6 People should have the children put on new clothes in the Upanayana rite.
7 The brothers sent us the city. (Brothers ordered us to go to the city.)
8 It was told to me that the sisters are coming.
9 The trees were knocked down by the force of the wind.
10 The warriors kill the enemies in the battle.
11 “May poets spread our excellences and make our glory increase.” thus the princes wish.
12 I live in the city of Prayaga, Rama stays in Kasi.
13 The text-book is composed by us. We let Rama write the book.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 87
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XVIII. i ^t^tt ^nxnr i q i u r ii I 3 I rtf^t ’tt i 8 i W-i m i qfvui-tr^j: ) $ i MnrCr i i ^TRr^rft-f<r rm^h i c | eR/ft ^trrîRT i < * i ^f^nrr 1 1 surras frfrT i q^ i n"^n’t frn’nfa tuj: Riwi fa^-fH i qq i ursiT s^nft ttWut u q? u
Exercise XVIII. i ^t^tt ^nxnr i q i u r ii I 3 I rtf^t ’tt i 8 i W-i m i qfvui-tr^j: ) $ i MnrCr i i ^TRr^rft-f<r rm^h i c | eR/ft ^trrîRT i < * i ^f^nrr 1 1 surras frfrT i q^ i n"^n’t frn’nfa tuj: Riwi fa^-fH i qq i ursiT s^nft ttWut u q? u

Back: - 14 mayā kaṭaḥ kāryate. (ahaṃ kaṭaṃ kārayāmi.)
- 15 mahyaṃ pustakāni darśaya.
- 16 bhrāhmaṇau āvāṃ adhyāpayetāṃ yajetāṃ ca.
- 17 nṛpo rājye karān akalpayat.
- 18 ahaṃ dāsaiḥ (dāsān) kṣetraṃ karṣayāmi.
- 19 mahyaṃ jalam annaṃ ca yaccha.
- 20 mad bālam apānāyayan.
- 21 nṛpāḥ pāṭaliputraṃ dūtān agamayan. (prāsthāpayan).
- 22 stenā asmākaṃ gā acorayan, vṛkāśca paśūn amārayan.
- 23 nṛpaḥ kaviṃ viṣṇoḥ strotram akāthayat.
- 24 vayaṃ manorathair asmākaṃ hṛdayāni vyathayāmaḥ.
- 25 śiṣyau gurum abhivādayataḥ
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 87
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The expression of possession, etc., on the part of pionouns 14. I cause a mat to be made (caus. pass.). 15. Show me (dat.) the books. 16. Let Brahmans teach us both and offer sacrifice for us. 17. The king determined (ordained) the taxes in his kingdom. 18. I have my field ploughed by slaves. 19. Give me water and food. 20. They had the boy taken (led) away from me (abl.). 21. The kings sent envoys to Pataliputra. 22. Thieves stole our (gen.) cows, and wolves killed our* flocks. 23. The king made the 78 Lesson XVIII. XIX. poet recite (use a eulogy of Visnu. 24. We torment our hearts with wishes. 25. Both scholars greet the teacher.
* The expression of possession, etc., on the part of pionouns 14. I cause a mat to be made (caus. pass.). 15. Show me (dat.) the books. 16. Let Brahmans teach us both and offer sacrifice for us. 17. The king determined (ordained) the taxes in his kingdom. 18. I have my field ploughed by slaves. 19. Give me water and food. 20. They had the boy taken (led) away from me (abl.). 21. The kings sent envoys to Pataliputra. 22. Thieves stole our (gen.) cows, and wolves killed our* flocks. 23. The king made the 78 Lesson XVIII. XIX. poet recite (use a eulogy of Visnu. 24. We torment our hearts with wishes. 25. Both scholars greet the teacher.
is made almost entirely by the genitive case, not by a derivative possessive adjective. But often the uncmphatic possessive pronoun of the English is omitted in Sanskrit.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 88
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Neuter: Sing. Dual. Plural. N. cl A. I. etc., as in the masculine.
Neuter: Sing. Dual. Plural. N. cl A. I. etc., as in the masculine.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 88
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XIX. 226. Pronoun of the Second Person. This pronoun (for which the natives assume and as bases) is declined thus. Singular. Dual. » 7 75 Plural.
Lesson XIX. 226. Pronoun of the Second Person. This pronoun (for which the natives assume and as bases) is declined thus. Singular. Dual. » 7 75 Plural.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 88
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 227. The forms are enclitics, subject to the same rules as ^T» W, etc. (§ 224).
227. The forms are enclitics, subject to the same rules as ^T» W, etc. (§ 224).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 88
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 228. The Pronoun of the Third Person (for which the natives assume as base — the base is really rf) is declined as follows (note nom. sing., m. and f.): Masculine N. Sing. Dual. eft A. cf 7) I. rTWTK D. ^| * 77 Ab. 77 G. cT^l L. 77 t? Plural. Feminine: Sing. Dual. Plural. ^TT cHR n 7? cTErr rTTfHK 77 77 77 y> errani: 77 HIM
228. The Pronoun of the Third Person (for which the natives assume as base — the base is really rf) is declined as follows (note nom. sing., m. and f.): Masculine N. Sing. Dual. eft A. cf 7) I. rTWTK D. ^| * 77 Ab. 77 G. cT^l L. 77 t? Plural. Feminine: Sing. Dual. Plural. ^TT cHR n 7? cTErr rTTfHK 77 77 77 y> errani: 77 HIM

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 89
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 229. The nom. sing. masc. and its compound lose their final before any consonant; before vowels, and at the end of a sentence, they follow the usual euphonic rules. Thus, H
229. The nom. sing. masc. and its compound lose their final before any consonant; before vowels, and at the end of a sentence, they follow the usual euphonic rules. Thus, H

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 89
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 230. The third personal pronoun is used oftenest as a weak or indefinite demonstrative, especially as antecedent to a relative; and often like the English “definite article.”
230. The third personal pronoun is used oftenest as a weak or indefinite demonstrative, especially as antecedent to a relative; and often like the English “definite article.”

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 89
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 231. Like H are declined: (a) XtcT, ‘this’, formed by prefixing to the forms of rf, throughout; thus, nom. sing. m. f. Itm, n. (£) the relative pronoun (and adj.) ‘which, who’; (c) comparatives and superlatives from pronominal roots, such as which (of the two)?’ and ‘which (of the many)?’So and ZfcW; ‘one of many’; ‘other’, with its comparative and ‘different’. — Yet other words are so inflected, but with ^4^ instead of in nom.-acc.-voc. sing, neut.: as, ‘ all ’; ‘ one’, in pl. ‘some’; f. °^ft (only sing, and ph), ‘both’.
231. Like H are declined: (a) XtcT, ‘this’, formed by prefixing to the forms of rf, throughout; thus, nom. sing. m. f. Itm, n. (£) the relative pronoun (and adj.) ‘which, who’; (c) comparatives and superlatives from pronominal roots, such as which (of the two)?’ and ‘which (of the many)?’So and ZfcW; ‘one of many’; ‘other’, with its comparative and ‘different’. — Yet other words are so inflected, but with ^4^ instead of in nom.-acc.-voc. sing, neut.: as, ‘ all ’; ‘ one’, in pl. ‘some’; f. °^ft (only sing, and ph), ‘both’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 89
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 232. The interrogative pronoun cfi (for which the Hindus give the base as follows precisely the declension of <f, except nom.-acc. sing. neut. ; nom. sing. m.
232. The interrogative pronoun cfi (for which the Hindus give the base as follows precisely the declension of <f, except nom.-acc. sing. neut. ; nom. sing. m.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 89
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 233. A number of words follow the pronominal declension in some of their significations, or optionally; but in other senses, or without known rule, lapse into the adjective inflection. Such are comparatives and superlatives from prepositional stems, as ‘lower’, ‘lowest’; TJX ‘chief’, ‘earlier’, Sj-rK ‘upper’, 80 Lesson XIX. ‘northern’, ‘southern’, etc. Occasional forms of the pronominal declension are met with from numeral adjectives, and from other words having somewhat of a numeral character, as ^5^1 ‘few’, ‘half’, etc.
233. A number of words follow the pronominal declension in some of their significations, or optionally; but in other senses, or without known rule, lapse into the adjective inflection. Such are comparatives and superlatives from prepositional stems, as ‘lower’, ‘lowest’; TJX ‘chief’, ‘earlier’, Sj-rK ‘upper’, 80 Lesson XIX. ‘northern’, ‘southern’, etc. Occasional forms of the pronominal declension are met with from numeral adjectives, and from other words having somewhat of a numeral character, as ^5^1 ‘few’, ‘half’, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 90
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 234. Peculiarities in the use of relative pronouns, etc. The Sanskrit often puts the relative clause before the antecedent clause, and inserts the substantive to which the relative refers into the same clause with the relative, instead of leaving it in the antecedent clause. In translating into Sanskrit, a relative clause is to be placed either before or after the whole antecedent clause; but not inserted into the antecedent clause, as is done in English. Thus, “the mountain which we saw yesterday is very high” would be in Sanskrit either: gif:, or: « Srfte g^r Kfr swm; but not h xrt<ft zj etc., according to the English idiom.
234. Peculiarities in the use of relative pronouns, etc. The Sanskrit often puts the relative clause before the antecedent clause, and inserts the substantive to which the relative refers into the same clause with the relative, instead of leaving it in the antecedent clause. In translating into Sanskrit, a relative clause is to be placed either before or after the whole antecedent clause; but not inserted into the antecedent clause, as is done in English. Thus, “the mountain which we saw yesterday is very high” would be in Sanskrit either: gif:, or: « Srfte g^r Kfr swm; but not h xrt<ft zj etc., according to the English idiom.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 90
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 235. The relative word may stand anywhere in its clause; thus, the gods whose chief is Qiva”. Sometimes relative or demonstrative adverbs are used as equivalents of certain case-forms of relative or demonstrative pronouns; thus,
235. The relative word may stand anywhere in its clause; thus, the gods whose chief is Qiva”. Sometimes relative or demonstrative adverbs are used as equivalents of certain case-forms of relative or demonstrative pronouns; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 90
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 236. The repetition of the relative gives an indefinite meaning: ‘whosoever, whatever’. The same result is much more commonly attained by adding to the relative the interrogative pronoun, with (or, less usually, without) one of the particles c(T. Sometimes the interrogative alone is used with these particles in a similar sense. Thus; “whatever this woman relates”; “whatever any one’s disposition may be”; R|<«|“he gives to some one or other”; “he takes from no one whatever”.
236. The repetition of the relative gives an indefinite meaning: ‘whosoever, whatever’. The same result is much more commonly attained by adding to the relative the interrogative pronoun, with (or, less usually, without) one of the particles c(T. Sometimes the interrogative alone is used with these particles in a similar sense. Thus; “whatever this woman relates”; “whatever any one’s disposition may be”; R|<«|“he gives to some one or other”; “he takes from no one whatever”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 91
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XIX. bi Vocabulary XIX. Verbs: sit; in cans, (asayatz) place, ixn drink; in cans, (paydyati} give to drink, water. 2in protect; in cans, (jpaldyatz) protect. ift rejoice; in cans, (jprznayatz) make rejoice, please. Kt fear; in cans, (bhzsdyate, bhaya- yate) terrify, frighten. say, speak; name; in cans. (vacayati} make (a written leaf) speak, i. e. read. (sahate) endure. (sadhayati) perform, acquire. kill; caus. (ghatayati) have killed. 357 call; in caus. (hvayayatz) have called.
Lesson XIX. bi Vocabulary XIX. Verbs: sit; in cans, (asayatz) place, ixn drink; in cans, (paydyati} give to drink, water. 2in protect; in cans, (jpaldyatz) protect. ift rejoice; in cans, (jprznayatz) make rejoice, please. Kt fear; in cans, (bhzsdyate, bhaya- yate) terrify, frighten. say, speak; name; in cans. (vacayati} make (a written leaf) speak, i. e. read. (sahate) endure. (sadhayati) perform, acquire. kill; caus. (ghatayati) have killed. 357 call; in caus. (hvayayatz) have called.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 91
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: m.,companion,helper. an.,business,coucern. Adj.: 四m,n.pr,agod. 习可other. ii回Tf,n.pr. other. f f.,gait;refuge. f图all(Vedic). 可um,n.,foot,leg 日奇all. 更石n,umbrella. gT飞sweet.. 飞n.,milk. Indecl.: €可if.,n.pr,Krsna"s mother. also,even. get f.,earth. f without (w.insir.or acc. as prefix to proper names, aften postpos.). has the meaning‘famous"、‘ho- norable’.
Subst.: m.,companion,helper. an.,business,coucern. Adj.: 四m,n.pr,agod. 习可other. ii回Tf,n.pr. other. f f.,gait;refuge. f图all(Vedic). 可um,n.,foot,leg 日奇all. 更石n,umbrella. gT飞sweet.. 飞n.,milk. Indecl.: €可if.,n.pr,Krsna"s mother. also,even. get f.,earth. f without (w.insir.or acc. as prefix to proper names, aften postpos.). has the meaning‘famous"、‘ho- norable’.

Back: Except from friend, any work will not be successful.
Whose gait is possible even with one foot?
1 The parents love me and you.
2 A person who protects the earth is called Parthiva.
3 Which goddess should we write an eulogy to ?
4 The teacher ordered to call all of you.
5 Do not kill the cows that give us milk to drink.
6 My suffering arises from you. (My suffering is caused by you.)
7 Good people receive heaven by their merits, but other people do not.
8 We don"t want this book, it must be given to someone.
9 None other than you is praised by us.
10 Lord Krsna was born of Devaki who was the wife of Vasudeva.
11 We came from the city with your father.
12 You all please your ancestors with oblations, we please them with water.
13 May all the gods protect you.
14 This poet acquired glory by poems of the others.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 91
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XIX. xrîiFfTfa * rfW: ii "o ii frjrTTV 1 q 1 h m-1 r 1 1 31 181 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 82 Lesson XIX. XX. TTT HI wh I M I ^fH I $ I HTtn: f^T 1 1 qt<^a‘^f^êTTH I <= I ^Tf«: I Q. I TR^»A^TR?n «!pl >S
Exercise XIX. xrîiFfTfa * rfW: ii "o ii frjrTTV 1 q 1 h m-1 r 1 1 31 181 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 82 Lesson XIX. XX. TTT HI wh I M I ^fH I $ I HTtn: f^T 1 1 qt<^a‘^f^êTTH I <= I ^Tf«: I Q. I TR^»A^TR?n «!pl >S
“Other than thou”. With as with comparatives, the ablative is used.

Back: 15 | yasyāṃ kausalyāyāṃ rāmo ’jāyata, tasyā bhartā daśaratha ucyate.
16 | tavodyogānmodate guruḥ.
17 | kasmādevaṃ vadasi.
18 | asmad anye na ke’pyetad duḥkhaṃ saheran.
19 | gurur asmāñ śrutiṃ smṛtīścādhyāpayati.
20 | ye nṛpā dharmamanu prajāḥ pālayanti, te sarve jayantu.
21 | sarveṣām eteṣāṃ vṛkṣāṇāṃ phalāni svādūni.
22 | yā nāryo bhartṝn sevante, tāsāṃ sarvāsāṃ kīrtir vardhatām.
23 | etasmin rājñe nṛpād daṇḍaḥ pāpān bhīṣyate.
24 | phalayoḥ katarad icchatha.
25 | mama pitā suvarṇaṃ mahyam adāpayat, gāḥ tubhyaṃ, na tu kimapy itarasmai bhrātre.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 92
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: ^41 A 15. The husband6 of that5 (ên.) Kausalya2 (loc.), of whom (loc. fem.) Rama3 was born4, is called8 Daâratha7. 16. 1 he teacher rejoices3 at thy1 diligence2 (att.J. 17. Why (^TcO speakest thou so? 18. Others than we could not endure this suffering. 19. The teacher teaches us holy-writ and the law-books. 20. May all8 those7 kings2 who1 protect6 their subjects3 according to4 (^J, postpos) the law3 (acc) be victorious9. 21. The fruits of all these trees are sweet. 22. May the glory of all women, who honor their husbands, increase (imv). 23. In this kingdom the king’s punishment terrifies the wicked. 24. Which of the two fruits do ye wish? 25. My father had gold given to me, cows to thee, to the other brother nothing. **
^41 A 15. The husband6 of that5 (ên.) Kausalya2 (loc.), of whom (loc. fem.) Rama3 was born4, is called8 Daâratha7. 16. 1 he teacher rejoices3 at thy1 diligence2 (att.J. 17. Why (^TcO speakest thou so? 18. Others than we could not endure this suffering. 19. The teacher teaches us holy-writ and the law-books. 20. May all8 those7 kings2 who1 protect6 their subjects3 according to4 (^J, postpos) the law3 (acc) be victorious9. 21. The fruits of all these trees are sweet. 22. May the glory of all women, who honor their husbands, increase (imv). 23. In this kingdom the king’s punishment terrifies the wicked. 24. Which of the two fruits do ye wish? 25. My father had gold given to me, cows to thee, to the other brother nothing. **
** “Makes us read caus.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 92
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: “Other than thou”. With as with comparatives, the ablative is used. ** “Makes us read caus.). 237. Declension of Stems in Consonants. All noun-stems in consonants may well be classed together, since the peculiarities shown by some concern only the stems themselves, and not the endings. Masculines and feminines of the same final are inflected precisely alike; and neuters are peculiar (as usually in fhe other Lesson XX. 83 declensions) only in the nom.-acc.-voc. of all numbers. But the majority of consonantal stems form a special feminine stem by adding (never to the weak form of the masculine.
“Other than thou”. With as with comparatives, the ablative is used. ** “Makes us read caus.). 237. Declension of Stems in Consonants. All noun-stems in consonants may well be classed together, since the peculiarities shown by some concern only the stems themselves, and not the endings. Masculines and feminines of the same final are inflected precisely alike; and neuters are peculiar (as usually in fhe other Lesson XX. 83 declensions) only in the nom.-acc.-voc. of all numbers. But the majority of consonantal stems form a special feminine stem by adding (never to the weak form of the masculine.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 238. Variations, as between stronger and weaker forms, are very general in consonantal steins: either of **strong and weak** stems, or of **strong, middle, and weakest**. The endings are throughout the normal ones (Introd., § 90).
238. Variations, as between stronger and weaker forms, are very general in consonantal steins: either of **strong and weak** stems, or of **strong, middle, and weakest**. The endings are throughout the normal ones (Introd., § 90).

Back: ETY :
k - ø - ṭ r - t n s - p m
ṅ - ø - ṇ  - l -
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 239. The general law concerning final consonants is as follows: 1. The more usual etymological finals are flT, sporadic are , TIT as finals. 2. In general, only **one** consonant, of whatever kind, is allowed to stand at the end of a word; if **two or more** would etymologically occur there, the last is dropped, and again the last, until **but one** remains. 3. Of the non-nasal mutes, only the first in each series, the **non-aspirate surd**, is allowed as final; the others — surd asp., and both sonants — are regularly converted into this , wherever they would etymologically occur. 4. A final **palatal**, or becomes either cfi, or (less often) but in a very few cases (where it represents original VJ) becomes
239. The general law concerning final consonants is as follows: 1. The more usual etymological finals are flT, sporadic are , TIT as finals. 2. In general, only **one** consonant, of whatever kind, is allowed to stand at the end of a word; if **two or more** would etymologically occur there, the last is dropped, and again the last, until **but one** remains. 3. Of the non-nasal mutes, only the first in each series, the **non-aspirate surd**, is allowed as final; the others — surd asp., and both sonants — are regularly converted into this , wherever they would etymologically occur. 4. A final **palatal**, or becomes either cfi, or (less often) but in a very few cases (where it represents original VJ) becomes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 240. According to 239. 2, the of the nom. sing., m. and f., is always lost; and irregularities of treatment of the stem-final, in this case, are not infrequent.
240. According to 239. 2, the of the nom. sing., m. and f., is always lost; and irregularities of treatment of the stem-final, in this case, are not infrequent.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 241. Before the pacta-endings, and a stem“final is treated as in external combination.
241. Before the pacta-endings, and a stem“final is treated as in external combination.

Back: thVp thVs > tVp tVs
tha, thl, thn
ttha, tthl, tthn
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 242. An aspirate mute is changed to its corresponding nonaspirate before another non-nasal mute or a sibilant; it stands unaltered only before a vowel or semivowel or nasal. Hence such a mute is doubled by prefixing its own corresponding non-aspirate.
242. An aspirate mute is changed to its corresponding nonaspirate before another non-nasal mute or a sibilant; it stands unaltered only before a vowel or semivowel or nasal. Hence such a mute is doubled by prefixing its own corresponding non-aspirate.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 93
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 243. Consonant-stems of one form in and . Be- Lesson XX. 84 fore suffixal Hj both stem-final becomes «and as stem-finals become W as Examples: JPvl * ., ‘wind’; G ‘misfortune’; n., ‘the world’. Sing. Plural. N.V. TT^rT | I 11 A. I i 11 i. i ^rnr^T i spnn u d. tt^ i 11 Ab. I I 11 G. „ r, «l. i i »i i 5PlfM 11 I ‘MmfgK i ’’‘iGtH. II i i ii i i spnnn u i i ii Dual. n.a.v. jnfTrt i ^rnr^t i u i. D.Ab. znrsnH i i 11 g.l. «<frK i i sT’nfr^ ii For the inserted in nom.-acc. pl. neuter, cf. phalani, ma- dhuni, etc.
243. Consonant-stems of one form in and . Be- Lesson XX. 84 fore suffixal Hj both stem-final becomes «and as stem-finals become W as Examples: JPvl * ., ‘wind’; G ‘misfortune’; n., ‘the world’. Sing. Plural. N.V. TT^rT | I 11 A. I i 11 i. i ^rnr^T i spnn u d. tt^ i 11 Ab. I I 11 G. „ r, «l. i i »i i 5PlfM 11 I ‘MmfgK i ’’‘iGtH. II i i ii i i spnnn u i i ii Dual. n.a.v. jnfTrt i ^rnr^t i u i. D.Ab. znrsnH i i 11 g.l. «<frK i i sT’nfr^ ii For the inserted in nom.-acc. pl. neuter, cf. phalani, ma- dhuni, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 94
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 244. In a few roots, when a final sonant aspirate (^, X? also representing^) loses its aspiration a< cording to §§ 239.3, 242, the initial sonant consonant (1^ , cJT or becomes aspirate; thus, , nom.-voc. sing.
244. In a few roots, when a final sonant aspirate (^, X? also representing^) loses its aspiration a< cording to §§ 239.3, 242, the initial sonant consonant (1^ , cJT or becomes aspirate; thus, , nom.-voc. sing.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 94
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 245. Agreement of adjectives. If the same adjective qualify two or more substantives, it will be used in their combined number; if the substantives are masculine and feminine, the adj. will be masc.; but in a combination of masc. or fem. subjects with neuter, the adjective will be neuter.
245. Agreement of adjectives. If the same adjective qualify two or more substantives, it will be used in their combined number; if the substantives are masculine and feminine, the adj. will be masc.; but in a combination of masc. or fem. subjects with neuter, the adjective will be neuter.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 95
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Verbs: Vocabulary XX. grow; cans, (rohayati or ro- payati) make rise or grow; plant. receive or take; give. Subst.: **f**., name of certain Vedic writings. wwtw **n**., sacred cord (worn by the three higher castes). lightning. TTcf **n**., a hundred, autumn ; year. nfwx **f**-» fasot-**f**., river. **m**., friend. **f**., contentment, happiness. **m**., supporter, maintainer. m., king; mountain. m., wind; as pl., n. pj\, the Storm-gods. **m**., wind. f^rer **m**., trust, confidence. Adj.: f. °**^TL** skilled, learned. **m**., **f**., **n**., threefold, triple, f- °**WI** , hard to find or reach ; difficult. f- O15n, devoted, true. Indecl.: also; even. behind (w. gen.). **m**., n. pr., a demon, Vrtra.
Verbs: Vocabulary XX. grow; cans, (rohayati or ro- payati) make rise or grow; plant. receive or take; give. Subst.: **f**., name of certain Vedic writings. wwtw **n**., sacred cord (worn by the three higher castes). lightning. TTcf **n**., a hundred, autumn ; year. nfwx **f**-» fasot-**f**., river. **m**., friend. **f**., contentment, happiness. **m**., supporter, maintainer. m., king; mountain. m., wind; as pl., n. pj\, the Storm-gods. **m**., wind. f^rer **m**., trust, confidence. Adj.: f. °**^TL** skilled, learned. **m**., **f**., **n**., threefold, triple, f- °**WI** , hard to find or reach ; difficult. f- O15n, devoted, true. Indecl.: also; even. behind (w. gen.). **m**., n. pr., a demon, Vrtra.
* If a nasal is ever taken in any of the strong forms of a root, it usually appears in the causal.

Back: 1. Those, who are devoted to their father, are the sons.
2. And he, who is the supporter, is the father.
3. He, in whom there is trust, is the friend.
4. She, in whom there is happiness, is the wife.
- 1 0 student, bring fagots from the forest.
- 2 The path of deliverance is shown in the Upanisads.
- 3 Friends should protect us in times of disaster.
- 4 Let the wicked in the whole earth be punished by the kings.
- 5 A person should worship fire with fagots.
- 6 May you conquer both worlds with merit.
- 7 May you live a hundred years.
- 8 We climbed to the top of the mountain but you stood below.
- 9 Some rivers meet with the ocean. Some meet with other rivers.
- 10 Lightning was seen at night.
- 11 True friends make us achieve happiness. (True friends make us happy.)
- 12 Women and children fulfilled their wish with tears.
- 13 Lotuses are seen in some rivers in autumn.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 95
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XX. W n ftnpfcfiT: H ftnTT hht i "rifM f^rn: hi htht fnffn: n 11 1 fsr^r hThvi < i q i ^rqf-^-wr i R i ^n
Exercise XX. W n ftnpfcfiT: H ftnTT hht i "rifM f^rn: hi htht fnffn: n 11 1 fsr^r hThvi < i q i ^rqf-^-wr i R i ^n

Back: - 14 indraḥ sahāyair marudbhiḥ saha vṛtram amārayat.
- 15 sahāyena vinā na ko’pi durlabhaṃ kāryaṃ sādhayet.
- 16 sarveṣu mārgeṣu cchāyāyai vṛkṣān rohayeyuḥ.
- 17 ye suhṛda āpadi bhaktās te trivṛtsu jagatsu durlabhāḥ.
- 18 dvijātīnāṃ mekhalopavītaṃ ca trivṛtī kriyetām.
- 19 agneḥ paścād etāṃ dṛṣadaṃ sthāpaya.
- 20 samudraḥ kavibhiḥ saritāṃ bhartocyate.
- 21 sarvāḥ prajā bhūbhṛdbhiḥ pālyantām. (pālyeran - optative)
- 22 eteṣu brāhmaṇeṣu kecid upaniṣatsu kuśalāḥ kecit smṛtiṣu.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 96
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 14. Indra, with the Maruts as his companions, killed Vrtra. 15. Without a companion no one can perform a difficult business. 16. One {express in pl.) should plant trees on all the roads, for the sake of the shade. 17. Those friends who are true in misfortune are hard to find in the three worlds. 18. The girdle and the sacred cord of Aryans are to be made threefold {neut. dual). 19. Put caus.) this stone behind the fire. 20. The ocean is called by the poets the husband of rivers. 21. All subjects must be protected {imv.) by their kings. 22. Some of these Brahmans are learned in the Upanisads, others in the law-books.
14. Indra, with the Maruts as his companions, killed Vrtra. 15. Without a companion no one can perform a difficult business. 16. One {express in pl.) should plant trees on all the roads, for the sake of the shade. 17. Those friends who are true in misfortune are hard to find in the three worlds. 18. The girdle and the sacred cord of Aryans are to be made threefold {neut. dual). 19. Put caus.) this stone behind the fire. 20. The ocean is called by the poets the husband of rivers. 21. All subjects must be protected {imv.) by their kings. 22. Some of these Brahmans are learned in the Upanisads, others in the law-books.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 96
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * In classical Sanskrit not many root-stems are used as independent substantives; but they are frequently employed, with adjective or (present) participial value, as final element of a compound word. 246. Declension of Consonant-stems, cont’d. Stems in palatals, etc. 1. Final of a stem reverts to the **original guttural** when it comes to stand as word-final, and before the jmcfo-endings, becoming cfi when final, and before and **^1** before V . 2. Final is oftenest treated exactly like — for cases of other treat- ment, see below. 3. In the roots Tc^TT » and ^pTTj the is treated in the same way. 4. The of becomes after cfi •87 Lesson XXI. thus, •’gr. E.g. f ‘speech, word’; f’’ ‘direction, point of the compass’: ‘ illness’; Sing. Pl ural. N.V. I | || A. I || I. I ^3TT | fi><m || L. cfTfW I | f^fTT II I ’vsra I II » ” ”I I II cn^ I I 11 Dual. cTT^rr i ^5ft i ii I I n I I f^"sfT^ II
* In classical Sanskrit not many root-stems are used as independent substantives; but they are frequently employed, with adjective or (present) participial value, as final element of a compound word. 246. Declension of Consonant-stems, cont’d. Stems in palatals, etc. 1. Final of a stem reverts to the **original guttural** when it comes to stand as word-final, and before the jmcfo-endings, becoming cfi when final, and before and **^1** before V . 2. Final is oftenest treated exactly like — for cases of other treat- ment, see below. 3. In the roots Tc^TT » and ^pTTj the is treated in the same way. 4. The of becomes after cfi •87 Lesson XXI. thus, •’gr. E.g. f ‘speech, word’; f’’ ‘direction, point of the compass’: ‘ illness’; Sing. Pl ural. N.V. I | || A. I || I. I ^3TT | fi><m || L. cfTfW I | f^fTT II I ’vsra I II » ” ”I I II cn^ I I 11 Dual. cTT^rr i ^5ft i ii I I n I I f^"sfT^ II

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 97
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 247. 1. Final 7T and TJ of a. stem regularly become the lingual mute or Z) before M and H, and when word-final. For exceptions, see § 246, 3. 2. The final gf of the root-stems TT3T, ‘ rule’, ^3f, ‘sacrifice’, and with others; and 3. the final | of a number of roots, are treated like 71 above. Thus, m., enemy ; ftp^ m. pl., ‘people’, the ‘ Vai
247. 1. Final 7T and TJ of a. stem regularly become the lingual mute or Z) before M and H, and when word-final. For exceptions, see § 246, 3. 2. The final gf of the root-stems TT3T, ‘ rule’, ^3f, ‘sacrifice’, and with others; and 3. the final | of a number of roots, are treated like 71 above. Thus, m., enemy ; ftp^ m. pl., ‘people’, the ‘ Vai

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 97
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 248. But m.,‘priest’, though containing the root gg Lesson XXI. makes etc.; and f., ‘garland’, though containing makes etc.
248. But m.,‘priest’, though containing the root gg Lesson XXI. makes etc.; and f., ‘garland’, though containing makes etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 98
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 249. 1. Nouns having the roots ‘ burn’, and ‘ milk’, ‘be hostile’, with others, as final element, and also (name of a certain metre), change the final into and Thus, ‘ wood -burning’, makes nom.-voc. sing. f., ‘granting wishes’, nom.-voc. sing. acc. loc. pl. ‘friend-betraying,’ nom.-voc.-sing. etc. 2. In words with ”5^, ‘bind,’ as final element, where |T represents original VL the becomes cf and c^; thus, f», ‘shoe, sandal,’ nom.-voc. sing. acc. > instr, du. loc. pl. O"5T?(J-
249. 1. Nouns having the roots ‘ burn’, and ‘ milk’, ‘be hostile’, with others, as final element, and also (name of a certain metre), change the final into and Thus, ‘ wood -burning’, makes nom.-voc. sing. f., ‘granting wishes’, nom.-voc. sing. acc. loc. pl. ‘friend-betraying,’ nom.-voc.-sing. etc. 2. In words with ”5^, ‘bind,’ as final element, where |T represents original VL the becomes cf and c^; thus, f», ‘shoe, sandal,’ nom.-voc. sing. acc. > instr, du. loc. pl. O"5T?(J-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 98
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXI. Yerbs: 可+了((utsrjdt)）let loose or in caus.(damdyati)tame; out;raise (the voice). compel. (parisvdjate")embrace. 豸厦(drihyati)be hostile;offend.意+可(prahdrat)strike out; in caus.(dhardyati)bear. smite. (bhdrati,-te)bear,support (lit. and fig.). Subst.: f.,look,glance;eye. m.pl.,n.pr.,a people infm.,enemy. India. 可ta四m.,tears. e可.，verse of the Rigveda;m gf向Em,bee. pl.,the Rigveda. n.,sweetness. n.,medicine. f,sickness,disease. i奇m,nom.pr. m.,great king,emperor. *and a few other roots,whose nasal is not coustant throughout their inflection,lose it in the present-system. Lesson XXI. 89 m.,vassal. 升可(i.e.f向-可)m.￡n m.,one who has taken a healthy,well. certain ceremonial bath. q,f.,wholesome (gen.). m.,private recitation (ofaf,f.,strongest. sacred texts). 百，f.oT(pas8.part.of百)， besieged,surrounded;suffused. Adj.: ff,f.(pass.part.of TT同，f.oT(pass.part.of )hated,detested. T),attacked,smitten. f.(part.of),old. 素图，f.oT,rich. f,f.sick,ill. m.f.n.,granting wishes; d,f.,provided with. as f.subst.,the Wonder-cow. Adv.: f同，f.orT,right hand;southern..iT可可，faTf句，f2Tf向，ever.
Vocabulary XXI. Yerbs: 可+了((utsrjdt)）let loose or in caus.(damdyati)tame; out;raise (the voice). compel. (parisvdjate")embrace. 豸厦(drihyati)be hostile;offend.意+可(prahdrat)strike out; in caus.(dhardyati)bear. smite. (bhdrati,-te)bear,support (lit. and fig.). Subst.: f.,look,glance;eye. m.pl.,n.pr.,a people infm.,enemy. India. 可ta四m.,tears. e可.，verse of the Rigveda;m gf向Em,bee. pl.,the Rigveda. n.,sweetness. n.,medicine. f,sickness,disease. i奇m,nom.pr. m.,great king,emperor. *and a few other roots,whose nasal is not coustant throughout their inflection,lose it in the present-system. Lesson XXI. 89 m.,vassal. 升可(i.e.f向-可)m.￡n m.,one who has taken a healthy,well. certain ceremonial bath. q,f.,wholesome (gen.). m.,private recitation (ofaf,f.,strongest. sacred texts). 百，f.oT(pas8.part.of百)， besieged,surrounded;suffused. Adj.: ff,f.(pass.part.of TT同，f.oT(pass.part.of )hated,detested. T),attacked,smitten. f.(part.of),old. 素图，f.oT,rich. f,f.sick,ill. m.f.n.,granting wishes; d,f.,provided with. as f.subst.,the Wonder-cow. Adv.: f同，f.orT,right hand;southern..iT可可，faTf句，f2Tf向，ever.

Back: O Kaunteya, you should support the poor man.
Do not give money to the rich.
Medicine is useful for the sick.
What is the use of medicine to the healthy person.
- 1 Wind blows from all directions.
- 2 The kingdom even of the great king was destroyed by enemies.
- 3 Oh Kalidasa, sweetness is in your speeches.
- 4 When the directions are burning, at that time one should not teach the students.
- 5 The farther looked at his son with the eyes full of tears and embraced him.
- 6 The priests" speech is a wish-granting one. That speech fulfils all wishes of people.
- 7 The enemies were seen in all directions.
- 8 The ascetic should not raise his voice.
- 9 The friend-betrayer is hated by all men.
- 10 The students provided with garlands and shoes should not approach their teacher.
- 11 The people who are threatened by disease will die.
- 12 Krsna was the great king of the Andhra people in the southern direction.
- 13 The boy was stung by bees.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 99
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXI. X x»rrsfTT^n"iT’THT I $ I I "O I i i i o. i futsjT wrqfH"giTi i w i ^fTHvr^n’rn i qq i f^fTT ^>wr "S’wnsrt ^rerr^re<( i qq i ^t-*fr i^^TcT u q$ II
Exercise XXI. X x»rrsfTT^n"iT’THT I $ I I "O I i i i o. i futsjT wrqfH"giTi i w i ^fTHvr^n’rn i qq i f^fTT ^>wr "S’wnsrt ^rerr^re<( i qq i ^t-*fr i^^TcT u q$ II
* (interrog.), with some other words expressing use or need, takes with it an instrumental of what is used or needed, and a genitive of the user. So here: ‘6 of what use to a well man are medicines”?

Back: - 14 svādhyāye parivrāḍ vācam utsṛjet. (utsṛjatu)
- 15 ṛtvijāṃ ya ṛgvedaṃ paṭhati, sa hotocyate.
- 16 snātaka upānahau srajaṃ chattraṃ ca dhārayet.
- 17 mama suhṛdāṃ rāmo baliṣṭha ity avadad rāvaṇaḥ.
- 18 samrāṭ sāmantān damayatu sarvāsyāṃ bhuvi prajāḥ pālayatu.
- 19 ṛgveda uṣṇig dṛśyate.
- 20 pitur dṛk mayy apatat.
- 21 mitradhrukṣu vibhīṣaṇo gaṇyate.
- 22 ṛsir ṛgbhir indrāṇīṃ śamsati.
- 23 samrāḍ asinārīn prāharat.
- 24 raṇe kṛṣṇo dviḍbhir amāryata.
- 25 asmākaṃ dviṣo rugbhiḥ pīḍyantām iti kopād brāhmaṇo ’vadat.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 99
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * (interrog.), with some other words expressing use or need, takes with it an instrumental of what is used or needed, and a genitive of the user. So here: ‘6 of what use to a well man are medicines”? 14. In the private recitation of the Veda an ascetic must 90 Lesson XXI. XXII. raise (opt. or imv.) his voice. 15. That one among the priests is called hotr, who recites the Rigveda. 16. A snataka must wear shoes and a garland, and carry an umbrella. 17. “Among my friends Rama is the strongest”: thus spoke Ravana. 18. Let an emperor keep his vassals in check caws.), and protect (in caus.) the people in all the earth. 19. In the Rigveda occurs pass.) the Usnih. 20. The father’s glance fell upon me (loc.). 21. Among the betrayers - of-friends is named pass.) Vibhisana. 22. The seer praises Indrani with verses of the Rigveda. 23. The emperor smote his enemies (acc., dat., or loc.) with the sword. 24. In the battle Krsna was killed by his enemies. 25. “ May our enemies be tormented by diseases”: thus spoke the Brahman in anger (abl.).
* (interrog.), with some other words expressing use or need, takes with it an instrumental of what is used or needed, and a genitive of the user. So here: ‘6 of what use to a well man are medicines”? 14. In the private recitation of the Veda an ascetic must 90 Lesson XXI. XXII. raise (opt. or imv.) his voice. 15. That one among the priests is called hotr, who recites the Rigveda. 16. A snataka must wear shoes and a garland, and carry an umbrella. 17. “Among my friends Rama is the strongest”: thus spoke Ravana. 18. Let an emperor keep his vassals in check caws.), and protect (in caus.) the people in all the earth. 19. In the Rigveda occurs pass.) the Usnih. 20. The father’s glance fell upon me (loc.). 21. Among the betrayers - of-friends is named pass.) Vibhisana. 22. The seer praises Indrani with verses of the Rigveda. 23. The emperor smote his enemies (acc., dat., or loc.) with the sword. 24. In the battle Krsna was killed by his enemies. 25. “ May our enemies be tormented by diseases”: thus spoke the Brahman in anger (abl.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 100
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 250. Declension of Stems in ’J. The stems in and lengthen the vowel before consonant-endings, and in nom.-sing., and the of the nom. is lost. In the nom.-sing, the final then becomes (or visarga) under conditions requiring a surd as final (see § 95, 116). Thus, f-, ‘voice’; Ji; f., ‘city’. Singular N.V. i ht ii A. filTK I JTK II I. f’TTT I JTT II L. firfT I II Dual. I II i yCrrc. u Plural. I W II T> T> i 3^
250. Declension of Stems in ’J. The stems in and lengthen the vowel before consonant-endings, and in nom.-sing., and the of the nom. is lost. In the nom.-sing, the final then becomes (or visarga) under conditions requiring a surd as final (see § 95, 116). Thus, f-, ‘voice’; Ji; f., ‘city’. Singular N.V. i ht ii A. filTK I JTK II I. f’TTT I JTT II L. firfT I II Dual. I II i yCrrc. u Plural. I W II T> T> i 3^

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 100
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 251. Stems in and neut. only; [and in and the corresponding feminine is made These are masc. by adding thus, * They lose their final before consonant-endings; * Almost any noun in may form a possessive derivative with .Lesson XXII. 91 and also in the nom. sing., where the masc. lengthens the in Thus, vfM’l ‘rich’. N. A. I. V. compensation. Masculine. Neuter. Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. vfW Dual. Plural. n as in the J5 masculine [~ * 1
251. Stems in and neut. only; [and in and the corresponding feminine is made These are masc. by adding thus, * They lose their final before consonant-endings; * Almost any noun in may form a possessive derivative with .Lesson XXII. 91 and also in the nom. sing., where the masc. lengthens the in Thus, vfM’l ‘rich’. N. A. I. V. compensation. Masculine. Neuter. Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. vfW Dual. Plural. n as in the J5 masculine [~ * 1
the suffix VU thus’ from n’5 <strength\ ‘having strength, strong’. Stems in and are very rare.

Back: ayas, uras, cetas, tapas, tamas, tejas, payas, yaśas, vacas, vayas, śiras, āyus
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 101
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 252. Derivative steins in The stems of this division are mostly neuter; but there are a few masculines and feminines. Their inflection is nearly regular (for before see § 241; for the loc. pl., p. 27, bottom of page). Masc. [and fem.] stems in lengthen the in nom. sing.; and the nom.-acc. pl. neut. also lengthen or or before the inserted nasal (anusvara). Thus, n., ‘mind’; n-> oblation , n., ‘bow’. Singular. Dual. N.A.V. Tpret I I II I I II i. i i n i i n l. i i wmTW n i i ii Plural. n.a. TFfi-ftr i i ii C\ i. i i u l. ’nrw i i ii or | or I or II
252. Derivative steins in The stems of this division are mostly neuter; but there are a few masculines and feminines. Their inflection is nearly regular (for before see § 241; for the loc. pl., p. 27, bottom of page). Masc. [and fem.] stems in lengthen the in nom. sing.; and the nom.-acc. pl. neut. also lengthen or or before the inserted nasal (anusvara). Thus, n., ‘mind’; n-> oblation , n., ‘bow’. Singular. Dual. N.A.V. Tpret I I II I I II i. i i n i i n l. i i wmTW n i i ii Plural. n.a. TFfi-ftr i i ii C\ i. i i u l. ’nrw i i ii or | or I or II

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 101
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 253. m. (name of certain mythical characters): nom. sing acc- instr- 15 voc-nom.-acc. pl.
253. m. (name of certain mythical characters): nom. sing acc- instr- 15 voc-nom.-acc. pl.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 102
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 254. Adjective compounds having nouns of this class as final member are very common. Thus, ‘favorably-minded.’Singular. m. f. n. N. ^<1141 A. Dual. m. f. n. long-lived ’: Singular. Dual. o-gTft •n netc. Plural. m. f. n. t> Plural. y> netc.
254. Adjective compounds having nouns of this class as final member are very common. Thus, ‘favorably-minded.’Singular. m. f. n. N. ^<1141 A. Dual. m. f. n. long-lived ’: Singular. Dual. o-gTft •n netc. Plural. m. f. n. t> Plural. y> netc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 102
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Verb: Vocabulary XXII. ; but often pass.: **sajjate** for **sajijdte**) hang on, be fastened on (as thoughts — w. **loc**.). Subst.: 4l m f-i heavenly nymph, "ddlft n- Pr--> an A psaras, Ur-vaQi. m., king. f., voice; song. n > eye. m., moon. m., spy. WT f., bowstring. n., light; star; heavenly body. cf^TRI m., pond. f., door, gate. n., bow. f-5 pipe, conduit. n., milk. HT f., city. M m-> n- PT") Pururavas. UTftlPL m-> (iiving) creature. m., n., pr., India. w., mind. minister (of state). n* i sacrificial formula, text, n., glory, fame. n]«, merchant. n., age. f., flower.
Verb: Vocabulary XXII. ; but often pass.: **sajjate** for **sajijdte**) hang on, be fastened on (as thoughts — w. **loc**.). Subst.: 4l m f-i heavenly nymph, "ddlft n- Pr--> an A psaras, Ur-vaQi. m., king. f., voice; song. n > eye. m., moon. m., spy. WT f., bowstring. n., light; star; heavenly body. cf^TRI m., pond. f., door, gate. n., bow. f-5 pipe, conduit. n., milk. HT f., city. M m-> n- PT") Pururavas. UTftlPL m-> (iiving) creature. m., n., pr., India. w., mind. minister (of state). n* i sacrificial formula, text, n., glory, fame. n]«, merchant. n., age. f., flower.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 103
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: n* 5 place, spot, locality; stead. id., possessor, lord. n., oblation. asceticism ; as m. subst., ascetic * courageous. jrih, f- °^n, first. 3TW, f. °^JT (part, of jp, dead, fallen. Adj.:f. °^rr (part, of qrq drawn, bent (as a bow). suffering, doing acts of f^TH, f. °^n (part, of standing. Indecl.: to be sure, in sooth.
n* 5 place, spot, locality; stead. id., possessor, lord. n., oblation. asceticism ; as m. subst., ascetic * courageous. jrih, f- °^n, first. 3TW, f. °^JT (part, of jp, dead, fallen. Adj.:f. °^rr (part, of qrq drawn, bent (as a bow). suffering, doing acts of f^TH, f. °^n (part, of standing. Indecl.: to be sure, in sooth.

Back: The cows see through smell.
Certainly, the Aryans see through the Vedas.
The kings see through his spies.
The people see through their eyes.
1 Warriors shoot arrows at the enemies with the bow drawn up to (their) ear.
2 The sun and moon are the heavenly bodies (stars) of the world.
3 The rich merchant should have his money given to the ascetics standing at the door.
4 In the sacrifices those priests, who recite the sacrificial formulas, are called Adhvaryus.
5 Pururavas, the emperor of the whole world married to Urvasi, the heavenly nymph, and a son was bom of her.
6 Bees are in the place of the string at the cupid"s bow and the flowers are in the place of the arrows.
7 The minds of creatures cling to (their) life.
8 The king ordered water to be brought to the city from the lake by the pipe.
9 Ministers should not betray their master at any time.
10 Parents let their children drink the milk of that cow.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 103
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXII. m"q: wPh wt^rf W f^n: i xnsrf’fi fWfHTrrg^^Tf»Tcr^ ^rr u qo n si’nrr i ? i I 3 I ^TZfnT H ^3^T-i 8 i ap: ^renz -h i sTsrRnr i q i vgf"i wm: ^rnt irrnsn WPt ^+<’1«r* s1BfnT | $ I TTTWdT ^’fad | "S | ijfx
Exercise XXII. m"q: wPh wt^rf W f^n: i xnsrf’fi fWfHTrrg^^Tf»Tcr^ ^rr u qo n si’nrr i ? i I 3 I ^TZfnT H ^3^T-i 8 i ap: ^renz -h i sTsrRnr i q i vgf"i wm: ^rnt irrnsn WPt ^+<’1«r* s1BfnT | $ I TTTWdT ^’fad | "S | ijfx

Back: - 11 hares stutaye giram utsṛjata.
- 12 bhāratakhaṇḍasya pūrṣu dhanino vaṇijas tejasvinaś ca kṣatriyā vasanti.
- 13 kālidāsena purūravasas stotram agīyata.
- 14 mama mantry āhūyatām iti kṣitipa ājñāpayat.
- 15 tapasvināṃ manāṃsi śriyāṃ na sajeyuḥ.
- 16 rātrau candramāḥ sarvebhyaḥ prāṇibhyo jyotir yacchati.
- 17 devān sumanobhiḥ phalaiḥ payasā ca yajeta, na prāṇibhiḥ.
- 18 apsaraso raṇe mṛtān kṣatriyān svargaṃ nayanti.
- 19 bhrātṛṣu śivo vayasā jyeṣṭho, na vidyayā.
- 20 devā havirbhir vartante.
- 21 vaṇik śriyam icchati, kṣatriyo yaśo, munir muktim.
- 22 vadhvāś cakṣuṣī bāṣpai ruddhe.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 103
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 11. Raise ye the voice in praise (dat.) of Hari. 12. In the cities of India dwell rich merchants and courageous warriors. 13. The praise of Pururavas was sung by Kalidasa. 14. The king gave orders (^T-^JT cans.") to have his minister called (use or. recta). 15. The minds of ascetics must not dwell (H^ ) on riches (^ft“, loc. sing.). 16. At night the moon gives light to all creatures. 17. One should sacrifice to the gods (cf. in Voc. I) flowers, fruits, and milk, not living creatures. 18. The Apsarases lead into Heaven warriors fallen in battle. 19. In age (instr.), not in knowledge, 94 Lesson XXII. XXIII. Qiva is the eldest among his brothers (loc., gen."). 20. The gods live by the oblation. 21. A merchant wishes wealth Oft), a warrior fame, an ascetic deliverance. 22. The woman’s eyes are suffused with tears.
11. Raise ye the voice in praise (dat.) of Hari. 12. In the cities of India dwell rich merchants and courageous warriors. 13. The praise of Pururavas was sung by Kalidasa. 14. The king gave orders (^T-^JT cans.") to have his minister called (use or. recta). 15. The minds of ascetics must not dwell (H^ ) on riches (^ft“, loc. sing.). 16. At night the moon gives light to all creatures. 17. One should sacrifice to the gods (cf. in Voc. I) flowers, fruits, and milk, not living creatures. 18. The Apsarases lead into Heaven warriors fallen in battle. 19. In age (instr.), not in knowledge, 94 Lesson XXII. XXIII. Qiva is the eldest among his brothers (loc., gen."). 20. The gods live by the oblation. 21. A merchant wishes wealth Oft), a warrior fame, an ascetic deliverance. 22. The woman’s eyes are suffused with tears.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 104
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 255. Declension. Comparative Adjectives. Comparative adjectives of primary formation have a double form of stem for masculine and neuter: a stronger in (usually in tbe strong cases, and a weaker in (usually , there being no distinction of middle and weakest cases. The voc. sing. masc. ends in The feminine-stem is made with from the weak stem-form. Thus, ‘better’: Masculine. Neuter. Dual. Dual. Plural. Sing. Plural. Sing. like the i. v. masculine. Fem. stem declined like
255. Declension. Comparative Adjectives. Comparative adjectives of primary formation have a double form of stem for masculine and neuter: a stronger in (usually in tbe strong cases, and a weaker in (usually , there being no distinction of middle and weakest cases. The voc. sing. masc. ends in The feminine-stem is made with from the weak stem-form. Thus, ‘better’: Masculine. Neuter. Dual. Dual. Plural. Sing. Plural. Sing. like the i. v. masculine. Fem. stem declined like

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 104
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 256. Stems in (or fall into two divisions: A. those made with the suffix (^), being, with feW excePtlons> actlve participles, present and future; and B. those made with the pos sessive suffixes H(
256. Stems in (or fall into two divisions: A. those made with the suffix (^), being, with feW excePtlons> actlve participles, present and future; and B. those made with the pos sessive suffixes H(

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 104
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 257. A. Participles in (or ^<0 S’ m’’ n ’ * * ‘living. ’Lesson XXIII. 95 Masculine. Sing. Dual. Neuter. Dual. Plural. N.V. A. „Plural. Sing. as in masculine.
257. A. Participles in (or ^<0 S’ m’’ n ’ * * ‘living. ’Lesson XXIII. 95 Masculine. Sing. Dual. Neuter. Dual. Plural. N.V. A. „Plural. Sing. as in masculine.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 105
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 258 The strong form of these participles is obtained , mechanically, by cutting off the final from the 3rd. pl. pres, (or fut.) ind. act.; thus , gives strong form of pres. act. part. Zprf , weak ; frlB"fnT, and — * 1^4 , •TgprT and ’Sfgjrf ; — and (fut.), and
258 The strong form of these participles is obtained , mechanically, by cutting off the final from the 3rd. pl. pres, (or fut.) ind. act.; thus , gives strong form of pres. act. part. Zprf , weak ; frlB"fnT, and — * 1^4 , •TgprT and ’Sfgjrf ; — and (fut.), and

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 105
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 259. But those verbs which in the 3rd. pl. act. lose the of the usual fifT (as e. g. the verbs following the reduplicating class in the present system), lose it also in the present participle, and have no distinction of strong and weak stem. Thus, from j/^T, 3rd pl. pres. ind. act. part, (only stem - form) nom.-voc. sing. masc. , acc. > nom.-voc.-acc. du. eft, pl- nom.-voc.-acc. sing. neut. du. pl- ^JS£f?T- *
259. But those verbs which in the 3rd. pl. act. lose the of the usual fifT (as e. g. the verbs following the reduplicating class in the present system), lose it also in the present participle, and have no distinction of strong and weak stem. Thus, from j/^T, 3rd pl. pres. ind. act. part, (only stem - form) nom.-voc. sing. masc. , acc. > nom.-voc.-acc. du. eft, pl- nom.-voc.-acc. sing. neut. du. pl- ^JS£f?T- *
* The grammarians, however, allow these verbs to insert the in the nom.-voc.-acc. pl. neuter of the present participle.

TextBack: 1. Present Participles:
• Present participles of a-class, ya-class, and causative verbs must include the -n- in the nominative, vocative, and accusative dual neuter forms.
• Present participles of the á-class and root-class (when the root ends in ā) have the option to include or omit the -n- in these dual forms.
2. Future Participles:
• All future participles, regardless of class, may either include or omit the -n- in the nominative, vocative, and accusative dual neuter forms.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 105
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 260.Only the present participles of verbs of the a-class,the ya-class,and causatives,invariably insert in nom.-voc.-acc. du. neut.Present participles of the d-class,of the root-class when the root ends in and all future participles,may either take or reject it;thus,neut.-sing.fa,du.f orfata;af (fut.),du.iff网升orf;可T(pres.part.from,‘go), du.a or a.Participles of all other verbs,and all other stems in leave out the in the du.neut.;thus,( eat",root-class),du.
260.Only the present participles of verbs of the a-class,the ya-class,and causatives,invariably insert in nom.-voc.-acc. du. neut.Present participles of the d-class,of the root-class when the root ends in and all future participles,may either take or reject it;thus,neut.-sing.fa,du.f orfata;af (fut.),du.iff网升orf;可T(pres.part.from,‘go), du.a or a.Participles of all other verbs,and all other stems in leave out the in the du.neut.;thus,( eat",root-class),du.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 105
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The grammarians, however, allow these verbs to insert the in the nom.-voc.-acc. pl. neuter of the present participle. 261. The adj. ‘great’, takes in strong cases the stem- 96 Lesson XXIII. form : nom.-sing. masc. (8ee § 239, 2), acc. ^1^1 voc. ; du- neut. lift, pl- Otherwise the inflection is like that of participles.
* The grammarians, however, allow these verbs to insert the in the nom.-voc.-acc. pl. neuter of the present participle. 261. The adj. ‘great’, takes in strong cases the stem- 96 Lesson XXIII. form : nom.-sing. masc. (8ee § 239, 2), acc. ^1^1 voc. ; du- neut. lift, pl- Otherwise the inflection is like that of participles.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 106
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 262. The feminine of participles and adjectives in ^<rf (or is always made with and the form is always identical with the nom. dual neuter.
262. The feminine of participles and adjectives in ^<rf (or is always made with and the form is always identical with the nom. dual neuter.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 106
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXIII. Verbs: (nindati) blame. V3T^(r4/a^e) shine; rule. -r (apasdratT) go away; in caus. (apasarayatT) drive away. Nouns (subst. and adj.): m., sun. (comp.) very honorable, (pr. part, of ^T) giving. bright, glistening; (act.) illuminating. f- become (past. pass, part, of 3J); as neut. subst., being, creature. calf. better, best; as neut. subst., salvation. (neut. being, existing; as masc. subst., good man; as fem. faithful wife. * Adv.: to-morrow. f? surely, indeed.
Vocabulary XXIII. Verbs: (nindati) blame. V3T^(r4/a^e) shine; rule. -r (apasdratT) go away; in caus. (apasarayatT) drive away. Nouns (subst. and adj.): m., sun. (comp.) very honorable, (pr. part, of ^T) giving. bright, glistening; (act.) illuminating. f- become (past. pass, part, of 3J); as neut. subst., being, creature. calf. better, best; as neut. subst., salvation. (neut. being, existing; as masc. subst., good man; as fem. faithful wife. * Adv.: to-morrow. f? surely, indeed.
* Especially a widow who immolates herself on the funeralpile of her husband; whence Anglo-Indian suttee.

Back: - The other qualities of the poor, though they exit, do not appear.
- The wealth of beings made their qualities appear like the sun.
- 1 The disciple should stand after the teacher who is standing, should walk after the teacher who is walking, should run after the teacher who is running.
- 2 One should respect the honorable ones for salvation.
- 3 Rich people who give money to the ascetics will be praised.
- 4 A person who neglects a loving wife is reprimanded.
- 5 Parents who see the faces of their living children will rejoice.
- 6 Of the two brothers, Rama is the most respected by honor.
- 7 The wealth of those merchants is great.
- 8 You should not be angry with the one who is angry.
- 9 I saw the maidens throwing grain to the birds that were flying in the garden.
- 10 When parents are still alive, brothers and sisters should not own their property.
- 11 You should not drive out a calf that is sucking its mother"s milk.
- 12 Among the teachers, father, teacher and mother are highly respected.
- 13 When you live, we all live with happiness.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 106
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXIII. ^5frr sfq** ft ’tutt: i v * Hcrnri u n ’retire: (acc. pi.) i i * Especially a widow who immolates herself on the funeralpile of her husband; whence Anglo-Indian suttee. ** “Even though they exist”. *** in composition often conveys the idea of imitation. Lesson XXIII. XXIV. 97 I 3 i ht4t i 8 I ^tern: 3^^ 7^ vînfr finrrt g^nr: 1 m i *ttwT (gen. du.) xt#i ’T"O- ^tpl 1 $ 1 vtttt ^fnniT v^nfsi 1 1 m gnzjH 1 1 TTtrgrl fW<5rwrr vro i Q. i ^rft^T^HT^Tfn:: ^rttt^ rratMî i<rf* nrr * fWg- 1 ^° 1 JTIV^TTT^ I 9«» I ’pSg fUdl<( * ?T HTrTT ’TTt- VTH: 1 O(R I cifÎ ^dfcT sft^TJT: 11 <1$ 11
Exercise XXIII. ^5frr sfq** ft ’tutt: i v * Hcrnri u n ’retire: (acc. pi.) i i * Especially a widow who immolates herself on the funeralpile of her husband; whence Anglo-Indian suttee. ** “Even though they exist”. *** in composition often conveys the idea of imitation. Lesson XXIII. XXIV. 97 I 3 i ht4t i 8 I ^tern: 3^^ 7^ vînfr finrrt g^nr: 1 m i *ttwT (gen. du.) xt#i ’T"O- ^tpl 1 $ 1 vtttt ^fnniT v^nfsi 1 1 m gnzjH 1 1 TTtrgrl fW<5rwrr vro i Q. i ^rft^T^HT^Tfn:: ^rttt^ rratMî i<rf* nrr * fWg- 1 ^° 1 JTIV^TTT^ I 9«» I ’pSg fUdl<( * ?T HTrTT ’TTt- VTH: 1 O(R I cifÎ ^dfcT sft^TJT: 11 <1$ 11

Back: - 14 vayam aśvāṃs tāḍayantaṃ sūtaṃ nindāmaḥ.
- 15 bhūbhṛt pāpān daṇḍayan sadbhyo ’nnaṃ dadacca śasyate.
- 16 kṣatriyo raṇe jayan mahadyaśo labhate.
- 17 jyotiṣṣu sūryaś candramāś ca mahāntau.
- 18 ahaṃ kṣetre patataḥ pakṣino ’paśyam.
- 19 adya jīvañśvo mriyate.
- 20 satāṃ vāg anuṣṭhīyeta.
- 21 satsu vasa.
- 22 kanyā srajaḥ sṛjatī (or sṛjantī) dṛṣadi niṣīdati.
- 23 svāmī dhanaṃ corayantīṃ bhāryāṃ daṇḍayet.
- 24 gṛhe bhrāmyadbhyo madhuliḍbhyo bālasya bhayaṃ vartate.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 107
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 14. We blame the driver who strikes (part.) the horses. 15. The king who punishes (part.) the bad and gives (part.) food to the good is praised. 16. The warrior who conquers (part.) in battle attains great fame. 17. Among the heavenly bodies the sun and moon are the two great ones. 18. In the field I saw birds flying. 19. He who lives (part.) to-day is dead to-morrow. 20. The word of the good must be followed (done). 21. Dwell among good men. 22. A maiden, making ) garlands, sits on a stone. 23. A hus- band shall punish a wife who steals {part.) his property. 24. The child {gen.) was afraid {use subst., no copula) of the bees {abl.) flying about in the house.
14. We blame the driver who strikes (part.) the horses. 15. The king who punishes (part.) the bad and gives (part.) food to the good is praised. 16. The warrior who conquers (part.) in battle attains great fame. 17. Among the heavenly bodies the sun and moon are the two great ones. 18. In the field I saw birds flying. 19. He who lives (part.) to-day is dead to-morrow. 20. The word of the good must be followed (done). 21. Dwell among good men. 22. A maiden, making ) garlands, sits on a stone. 23. A hus- band shall punish a wife who steals {part.) his property. 24. The child {gen.) was afraid {use subst., no copula) of the bees {abl.) flying about in the house.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 107
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 263.Declension.Stems in (or )cont"d.B.Stems in (and (ad).Adjectives formed with these suffixes are p possessives.They are declined precisely alike*;and differ in inflection from the participles in only by lengthening the in the nom.sing.masc.The feminine is made in;thus, In the dual neut.is never inserted.Thus,, rich",celebrated:> The two adjectives,so great","so many",andfa m,‘how great?’‘how many?’are similarly declined. Perry,Sanskrit Primer. 98 Lesson XXIV. Masculine. Neuter. Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular.Dual. Plural. N. 升T可升开升： 升开司瓦NV.升阳升升tf A. 罗计H开开瓦I. 开T 阶开阅风升阳有红as in the masculine. L 介Hf 升开升双可开雨V. 杆可
263.Declension.Stems in (or )cont"d.B.Stems in (and (ad).Adjectives formed with these suffixes are p possessives.They are declined precisely alike*;and differ in inflection from the participles in only by lengthening the in the nom.sing.masc.The feminine is made in;thus, In the dual neut.is never inserted.Thus,, rich",celebrated:> The two adjectives,so great","so many",andfa m,‘how great?’‘how many?’are similarly declined. Perry,Sanskrit Primer. 98 Lesson XXIV. Masculine. Neuter. Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular.Dual. Plural. N. 升T可升开升： 升开司瓦NV.升阳升升tf A. 罗计H开开瓦I. 开T 阶开阅风升阳有红as in the masculine. L 介Hf 升开升双可开雨V. 杆可

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 108
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 264. A stem (to be carefully distinguished from pres. part. act. of is frequently used in respectful address as a substitute for the pronoun of the second person. It is construed with the verb in the third person. Its nom. sing. masc. is HMPL (fem. and hYiT- the contracted form of its older voc. is a common exclamation of address: “you, sir!’’, “ho, there!”; and is often doubled. **
264. A stem (to be carefully distinguished from pres. part. act. of is frequently used in respectful address as a substitute for the pronoun of the second person. It is construed with the verb in the third person. Its nom. sing. masc. is HMPL (fem. and hYiT- the contracted form of its older voc. is a common exclamation of address: “you, sir!’’, “ho, there!”; and is often doubled. **
* Probably contracted from ‘blessed’. ** loses its final before all vowels and all sonant consonants; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 108
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 265. Derivative stems in These are made by the suffixes and and are, with one or two exceptions, masc. and neut. only. The stem has a triple form. In the strong cases of the masc. the vowel of the suffix is lengthened to ^T, in the weakest cases it is in general dropped; in the middle cases the final is dropped, and it is also lost in the nom. sing, of all genders. In the neuter, the nom.-acc. pl., as being strong cases, lengthen the vowel of the suffix; the same cases in the dual (as weakest cases) lose — but this only optionally. After the or of and when these are preceded by a consonant, the is retained in all the weakest cases, to avoid too great an accumulation of consonants. Examples: ‘king’; •rPFPT n., ‘name’; ^TT^PT m-, 4 soul, self’; n., ‘devotion’.
265. Derivative stems in These are made by the suffixes and and are, with one or two exceptions, masc. and neut. only. The stem has a triple form. In the strong cases of the masc. the vowel of the suffix is lengthened to ^T, in the weakest cases it is in general dropped; in the middle cases the final is dropped, and it is also lost in the nom. sing, of all genders. In the neuter, the nom.-acc. pl., as being strong cases, lengthen the vowel of the suffix; the same cases in the dual (as weakest cases) lose — but this only optionally. After the or of and when these are preceded by a consonant, the is retained in all the weakest cases, to avoid too great an accumulation of consonants. Examples: ‘king’; •rPFPT n., ‘name’; ^TT^PT m-, 4 soul, self’; n., ‘devotion’.
Masculine. Singular. Dual. Plural. N. TTWpft A. „ TTSRC J. mn* TT^wrm XT5rfH< L. XTMfM TT^tR or 4^ | psj V. n. Mrrarr ^rrarpft A. ^ntJTTMK »I. Mn<5TMT Mnawin V. ^T<5PT Neuter* Singular. Dual. Plural. ^"RTrf^r or «n * * * ^rnrPr or<TT^l or <TTH » » ”or w

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 109
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 266.Euphonic rules.Final and y remain unaltered be- fore initial surd consouants;before sonants,whether vowel or con- sonant,they become respectively ,,Before nasals they may be still further assimilated,becoming the nasals,,. Thus,f文T区r可becomes either可ftats or uttar双；阿西becomes The latter method is much more usual.
266.Euphonic rules.Final and y remain unaltered be- fore initial surd consouants;before sonants,whether vowel or con- sonant,they become respectively ,,Before nasals they may be still further assimilated,becoming the nasals,,. Thus,f文T区r可becomes either可ftats or uttar双；阿西becomes The latter method is much more usual.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 109
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: When a dental mute comes in contact with a lingual or palatal mute or sibilant, the dental is usually assimilated, becoming lingual or palatal respectively. Thus, tisthati from ti-stha-ti; rajna instead of rajna. 267. Before initial a final mute is made sonant; and then the may either remain unchanged, or be converted into the sonant aspirate corresponding to the preceding letter; thus, either ^TRTJtPri: or either Tf^n^T or In practice the latter method is almost invariably followed. /
When a dental mute comes in contact with a lingual or palatal mute or sibilant, the dental is usually assimilated, becoming lingual or palatal respectively. Thus, tisthati from ti-stha-ti; rajna instead of rajna. 267. Before initial a final mute is made sonant; and then the may either remain unchanged, or be converted into the sonant aspirate corresponding to the preceding letter; thus, either ^TRTJtPri: or either Tf^n^T or In practice the latter method is almost invariably followed. /

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 110
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 100 Lesson XXIV. Vocabulary XXIV. Verbs: out off. in cans, (marjayati) rub, rub off, polish. (denom. — varndyati) describe, portray. in caus. (udvejayati) terrify.
100 Lesson XXIV. Vocabulary XXIV. Verbs: out off. in cans, (marjayati) rub, rub off, polish. (denom. — varndyati) describe, portray. in caus. (udvejayati) terrify.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 110
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: m-> s°uh self; often as simple reflexive pronoun; in genitive, his, etc.; one’s own. eft 44 n., deed; ceremony; fate. n., hide, skin; leather. n., birth. cfVT n-» l>ank, shore. name of a metre. n., day. n., temple. Ml/* m., hell. «rf shining, brilliant. 44fcJ44<rI shrewd, prudent, how much, as many. 1^3, f. °ÎT, harsh, rough, fern, f. pervading, far->•reaching; omnipresent; mighty. ^cT, f. °^5IT (pass. part, of killed. Adv.: TR^nir commonly. m., bird. n., pot, vessel. (brahman) n., devotion; sacred word (of God); sacred knowledge; the world-spirit. (brahman — a personification of the preceding) m., the supreme All-Soul, the creator. n-> ashes. m.» ascetic. m., king. n’’ hair. ^4 n., year. 41m., meeting, encounter. 4^44* ^ f., border, boundary; outskirts. m , slayer, killer. Adj.: | U4<H long-lived (often used in respectful address). so great, so much (263). how great? how much? f. o^TF, poor; niggardly, d |c(«rf so much, so many. f. °^rr, second. kind. saying pleasant things, sociable. strong, mighty, honorable; blessed.
Subst.: m-> s°uh self; often as simple reflexive pronoun; in genitive, his, etc.; one’s own. eft 44 n., deed; ceremony; fate. n., hide, skin; leather. n., birth. cfVT n-» l>ank, shore. name of a metre. n., day. n., temple. Ml/* m., hell. «rf shining, brilliant. 44fcJ44<rI shrewd, prudent, how much, as many. 1^3, f. °ÎT, harsh, rough, fern, f. pervading, far->•reaching; omnipresent; mighty. ^cT, f. °^5IT (pass. part, of killed. Adv.: TR^nir commonly. m., bird. n., pot, vessel. (brahman) n., devotion; sacred word (of God); sacred knowledge; the world-spirit. (brahman — a personification of the preceding) m., the supreme All-Soul, the creator. n-> ashes. m.» ascetic. m., king. n’’ hair. ^4 n., year. 41m., meeting, encounter. 4^44* ^ f., border, boundary; outskirts. m , slayer, killer. Adj.: | U4<H long-lived (often used in respectful address). so great, so much (263). how great? how much? f. o^TF, poor; niggardly, d |c(«rf so much, so many. f. °^rr, second. kind. saying pleasant things, sociable. strong, mighty, honorable; blessed.

Back: - One should not insult beings with harsh words. One should have good speech.
- Generally, a person who performs good deeds will definitely be respected even if he is poor.
- 1 The slayer should live in hell for years as much as the fur found on the skin of the slaughtered animal.
- 2 Let servants say to the mighty king thus “Ayusman”
- 3 Let Aryan worship the shining sun every day.
- 4 How may months did you stay in Kasi?
- 5 Some ascetics smear their bodies with ashes.
- 6 “Karma is powerful” thus is my thought when I see all the wise poor people.
- 7 When you are king, happiness should not perish for us and for all the people.
- 8 In one birth, those who born as Sudras, when fulfilling their own duties well, may become Aryans in their second birth.
- 9 The wanderer should not stay in the village, wandering around in the forest should think of Brahman.
- 10 The meeting of two famous kings had already taken place in this city.
- 11 Brahma is heard in the Vedas as the creator of the world.
- 12 All those birds which you saw flying up from the tree at the outskirts of the forest were caught alive with snares by me and my brother and they were cooked for us by my mother.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 111
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXIV. m^qr fw^T^vRi m: f»upri|ct I "O I ?T TTjfT ^FSTTSpfT cf ^JISTHT V<«i CH^nTT f^rftW fânWr * fWg: i c I mtm ufT^nji fcri^W MfxRPFw "arr- ?ra i q. i httmti nfx ^Hcft xvtfr: RTMT’nrt fstrsnr i ao i wi owa: ^rei 1 mImPt ^-q i^<-m-cHTt m mW mmt rttmt m mt^i mtmt-^T^q^sa II AR II
Exercise XXIV. m^qr fw^T^vRi m: f»upri|ct I "O I ?T TTjfT ^FSTTSpfT cf ^JISTHT V<«i CH^nTT f^rftW fânWr * fWg: i c I mtm ufT^nji fcri^W MfxRPFw "arr- ?ra i q. i httmti nfx ^Hcft xvtfr: RTMT’nrt fstrsnr i ao i wi owa: ^rei 1 mImPt ^-q i^<-m-cHTt m mW mmt rttmt m mt^i mtmt-^T^q^sa II AR II

Back: - 13 brahmaṇāś carmaṇā kāṣṭhena vopānahau kārayanti.
- 14 bhagavato viṣṇor devakulam etasya grāmasya sīmani nadyās tīre tiṣṭhati.
- 15 sa bhasmabhiḥ pātrāṇi bhṛśaṃ mārjayatu.
- 16 śrīmantau kavī āgacchatām iti rājānaṃ nyavedayan bhṛtyāḥ.
- 17 he śiśū, ātmanor nāmanī (or nāmnī) vadatam. (kathayatam)
- 18 brahma bahūsūpaniṣatsu varṇyate.
- 19 brahma vibhvityṛṣibhirucyate. (vibhv ity ṛṣibhir ucyate)
- 20 yo brāhmaṇo bhāgaḥ śarīreṇāvachidyate, sa ātmocyate. (ātmā ucyate)
- 21 candragupto viśvasya bhuvo balavān samrāḍ abhavat.
- 22 ye balavantaḥ kṣatriyāḥ kṛṣṇasya senāyām ayudhyanta, te sarve raṇe dviḍbhir aghātyanta.
- 23 ṛkṣu triṣṭubh api vidyate.
- 24 pāṭaliputrasya rājā jātyā śūdraḥ, sa mitrātither yateḥ sundarīṃ kanyāṃ mā pariṇayatu.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 111
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 13. Brahmans have their shoes made (use caus.) of leather (insZr.) or wood. 14. A temple of blessed Visnu stands in the outskirts of this village, on the bank of the river. 15. Let him rub off the vessels diligently with ashes (pl.)- 16. The servants announced to the king that the two celebrated poets were coming (use or. recta with TfiT). 17. O children (du.), tell me your gen. du.) names. 18. The world-spirit is described in many Upanisads. 19. It is said by the seers that the worldspirit is omnipresent (use or. recta). 20. That part of the world-spirit, which is encompassed by the body, is called the soul of man (cf. § 234). 21. Candragupta was the mighty emperor of the whole earth. 22. All the mighty warriors who fought in Krsna’s army were killed in battle by the enemy. 23. In the Rigveda pl^) occurs pass.) also the Tristubh. 24. The king of Pataliputra is by birth a Qudra; let him not marry the beautiful daughter of the ascetic Mitratithi.
13. Brahmans have their shoes made (use caus.) of leather (insZr.) or wood. 14. A temple of blessed Visnu stands in the outskirts of this village, on the bank of the river. 15. Let him rub off the vessels diligently with ashes (pl.)- 16. The servants announced to the king that the two celebrated poets were coming (use or. recta with TfiT). 17. O children (du.), tell me your gen. du.) names. 18. The world-spirit is described in many Upanisads. 19. It is said by the seers that the worldspirit is omnipresent (use or. recta). 20. That part of the world-spirit, which is encompassed by the body, is called the soul of man (cf. § 234). 21. Candragupta was the mighty emperor of the whole earth. 22. All the mighty warriors who fought in Krsna’s army were killed in battle by the enemy. 23. In the Rigveda pl^) occurs pass.) also the Tristubh. 24. The king of Pataliputra is by birth a Qudra; let him not marry the beautiful daughter of the ascetic Mitratithi.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 112
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 268. Declension# Perfect Active Participles in The active participles of the perfect tense-system are quite peculiar as regards the modifications of the stem. In the strong cases the suffix is which becomes in the nom. sing, masc., and is shortened to in the voc. sing. In the weakest cases the suffix is contracted into ; and in the middle cases it is changed to A union-vowel if present in the strong and middle cases, disappears before in the weakest. Radical and if preceded by one consonant, become before but if preceded by **more** than one consonant, become ; whereas radical xj always becomes before , and radical Thus, f«1 i> r> I. H. as in the masculine. L. V. 2. 5if7Trcri^ ‘having gone’*: * Another form of perf. part, of this verb (71^) makes the strong and middle stems (H. an<f the weakest form is as above, Lesson XXV. 103 Masculine Neuter Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. A. i-HH »i. 5Rprr ®^snn * L. grnrfa ^Tth^?r x * x * xi V. grfT* rer^ as in the masculine n n n
268. Declension# Perfect Active Participles in The active participles of the perfect tense-system are quite peculiar as regards the modifications of the stem. In the strong cases the suffix is which becomes in the nom. sing, masc., and is shortened to in the voc. sing. In the weakest cases the suffix is contracted into ; and in the middle cases it is changed to A union-vowel if present in the strong and middle cases, disappears before in the weakest. Radical and if preceded by one consonant, become before but if preceded by **more** than one consonant, become ; whereas radical xj always becomes before , and radical Thus, f«1 i> r> I. H. as in the masculine. L. V. 2. 5if7Trcri^ ‘having gone’*: * Another form of perf. part, of this verb (71^) makes the strong and middle stems (H. an<f the weakest form is as above, Lesson XXV. 103 Masculine Neuter Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. A. i-HH »i. 5Rprr ®^snn * L. grnrfa ^Tth^?r x * x * xi V. grfT* rer^ as in the masculine n n n

Back: Declension table of [Mas.] śvan_1
Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | śvā | śvānau | śvānaḥ
Vocative | śvan | śvānau | śvānaḥ
Accusative | śvānam | śvānau | śunaḥ
Instrumental | śunā | śvabhyām | śvabhiḥ
Dative | śune | śvabhyām | śvabhyaḥ
Ablative | śunaḥ | śvabhyām | śvabhyaḥ
Genitive | śunaḥ | śunoḥ | śunām
Locative | śuni | śunoḥ | śvasu
Declension table of [Fem.] śunī
Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | śunī | śunyau | śunyaḥ
Vocative | śuni | śunyau | śunyaḥ
Accusative | śunīm | śunyau | śunīḥ
Instrumental | śunyā | śunībhyām | śunībhiḥ
Dative | śunyai | śunībhyām | śunībhyaḥ
Ablative | śunyāḥ | śunībhyām | śunībhyaḥ
Genitive | śunyāḥ | śunyoḥ | śunīnām
Locative | śunyām | śunyoḥ | śunīṣu
Declension table of [Mas.] yuvan
Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | yuvā | yuvānau | yuvānaḥ
Vocative | yuvan | yuvānau | yuvānaḥ
Accusative | yuvānam | yuvānau | yūnaḥ
Instrumental | yūnā | yuvabhyām | yuvabhiḥ
Dative | yūne | yuvabhyām | yuvabhyaḥ
Ablative | yūnaḥ | yuvabhyām | yuvabhyaḥ
Genitive | yūnaḥ | yūnoḥ | yūnām
Locative | yūni | yūnoḥ | yuvasu
Neuter | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | yuva | yuvanī | yuvānī
Vocative | yuvan yuva | yuvanī | yuvānī
Accusative | yuva | yuvanī | yuvānī
Instrumental | yūnā | yuvabhyām | yuvabhiḥ
Dative | yūne | yuvabhyām | yuvabhyaḥ
Ablative | yūnaḥ | yuvabhyām | yuvabhyaḥ
Genitive | yūnaḥ | yūnoḥ | yūnām
Locative | yūni | yūnoḥ | yuvasu
Declension table of [Fem.] yuvati
Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | yuvatiḥ | yuvatī | yuvatayaḥ
Vocative | yuvate | yuvatī | yuvatayaḥ
Accusative | yuvatim | yuvatī | yuvatīḥ
Instrumental | yuvatyā | yuvatibhyām | yuvatibhiḥ
Dative | yuvatyai yuvataye | yuvatibhyām | yuvatibhyaḥ
Ablative | yuvatyāḥ yuvateḥ yuvatitaḥ | yuvatibhyām | yuvatibhyaḥ
Genitive | yuvatyāḥ yuvateḥ | yuvatyoḥ | yuvatīnām
Locative | yuvatyām yuvatau | yuvatyoḥ | yuvatiṣu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 113
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 269. Stems The stems m., ‘dog’, and ^ra
269. Stems The stems m., ‘dog’, and ^ra

TextBack: Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | maghavā | maghavānau | maghavānaḥ
Vocative | maghavan | maghavānau | maghavānaḥ
Accusative | maghavānam | maghavānau | maghonaḥ
Instrumental | maghonā | maghavabhyām | maghavabhiḥ
Dative | maghone | maghavabhyām | maghavabhyaḥ
Ablative | maghonaḥ | maghavabhyām | maghavabhyaḥ
Genitive | maghonaḥ | maghonoḥ | maghonām
Locative | maghoni | maghonoḥ | maghavasu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 113
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 270. The stem m., ‘ generous ’ (in the later language almost exclusively a name of Indra), has as strong stem ^TET^T * L mid. °^T, weakest 44 Nom. sing. voc. °^<V Fem.
270. The stem m., ‘ generous ’ (in the later language almost exclusively a name of Indra), has as strong stem ^TET^T * L mid. °^T, weakest 44 Nom. sing. voc. °^<V Fem.

Back: Neuter an-stem declension of अहन् (áhan)
 | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | áhar | áhnī / áhanī | áhāni / áha¹ / áhā¹
Vocative | áhar | áhnī / áhanī | áhāni / áha¹ / áhā¹
Accusative | áhar | áhnī / áhanī | áhāni / áha¹ / áhā¹
Instrumental | áhnā | áhabhyām | áhabhiḥ / áhobhiḥ
Dative | áhne | áhabhyām | áhabhyaḥ / áhobhyaḥ
Ablative | áhnaḥ | áhabhyām | áhabhyaḥ / áhobhyaḥ
Genitive | áhnaḥ | áhnoḥ | áhnām
Locative | áhani / ahni | áhnoḥ | áhasu / áhassu
Notes | - ¹Vedic
ahān, ahar, ahan/ahn
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 113
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 271. The stem n., ‘day’, is used only in the strong and weakest cases, the middle, with the nom. sing., coming from ’sM^^ or Thus : Singular. Dual. Plural. N.A.V. (°^:) ^r^ft or ^l^Tf^T i. ^rCrfHH L. or or
271. The stem n., ‘day’, is used only in the strong and weakest cases, the middle, with the nom. sing., coming from ’sM^^ or Thus : Singular. Dual. Plural. N.A.V. (°^:) ^r^ft or ^l^Tf^T i. ^rCrfHH L. or or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 113
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 272. Compounds with J^SI^ or The adjectives formed from this root with prepositions and other words are quite irregular. Some of them have only two stem-forms: a strong in and a weak in ^5F^; while others distinguish from the middle in a weakest stem in before which the is contracted with a preceding ) or ^3 (^) into or The fem. is made with from the weakest (or weak) stem; thus, f^^h- The principal stems of this sort are as follows : 104 Lesson XXV. 3TH3 * for ward’, ‘eastward’downward ’northward ’‘ ‘backward’,‘westward’‘ low ’‘following’‘going horizontally’Middle. Weak (weakest).
272. Compounds with J^SI^ or The adjectives formed from this root with prepositions and other words are quite irregular. Some of them have only two stem-forms: a strong in and a weak in ^5F^; while others distinguish from the middle in a weakest stem in before which the is contracted with a preceding ) or ^3 (^) into or The fem. is made with from the weakest (or weak) stem; thus, f^^h- The principal stems of this sort are as follows : 104 Lesson XXV. 3TH3 * for ward’, ‘eastward’downward ’northward ’‘ ‘backward’,‘westward’‘ low ’‘following’‘going horizontally’Middle. Weak (weakest).
inserted, irregularly, in weakest forms only. ** irregular (fwro.+^0-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 114
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXV. Verbs: 4- (**udgacchati**) rise. (astamgacchati} go down, set (lit’ly “go home” — used of the heavenly bodies). (**sprit ay ati**} desire (dat.}.
Vocabulary XXV. Verbs: 4- (**udgacchati**) rise. (astamgacchati} go down, set (lit’ly “go home” — used of the heavenly bodies). (**sprit ay ati**} desire (dat.}.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 114
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: n., weight; dignity. n., that which lives. n- Pr^ a city (Taxila) in India. **m**., **n**., animal. n» Pr-, a god, Tvastar. assembly. Baroch (a holy place in India). **m**., Indra. **m**., **n**., young; f. **m**., ripening; recompense. ** **m**., pains, trouble. I **tn**., lion. **n**., bathing, bath. **m**., gazelle. Adj.:f., °tRT, learned, studied having stood; as n subst., the immovable. three-headed. f. °**^T**, (part, of **^17** ) bitten forest-dwelling. knowing, wise, learned
Subst.: n., weight; dignity. n., that which lives. n- Pr^ a city (Taxila) in India. **m**., **n**., animal. n» Pr-, a god, Tvastar. assembly. Baroch (a holy place in India). **m**., Indra. **m**., **n**., young; f. **m**., ripening; recompense. ** **m**., pains, trouble. I **tn**., lion. **n**., bathing, bath. **m**., gazelle. Adj.:f., °tRT, learned, studied having stood; as n subst., the immovable. three-headed. f. °**^T**, (part, of **^17** ) bitten forest-dwelling. knowing, wise, learned

Back: 1. The wise man is glorified in the world. The wise man receive dignity.
2. Everything is received by knowledge. Knowledge is honored everywhere.
- 1 Heavenly bodies rise in the east and set in the west.
- 2 The suffering of the wise is only known by the wise.
- 3 Indra killed the three-headed son of Tavastr.
- 4 The warriors had only fought for two days.
- 5 An Aryan who was bitten by a dog should perform a ritual bath.
- 6 We saw the brothers who have come from Kasi.
- 7 By whom the Vedas have been studied, they respect that person, even in his youth, as a teacher.
- 8 “The wicked men are bom among the beasts in the second life as a result of their deeds” thus the Smrti says.
- 9 All wise men desire to associate with the wise.
- 10 By how many days did you go to Prayaga from Kasi?
- 11 The great city of Pataliputra is in the country of the eastern people, Taxila is of the northern and Brgukaccha is of the western.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 115
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXV. II II
Exercise XXV. II II

Back: - 12 vṛtro maghonā marudbhiś cāghātyata. (ca aghātyata)
- 13 yuvatyo gītam agāyan.
- 14 vidvāṃsau brāhmaṇau vivadete.
- 15 ṛkṣu saramā devānāṃ śunyucyate.
- 16 mahānti vanāni pratyañci dṛśyante.
- 17 pariṣadi vidvatsu śreṣṭho dharmam upadiśatu.
- 18 pāpāni karmāṇi cakṛvāṃso ’has tiṣṭheyū rātriṃ ca niṣīdeyuḥ.
- 19 kīrtir yūnā kṣatriyeṇālabhyata. (kṣatriyeṇa alabhyata)
- 20 prāṅ devān namatu, prācī devānāṃ dik.
- 22 ahanyahani sūryaṃ pūjayet.
- 21 hariṇaḥ śvabhir hataḥ. (or hariṇaḥ śvabhir aghātyata)
- 23 siṃho vanavāsināṃ tiraścāṃ rājā.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 115
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 12. Vrtra was killed caus. pass.") by Maghavan and the Maruts. 13. Young women sang a song. 14. Two learned Brahmans dispute. 15. Sarama is called in the Rigveda the dog (/.) of the gods. 16. Great forests are found in the west (expr. as pred., nom. pl.). 17. In the assembly let the best among the learned teach tbe law- 18-must stand by day (acc.) Those who have committed evil deeds and sit by night. 19. Glory was attained by the young warrior. 20. Turned toward the east (nom. sing.) let one reverence the gods; the east (m I* 41) the quarter °f the gods. 21. Day by day one must worship (TT^) the sun. 22. The gazelle has been killed by dogs. 23. The lion is king of forestdwelling animals.
12. Vrtra was killed caus. pass.") by Maghavan and the Maruts. 13. Young women sang a song. 14. Two learned Brahmans dispute. 15. Sarama is called in the Rigveda the dog (/.) of the gods. 16. Great forests are found in the west (expr. as pred., nom. pl.). 17. In the assembly let the best among the learned teach tbe law- 18-must stand by day (acc.) Those who have committed evil deeds and sit by night. 19. Glory was attained by the young warrior. 20. Turned toward the east (nom. sing.) let one reverence the gods; the east (m I* 41) the quarter °f the gods. 21. Day by day one must worship (TT^) the sun. 22. The gazelle has been killed by dogs. 23. The lion is king of forestdwelling animals.

Back: Feminine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | ambā | ambe | ambāḥ
Vocative | ambe amba | ambe | ambāḥ
Accusative | ambām | ambe | ambāḥ
Instrumental | ambayā | ambābhyām | ambābhiḥ
Dative | ambāyai | ambābhyām | ambābhyaḥ
Ablative | ambāyāḥ | ambābhyām | ambābhyaḥ
Genitive | ambāyāḥ | ambayoḥ | ambānām
Locative | ambāyām | ambayoḥ | ambāsu
Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | sakhā | sakhāyau sakhāyā | sakhāyaḥ
Vocative | sakhe | sakhāyau | sakhāyaḥ
Accusative | sakhāyam | sakhāyau | sakhīn
Instrumental | sakhyā | sakhibhyām | sakhibhiḥ
Dative | sakhye | sakhibhyām | sakhibhyaḥ
Ablative | sakhyuḥ | sakhibhyām | sakhibhyaḥ
Genitive | sakhyuḥ | sakhyoḥ | sakhīnām
Locative | sakhyau | sakhyoḥ | sakhiṣu
Masculine | Singular | Dual | Plural
Nominative | patiḥ patā | patī patāyau patāyā | patāyaḥ patayaḥ
Vocative | pate | patī patāyau | patāyaḥ patayaḥ
Accusative | patim patāyam | patī patāyau | patīn
Instrumental | patyā patinā | patibhyām | patibhiḥ
Dative | patye pataye | patibhyām | patibhyaḥ
Ablative | patyuḥ pateḥ patitaḥ | patibhyām | patibhyaḥ
Genitive | patyuḥ pateḥ | patyoḥ | patīnām
Locative | patyau patau | patyoḥ | patiṣu
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 115
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Some Irregular Substantives. 273. 4G3T f., ‘ mother ’: voc. sing. 274. 1. m., ‘friend’: sing. nom. , acc. inst. dat. abl.-gen. loc. voc. ; du. 106 Lesson XXVI. pl- nom- acc- <1 «<!•(.> instr-the rest like — 2. XjfcT m., is declined regularly (like in composition, and when meaning ‘lord, master’; when meaning ‘husband’, it follows in the following forms: inst. sing. MdJT? dat. XKSt abl.-gen. TTHJTG loc-
Some Irregular Substantives. 273. 4G3T f., ‘ mother ’: voc. sing. 274. 1. m., ‘friend’: sing. nom. , acc. inst. dat. abl.-gen. loc. voc. ; du. 106 Lesson XXVI. pl- nom- acc- <1 «<!•(.> instr-the rest like — 2. XjfcT m., is declined regularly (like in composition, and when meaning ‘lord, master’; when meaning ‘husband’, it follows in the following forms: inst. sing. MdJT? dat. XKSt abl.-gen. TTHJTG loc-

Back: akṣi-, akṣṇ- (akṣaṇ-)
asthi-, asthn- (asthan-)
dadhi-, dadhn- (dadhan-)
sakthi-, sakthn- (sakthan-)
akṣiṇī, akṣīṇi
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 116
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 275. The neuter stemseye’, ‘ bone’, ‘ curds’, ‘thigh’, form only the weakest cases; thus, or etc.; the rest of the inflection is made from corresponding stems in <T 5 thus, nom. sing. etc-
275. The neuter stemseye’, ‘ bone’, ‘ curds’, ‘thigh’, form only the weakest cases; thus, or etc.; the rest of the inflection is made from corresponding stems in <T 5 thus, nom. sing. etc-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 116
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 276. 1. ?•> ‘goddess of fortune’, makes nom. sing. _ 2. ^f^f., ‘woman’, follows a mixed declension; thus, nom. sing. acc. or instr. dat. abl.-gen. loc. fÊnK; du- f^fT, pi- nom- f^r«ra, acc. or instr. ^1* 1^, etc.; gen. ^tUTTK-
276. 1. ?•> ‘goddess of fortune’, makes nom. sing. _ 2. ^f^f., ‘woman’, follows a mixed declension; thus, nom. sing. acc. or instr. dat. abl.-gen. loc. fÊnK; du- f^fT, pi- nom- f^r«ra, acc. or instr. ^1* 1^, etc.; gen. ^tUTTK-

Back: dyau(dyāv), dyu, div
dyubhyām, divos
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 116
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 277. 1. f., ‘water’, only pL; its final is changed to before W; thus, nom. acc. instr, dat.-abl. gen. loc. — 2. f^cf f.,* ‘sky’, makes nom. sing. du. T?Hcft-, pl. (sometimes) the endings are the normal ones, but the root becomes before consonant-endings: thus, acc. sing. nom.-acc. pl. instr. Not all the cases are found in use. — 3. Stem m. (rarely f.), ‘wealth’s sing. TTET> TTOTetc.; du. VRlt, TT’flK; pl-(nom. and acc.), TlfHRi do-
277. 1. f., ‘water’, only pL; its final is changed to before W; thus, nom. acc. instr, dat.-abl. gen. loc. — 2. f^cf f.,* ‘sky’, makes nom. sing. du. T?Hcft-, pl. (sometimes) the endings are the normal ones, but the root becomes before consonant-endings: thus, acc. sing. nom.-acc. pl. instr. Not all the cases are found in use. — 3. Stem m. (rarely f.), ‘wealth’s sing. TTET> TTOTetc.; du. VRlt, TT’flK; pl-(nom. and acc.), TlfHRi do-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 116
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 278.1.可冠or可飞冠m,（from习可瓦+可‘cart-drawing", i.e.)‘ox":strong stem可T返，mid.可ss,weakest; nom.sing.可3T可，voc.习可s孔.一2.The stemq网Tm,‘road" makes all the strong cases,with irregular nom.sing.;the corresponding middle cases are made from qf,and the weakest from g可；thus,acc.sing.q网T同t,dat.g,acc.pl.qr, In the older language oftener masculine. Lesson XXVI. 107 dat.f.[The stems m.,"stirring-stick",and m., an epithet of Indra,are said to follow]
278.1.可冠or可飞冠m,（from习可瓦+可‘cart-drawing", i.e.)‘ox":strong stem可T返，mid.可ss,weakest; nom.sing.可3T可，voc.习可s孔.一2.The stemq网Tm,‘road" makes all the strong cases,with irregular nom.sing.;the corresponding middle cases are made from qf,and the weakest from g可；thus,acc.sing.q网T同t,dat.g,acc.pl.qr, In the older language oftener masculine. Lesson XXVI. 107 dat.f.[The stems m.,"stirring-stick",and m., an epithet of Indra,are said to follow]

TextBack: pumāṃs, pum, puṃs
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 279. The stem xjjT m., ‘man’, is very irregular. The strong x> v 7 stem is mid. TJH, weakest Thus, sing. TJHT, etc., voc. U+l’lJ du. xprpft, TJTOITSL PL etc.,
279. The stem xjjT m., ‘man’, is very irregular. The strong x> v 7 stem is mid. TJH, weakest Thus, sing. TJHT, etc., voc. U+l’lJ du. xprpft, TJTOITSL PL etc.,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 280. For the stem f’•, 6 age’, may be substituted in the cases with vowel-endings forms from <s| f.; thus, or
280. For the stem f’•, 6 age’, may be substituted in the cases with vowel-endings forms from <s| f.; thus, or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 281. n., ‘heart’, does not make nom.-voc.-acc. of any number (except in composition), these being supplied from n.
281. n., ‘heart’, does not make nom.-voc.-acc. of any number (except in composition), these being supplied from n.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 282. The stem m., ‘foot’, becomes xn^ in strong cases; and, in compounds, in the middle cases also; thus, nom. sing. acc. XJT^FL instr. q^T, etc. From ‘biped’, acc. sing, P1- instr, pl. [The stem XJT^ tn., ‘foot1, has the complete declension of a-stems.]
282. The stem m., ‘foot’, becomes xn^ in strong cases; and, in compounds, in the middle cases also; thus, nom. sing. acc. XJT^FL instr. q^T, etc. From ‘biped’, acc. sing, P1- instr, pl. [The stem XJT^ tn., ‘foot1, has the complete declension of a-stems.]

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 283. The root ‘slay’, as final member of a compound, becomes ^F[ in nom. sing., and loses its in the middle cases and its in the weakest cases (but only optionally i.i loc. sing.). Further, when is lost, in contact with reverts to its original VI ; thus, m., ‘killing a Brahman’, makes nom. sing. acc. instr. etc., loc. or voc. du. °<«rrK etc.; pl. nom. acc.
283. The root ‘slay’, as final member of a compound, becomes ^F[ in nom. sing., and loses its in the middle cases and its in the weakest cases (but only optionally i.i loc. sing.). Further, when is lost, in contact with reverts to its original VI ; thus, m., ‘killing a Brahman’, makes nom. sing. acc. instr. etc., loc. or voc. du. °<«rrK etc.; pl. nom. acc.
* In compound words, an altering cause in one member sometimes lingualizes a of the next following member. But a guttural or labial in direct combination with sometimes prevents the combination, as in the instr.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 117
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 284. The stems **m**., n. pr., and m., n. pr, (both personifications of the sun), make the nom. sing, in but otherwise do not lengthen the ; thus, nom. IpfT, acc. ’gqiq"FQ, instr. xrmiT.
284. The stems **m**., n. pr., and m., n. pr, (both personifications of the sun), make the nom. sing, in but otherwise do not lengthen the ; thus, nom. IpfT, acc. ’gqiq"FQ, instr. xrmiT.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 118
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXVI. Verbs: move; in caus. (arpayati) send; put; hand over, give. (g&hati) in caus. (guhdyati) hide away, conceal. (trpyati) be pleased or satis- tied, satisfy or satiate oneself. + fqr (vilapati) complain.
Vocabulary XXVI. Verbs: move; in caus. (arpayati) send; put; hand over, give. (g&hati) in caus. (guhdyati) hide away, conceal. (trpyati) be pleased or satis- tied, satisfy or satiate oneself. + fqr (vilapati) complain.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 118
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: C<fW) n., eye. m., man (homo), n., vow, obligation, duty. m., faithfulness. m-, demon. Adj.: efiTUT f-> °^TT, one-eyed. n., notice, thought, mind. four-footed, quadruped. (weakest m-? n-Pr^ a Vedic saint. n., protection. m., biped. fspEJf. (part, of ordained, fixed, permanent. fSTcf, f. o^5n, beneficent, gracious, blessed.
Subst.: C<fW) n., eye. m., man (homo), n., vow, obligation, duty. m., faithfulness. m-, demon. Adj.: efiTUT f-> °^TT, one-eyed. n., notice, thought, mind. four-footed, quadruped. (weakest m-? n-Pr^ a Vedic saint. n., protection. m., biped. fspEJf. (part, of ordained, fixed, permanent. fSTcf, f. o^5n, beneficent, gracious, blessed.

Back: - Loyalty to the husband is the duty of the women. Faithfulness is the duty of the ministers.
- And protection of the people is a duty that has been assigned to king.
- 1 Two strong oxen should pull the plough.
- 2 May your paths be safe.
- 3 Laksmi is the wife of Visnu.
- 4 This man ponders the hightest Brahman in his mind.
- 5 The king conquered the whole world with both arms.
- 6 By which way did you come with your friend?
- 7 Friend touched me with his foot.
- 8 The king ordered the women to come with the men.
- 9 O young man, show me the way.
- 10 This wandering ascetic washed both of his feet with water.
- 11 The wife sends the gold-pieces to her husband.
- 12 Whoever sees nothing with one eye is called one blind (Kana)./ (They call him “Kana” as he sees nothing by his one eye.)
- 13 May heavenly father and earthly mother protect you.
- 14 These men hide their sins in their hearts.
- 15 A person should not converse with a Brahmin-slayer and should not teach him or induce him to sacrifice.
- 16 Human beings have asked for protection from the gods out of fear of demons and the sinful demons were killed by those merciful gods.
- 17 The great king of the northern people, while talking to the needy students who are standing in the street, delivers alms to them.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 118
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXVI. 口同升对f師行升T开反t开f同ui可纸T可iT寸奇可f对时i开‖q8川可可可可T阿可写I升可1寸可信T开19If钉可T安网T可：11 升f付wi打香T131司可g田Tq文可冠订Tfa181可T写阿i 府可可可141守可可T可T网TT订更TI名1q女T 开T用型T丙gT191f:升女T订田可安T同T1云1复习可和T时守式女11f有：T奇可T可同gfT区1901升商qT四f行1991V可T刘T升可ff句四双f行方T过可f司19R1奇：fuat uf升可T升可aT1931gi 安可gqT中履可f可1981T可T向行可可a开网T喻可T 司可T1q叫1gt升T钉T可aT食可T:T网可T可可Tf图f可可Tf:TT图TT网T19专！H1可行iT同Tf安： f何fagf:fT商：TgHT四升fH司i硬f行q9‖
Exercise XXVI. 口同升对f師行升T开反t开f同ui可纸T可iT寸奇可f对时i开‖q8川可可可可T阿可写I升可1寸可信T开19If钉可T安网T可：11 升f付wi打香T131司可g田Tq文可冠订Tfa181可T写阿i 府可可可141守可可T可T网TT订更TI名1q女T 开T用型T丙gT191f:升女T订田可安T同T1云1复习可和T时守式女11f有：T奇可T可同gfT区1901升商qT四f行1991V可T刘T升可ff句四双f行方T过可f司19R1奇：fuat uf升可T升可aT1931gi 安可gqT中履可f可1981T可T向行可可a开网T喻可T 司可T1q叫1gt升T钉T可aT食可T:T网可T可可Tf图f可可Tf:TT图TT网T19专！H1可行iT同Tf安： f何fagf:fT商：TgHT四升fH司i硬f行q9‖

Back: - 18 puruṣāṇāṃ strīṇāṃ ca samāgamo marge ’bhavat.
- 19 pūṣā, mitro’ryamā saviteti (savitā iti) vede sūryaṃ vadanti.
- 20 ṛkṣu yajuḥṣu cāpo’pi (ca āpas api) deveṣu gaṇyante.
- 21 he śiva, dvipadbhyaś catuṣpadbhayaś ca śivo bhava.
- 22 agnir apsu vartata ityṛṣīṇāṃ matiḥ.
- 23 asuro maghonā dadhīco’sthnāghātyata. (dadhīcas asthnā aghātyata)
- 24 kena marutas panthā vidyate.
- 25 he amba, dadhnā bālaṃ tarpaya.
- 26 asmākaṃ mitrasya gṛhād annam ānāyaya.
- 27 maruto maghonas sakhāyaḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 119
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXVI. XXVII. 109 18. The meeting of the men and women took place on the road. 19. In the Veda they call the sun Pusan, Mitra (m.), Aryaman, and Savitar. 20. Water also is named (THTRf, pass.) among the deities in the Rik (use and in the sacrificial formulas. 21. Be gracious, O Qiva, to biped and quadruped. 22. The seers5 view is, that fire is to be found in the water (use , and make a direct statement with TfH). 23. The Asura was slain by Maghavan with a bone ofDadhyanc. 24. Who knows the wind’s path (pass.)? 25. Mother, satisfy (rT^ caus.) the child with curds. 26. Have food brought (use caus. y pl.) from our fr iend’s house. 27. The Maruts are Maghavan’s friends.
Lesson XXVI. XXVII. 109 18. The meeting of the men and women took place on the road. 19. In the Veda they call the sun Pusan, Mitra (m.), Aryaman, and Savitar. 20. Water also is named (THTRf, pass.) among the deities in the Rik (use and in the sacrificial formulas. 21. Be gracious, O Qiva, to biped and quadruped. 22. The seers5 view is, that fire is to be found in the water (use , and make a direct statement with TfH). 23. The Asura was slain by Maghavan with a bone ofDadhyanc. 24. Who knows the wind’s path (pass.)? 25. Mother, satisfy (rT^ caus.) the child with curds. 26. Have food brought (use caus. y pl.) from our fr iend’s house. 27. The Maruts are Maghavan’s friends.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 119
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 285. Demonstrative Pronouns. Two demonstrative-declensions are made up with particular irregularity: they are those of the pronouns an<^ (for which the natives give the stem-forms as ^<^7^ and ^<^7^ respectively). The first is a more indefinite demonstrative: ‘this’ or ‘that’; the other signifies especially the remoter relation.
285. Demonstrative Pronouns. Two demonstrative-declensions are made up with particular irregularity: they are those of the pronouns an<^ (for which the natives give the stem-forms as ^<^7^ and ^<^7^ respectively). The first is a more indefinite demonstrative: ‘this’ or ‘that’; the other signifies especially the remoter relation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 119
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 286. (<^R): Masculine. Sing. Dual. N. A. Ti I. D. Ab. G. r> Plural. Sing. Trf*T^ » IH. V3 Feminine. Dual. Plural. 7i wJ9 •n 1 110 Lesson XXVII. Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. du. ; the rest is like the masculine.
286. (<^R): Masculine. Sing. Dual. N. A. Ti I. D. Ab. G. r> Plural. Sing. Trf*T^ » IH. V3 Feminine. Dual. Plural. 7i wJ9 •n 1 110 Lesson XXVII. Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. du. ; the rest is like the masculine.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 120
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 287. MF&T (^TO: Masculine. Feminine. Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. a. wi „ * ^5 «I. MFHM7 ^ * j«41 D. Ml<t^ „ MHTtwiK Ab. (c^ » * ^ 1 * 4 r> G. » -siy «T1r l. ^zjtk Plural. Cv (X ^^5 Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. -**^<^4^**, du. **^llj**, pl- t^le re8t like masc. — The final of is unchangeable (cf. § 161).
287. MF&T (^TO: Masculine. Feminine. Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. a. wi „ * ^5 «I. MFHM7 ^ * j«41 D. Ml<t^ „ MHTtwiK Ab. (c^ » * ^ 1 * 4 r> G. » -siy «T1r l. ^zjtk Plural. Cv (X ^^5 Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. -**^<^4^**, du. **^llj**, pl- t^le re8t like masc. — The final of is unchangeable (cf. § 161).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 120
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 288. There is a defective pronominal stem XTM, which is accentless, and hence used only in situations where no emphasis falls upon it. The only forms are the following: Sing. acc. m. n. Ipf^’ f- instr- m ’ n-> f- VW Du- ace-m. ?•> n*’ gen.-loc. m., f., n., acc* m* n. f« TpnH- — These forms may be used only when the person or object to which they refer has already been indicated by a form of or Thus, “this one has read the art of poetry; teach him grammar”.
288. There is a defective pronominal stem XTM, which is accentless, and hence used only in situations where no emphasis falls upon it. The only forms are the following: Sing. acc. m. n. Ipf^’ f- instr- m ’ n-> f- VW Du- ace-m. ?•> n*’ gen.-loc. m., f., n., acc* m* n. f« TpnH- — These forms may be used only when the person or object to which they refer has already been indicated by a form of or Thus, “this one has read the art of poetry; teach him grammar”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 120
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 289. Past Passive Participle in cf or <L By the suffix cf— or, in a comparative!small number of verbs, «f — is formed, directly from the root of the verb, and unconnected with any tensestem, a verbal adjective called the past passive participle. The fem. ends always in °^5rT. When this participle is made from transitive verbs, it qualifies something as having endured the action expressed by the verb; thus, <^tT dattd, ‘given’; ukta^ ‘spoken’. When made from an intransitive or neuter verb, the same par Lesson XXVII. Ill ticiple has no passive, but only an indefinite past, sense; thus, WcT, ‘gone’, ‘been’; Trf^TcT, ‘fallen’.
289. Past Passive Participle in cf or <L By the suffix cf— or, in a comparative!small number of verbs, «f — is formed, directly from the root of the verb, and unconnected with any tensestem, a verbal adjective called the past passive participle. The fem. ends always in °^5rT. When this participle is made from transitive verbs, it qualifies something as having endured the action expressed by the verb; thus, <^tT dattd, ‘given’; ukta^ ‘spoken’. When made from an intransitive or neuter verb, the same par Lesson XXVII. Ill ticiple has no passive, but only an indefinite past, sense; thus, WcT, ‘gone’, ‘been’; Trf^TcT, ‘fallen’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 121
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 290. This participle is often used as an adjective. Very commonly, also, it supplies the place of a finite verb, when some form of ‘be’, or H is to be supplied; thus, “he is gone”; “by me a letter was written”. The neuter is frequently used as a substantive; thus, ‘ a gift’; ‘milk ’; and also as nomen actionis. Sometimes it has a present signification, particularly when made from neuter verbs; thus, f^gT<T (from IgH) often ‘standing’.
290. This participle is often used as an adjective. Very commonly, also, it supplies the place of a finite verb, when some form of ‘be’, or H is to be supplied; thus, “he is gone”; “by me a letter was written”. The neuter is frequently used as a substantive; thus, ‘ a gift’; ‘milk ’; and also as nomen actionis. Sometimes it has a present signification, particularly when made from neuter verbs; thus, f^gT<T (from IgH) often ‘standing’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 121
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 291. A. With suffix
291. A. With suffix
* Commonest exceptions: <st I cT from ‘eat’; ♦t"rl from from JT^ ‘rejoice’; from ‘weep’; from ‘speak’; from ‘know’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 121
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 292. Some few verbs make double forms; thus, ‘hasten’, HTJ or ‘acquire’, or f^prT-ex
292. Some few verbs make double forms; thus, ‘hasten’, HTJ or ‘acquire’, or f^prT-ex

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 122
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXVII. Verbs: 时可(bhaksayati) eat. (upeksate)neglect. break. 2更+f行(ikirdti) scatter. 2y可+寸q enjoy.. ru+可(den.一avagandyati) (paribhdvati)despise. despise. 可(majjat)sink. +in caus.(uccardyati) 可in caus.( (yojdyati)yoke, pronounce,say. harness. 夏+可(avatirati)）descend. (dgati)attach;hang,cling, +(uttdrati) emerge,come adhere. out. (sidati)sit,settle down;be or tT (pyayate)become stout overcome,exhausted. or fat.
Vocabulary XXVII. Verbs: 时可(bhaksayati) eat. (upeksate)neglect. break. 2更+f行(ikirdti) scatter. 2y可+寸q enjoy.. ru+可(den.一avagandyati) (paribhdvati)despise. despise. 可(majjat)sink. +in caus.(uccardyati) 可in caus.( (yojdyati)yoke, pronounce,say. harness. 夏+可(avatirati)）descend. (dgati)attach;hang,cling, +(uttdrati) emerge,come adhere. out. (sidati)sit,settle down;be or tT (pyayate)become stout overcome,exhausted. or fat.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 122
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: ■^1 * 1 1 m* du., nom. pr., the **m**. , n. pr. a mountain. **f**., hunger. *4 **d**. > life of holiness, i. e. religious studentship. **n**. , meal-time, meal. **m**., n.pr.., a Vedic personage. **m**., sweet drink. ’HWI **f**-> pearl. 43^44 **m**., demon. **no**-9 acquisition, gain. Alvins (the Indian xoupoi). ^T^TTT id. > “walk and conversation ” ; conduct of life, observance. **m**., wedding, marriage. ÎTfV **id**., illness. **m**., car. TRSTF **f**-, bed. **m**., **n**., plough. < **m**., chain, garland. ^Try **n**., debt. Adj.: (part, of 2f^J) reduced, decayed; ruined. f- °**^rr5** gêat, strong, violent. **xft<T** (part, of xft) fat. studying sacred knowledge; as m. subst. > Brahman student. (part.) abandoned; wanting in; and so sometimes w. instr., = ‘without’.
Subst.: ■^1 * 1 1 m* du., nom. pr., the **m**. , n. pr. a mountain. **f**., hunger. *4 **d**. > life of holiness, i. e. religious studentship. **n**. , meal-time, meal. **m**., n.pr.., a Vedic personage. **m**., sweet drink. ’HWI **f**-> pearl. 43^44 **m**., demon. **no**-9 acquisition, gain. Alvins (the Indian xoupoi). ^T^TTT id. > “walk and conversation ” ; conduct of life, observance. **m**., wedding, marriage. ÎTfV **id**., illness. **m**., car. TRSTF **f**-, bed. **m**., **n**., plough. < **m**., chain, garland. ^Try **n**., debt. Adj.: (part, of 2f^J) reduced, decayed; ruined. f- °**^rr5** gêat, strong, violent. **xft<T** (part, of xft) fat. studying sacred knowledge; as m. subst. > Brahman student. (part.) abandoned; wanting in; and so sometimes w. instr., = ‘without’.

Back: - O king, increasing debt, despised enemies, and neglected ills cause great disasters.
- 1 The effect of karmas (actions) which are done in this world will be received by the actor in the hereafter.
- 2 One should pay homage to the most venerable and say: “Sir I am that person.”
- 3 The father of us got out of the car is standing and talking with friend.
- 4 Good people rebuke a man who abstains from good conduct even if he is a wise person.
- 5 Both Asvin had rescued the Bhujayu who was drowing in the ocean and dying by boat.
- 6 You should give food to these beggars who sit in hunger.
- 7 Our car has broken down on the road.
- 8 Look at those oxen that are lighting.
- 9 These birds eat the grain that has been sown by you.
- 10 You should wash both of your hand with this water.
- 11 The householder should say to the guest who is coming to his house thus: “This is a chair. This is water for bathing. This is nectar. This is food. These are clothes and this is the mattress.”
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 123
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXVII. a和T对TTf衣T9T子可：I 可可可faH女升奇过T图Tgf同T:l9yl Tf行霸fT四f种标f奇i对打对f时升币- 灯s行191行习T可开*又丙日T可订计fT式双1又1可:f和T(四T反可升：网TH对HTqT西f8f府131T可Tu 寸g河i对f何阳两四可四f可双可：18|子升开对f何习T可阅f图升可T(文a开141：了Tf科可升S京更1专1四知T文分网：191习团TT可双冠：可照1云！ H阿aTf何过T丙f和粉f何订TH同f司1Q1Tf文f:qT 可T口1901开*T阳f和T:有T网T可y式式升af和mf府n节Tf行履升f向f女TT更司可安l99川
Exercise XXVII. a和T对TTf衣T9T子可：I 可可可faH女升奇过T图Tgf同T:l9yl Tf行霸fT四f种标f奇i对打对f时升币- 灯s行191行习T可开*又丙日T可订计fT式双1又1可:f和T(四T反可升：网TH对HTqT西f8f府131T可Tu 寸g河i对f何阳两四可四f可双可：18|子升开对f何习T可阅f图升可T(文a开141：了Tf科可升S京更1专1四知T文分网：191习团TT可双冠：可照1云！ H阿aTf何过T丙f和粉f何订TH同f司1Q1Tf文f:qT 可T口1901开*T阳f和T:有T网T可y式式升af和mf府n节Tf行履升f向f女TT更司可安l99川
* I am so-and-so; N. or M.”** Translate the pronoun-forms by ‘here’, and cf. § 225. Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

Back: - 12 ebhyo rugṇebhya auṣadhaṃ tvaritaṃ dāpaya.
- 13 yasmin parvate śivo vasati, sa kailāsaḥ.
- 14 asya cāmuṣya ca jagato lābhāya brāhmaṇo mahyaṃ taṃ yājayati.
- 15 āsāṃ strīṇāṃ hāreṣu puṣpāṇi mlānāni.
- 16 yo’smābhiḥ prāśasyata, tenebhī (tena ebhis) ratnair atoṣyāmahi.
- 17 kṛṣīvalo halaṃ pīnābhyāṃ anaḍudbhyām ayojayat.
- 18 vidvān brāhmaṇo jalād uttīrṇaḥ.
- 19 atra devyāgatā.
- 20 muktānāṃ hāro’sya rākṣasasya kaṇṭhād lagnaḥ.
- 21 kiṃ pāpaṃ dhanakṣīṇena na kriyate?
- 22 idam udyānaṃ puṃbhiḥ strībhiśca pūrṇam.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 123
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 12. Have medicine given quickly (use pass. part. of cTJ, in nom.) to these sick persons. 13. This is that mountain Kailasa, on which Qiva dwells. 14. In order to attain (^TTH, dat.) this and that other world (gen.) the priest offered sacrifice for me caus.). 15. The flowers in the garlands of these women are withered. 16. By that king, who was praised by us, we were delighted with these jewels. 17. The peasant yoked two fat oxen to the plough. 18. The learned Brahman emerged (pass, part.) from the water. 19. Here comes (pass, part.) the queen. 20. A chain of pearls hung (pass, part.) on the neck of this demon. 21. What sin is not committed by persons reduced in fortune? 22. This garden is filled with men and women.
12. Have medicine given quickly (use pass. part. of cTJ, in nom.) to these sick persons. 13. This is that mountain Kailasa, on which Qiva dwells. 14. In order to attain (^TTH, dat.) this and that other world (gen.) the priest offered sacrifice for me caus.). 15. The flowers in the garlands of these women are withered. 16. By that king, who was praised by us, we were delighted with these jewels. 17. The peasant yoked two fat oxen to the plough. 18. The learned Brahman emerged (pass, part.) from the water. 19. Here comes (pass, part.) the queen. 20. A chain of pearls hung (pass, part.) on the neck of this demon. 21. What sin is not committed by persons reduced in fortune? 22. This garden is filled with men and women.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 123
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * I am so-and-so; N. or M.”** Translate the pronoun-forms by ‘here’, and cf. § 225. Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 293. Past Passive Participle, cont’d. B With suffix cf. I. Without union-vowel Much more commonly this parti 114 Lesson XXVIII. ciple is made by adding the suffix rf to the bare root; thus, (cf from ^JT; from fsf; fWH from fWR; from (or si);
* I am so-and-so; N. or M.”** Translate the pronoun-forms by ‘here’, and cf. § 225. Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 293. Past Passive Participle, cont’d. B With suffix cf. I. Without union-vowel Much more commonly this parti 114 Lesson XXVIII. ciple is made by adding the suffix rf to the bare root; thus, (cf from ^JT; from fsf; fWH from fWR; from (or si);

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 124
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 294.If the root end in a consonant other than更，瓦，可，， the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as f follows: l.Final可and可become;thus,f和闭from f可；g闭rom习可；闭from可，
294.If the root end in a consonant other than更，瓦，可，， the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as f follows: l.Final可and可become;thus,f和闭from f可；g闭rom习可；闭from可，

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 124
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2. Final TT becomes , after which, as also after radical final becomes thus, from from . MH and MS are made from MM and MM , and ^H from MM , contrary to 1. TTW makes H"S; and rl^T , rHJ-
2. Final TT becomes , after which, as also after radical final becomes thus, from from . MH and MS are made from MM and MM , and ^H from MM , contrary to 1. TTW makes H"S; and rl^T , rHJ-
294. If the root end in a consonant other than the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as follows :

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 124
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 3. Final becomes ^T, and H , and the following becomes V ; thus, from aW , from . c.
3. Final becomes ^T, and H , and the following becomes V ; thus, from aW , from . c.
294. If the root end in a consonant other than the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as follows :

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 124
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: c. 4. Final is treated in various ways, according to its historical value, a. Sometimes combines with to form before which short vowels (except^) are lengthened; thus, from com-MT?, from from M ! Mg from M^T; but îg forms Mtg. b. Where represents original M , the bination is jq ; thus, from from The root M^ forms also MTtJ- c. , where represents original makes «TjT-
c. 4. Final is treated in various ways, according to its historical value, a. Sometimes combines with to form before which short vowels (except^) are lengthened; thus, from com-MT?, from from M ! Mg from M^T; but îg forms Mtg. b. Where represents original M , the bination is jq ; thus, from from The root M^ forms also MTtJ- c. , where represents original makes «TjT-
294. If the root end in a consonant other than the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as follows :

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 124
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 295. The root before M usually has its weakest form, if there is any where in the verbal system a distinction of strong and weak forms. Thus: 1. A **penultimate nasal** is dropped; e. g., Mrfi from froin from (or ^^); from 2. Roots which are abbreviated in the weak forms of the per feet suffer the same abbreviation here; e. g., "SMi from from cft^, MRlrom^TL from J from MM^ (the same form from^q ); from eSPJ i W from 3. Final is weakened to f in MhT from MT ‘sing’, tf|M from 1TJT ‘drink’; to <; in from TSIT, f^<T from VT ‘put’ (with 5J also changed to ^), fMH from Lesson XXVIII. 115 ‘measure’, and a few others. 4. A final 3T is lost after in ZfcT, ’’EHL W?f, TH (from etc.); and likewise final in vTcP cTcf, ^Rcf, ^?T (from etc.). 5. Isolated cases are flJH from irraj from ‘P,ay’-
295. The root before M usually has its weakest form, if there is any where in the verbal system a distinction of strong and weak forms. Thus: 1. A **penultimate nasal** is dropped; e. g., Mrfi from froin from (or ^^); from 2. Roots which are abbreviated in the weak forms of the per feet suffer the same abbreviation here; e. g., "SMi from from cft^, MRlrom^TL from J from MM^ (the same form from^q ); from eSPJ i W from 3. Final is weakened to f in MhT from MT ‘sing’, tf|M from 1TJT ‘drink’; to <; in from TSIT, f^<T from VT ‘put’ (with 5J also changed to ^), fMH from Lesson XXVIII. 115 ‘measure’, and a few others. 4. A final 3T is lost after in ZfcT, ’’EHL W?f, TH (from etc.); and likewise final in vTcP cTcf, ^Rcf, ^?T (from etc.). 5. Isolated cases are flJH from irraj from ‘P,ay’-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 296. More irregular are the following: 1. Some roots in make participles in (<r1 ; thus, cfit ^T^T, ^TwT, <n^T, ^T^T, IJTwL ^TTwT> from etc. 2. and make iHcf etc. 3. The root Ic^T, ‘give’, forms <^Tf (from the derivative form ^r^T). The contracted form "xj is widely found in composition, especially with prepositions; thus, s|<^"d °r TTrf, Gt^"d or «T1"d, etc.
296. More irregular are the following: 1. Some roots in make participles in (<r1 ; thus, cfit ^T^T, ^TwT, <n^T, ^T^T, IJTwL ^TTwT> from etc. 2. and make iHcf etc. 3. The root Ic^T, ‘give’, forms <^Tf (from the derivative form ^r^T). The contracted form "xj is widely found in composition, especially with prepositions; thus, s|<^"d °r TTrf, Gt^"d or «T1"d, etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 297. II. With union-vowel The suffix with or in the form ^cT, is regularly used with the derivative verb-stems in secondary conjugation, also often with roots of derivative character (like and not infrequently with original roots.
297. II. With union-vowel The suffix with or in the form ^cT, is regularly used with the derivative verb-stems in secondary conjugation, also often with roots of derivative character (like and not infrequently with original roots.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 298. When is added to causative and denominative verbstems the syllables are dropped ; thus, pass. part, xftf<d5 Wfald; Hlf^rT; TT, caus. caus- Pass- Part-WlfTcT; caus. WTeTErfH, WTfHeP
298. When is added to causative and denominative verbstems the syllables are dropped ; thus, pass. part, xftf<d5 Wfald; Hlf^rT; TT, caus. caus- Pass- Part-WlfTcT; caus. WTeTErfH, WTfHeP

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 299. Among the original roots taking may be noticed the following: TTd; ‘fall’, TjfcTcT; cfifqci; ‘dwell’, ^fHcT; c|^ ‘thirst’, WfWcI; ^nr makes 1ft Mie’ rnakes U"fad-
299. Among the original roots taking may be noticed the following: TTd; ‘fall’, TjfcTcT; cfifqci; ‘dwell’, ^fHcT; c|^ ‘thirst’, WfWcI; ^nr makes 1ft Mie’ rnakes U"fad-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 300. A few roots form this participle either with or without the auxiliary ; thus, 4<"ri and lift"d from
300. A few roots form this participle either with or without the auxiliary ; thus, 4<"ri and lift"d from

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 125
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 301. The grammarians reckon as participles of the na-formation a few derivative adjectives, coming from roots which do not make a regular participle; such are ‘burnt’ (^TT); ‘thin’, ‘haggard’ (^PT); Vai îpe’ (^); ‘dry’ ; ^‘expanded’
301. The grammarians reckon as participles of the na-formation a few derivative adjectives, coming from roots which do not make a regular participle; such are ‘burnt’ (^TT); ‘thin’, ‘haggard’ (^PT); Vai îpe’ (^); ‘dry’ ; ^‘expanded’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 126
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 302. Past Active Participle in (or •Tq^). From the past pass. part, is made, by adding the possessive suffix (f. cfcft), a secondary derivative having the meaning and construction of a perfect active participle; thus,
302. Past Active Participle in (or •Tq^). From the past pass. part, is made, by adding the possessive suffix (f. cfcft), a secondary derivative having the meaning and construction of a perfect active participle; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 126
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 303. This participle is almost always used predicatively, and generally without expressed copula, i. e., with the value of a personal perfect-form. Thus, ^TT * T G S“ no one has seen me”; or, with copula, TTTH^Wf^T “thou (fem.) hast come into great misery”. This participle comes to be made even from intransitives; thus, HT “she has gone”.
303. This participle is almost always used predicatively, and generally without expressed copula, i. e., with the value of a personal perfect-form. Thus, ^TT * T G S“ no one has seen me”; or, with copula, TTTH^Wf^T “thou (fem.) hast come into great misery”. This participle comes to be made even from intransitives; thus, HT “she has gone”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 126
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXVIlI. Verbs: (mihyati)be confused or dazed 夏+可in caus.（pralardyate)de- or stupid. ceive. 7+口besiege.. 可飞+r(sarndhyati)equip one-页+可(prarohati)grow up. self. fa+(pravicdti)penetrate, +in caus.(vyapaddyali) enter. kill. 冠a+可in caus.(pravaridyati) gT可*(pala/ate)且ee. continue. 2可enjoy,eat. f+remain over,survive. H可十瓦honor. +了q bestrew.
Vocabulary XXVIlI. Verbs: (mihyati)be confused or dazed 夏+可in caus.（pralardyate)de- or stupid. ceive. 7+口besiege.. 可飞+r(sarndhyati)equip one-页+可(prarohati)grow up. self. fa+(pravicdti)penetrate, +in caus.(vyapaddyali) enter. kill. 冠a+可in caus.(pravaridyati) gT可*(pala/ate)且ee. continue. 2可enjoy,eat. f+remain over,survive. H可十瓦honor. +了q bestrew.
* A t/uasi-root from ‘go’ 4- XJVT ‘away’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 126
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: m.,citizen. m.,end;in loc.,at last. 可TT反m,palace. 夏安可gn,n.pm,Delhi. T可可m,Greek,barbarian. t m.,ass. 可T可m,jackal. T f.,cave. m.,soldier. af n.,behavior,life. 奇dn,army m.,nom.pr. m.,elephant. "A9uasi-root from置‘go’+qtT‘away’. Lesson XXVIII.XXIX. 117 Adj.: (part.from affectio- 可(comp.) more.In neut. nate. sing.as adv.:mostly.
Subst.: m.,citizen. m.,end;in loc.,at last. 可TT反m,palace. 夏安可gn,n.pm,Delhi. T可可m,Greek,barbarian. t m.,ass. 可T可m,jackal. T f.,cave. m.,soldier. af n.,behavior,life. 奇dn,army m.,nom.pr. m.,elephant. "A9uasi-root from置‘go’+qtT‘away’. Lesson XXVIII.XXIX. 117 Adj.: (part.from affectio- 可(comp.) more.In neut. nate. sing.as adv.:mostly.

Back: 1 The coveted wealth were received by these poets who were respected by the famous king.
2 The wandering ascetic who is standing at the door is asked by the house-owner thus: “Where did you come from?”
3 The deer was captured by the dogs and then killed by the hunters.
4 The foolish donkey, deceived by the fox"s lovely words, came into the lion"s den, was killed by it (the lion).
5 The grain of the paddy had sprouted by the water of the clouds that had fallen into the fields.
6 This is known from a letter written by their teacher thus: “The subjects were well learned by the brothers who lived in Kasi.”
7 When the Greeks were coming from the north, king Prthviraja went out with his army from the Indraprastha city.
8 A big battle with the enemies that meet on the way has taken place.
9 The king was defeated in that battle, had been shot by arrows, had fallen from an elephant on the ground, had been captured while still alive by the Greeks, and was later killed by a sword.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 127
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXVIII. (abi.) ttsf: v>fvfHfTETf * r i a i CK. cficrT ^rfv f^ra: vfavr vs: I I ?Wt vuvvtTSTf^Ti: i 3 i hs: vrr: W«?t-fHVTftn: PHTtv^: i 8 i fvsn-i m i vjmigfvW iTgf* r: v^nrtftcTT’ftfWTrvT^Tviv’ir f^f^HTrVTn^vvnvW u $ if f^sfr (abl ) VxOtTST WPH: I I vfv ’T^"eT I c* l rrf^PXT^T VTTf<51H: WU VfcTcfT VVVsffvBv (X ^t
Exercise XXVIII. (abi.) ttsf: v>fvfHfTETf * r i a i CK. cficrT ^rfv f^ra: vfavr vs: I I ?Wt vuvvtTSTf^Ti: i 3 i hs: vrr: W«?t-fHVTftn: PHTtv^: i 8 i fvsn-i m i vjmigfvW iTgf* r: v^nrtftcTT’ftfWTrvT^Tviv’ir f^f^HTrVTn^vvnvW u $ if f^sfr (abl ) VxOtTST WPH: I I vfv ’T^"eT I c* l rrf^PXT^T VTTf<51H: WU VfcTcfT VVVsffvBv (X ^t

Back: - 10 prabhūtās sainikā ghātitā, ye ’vaśiṣṭās te nagare palāyitāḥ. (kecid vaśiṣṭā nagare palāyitāḥ)
- 11 nagarasya dṛḍhā dvāro ’pihitāḥ (dṛḍhās dvāras apihitās), paurā raṇāya saṃnaddhāḥ.
- 12 nagaram āgatair yavanair aparuddham.
- 13 ante yavanā jitavanto balena nagaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ.
- 14 yuvāno vṛddhāśca janā bhūyo hatās, striyo dāsyaś ca kṛtāḥ, paurāṇāṃ mahānti dhanāni hṛtāni, prāsādāśca gṛhāṇi cāgninā dagdhāni.
- 15 pṛthivīrājasyānto yavanair varṇitaḥ, tasya pūrvaṃ jīvitaṃ caṇḍena kavinā gītam.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 127
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: (Th the following render all finite verbs by participles.) 10. Many of the soldiers were killed ; some who survived fled into the city. 11. The gates of the city were shut fast (^<57 ’’MfM the citizens equipped themselves for battle. 12. The Ya- vanas approached and besieged the city (pass). 13. Finally the Yavanas , proving victorious (past act. part), entered the city by force. 14. The young and old men were mostly murdered; the women made slaves; the great possessions of the citizens plundered, the palaces and houses burnt with fire. 15. The end of Prthviraja has been described by the Yavanas, and his previous life sung by the poet Canda. *
(Th the following render all finite verbs by participles.) 10. Many of the soldiers were killed ; some who survived fled into the city. 11. The gates of the city were shut fast (^<57 ’’MfM the citizens equipped themselves for battle. 12. The Ya- vanas approached and besieged the city (pass). 13. Finally the Yavanas , proving victorious (past act. part), entered the city by force. 14. The young and old men were mostly murdered; the women made slaves; the great possessions of the citizens plundered, the palaces and houses burnt with fire. 15. The end of Prthviraja has been described by the Yavanas, and his previous life sung by the poet Canda. *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 127
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 304. Gerund, or Absolutive. The gerund is made in classical Sanskrit by one of the suffixes tTT and
304. Gerund, or Absolutive. The gerund is made in classical Sanskrit by one of the suffixes tTT and

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 128
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 305.A.T.To uncompounded roots is added the suffix T It is usually added directly to the root,but sometimes with the vowel interposed.With regard to the use of and to the form of root before it,this formation closely agrees with that of the participle in or.A final root-consonant is treated as before Roots which make the past pass.part.in generally reject before T. Examples.l.Without inserted夏：司TT,fT,升T,T, 闷T;fg闷T from,Tfrom1T‘place"(cf.f)and from 爱T,可"from T(cf.可)，升网T from;3 T from可瓦， T from习可；可网T from,开Tfrom,f有可Trom2f ‘ind";升中from夏(cf.升过)，T from足(cf.g):T from 毫可，Tfrom可，Tfrom可可(Cf.§295,2)，Tfrom可可@T from可H,T对T from. 2.With inserted烹：fgf网T from1fa区know",了fg网T from 可‘dwell",Tf何T from(cf.Tf可a),Ii网T from可(cf a).
305.A.T.To uncompounded roots is added the suffix T It is usually added directly to the root,but sometimes with the vowel interposed.With regard to the use of and to the form of root before it,this formation closely agrees with that of the participle in or.A final root-consonant is treated as before Roots which make the past pass.part.in generally reject before T. Examples.l.Without inserted夏：司TT,fT,升T,T, 闷T;fg闷T from,Tfrom1T‘place"(cf.f)and from 爱T,可"from T(cf.可)，升网T from;3 T from可瓦， T from习可；可网T from,开Tfrom,f有可Trom2f ‘ind";升中from夏(cf.升过)，T from足(cf.g):T from 毫可，Tfrom可，Tfrom可可(Cf.§295,2)，Tfrom可可@T from可H,T对T from. 2.With inserted烹：fgf网T from1fa区know",了fg网T from 可‘dwell",Tf何T from(cf.Tf可a),Ii网T from可(cf a).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 128
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 306. Some verbs make both forms; thus, from either 7^-or ; from either or ITP^T-
306. Some verbs make both forms; thus, from either 7^-or ; from either or ITP^T-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 128
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 307. Causatives and denominatives in make ; thus, crr^f^n; ^nvf^T.
307. Causatives and denominatives in make ; thus, crr^f^n; ^nvf^T.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 128
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 308. B. Roots in composition with prepositions (or sometimes with elements of other kinds, as adverbs or nouns) take the suffix before which is never inserted. A root which ends in a short vowel adds before Thus, UfXufl^T»f^c€L ^c* T, (^rf^T-V)
308. B. Roots in composition with prepositions (or sometimes with elements of other kinds, as adverbs or nouns) take the suffix before which is never inserted. A root which ends in a short vowel adds before Thus, UfXufl^T»f^c€L ^c* T, (^rf^T-V)

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 128
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 309. Roots in and whose pass. part, ends in form this gerund in ; thus, c7T(^h But such tzm-roots (not an-roots) may preserve the nasal; thus, Final changeable becomes or 5 thus, °7rtÊT, ° remains unaltered; thus, Some roots show a weak form before Lesson XXIX. 119 this suffix; thus, 41^ (U-"d^) from ^T-•T3J from from
309. Roots in and whose pass. part, ends in form this gerund in ; thus, c7T(^h But such tzm-roots (not an-roots) may preserve the nasal; thus, Final changeable becomes or 5 thus, °7rtÊT, ° remains unaltered; thus, Some roots show a weak form before Lesson XXIX. 119 this suffix; thus, 41^ (U-"d^) from ^T-•T3J from from

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 129
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 310. Causals and denominatives in reject those syllables; thus, JT^tT^fcT, TTHTgl; WHET; ^TPH^T^fa (^TT-^ft), |¥f [ffi. But if the root ends in a single consonant and encloses short which is not lengthened in the causative, then the gerund of the caus. ends in ^FST, to distinguish it from the gerund of the simple verb; thus, ger. ^<4 ; caus. ger. êpnrsr.
310. Causals and denominatives in reject those syllables; thus, JT^tT^fcT, TTHTgl; WHET; ^TPH^T^fa (^TT-^ft), |¥f [ffi. But if the root ends in a single consonant and encloses short which is not lengthened in the causative, then the gerund of the caus. ends in ^FST, to distinguish it from the gerund of the simple verb; thus, ger. ^<4 ; caus. ger. êpnrsr.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 129
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 311. The gerund or absolutive is used generally as logical adjunct to the subject of a clause. It denotes an action accompanying or (usually) preceding that which is signified by the verb of the clause. (In the later language it is not always confined to the grammatical subject of the clause as an adjunct.) It has thus virtually the value of an indeclinable participle, present or past, qualifying the actor whose action it describes. Thus, rra; ^T’i ’i
311. The gerund or absolutive is used generally as logical adjunct to the subject of a clause. It denotes an action accompanying or (usually) preceding that which is signified by the verb of the clause. (In the later language it is not always confined to the grammatical subject of the clause as an adjunct.) It has thus virtually the value of an indeclinable participle, present or past, qualifying the actor whose action it describes. Thus, rra; ^T’i ’i
* Of course the absolutives are often best rendered by relative clauses, or even by clauses coordinate with the principal clause.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 129
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 312. The gerunds of some verbs have not much more than prepositional value; thus, ‘having taken’, i. e. ‘with’, like Greek Xa/3aj"v, 6 having released’, i. e. 6 without’, ‘ except’.
312. The gerunds of some verbs have not much more than prepositional value; thus, ‘having taken’, i. e. ‘with’, like Greek Xa/3aj"v, 6 having released’, i. e. 6 without’, ‘ except’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 129
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 313. Before all gerunds may be used the privative or ^5T ; thus, “ without having received”; “ without having summoned. ”
313. Before all gerunds may be used the privative or ^5T ; thus, “ without having received”; “ without having summoned. ”

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 129
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXIX. Verbs: acquire, attain, reach. t (nydsyati) entrust (to H go forth ; die. one’s care). I 4- ^{^(-^5(1 join.
Vocabulary XXIX. Verbs: acquire, attain, reach. t (nydsyati) entrust (to H go forth ; die. one’s care). I 4- ^{^(-^5(1 join.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 130
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: _l_ ^5rf5£r Put at the head, ap-Apoint as ruler over (Zoe.). 4- 31 (pracaZaZi) move on, march. (cintayati) consider. (cyavate) totter, fall. 4- take. Cf. § 312. 4- lay or place on. 4 (nirnayatz) bring to an end, determine, settle. 4. fq (vibhajati, -Ze)distribute. 4- (jnravrajati) wander forth ; leave one’s home to become a wandering ascetic.
_l_ ^5rf5£r Put at the head, ap-Apoint as ruler over (Zoe.). 4- 31 (pracaZaZi) move on, march. (cintayati) consider. (cyavate) totter, fall. 4- take. Cf. § 312. 4- lay or place on. 4 (nirnayatz) bring to an end, determine, settle. 4. fq (vibhajati, -Ze)distribute. 4- (jnravrajati) wander forth ; leave one’s home to become a wandering ascetic.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 130
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: m., victory. f., misfortune. Xf^- m., wing; side; party. m., frog, f-, n. P?* , Ceylon. "2JX m-, hero. ^rrtpr n., means, device. Wh m., bridge, dike. m., n. pr., a monkey-king, xjj et^j^ (nom. °^J^) m., fire.
m., victory. f., misfortune. Xf^- m., wing; side; party. m., frog, f-, n. P?* , Ceylon. "2JX m-, hero. ^rrtpr n., means, device. Wh m., bridge, dike. m., n. pr., a monkey-king, xjj et^j^ (nom. °^J^) m., fire.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 130
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Adj.: disagreeable. responsible, trustworthy. du., both. f- ’* T’ little, small. f. o-^TT, daily, regular, on the head. Cx Prep os.: JjfTT (postpos., with acc.) against.
Adj.: disagreeable. responsible, trustworthy. du., both. f- ’* T’ little, small. f. o-^TT, daily, regular, on the head. Cx Prep os.: JjfTT (postpos., with acc.) against.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 130
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst* : m-, Plan> design. n., bringing. cfifq m., monkey. m., elephant.
Subst* : m-, Plan> design. n., bringing. cfifq m., monkey. m., elephant.

Back: - Certainly, when people reach misfortune, even a small person will do something undesirable to him.
- When the elephant sinks into mud, so the frog landed on its head.
- 1 After being closed to the teacher, after studying the Vedas, after marrying a woman, after giving birth to a son, after doing the daily routine of the Brahmana, after performing the sacrifice and after giving alms, a Brahmana does not depart from the Brahma world after death.
- 2 Those people, after eating and after drinking, fell asleep.
- 3 The servant, after telling his master about the coming of the wise ministers, left.
- 4 Joined by Hanumat and other monkeys in friendship, Rāma, having built the bridge over the ocean, entered Laṅkā and slew Rāvaṇa.
- 5 The lire which had burned all the forests had now been extinguished.
- 6 Lord Indra together with the mighty Maruts went out to bring back the cows.
- 7 The teacher has called the disciples, has been well worshiped by them, taught them the Rveda and Yajurveda.
- 8 After the offering had been made, wealth was again given to the priests by the host (yájamāna).
        haviṣeṣṭvartvigbhyo bhūyo dhanaṃ yajamānena dattam |
- 9 This kind of suffering could not be tolerated by anyone other than you.
- 10 After knowing the strength of his enemies by the hidden spies, after delegating all duties to the ministers, and after appointing the brave and faithful men into the army, the king should go out to light.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 130
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXIX. 府f後转i侖可安升网f信T可式风！ 章f行对f欣f诞升对可f行双：‖9存" Tgf何网a网fu问g育可f何网TfTf 四可8T可司Tf号TTTf行可支可T可Tu时可可可司可时前T风191可T升网T奇行：T:1又1升和i开- faT田TT田寸Tf和分f有可升f项1：í31双叉T可开a 奇图f和f:守升叶对f欣对可喝T可f何恐可文T升TT 西阿T可181更荷可时T时y可TT可：141可可- 可重T男T民T可可可TT辰T四T可fi:!专|fI网TT最可西奇：网对f定四升布可Tmf和可191f网f Lesson XXIX.XXX. 121 命升可同向可开！云1可i可承T可命f向T飞对t乙开1Q1危t:更西i可寸f何f位f和fag可行可TT5T可fr团网T同TT可f向i藏冠！90‖
Exercise XXIX. 府f後转i侖可安升网f信T可式风！ 章f行对f欣f诞升对可f行双：‖9存" Tgf何网a网fu问g育可f何网TfTf 四可8T可司Tf号TTTf行可支可T可Tu时可可可司可时前T风191可T升网T奇行：T:1又1升和i开- faT田TT田寸Tf和分f有可升f项1：í31双叉T可开a 奇图f和f:守升叶对f欣对可喝T可f何恐可文T升TT 西阿T可181更荷可时T时y可TT可：141可可- 可重T男T民T可可可TT辰T四T可fi:!专|fI网TT最可西奇：网对f定四升布可Tmf和可191f网f Lesson XXIX.XXX. 121 命升可同向可开！云1可i可承T可命f向T飞对t乙开1Q1危t:更西i可寸f何f位f和fag可行可TT5T可fr团网T同TT可f向i藏冠！90‖

Back: - 11 nṛpaḥ pratīcāṃ diśi sāmantān vijitya prācāṃ diśi sāmantān prati pracalitavān. (ākrāntaḥ)
- 12 tuṣṭair vaṇigbhir dhanaṃ gṛhītaṃ, nṛpāya ca ratnāni dattāni.
- 13 saṃdhyāyāṃ devān praṇamyāgnau ca samidho hitvā vāpyā jalam ānayeti (ānaya iti) uktvā guruḥ kaṭe niṣaṇṇaḥ.
- 14 śūro dviḍbhir yuddhvā tasya jayena mahatīṃ kīrtiṃ labdhavān.
- 15 brāhmaṇaḥ ātmanam dhanam tyaktvā pravrajitaḥ.
- 16 vanig bhṛtyāyābhiprāyaṃ (bhṛtyāya abhiprāyaṃ) nivedya taṃ grāmaṃ prāsthāpayat.
- 17 gṛhasya patir dhanam ānāyya daridrebhyo vyabhajat.
- 18 rājāna ubhayor vāco ’srutvā vyavahārān na nirṇayeyuḥ.
- 19 yo balavato dviṣo ’vagaṇya teṣāṃ ca jayasya sādhanam acintayitvā tair yudhyate, sa vināśam ṛcchati.
- 20 yo vedam anadhītya yogī bhavati, sa nirvāṇam alabdhvā narake tu patati.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 131
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 11. After the king had conquered the vassals of the western lands he marched (pass. part.} against the eastern vassals. 12. The merchants, in joy (pass, part.}, took the money and gave the jewels to the king (use ger., and pass, constr.}. 13. “After adoring the gods at twilight, and placing fagots on the fire, bring water from the cistern”: thus having spoken, the teacher seated himself (pass, part.} on the mat. 14. The hero fought (ger.} with bis enemies and gained (part.} great glory by the victory over them (gen.}. 15. The Brahman, abandoning his own (pl.}, became an ascetic (TJ-pass.part.}. 16. When the merchant had imparted caus.} bis plan to the servant, he sent him into the village. 17. The master of the house had money brought (ger.} and distributed it to the poor. 18. Let not kings decide law-suits without hearing the arguments (•q-p^) of both sides. 19. Whoever despises powerful foes, and fights with them without considering the means to victory (gen.}, perishes. 20. Whoever becomes an ascetic without having studied the Veda, attains (ger.} not salvation, but falls into hell (loc.}.
11. After the king had conquered the vassals of the western lands he marched (pass. part.} against the eastern vassals. 12. The merchants, in joy (pass, part.}, took the money and gave the jewels to the king (use ger., and pass, constr.}. 13. “After adoring the gods at twilight, and placing fagots on the fire, bring water from the cistern”: thus having spoken, the teacher seated himself (pass, part.} on the mat. 14. The hero fought (ger.} with bis enemies and gained (part.} great glory by the victory over them (gen.}. 15. The Brahman, abandoning his own (pl.}, became an ascetic (TJ-pass.part.}. 16. When the merchant had imparted caus.} bis plan to the servant, he sent him into the village. 17. The master of the house had money brought (ger.} and distributed it to the poor. 18. Let not kings decide law-suits without hearing the arguments (•q-p^) of both sides. 19. Whoever despises powerful foes, and fights with them without considering the means to victory (gen.}, perishes. 20. Whoever becomes an ascetic without having studied the Veda, attains (ger.} not salvation, but falls into hell (loc.}.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 131
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 314. Infinitive. The later language has a single infinitive, the ending of which is (or The root takes guna, when possible.
314. Infinitive. The later language has a single infinitive, the ending of which is (or The root takes guna, when possible.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 131
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 315. The ending HK is added directly: 1. To almost all roots ending in vowels, except those in and changeable Thus, MT, Ml cjH 5 ’’ft, ^9^5 !•’2.
315. The ending HK is added directly: 1. To almost all roots ending in vowels, except those in and changeable Thus, MT, Ml cjH 5 ’’ft, ^9^5 !•’2.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 131
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2. To a number of roots ending in consonants. As root 122 Lesson XXX. finals, cK, R, R and R remain unchanged before gK? thu8’ 7r?jiK; hr, * pgK; htr, htijk; RRRJ rr, mTftk; hr ‘curse’, RRR; 3RR ‘dwell’, R»jJK — Other finals are changed according to the rules given in Lesson XXVIII for the conversion of final consonants before the participial suffix cf- Thus, RR, RjJK; TOK’ TORTR; RR-r^r; HR, torr; gpV toY^K; rrx, HsgRj rT<oR; Rf, ^jk; K!T» —Final becomes R, and final K > RJ thus, TOR, TORJK5 ‘know’, TjH (also RfRRK); ’ik, rtok
2. To a number of roots ending in consonants. As root 122 Lesson XXX. finals, cK, R, R and R remain unchanged before gK? thu8’ 7r?jiK; hr, * pgK; htr, htijk; RRRJ rr, mTftk; hr ‘curse’, RRR; 3RR ‘dwell’, R»jJK — Other finals are changed according to the rules given in Lesson XXVIII for the conversion of final consonants before the participial suffix cf- Thus, RR, RjJK; TOK’ TORTR; RR-r^r; HR, torr; gpV toY^K; rrx, HsgRj rT<oR; Rf, ^jk; K!T» —Final becomes R, and final K > RJ thus, TOR, TORJK5 ‘know’, TjH (also RfRRK); ’ik, rtok
* The increments of are sometimes X an<^ XT instead of wx and ^5nX> especially where a difficult combination of consonants is thus avoided.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 132
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 316. The ending HR with R (in the form RRR) is taken bX roots in final long Rf and the root 1ft, with a few other vowelroots; by the majority of roots in consonants; and by verbs of the secondary conjugations. Thus, 5J, RfRgR; 1ft, UlRtrJK’ tfrogK; rjr, KftRgn; (cf- §"01)-
316. The ending HR with R (in the form RRR) is taken bX roots in final long Rf and the root 1ft, with a few other vowelroots; by the majority of roots in consonants; and by verbs of the secondary conjugations. Thus, 5J, RfRgR; 1ft, UlRtrJK’ tfrogK; rjr, KftRgn; (cf- §"01)-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 132
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 317. Causatives and denominatives in have the root being treated as in the present; thus, rr^, crref^H^.
317. Causatives and denominatives in have the root being treated as in the present; thus, rr^, crref^H^.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 132
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 318. Some roots in consonants insert or reject at pleasure; thus, or The root TH? makes u<VgH
318. Some roots in consonants insert or reject at pleasure; thus, or The root TH? makes u<VgH
* In all the tense-systems, and in derivation, the root exhibits often the vrddhi instead of the ûna-strengthening.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 132
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 319. The rules for the use o f T in the infinitive agree closely with those governing its use in the formation of the s-future and of the nomen agentis in 7^.
319. The rules for the use o f T in the infinitive agree closely with those governing its use in the formation of the s-future and of the nomen agentis in 7^.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 132
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The increments of are sometimes X an<^ XT instead of wx and ^5nX> especially where a difficult combination of consonants is thus avoided. * In all the tense-systems, and in derivation, the root exhibits often the vrddhi instead of the ûna-strengthening. 320. Uses of the infinitive The chief use of the infinitive is as equivalent to an accusative, as the object of a verb, especially of the verbs ‘be able’, and ‘be worthy’, ‘have the right * Lesson XXX. 123 or power"; thus, “**he is able to tell**”; 4^ cj “**the prince ought to hear it**”. is often thus used with >•the infinitive to express a respectful request or entreaty, as in the last example. The infinitive is also often found with verbs of motion, and with those meaning ‘desire’, * hope ’, ‘notice’, ‘know’, and the like.
* The increments of are sometimes X an<^ XT instead of wx and ^5nX> especially where a difficult combination of consonants is thus avoided. * In all the tense-systems, and in derivation, the root exhibits often the vrddhi instead of the ûna-strengthening. 320. Uses of the infinitive The chief use of the infinitive is as equivalent to an accusative, as the object of a verb, especially of the verbs ‘be able’, and ‘be worthy’, ‘have the right * Lesson XXX. 123 or power"; thus, “**he is able to tell**”; 4^ cj “**the prince ought to hear it**”. is often thus used with >•the infinitive to express a respectful request or entreaty, as in the last example. The infinitive is also often found with verbs of motion, and with those meaning ‘desire’, * hope ’, ‘notice’, ‘know’, and the like.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 133
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 321. But often the infinitive has a case-value not accusative. Thus, a dative value: HtjvTOK “**there is food to eat**” i. e. “**for eating**”; a genitive value: RRWT “**capable of going**”. Even a construction as nominative is not unknown.
321. But often the infinitive has a case-value not accusative. Thus, a dative value: HtjvTOK “**there is food to eat**” i. e. “**for eating**”; a genitive value: RRWT “**capable of going**”. Even a construction as nominative is not unknown.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 133
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 322. In certain connections the infinitive has a ûasz-passive force. Thus, “**begun to be made** ”; <T “ **it is not fit to be heard**.” This is especially frequent along with the passive forms ofjf^; thus, * T IJWtfh “**he cannot abandon**”, but TRW TT4* 1W “**he cannot be abandoned**”; (4* 1 “**the two men can be brought hither**.”
322. In certain connections the infinitive has a ûasz-passive force. Thus, “**begun to be made** ”; <T “ **it is not fit to be heard**.” This is especially frequent along with the passive forms ofjf^; thus, * T IJWtfh “**he cannot abandon**”, but TRW TT4* 1W “**he cannot be abandoned**”; (4* 1 “**the two men can be brought hither**.”

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 133
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 323. Future Passive Participle, or Gerundive. Certain derivative adjectives, mostly secondary, have acquired a value quite like that of the Latin gerundive; thus, (from ‘to be done’, faciendus. They may be made from every verb. The ordinary suffixes are three: and ^<1) ^4-
323. Future Passive Participle, or Gerundive. Certain derivative adjectives, mostly secondary, have acquired a value quite like that of the Latin gerundive; thus, (from ‘to be done’, faciendus. They may be made from every verb. The ordinary suffixes are three: and ^<1) ^4-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 133
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The original value of this suffix is 2a. Hence the conversion of H to and of ^5Tt to before it. 324. A. Suffix If. a. Before this suffix final radical ^TT becomes -Qj thus, from ^T, 7^; RT, b. Other final vowels sometimes remain unchanged, sometimes have the guna or even the t"rofcZAi-strengthening; andXJ often, and always, are treated before * as before a vowel; thus, from flT, and ; from and from and from ; from 5J, from — c. In a few instances, a short vowel adds before the suffix; thus, V^(T)’ (^)- d" Medial remains 124 Lesson XXX. unchanged in one class of words, and is lengthened in another class; thus, but (^> e. Initial or medial », u, and r- vowels are sometimes unchanged, sometimes have the ^wna-strengthening; thus, /. The root makes A form (from the defective root ) is assigned to makes and g. Causatives and denominatives in are treated as in the present, but omit the syllables thus,
* The original value of this suffix is 2a. Hence the conversion of H to and of ^5Tt to before it. 324. A. Suffix If. a. Before this suffix final radical ^TT becomes -Qj thus, from ^T, 7^; RT, b. Other final vowels sometimes remain unchanged, sometimes have the guna or even the t"rofcZAi-strengthening; andXJ often, and always, are treated before * as before a vowel; thus, from flT, and ; from and from and from ; from 5J, from — c. In a few instances, a short vowel adds before the suffix; thus, V^(T)’ (^)- d" Medial remains 124 Lesson XXX. unchanged in one class of words, and is lengthened in another class; thus, but (^> e. Initial or medial », u, and r- vowels are sometimes unchanged, sometimes have the ^wna-strengthening; thus, /. The root makes A form (from the defective root ) is assigned to makes and g. Causatives and denominatives in are treated as in the present, but omit the syllables thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 134
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 325. B. Suffix This is a secondary adjective derivative from the infinitival noun in cf Hence, both as regards the form of root and the use or omission of the rules are the same as for the formation of the infinitive; thus, W (1ft)-
325. B. Suffix This is a secondary adjective derivative from the infinitival noun in cf Hence, both as regards the form of root and the use or omission of the rules are the same as for the formation of the infinitive; thus, W (1ft)-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 134
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 326. C. Suffix [tuft’d- Generally radical vowels will be found gunated before this suffix; causatives and denominatives in are treated as in the present-system, without the syllables ; thus, (^t), (m), wfk (^j),
326. C. Suffix [tuft’d- Generally radical vowels will be found gunated before this suffix; causatives and denominatives in are treated as in the present-system, without the syllables ; thus, (^t), (m), wfk (^j),

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 134
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 327. The gerundives in cf oEj are common in the impersonal passive construction described in Lesson X, and not seldom have a purely future sense; thus, ‘‘**with that thou shalt be happy**”.
327. The gerundives in cf oEj are common in the impersonal passive construction described in Lesson X, and not seldom have a purely future sense; thus, ‘‘**with that thou shalt be happy**”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 134
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Verbs: (arhati) have the right, etc. (cf. § 320.)finish, attain. pay. A 4- ^5TfH (abhigdcchati) visit, attend. *TT< + dive under (acc.). cfq^ (tapati, -te) burn (tr. and intr.); pain; in pass., suffer, do penance. VI + fW arrange, ordain, order. «T<T (nrtyati) dance.
Verbs: (arhati) have the right, etc. (cf. § 320.)finish, attain. pay. A 4- ^5TfH (abhigdcchati) visit, attend. *TT< + dive under (acc.). cfq^ (tapati, -te) burn (tr. and intr.); pain; in pass., suffer, do penance. VI + fW arrange, ordain, order. «T<T (nrtyati) dance.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 135
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: -f- TT be mighty, able; v al ere. 4- JJ (pravartate) continue, go on.
-f- TT be mighty, able; v al ere. 4- JJ (pravartate) continue, go on.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 135
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: TJg stout, fat. acceptably speaking. fruitful. destined or suitable for sacrifice. fsif^cl (part, of t^-VT) ordained, f., “’SIT, capable, able, self-existent; as m. subst., epithet of Brahma. Adv.:enough, very; w. instr., enough of, away with; w. dat., suitable for. at pleasure.
TJg stout, fat. acceptably speaking. fruitful. destined or suitable for sacrifice. fsif^cl (part, of t^-VT) ordained, f., “’SIT, capable, able, self-existent; as m. subst., epithet of Brahma. Adv.:enough, very; w. instr., enough of, away with; w. dat., suitable for. at pleasure.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 135
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Snbst.: cfrq^"^f m., busbandman. TftH n., song, singing. <=pq^ n., heat; self-torture. n., drama, play. <TtF n., dance, dancing. n., body, figure. m., convention, company. n., Vedic melody, song; pl., the Samaveda. Adj.: cTÛ, f- °t“> young, delicate.
Snbst.: cfrq^"^f m., busbandman. TftH n., song, singing. <=pq^ n., heat; self-torture. n., drama, play. <TtF n., dance, dancing. n., body, figure. m., convention, company. n., Vedic melody, song; pl., the Samaveda. Adj.: cTÛ, f- °t“> young, delicate.

Back: 1 All the townspeople have come to see the play that has been composed by Kalidasa.
2 The servants with pleasant words said to the king thus: “Your majesty is able to defeat all enemies with both arms.”
3 To wash away all sin, Rgveda should be recited, or Samaveda should be chanted by the man after having been diving into the water.
4 The hermit went to the forest to practice asceticism strictly.
5 Now the thought of riding horse has come to me who was tired on the way.
6 A Brahmana should give birth to a son in order to pay off the debt that should be paid to the ancestors.
7 You should perform more sacrificial ceremonies to attain heaven.
8 The king has commanded that a horse suitable for sacrifice should be released by you to wander in all directions freely.
9 Your language is impossible for anyone to understand. (People cannot understand your language.)
10 The farmer must be ordered to harness two fat cows in the cart.
11 The idea of creating the world was already done by Brahma.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 135
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXX. fl"af xftTTi TfWrf I A • ^1" 1 r. 1 xrnnw’Hrr^wTft PZ’ftsn: i+nf^r ’T-"snf^r i $ 1 fltsi 1 a 1 A Tjfzi TTfH^Trn I M I tPH^TT ^TcJ^mupTTn^fH ^T^TW: qd apracb • £ 1 1 •’dprifR 1 1 TfH TTSnf<3?TH I I H- ^cri HT^T (§ 322) I Q I 1 qo 1 r * f: ii ar ii ^Sentences with must may be rendered either with or with
Exercise XXX. fl"af xftTTi TfWrf I A • ^1" 1 r. 1 xrnnw’Hrr^wTft PZ’ftsn: i+nf^r ’T-"snf^r i $ 1 fltsi 1 a 1 A Tjfzi TTfH^Trn I M I tPH^TT ^TcJ^mupTTn^fH ^T^TW: qd apracb • £ 1 1 •’dprifR 1 1 TfH TTSnf<3?TH I I H- ^cri HT^T (§ 322) I Q I 1 qo 1 r * f: ii ar ii ^Sentences with must may be rendered either with or with

Back: (Sentences with must may be rendered either with √arh or with gerundives)
- 12. A Brahmacārin must not visit any companies to see (pra-√īkṣ) dancing or to hear singing.
- 12 brahmacārī nṛttaṃ prekṣituṃ vā gītaṃ śrotuṃ vā kiñcit samājam abhigantuṃ nārhati. (na arhati)
- 13. Remembering that works will be fruitful in the other life (use “thus thinking”, after or. recta), a man must strive to perform what is ordained.
- 13 karmabhir anyasmin loke phalavadbhir bhavitavyam iti matvā naro vihitaṃ sādhayitum (kartum) arhati.
- 14. The maidens seated themselves (pass. part.) in the garden to bind wreaths.
- 14 udyāne niṣiṇṇabhiḥ kanyābhir mālā baddhāḥ. (kanyā mālā baddhum udyāne niṣiṇṇāḥ)
- 15. True friends are able to save from misfortune.
- 15 bhaktāni mitrāṇi duḥkhād uddhartum samarthāḥ.
- 16. The daughters came (pass, part.) to bow before their parents.
- 16 kanyābhiḥ pitarau vanditum āgatam. (kanyāḥ pitarau vanditum āgatāḥ)
- 17. How is the delicate body of this fair one capable of enduring penance?
- 17 kathaṃ rūpavatyās kanyāyās taruṇaṃ vapus tapas soḍhuṃ samartham.
- 18. You must become a scholar (use bhavant, and cf. §177).
- 18 bhavatā viduṣā (paṇḍitena) bhavitavyam.
- 19. You must bring a boat to cross the river.
- 19 (tvaṃ) nadīṃ tartuṃ nāvam ānetum arhasi.
- 20. Who is able to stop the mighty wind?
- 20 ko ’pi balavantaṃ marutaṃ roddhuṃ samarthaḥ.
- 21. The gentlemen (bhavant) are to read this letter.
- 21 bhavanta idaṃ likhitaṃ paṭhitum arhanti.
- 22. Having finished the Veda, he went on to study the other sciences.
- 22 sa vedam adhītyānyāni (adhītya anyāni) śāstrāṇi śikṣitum ārabdhaḥ.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 135
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: ^Sentences with must may be rendered either with or with gerundives"). 12. A Brahmacarin must not visit any companies to see (U-t;vr) dancing or to hear singing. 13. Remembering that works will be fruitful in the other life (use “thus thinking”, after or. recta), a man must strive to perform what is ordained. 126 Lesson XXX. XXXI. 14. The maidens seated themselves {pass. part.) in the garden to bind wreaths. 15. True friends are able to save from misfortune. 16. The daughters came {pass, part.) to bow before their parents. 17. How is the delicate body of this fair one capable of enduring penance? 18. You must become a scholar {use , and cf. § 177). 19. You must bring a boat to cross the river. 20. Who is able to stop the mighty wind? 21. The gentlemen {use ) are to read this letter. 22. Having finished the Veda, he went on to study the other sciences.
^Sentences with must may be rendered either with or with gerundives"). 12. A Brahmacarin must not visit any companies to see (U-t;vr) dancing or to hear singing. 13. Remembering that works will be fruitful in the other life (use “thus thinking”, after or. recta), a man must strive to perform what is ordained. 126 Lesson XXX. XXXI. 14. The maidens seated themselves {pass. part.) in the garden to bind wreaths. 15. True friends are able to save from misfortune. 16. The daughters came {pass, part.) to bow before their parents. 17. How is the delicate body of this fair one capable of enduring penance? 18. You must become a scholar {use , and cf. § 177). 19. You must bring a boat to cross the river. 20. Who is able to stop the mighty wind? 21. The gentlemen {use ) are to read this letter. 22. Having finished the Veda, he went on to study the other sciences.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 136
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXI. 328. Numerals. Cardinals: 2, 3, 4, TRf 5, XT* 6, MH 7, ’Ml® 8, 9, 10. — 41, 42, 43,14, 15, tfr-gTr 16, 47, 48, 49, fwUfW 20. — -QSfifshlfTf 21, ^Tf^’ST"fn 22, etc. —30, 40> 50, go, 70, frf 80, ^c?frT 90, 100. — f^cf or ![?( 200. — 1000, or 2000, cior 100 000.
Lesson XXXI. 328. Numerals. Cardinals: 2, 3, 4, TRf 5, XT* 6, MH 7, ’Ml® 8, 9, 10. — 41, 42, 43,14, 15, tfr-gTr 16, 47, 48, 49, fwUfW 20. — -QSfifshlfTf 21, ^Tf^’ST"fn 22, etc. —30, 40> 50, go, 70, frf 80, ^c?frT 90, 100. — f^cf or ![?( 200. — 1000, or 2000, cior 100 000.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 136
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 329. The numbers between the even tens are made by prefixing the unit-number to the ten; thus, ’rgfWufH 25. But note: V=fiT^TT, not. 11. 42, 52, 62, 72 and 92, either or ^T^°, etc.; 43—73, and 93, either or etc.; 48—78, and 98, either j * ® or I"M CM 1° etc. 96 is Note also : 42, etc., but for 82 only gnflfTr; 23, MrqfMcnjcf 33, for 83 only ^nftfrl ; TTTÎT 16, 26, etc. ; 28, 38, 88.
329. The numbers between the even tens are made by prefixing the unit-number to the ten; thus, ’rgfWufH 25. But note: V=fiT^TT, not. 11. 42, 52, 62, 72 and 92, either or ^T^°, etc.; 43—73, and 93, either or etc.; 48—78, and 98, either j * ® or I"M CM 1° etc. 96 is Note also : 42, etc., but for 82 only gnflfTr; 23, MrqfMcnjcf 33, for 83 only ^nftfrl ; TTTÎT 16, 26, etc. ; 28, 38, 88.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 136
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 330. There are other ways of expressing the numbers between the tens. Thus: 1. By the use of the adj. ‘deficient’, in composition; e. g. Pl ‘20 less 1’, i. e. 19. This usage is not common except for the nines. Sometimes is left off’, and , etc., have the same value. 2. By the adj. or Lesson XXXI. 127 \5tVC ‘more’, also in composition; e. g., <f (also 98.
330. There are other ways of expressing the numbers between the tens. Thus: 1. By the use of the adj. ‘deficient’, in composition; e. g. Pl ‘20 less 1’, i. e. 19. This usage is not common except for the nines. Sometimes is left off’, and , etc., have the same value. 2. By the adj. or Lesson XXXI. 127 \5tVC ‘more’, also in composition; e. g., <f (also 98.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 331. The same methods are used to form the odd numbers above 100. Thus, TjcfiUrH^ 101, 108, W170-5’4IHW< 107.
331. The same methods are used to form the odd numbers above 100. Thus, TjcfiUrH^ 101, 108, W170-5’4IHW< 107.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 332. Inflection of cardinals. 1. TJcfi is declined like , at § 231 (pl.: ‘some’, ‘certain ones’). The dual does not occur. Ifcg sometimes means ‘a certain’; or even ‘an, a’, as an indefinite article.
332. Inflection of cardinals. 1. TJcfi is declined like , at § 231 (pl.: ‘some’, ‘certain ones’). The dual does not occur. Ifcg sometimes means ‘a certain’; or even ‘an, a’, as an indefinite article.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2. (dual only) is quite regular; thus, nom.-acc.-voc. m., f. n. ^TWTTR,
2. (dual only) is quite regular; thus, nom.-acc.-voc. m., f. n. ^TWTTR,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 3, is in masc. and neut. nearly regular; the fem. has the stem Thus, nom. m. acc. m. nom.-acc. n. instr. , .dat.-abl. gen. 1^1 mH* ! , loc. fWg-Fem.: nom.-acc. instr. dat.-abl. gen-loc.
3, is in masc. and neut. nearly regular; the fem. has the stem Thus, nom. m. acc. m. nom.-acc. n. instr. , .dat.-abl. gen. 1^1 mH* ! , loc. fWg-Fem.: nom.-acc. instr. dat.-abl. gen-loc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 4. has in strong cases; the fem. stem is ^TT^T-Thus, nom. m. , acc. m. ; nom.-acc. n. -q
4. has in strong cases; the fem. stem is ^TT^T-Thus, nom. m. , acc. m. ; nom.-acc. n. -q

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: (5—19.~) These numbers have no distinction of gender. They are inflected with some irregularity as plurals. Thus: 5, 7, 9, 10. ^1T, and compounds of are similarly declined.
(5—19.~) These numbers have no distinction of gender. They are inflected with some irregularity as plurals. Thus: 5, 7, 9, 10. ^1T, and compounds of are similarly declined.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 6. TP? as follows: WHC
6. TP? as follows: WHC

Back: Irregular declension of अष्ट (aṣṭá)
 | Plural
Nominative | अष्टौ (aṣṭaú), अष्ट (aṣṭá)
Vocative | अष्टौ (áṣṭau), अष्ट (áṣṭa)
Accusative | अष्टौ (aṣṭaú), अष्ट (aṣṭá)
Instrumental | अष्टाभिः (aṣṭābhíḥ), अष्टभिः (aṣṭábhiḥ)
Dative | अष्टाभ्यः (aṣṭābhyáḥ), अष्टभ्यः (aṣṭábhyaḥ)
Ablative | अष्टाभ्यः (aṣṭābhyáḥ), अष्टभ्यः (aṣṭábhyaḥ)
Genitive | अष्टनाम् (aṣṭānā́m)
Locative | अष्टासु (aṣṭāsú), अष्टसु (aṣṭásu)
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 8. may follow or be declined thus:
8. may follow or be declined thus:

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 20, 30, etc. fWvrfrT, etc., are declined regularly as fem. stems, in all numbers. 100, 1000. VT7T and are declined regularly as neut. stems, in all numbers.
20, 30, etc. fWvrfrT, etc., are declined regularly as fem. stems, in all numbers. 100, 1000. VT7T and are declined regularly as neut. stems, in all numbers.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 137
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 333. Construction of numerals. 1. The words from 1 to 19 are used as adjectives, agreeing in case (and in gender, if possible) 128 Lesson XXXI. with the nouns. 2. The numerals above 19 are usually treated as nouns, either taking the numbered noun as a dependent genitive, or standing in the sing, in apposition with it; thus, V[ci or VI cf “a hundred female slaves”; “ in sixty autumns ”.
333. Construction of numerals. 1. The words from 1 to 19 are used as adjectives, agreeing in case (and in gender, if possible) 128 Lesson XXXI. with the nouns. 2. The numerals above 19 are usually treated as nouns, either taking the numbered noun as a dependent genitive, or standing in the sing, in apposition with it; thus, V[ci or VI cf “a hundred female slaves”; “ in sixty autumns ”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 138
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 334. Ordinals. ‘first’, HcfhT, (to 19th, the same as the cardinals, but declined like X*’ etc.); fW or fcJUfHcm 20th-, f^TTT or 30th, etc. Note also or U cftl * f1^ VrfH cTR or ârsrfW’srfHcHT, 19th. The shorter forms (f^VJ etc.) are by far the commoner.
334. Ordinals. ‘first’, HcfhT, (to 19th, the same as the cardinals, but declined like X*’ etc.); fW or fcJUfHcm 20th-, f^TTT or 30th, etc. Note also or U cftl * f1^ VrfH cTR or ârsrfW’srfHcHT, 19th. The shorter forms (f^VJ etc.) are by far the commoner.
* forms no ordinal.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 138
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 335. innT, and cfcfta make their fem. in °^T; the rest, in Occasional forms of the pronominal declension are met with from the first three; but the usual declension of nouns is the normal one for ordinals also.
335. innT, and cfcfta make their fem. in °^T; the rest, in Occasional forms of the pronominal declension are met with from the first three; but the usual declension of nouns is the normal one for ordinals also.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 138
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 336. Numeral adverbs. 1. ‘once’; to ‘ twice ’; ‘thrice’; ‘four times’; or ‘five times’; and so on, with or IXJL "" 2. ‘in one way ’; or ‘in two ways faVT or ^VT, ^<p4T, T1ST or-qrgVT, etc. — 3. one by one’; ‘by hundreds’, e(c.
336. Numeral adverbs. 1. ‘once’; to ‘ twice ’; ‘thrice’; ‘four times’; or ‘five times’; and so on, with or IXJL "" 2. ‘in one way ’; or ‘in two ways faVT or ^VT, ^<p4T, T1ST or-qrgVT, etc. — 3. one by one’; ‘by hundreds’, e(c.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 138
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXI. Verbs: 4- 44^ (**saihkaldyati**) put together, add. + pass (of time). Wof in caus. (bhojayatP) feed. S. X 4- {abhisincdti) anoint as king. cite, mention. (jdlpati") speak, chat.
Vocabulary XXXI. Verbs: 4- 44^ (**saihkaldyati**) put together, add. + pass (of time). Wof in caus. (bhojayatP) feed. S. X 4- {abhisincdti) anoint as king. cite, mention. (jdlpati") speak, chat.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 138
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * forms no ordinal. Subst.:m.9 the fourth Veda. **n**-> n- Pr- a city. Lesson XXXI. 129 n*’ “Iron Age” of the world. n., wheel. ^ * 7) fd1^ **n*** » astronomy; astronomical text-book. Uld **n**-j philosophical system. •T^^T **n**., lunar mansion. MI **m**--> n- Pr-, descendant of Pandu. one of a class of works on the creation of the world. **m**., n. pr., a famous king. TTî m., Scythian. HVK **n**., body. **f**., branch, edition , re daction. m., year. Adv.: (w- a^- — often postpos.") after, immediately after, sometimes (in altern.). namely, to wit. H"nSTcFH^ at present.
* forms no ordinal. Subst.:m.9 the fourth Veda. **n**-> n- Pr- a city. Lesson XXXI. 129 n*’ “Iron Age” of the world. n., wheel. ^ * 7) fd1^ **n*** » astronomy; astronomical text-book. Uld **n**-j philosophical system. •T^^T **n**., lunar mansion. MI **m**--> n- Pr-, descendant of Pandu. one of a class of works on the creation of the world. **m**., n. pr., a famous king. TTî m., Scythian. HVK **n**., body. **f**., branch, edition , re daction. m., year. Adv.: (w- a^- — often postpos.") after, immediately after, sometimes (in altern.). namely, to wit. H"nSTcFH^ at present.

Back: sakṛj jalpanti rājānaḥ sakṛj jalpanti sādhavaḥ |
sakṛt kanyāḥ pradīyante trīṇy etāni satāṃ sakṛt || 17 ||
The kings speak only once. The good speak only one.
The maidens are given for marriage only once. These three happen only once in the case of the good.
1. saptānāmṛṣīṇāṃ śarīrāṇi divi rajamānāni dṛśyante |
The bodies of the seven seers appear shining in the sky.
2. catvāro vedā vidyante' ṣṭādaśa purāṇāni ṣaṭtriṃśat smṛtayaḥ ṣaḍ darśanānīti viduṣāṃ matam |
“There are four Vedas, eighteen Purāṇas, thirty-six Smṛtis and six Darśanas”: Thus is the view of the learned.
3. caturṇāṃ vedānāṃ tu bahavaḥ śākhā vartante |
The four Vedas have many branches.
4. tad yathā | ṛgvedasya pañca śākhā yajurvedasya ṣaḍaśītiḥ sāmavedasya saptātharvavedasya naveti |
To wit: Rgveda has five branches; Yajurveda eighty-six; Sāmaveda seven; and Atharvaveda nine.
5. sarvāḥ saṃkalayya saptottaraṃ śataṃ śākhānāṃ śrūyate |
After putting together all the branches, it is heard that there are 107 branches.
6. sāmprataṃ catvāri sahasrāṇi nava śatāni tryaśītiśca kaliyugasya varṣāṇyatikrāntāni |
Now, 4983 years of Kaliyuga have passed.
7. śrīvikramādityād anantaraṃ pañcapañcāśādhike śatatame saṃvatsare śakānāṇ rājābhiṣiktaḥ |
The king of the Śakas was anointed in the 155^th year after King Śrīvikramāditya.
8. adhunā tvaṣṭādaśa śatāni catvāri ca śakānāṃ rajño varṣāṇi gatāni |
But now 1804 years of the king of the Śakas have passed.
9. trīṇi lakṣāṇi gavāṃ ṣoḍaśa grāmāś carṣabhadattena brāhmaṇebhyo dattāni |
300,000 cows and 16 villages were given to Brāhmaṇas by Ṛṣabhadatta.
10. sa eva varṣe varṣe śatasahasraṃ brāhmaṇānām abhojayat |
The same Ṛṣabhadatta fed 100,000 Brahmaṇas every year.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 139
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXI. TT5n^: KTVRT I wcri ii q"Q n ^jKnn^fhsn vCtTrW f^fW
Exercise XXXI. TT5n^: KTVRT I wcri ii q"Q n ^jKnn^fhsn vCtTrW f^fW
*i. e., in. the seven stars of the Great Bear. Sentences 6 and 8 were true only down to 1882. Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

Back: 11. The wagon of the Aśvins is fitted (√yuj, part, pass.) with three wheels.
aśvino rathas tribhiścakrair yuktaḥ |
12. The Aśvins are praised by the seer with four Rik-verses.
aśvināvṛṣiṇā caturbhir ṛgbhiḥ śasyete |
13. Kṛṣṇa is the eldest of six brothers.
ṣaṭsu bhrātṛṣu kṛṣṇo jyeṣṭhaḥ |
14. Arjuna is the third among the five Pāṇḍavas.
arjunaḥ pañcānāṃ pāṇḍavānāṃ tṛtīyaḥ |
15. Some think there are eight sorts of marriage (pl.); others, six (model after 2^nd sentence in Sanskrit above).
aṣṭau vivāhā vidyanta iti keṣāñ cin mataṃ ṣaḍ ity apareṣām.
16. Twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar mansions are mentioned in astronomy.
saptaviṃśatir aṣṭāviṃśatir vā nakṣatrāṇi jyotiṣa uddhriyante.
17. One should consecratea Brāhman in his eighth year, a Katriya in his eleventh, a Vaiçyain his twelfth.
aṣṭame varṣe brāhmaṇam upanayed ekādaśe kṣatriyaṃ dvādaśe vaiśyam |
18. Two great lights shine in the sky.
mahatī jyotiṣī divi rājete |
19. The teacher, having taught the fifth Rik-verse, recited the sixth.
guruḥ pañcamīm ṛcam adhyāpya ṣaṣṭhīm apaṭhat |
20. Çākyamuni Buddha died in the eightieth year of his age (life).
śākyamunir buddho vayaso ‘śītitame varṣe mṛtaḥ |
21. Sometimes 33 gods are reckoned in the Veda, sometimes 3333.
kvacit trayastriṃśad devā vede gaṇyante kvacit trīṇi sahasrāṇi trīṇi śatāni trayastriṃśac ca |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 139
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: *i. e., in. the seven stars of the Great Bear. Sentences 6 and 8 were true only down to 1882. Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 11. The wagon of the Alvins is fitted Cg^, part, pass.) with three wheels. 12. The Alvins are praised by the seer with four 130 Lesson XXXI. XXXII. Rik-verses. 13. Krsna is the eldest of six brothers. 14. Arjuna is the third among the five Pandavas. 15. Some think there are eight sorts of marriage (pL); others, six (model after 2nd sentence in Sanskrit above). 16. Twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar mansions are mentioned in astronomy. 17. One should consecrate a Brahman in his eighth year, a Ksatriya in his eleventh, a Vaic;ya in his twelfth. 18. Two great lights shine in the sky. 19. The teacher, having taught the fifth Rik-verse, recited the sixth. 20. Qakyamuni Buddha died in the eightieth year of his age (life). 21. Sometimes 33 gods are reckoned in the Veda, sometimes 3333.
*i. e., in. the seven stars of the Great Bear. Sentences 6 and 8 were true only down to 1882. Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 11. The wagon of the Alvins is fitted Cg^, part, pass.) with three wheels. 12. The Alvins are praised by the seer with four 130 Lesson XXXI. XXXII. Rik-verses. 13. Krsna is the eldest of six brothers. 14. Arjuna is the third among the five Pandavas. 15. Some think there are eight sorts of marriage (pL); others, six (model after 2nd sentence in Sanskrit above). 16. Twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar mansions are mentioned in astronomy. 17. One should consecrate a Brahman in his eighth year, a Ksatriya in his eleventh, a Vaic;ya in his twelfth. 18. Two great lights shine in the sky. 19. The teacher, having taught the fifth Rik-verse, recited the sixth. 20. Qakyamuni Buddha died in the eightieth year of his age (life). 21. Sometimes 33 gods are reckoned in the Veda, sometimes 3333.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 140
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXII. 337. Comparison of Adjectives. Derivative adjectives having comparative and superlative meaning — or often, and more originally, a merely intensive value — are made either (A.) directly from roots (by primary derivation), or (B ) from other derivative or compound stems (by secondary derivation).
Lesson XXXII. 337. Comparison of Adjectives. Derivative adjectives having comparative and superlative meaning — or often, and more originally, a merely intensive value — are made either (A.) directly from roots (by primary derivation), or (B ) from other derivative or compound stems (by secondary derivation).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 140
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 338. A. The suffixes of primary derivation are for the comparative, and for the superlative. The root before them is accented, and usually strengthened by guna (if capable of it), or sometimes by nasalization or prolongation. — In classical Sanskrit few such formations are in use; and these attach themselves in meaning mostly to other adjectives from the same root, which seem to be their corresponding positives. In part, however, they are connected with words unrelated to them in derivation.
338. A. The suffixes of primary derivation are for the comparative, and for the superlative. The root before them is accented, and usually strengthened by guna (if capable of it), or sometimes by nasalization or prolongation. — In classical Sanskrit few such formations are in use; and these attach themselves in meaning mostly to other adjectives from the same root, which seem to be their corresponding positives. In part, however, they are connected with words unrelated to them in derivation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 140
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 339. Thus ^fqY^TR^ an attach themselves to ‘quick’; and qfXH (k^ ‘ encomPass ) ’ to ‘broad’; qT^Y^T^C and * Trfq¥, ‘worse’ and ‘worst’, to the subst. xnq; qzY’qTC an<^ , to tjtj ‘skilful’; an^ to Lesson XXXII. 131 and to <HIM* !, or •rf > an^ BTfvre to ^rrar
339. Thus ^fqY^TR^ an attach themselves to ‘quick’; and qfXH (k^ ‘ encomPass ) ’ to ‘broad’; qT^Y^T^C and * Trfq¥, ‘worse’ and ‘worst’, to the subst. xnq; qzY’qTC an<^ , to tjtj ‘skilful’; an^ to Lesson XXXII. 131 and to <HIM* !, or •rf > an^ BTfvre to ^rrar

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 340. The following are examples of artificial connections: ‘near’, ‘little’, (but also ’SHijin <141, J ‘ heavy ’, ’lf=<3 5 ‘long’, ^“TfEre; ‘praiseworthy ’, ‘good’, SjiltL ‘better’, 51^ ‘best’; ‘dear’, ‘much’, ‘young’, ; 1JW ‘old’, fqK- l^T<t an^ correspond sometimes to TTlf^r or ^TT^J, sometimes to cjlf.
340. The following are examples of artificial connections: ‘near’, ‘little’, (but also ’SHijin <141, J ‘ heavy ’, ’lf=<3 5 ‘long’, ^“TfEre; ‘praiseworthy ’, ‘good’, SjiltL ‘better’, 51^ ‘best’; ‘dear’, ‘much’, ‘young’, ; 1JW ‘old’, fqK- l^T<t an^ correspond sometimes to TTlf^r or ^TT^J, sometimes to cjlf.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 341. The stems in are inflected like ordinary adjectives in ^5(, with the fem. in "^TT; those in have a peculiar declension, with a strong stem in and fem. for which see § 255. So also and
341. The stems in are inflected like ordinary adjectives in ^5(, with the fem. in "^TT; those in have a peculiar declension, with a strong stem in and fem. for which see § 255. So also and

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 342. B. The suffixes of secondary derivation are cfX and cfJT They are of almost unrestricted use. That form of stem is usually taken which appears before an initial consonant of a case-ending. Stems in are always unchanged; final and become and ’’3’ET , after which the of the suffix becomes Thus, fit<4 c< r^, ftr* T^rraT ’trf’i’t, vfaao °<w; fW- “’rT’b
342. B. The suffixes of secondary derivation are cfX and cfJT They are of almost unrestricted use. That form of stem is usually taken which appears before an initial consonant of a case-ending. Stems in are always unchanged; final and become and ’’3’ET , after which the of the suffix becomes Thus, fit<4 c< r^, ftr* T^rraT ’trf’i’t, vfaao °<w; fW- “’rT’b

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 343. Some stems which are substantives rather than adjectives are found to form derivatives of comparison; thus, HTvlcf^T 6 most motherly’, «I7TJ1 ‘most manly’, ‘most like an elephant.’
343. Some stems which are substantives rather than adjectives are found to form derivatives of comparison; thus, HTvlcf^T 6 most motherly’, «I7TJ1 ‘most manly’, ‘most like an elephant.’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 344. Comparison of Adverbs Adverbs are compared by adding the suffixes in the forms cfXI^T and cHUMJ thus, H ‘well’, ^Tcf-*
344. Comparison of Adverbs Adverbs are compared by adding the suffixes in the forms cfXI^T and cHUMJ thus, H ‘well’, ^Tcf-*

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 141
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 345. Construction. With a comparative (and sometimes with other words used in a similar way) the ablative is the regular construction; thus, “a daughter is dearer to him than a son”; "intellect alone is 132 Lesson XXXII. stronger than force”. After the superlative either genitive or locative may be used. The comparative often has the force of a strengthened superlative; thus, ‘most honorable’.
345. Construction. With a comparative (and sometimes with other words used in a similar way) the ablative is the regular construction; thus, “a daughter is dearer to him than a son”; "intellect alone is 132 Lesson XXXII. stronger than force”. After the superlative either genitive or locative may be used. The comparative often has the force of a strengthened superlative; thus, ‘most honorable’.

Back: दक्ष dakṣa [agt. dakṣ] a. m. n. f. dakṣā capable, adroit, habile, compétent; expert en <loc.>; zélé — m. adéquation, efficacité; compétence, expertise | myth. np. du radieux [āditya] Dakṣa «Expert (en rituel)», dieu du sacrifice, issu du pouce de Brahmā, aussi appelé Pracetā «Savant»; il est à la fois père et fils d'Aditi, et père de Diti; chef des géniteurs [prajāpati], il personnifie le rituel et la magie efficace; il est père par Asiknī de Satī, l'épouse de Śiva, qu'il refusa d'inviter à un sacrifice dédié à Viṣṇu, car il était impur comme Kapālī; Vīrabhadra-Śiva détruisit ce sacrifice, dans le feu duquel se jeta Satī; décapité par le gaṇa, Dakṣa fut rendu à la vie avec une tête de bouc; il donna en mariage 13 de ses filles à Kaśyapa, 10 à Dharma, 27 à Soma-Candra (les astérismes [nakṣatra]), 4 à Ariṣṭanemi et sa cadette Satī à Śiva; il eut également 24 filles de son épouse Prasūti.
रोहित rohita [relié à lohita] a. m. n. f. rohiṇī rouge — m. la couleur rouge | sang | natu. zoo. Cyprinus rohita, poisson rouge | véd. nom de Rohita «Le Rouge», forme du Soleil comme créateur du monde | myth. np. de l'arc d'Indra «Rouge» | myth. np. du prince Rohitāśva — f. rohiṇī myth. np. de Rohiṇī «Rougeoyante», épith. d'Uṣā l'Aurore, fille de Prajāpati, avec laquelle il commit l'inceste primordial lors de la Création; cf. mṛgaśiras | myth. Rohiṇī_1 «(Aldébaran l'étoile) Rouge», fille de Dakṣa, épouse favorite de Soma-Candra; astr. sa symbolisation cosmologique en tant que 2^e astérisme lunaire [nakṣatra], corr. à l'étoile Aldébaran; Prajāpati y préside; son symbole est la brouette | myth. Rohiṇī_2 «la (Vache) Rouge», fille de Kaśyapa et Surabhī, mère de Kāmadukh et du bétail | myth. [Mah.] Rohiṇī_3, 2^e épouse de Vasudeva, qui éleva Balarāma en secret; [HV.] elle incarne sur Terre Surabhī | gr. ερυθρος; lat. ruber; ang. red; all. roth; fr. rouge.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 142
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: 4 one of a band of celestial singers, a Gandharva. m., n. pr. n., running, course. m., n. pr.. the Indus. m., drunkard. m., winter. AdL: m-’ l^e world-spirit, deliverance, salvation. n* Pr* n., metal; iron. m-, crow. m., a system of philosophy. n. pr. little , atom. , f- sucb. small; as n. su6st., MCI TIT, f. °^T and old. abiding, being. In decl.: xf sometimes in sense of if.
Subst.: 4 one of a band of celestial singers, a Gandharva. m., n. pr. n., running, course. m., n. pr.. the Indus. m., drunkard. m., winter. AdL: m-’ l^e world-spirit, deliverance, salvation. n* Pr* n., metal; iron. m-, crow. m., a system of philosophy. n. pr. little , atom. , f- sucb. small; as n. su6st., MCI TIT, f. °^T and old. abiding, being. In decl.: xf sometimes in sense of if.

Back: jyeṣṭho bhrātā pitā vāpi yaś ca vidyāṃ prayacchati |
trayas te pitaro jñeyā dharme ca pathi vartinaḥ || 18 ||
Those three, namely, the eldest brother and the father and he who gives knowledge should be recognized as fathers if they abide in the path of righteousness.
1. mokṣāya jñānaṃ yajñebhyaḥ sādhīya iti purāṇair uktam |
The Puraṇas said thus: “For salvation knowledge is better than sacrifices.”
2. sāmprataṃ tu bhaktyā śreyo labdhuṃ dvijātayo yatante |
But now the Aryans strive to obtain salvation by devotion (to God).
3. trayaḥ kanīyāṃso bhrātaro rāmasyābhavan |
Rama had three younger brothers.
4. yavīyasīṃ bhāryāṃ pariṇayet |
One must marry a younger wife.
5. yadi jyeṣṭhāyāṃ bhāryāyāṃ kaniṣṭhaḥ putro jāyeta tadā sa eva śreṣṭhaṃ dhanasya bhāgaṃ labhetety eke |
Some said thus: “If the youngest son is born of the eldest wife then that very son must get the best part of the wealth.”
6. paramātmāṇor apy aṇīyān mahato" pi mahīyān vedānteṣu varṇyate |
The world spirit is described in the Vedantas (Upanishads) as smaller even than atom and bigger even than the Mahat.
7. pañcabhir etābhir nadībhiḥ saha saṃgataḥ sindhur gaṅgāyā api varīyān dṛśyate |
The Indus that united with these five rivers appears wider even than the Ganges.
8. yā aṣṭāviṃśatir dakṣasya duhitaraś candramasā pariṇītās tāsāṃ rohiṇī bhartuḥ preṣṭhābhavat |
Among those 28 daughters of Dakṣa who married with the Moon, Rohini was the most beloved of her husband.
9. stenebhyaḥ surāpāḥ pāpīyāṃsaḥ smaryante |
The drunkard are considered more wicked than the thieves.
10. pāpānāṃ pāpiṣṭhās tu brahmahaṇaḥ |
The Brāhman-killers are the most wicked among the wicked.
11. prathīyo yaśas triṣu lokeṣv arjunena labdham |
The fame which is wide-spread in the three worlds was obtained by Arjuna.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 142
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXII. *JT
Exercise XXXII. *JT

Back: 12. Of the three wives of Daśaratha, Kāusalyā was older and more honored (guru, comp.) than Kāikeyī and Sumitrā.
daśarathasya tisṛṇāṃ bhāryāṇāṃ kausalyā kaikeyyāḥ sumitrāyāś ca jyāyasī (varṣīyasī) garīyasī cābhavat |
13. In winter the nights are very long.
hemante rātrayo drāghīyasyaḥ |
14. Not very many (express as pred.) such jewels are found on earth.
bhuvīdṛśāni ratnāni na bhūyāṃsi |
15. Among those kings of the North Prthviraja was the mightiest.
udīcām eteṣu rājasu pṛthvīrājo baliṣṭhaḥ |
16. The poems of Kālidāsa are sweeter than the works of Bāṇa.
kālidāsasya kāvyāni bāṇasya kāvyebhyo madhuratarāṇi |
17. Anāthapiṇḍika was the richest among all the merchants in Rājagṛha.
rājagṛhe sarveṣāṃ vaṇijām anāthapiṇḍiko dhanitamaḥ |
18. Iron is lighter than gold, but heavier than wood.
lohaṃ suvarṇāl laghīyaḥ kāṣṭhāt tu garīyaḥ |
19. In running the horse is the swiftest of quadrupeds.
catuṣpadām aśvo dhāvane kṣepiṣṭhaḥ |
20. Śakuntala was more beautiful than all other women of that time, and became the wife of the mightiest monarch of the whole earth.
śakuntalā tasmin samaye' nyāsu sarvāsu nārīṣu rūpavattamā kṛtsnāyāśca bhuvo baliṣṭhasya samrājo bhāryābhavat |
21. The crow is called the shrewdest of birds.
vāyasaḥ pakṣiṇāṃ paṭiṣṭha ucyate. |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 143
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 12. Of the three wives of Daâratha, Kausalya was older and more honored comp.) than Kaikeyl and Sumi tra. 13. In winter the nights are very long. 14. Not very many (express as pred.) such jewels are found on earth. 15. Among those kings of the North Prthviraja was the mightiest. 16. The poems of Kalidasa are sweeter than the works of Bana. 17. Anathapindika was the richest among all the merchants in Rajagrha. 18. Iron is lighter than gold, but heavier than wood. 19. In running the horse is the swiftest of quadrupeds. 20. (pakuntala was more beautiful than all other women of that time, and became the wife of the mightiest monarch of the whole earth. 21. The crow is called the shrewdest of birds.
12. Of the three wives of Daâratha, Kausalya was older and more honored comp.) than Kaikeyl and Sumi tra. 13. In winter the nights are very long. 14. Not very many (express as pred.) such jewels are found on earth. 15. Among those kings of the North Prthviraja was the mightiest. 16. The poems of Kalidasa are sweeter than the works of Bana. 17. Anathapindika was the richest among all the merchants in Rajagrha. 18. Iron is lighter than gold, but heavier than wood. 19. In running the horse is the swiftest of quadrupeds. 20. (pakuntala was more beautiful than all other women of that time, and became the wife of the mightiest monarch of the whole earth. 21. The crow is called the shrewdest of birds.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 143
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXIII. (Part I.) 346. Compounds In all periods of the language the combination of stems of declension with one another, forming compounds which are treated in accent, inflection and construction as if simple words, is one of the most striking peculiarities of the Sanskrit tongue. In the Vedic period compounds of more than two elements are rare. In the later language this moderation is abandoned; and the later the period, and especially the more elaborate the style of composition, the more unwieldy and difficult do the compounds become. To such an extent is this carried that the advantages of an inflective language are often deliberately thrown away, and a clumsy aggregation of elements replaces the due syntactical union of inflected words into sentences. *
Lesson XXXIII. (Part I.) 346. Compounds In all periods of the language the combination of stems of declension with one another, forming compounds which are treated in accent, inflection and construction as if simple words, is one of the most striking peculiarities of the Sanskrit tongue. In the Vedic period compounds of more than two elements are rare. In the later language this moderation is abandoned; and the later the period, and especially the more elaborate the style of composition, the more unwieldy and difficult do the compounds become. To such an extent is this carried that the advantages of an inflective language are often deliberately thrown away, and a clumsy aggregation of elements replaces the due syntactical union of inflected words into sentences. *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 143
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 347. Sanskrit compounds fall into three principal classes: 1. Copulative or Aggregative compounds, of which the members are syntactically coordinate: a joining together of words which in 134 Lesson XXXIIL an uncompounded state would be connected by ‘and’. E. g. ^5-‘done and undone’; ‘gods and Gan-dharvas and men The members of such a compound may obvi-ously be of any number, two or more.
347. Sanskrit compounds fall into three principal classes: 1. Copulative or Aggregative compounds, of which the members are syntactically coordinate: a joining together of words which in 134 Lesson XXXIIL an uncompounded state would be connected by ‘and’. E. g. ^5-‘done and undone’; ‘gods and Gan-dharvas and men The members of such a compound may obvi-ously be of any number, two or more.
This class of compounds is of comparatively recent development; only the other two are common in others of the related tongues.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 144
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: IL Determinative compounds, of which the former member is syntactically dependent on the latter, as its determining or qualifying adjunct: being either a noun limiting it in a case-relation, or an adjective or an adverb describing it. Thus may be distinguished two sub-classes: A. Dependent, and B. Descriptive, compounds; their difference is not absolute. Examples are: of dependents, ‘army of enemies’; ‘water for the feet’; ‘made with hands’; — of descriptives, ‘ great king’; (§353, 2) 4 dear friend’; ‘badly done’.
IL Determinative compounds, of which the former member is syntactically dependent on the latter, as its determining or qualifying adjunct: being either a noun limiting it in a case-relation, or an adjective or an adverb describing it. Thus may be distinguished two sub-classes: A. Dependent, and B. Descriptive, compounds; their difference is not absolute. Examples are: of dependents, ‘army of enemies’; ‘water for the feet’; ‘made with hands’; — of descriptives, ‘ great king’; (§353, 2) 4 dear friend’; ‘badly done’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 144
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 348. The character of compounds of classes I. and II., as parts of speech, is determined by their final member, and they are capable of being resolved into equivalent phrases by giving the proper independent form and formal means of connection to each member. But this is not true of the third class, which accordingly is more fundamentally distinct from them than they from each other.
348. The character of compounds of classes I. and II., as parts of speech, is determined by their final member, and they are capable of being resolved into equivalent phrases by giving the proper independent form and formal means of connection to each member. But this is not true of the third class, which accordingly is more fundamentally distinct from them than they from each other.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 144
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 349. III. Secondary Adjective compounds, the value of which is not given by a simple resolution into their component parts, but which, though having as final member a noun, are themselves adjectives. These again are of two sub-classes: A. **Possessive** compounds, which are noun-compounds of the preceding class (II. A. or B.), with the idea of ‘**having**’ added, turning them from nouns into **adjectives**; and B. compounds in which the second member is This class of compounds is of comparatively recent development; only the other two are common in others of the related tongues. Lesson XXXIII. 135 a noun syntactically dependent on the first: namely, 1. **Participial** compounds (only **Vedic**), of a **present participle** with its following object; and 2. **Prepositional** compounds, of a preposition and following noun. This whole sub-class B is comparatively small. Examples : * possessing a hero-army ’; * having desire of **progeny** ’ ; ‘ **excessive** ’.
349. III. Secondary Adjective compounds, the value of which is not given by a simple resolution into their component parts, but which, though having as final member a noun, are themselves adjectives. These again are of two sub-classes: A. **Possessive** compounds, which are noun-compounds of the preceding class (II. A. or B.), with the idea of ‘**having**’ added, turning them from nouns into **adjectives**; and B. compounds in which the second member is This class of compounds is of comparatively recent development; only the other two are common in others of the related tongues. Lesson XXXIII. 135 a noun syntactically dependent on the first: namely, 1. **Participial** compounds (only **Vedic**), of a **present participle** with its following object; and 2. **Prepositional** compounds, of a preposition and following noun. This whole sub-class B is comparatively small. Examples : * possessing a hero-army ’; * having desire of **progeny** ’ ; ‘ **excessive** ’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 145
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 350. The adjective compounds are, like simple adjectives, sometimes used, especially in the **neuter**, as **abstract** and **collective** nouns; and in the **accusative** as adverbs. Out of these uses have grown apparent classes of compounds, reckoned and named as such by the Hindu grammarians.
350. The adjective compounds are, like simple adjectives, sometimes used, especially in the **neuter**, as **abstract** and **collective** nouns; and in the **accusative** as adverbs. Out of these uses have grown apparent classes of compounds, reckoned and named as such by the Hindu grammarians.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 145
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 351. A compound may, like a simple word, become a member in another compound, and so on indefinitely. The analysis of a compound (except copulatives), of whatever length, must be made by a series of bisections. Thus the dependent compound ‘done in a previous existence’, is first divisible into cficf and ctthe descriptive then this into its two elements.
351. A compound may, like a simple word, become a member in another compound, and so on indefinitely. The analysis of a compound (except copulatives), of whatever length, must be made by a series of bisections. Thus the dependent compound ‘done in a previous existence’, is first divisible into cficf and ctthe descriptive then this into its two elements.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 145
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 352. Euphonic combination in compounds. The final of a stem is combined with the initial of another stem in composition according to the before2. general rules for **external** combination. But: Final and of a prior member become and surd **gutturals**, **dentals**, and **labials**; thus, Ct Final * ^<1 of a prior member often remains unchanged under similar circumstances. 3. After final an initial often becomes **lingual**. 4. Pronouns generally take the stem-form of the **neuter**; for the personal pronouns are oftenest used and in the **sing**., * and in the pl. 5. For ‘ , in the prior member of **descriptive** and **possessive** compounds, is used 6. A case-form in the prior member is not very rare.
352. Euphonic combination in compounds. The final of a stem is combined with the initial of another stem in composition according to the before2. general rules for **external** combination. But: Final and of a prior member become and surd **gutturals**, **dentals**, and **labials**; thus, Ct Final * ^<1 of a prior member often remains unchanged under similar circumstances. 3. After final an initial often becomes **lingual**. 4. Pronouns generally take the stem-form of the **neuter**; for the personal pronouns are oftenest used and in the **sing**., * and in the pl. 5. For ‘ , in the prior member of **descriptive** and **possessive** compounds, is used 6. A case-form in the prior member is not very rare.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 146
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 353. In all classes of compounds, certain changes of finals are liable to appear in the concluding member; generally they have the effect of transferring the compound as a whole to the **a-declension**. Thus: 1. A stem in often drops the final as in °TT^1- 2. T or is changed to as in °^’©rpy. 3. An is added after a final consonant, sometimes even after an **u-vowel** or a diphthong, as in The separate classes of compounds will now be taken up.
353. In all classes of compounds, certain changes of finals are liable to appear in the concluding member; generally they have the effect of transferring the compound as a whole to the **a-declension**. Thus: 1. A stem in often drops the final as in °TT^1- 2. T or is changed to as in °^’©rpy. 3. An is added after a final consonant, sometimes even after an **u-vowel** or a diphthong, as in The separate classes of compounds will now be taken up.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 146
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 354. I. Copulative compounds. Two or more nouns — much less often adjectives, and once or twice adverbs — having a coordinate construction, as though joined by ‘ and’, are sometimes com- bined into a compound.
354. I. Copulative compounds. Two or more nouns — much less often adjectives, and once or twice adverbs — having a coordinate construction, as though joined by ‘ and’, are sometimes com- bined into a compound.
This class is called by the Hindus dvandva, ‘couple’; but a dvandva of adjectives they do not recognize.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 146
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 355. The noun-compounds fall, as regards their inflective form, into two classes: A. The compound has the gender and declension of its final member, and is in number a dual or plural, according to its logical value as denoting either two, or more than two, individual things. Examples are: ‘rice and barley’; TQft ‘Rama and Krsna’; ‘goats and sheep U ‘Brahmans, Ksatriyas, Vai
355. The noun-compounds fall, as regards their inflective form, into two classes: A. The compound has the gender and declension of its final member, and is in number a dual or plural, according to its logical value as denoting either two, or more than two, individual things. Examples are: ‘rice and barley’; TQft ‘Rama and Krsna’; ‘goats and sheep U ‘Brahmans, Ksatriyas, Vai

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 146
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 356. The later language preserves several dual combinations This class is called by the Hindus dvandva, ‘couple’; but a dvandva of adjectives they do not recognize. Lesson XXXIIL 137 of the names of divinities, etc., which retain their earlier forms; thus, and ‘Heaven and Earth Onn-VUt ‘Mitra and Varuna’; ‘Agni and Sonoa’.
356. The later language preserves several dual combinations This class is called by the Hindus dvandva, ‘couple’; but a dvandva of adjectives they do not recognize. Lesson XXXIIL 137 of the names of divinities, etc., which retain their earlier forms; thus, and ‘Heaven and Earth Onn-VUt ‘Mitra and Varuna’; ‘Agni and Sonoa’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 147
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 357. Adjective copulative compounds are made likewise, but are rare. Examples are: ‘**light** and **dark** ‘ **round** and **plump**’; * ^TcTT’Tf^T"H ‘**bathed** and **anointed**’.
357. Adjective copulative compounds are made likewise, but are rare. Examples are: ‘**light** and **dark** ‘ **round** and **plump**’; * ^TcTT’Tf^T"H ‘**bathed** and **anointed**’.
* The Hindus reckon these as karmadharayas (see next note).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 147
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 358. II. Determinative compounds. A noun or adjective is often combined into a compound with a preceding **determining** or **qualifying** word — a noun or adjective or adverb. The two principal divisions of this class are, as indicated above, A. **Dependent**, and B. **Descriptive**, compounds. Each class falls into two subdivisions, according as the final member, and therefore the whole compound, is noun or adjective. **
358. II. Determinative compounds. A noun or adjective is often combined into a compound with a preceding **determining** or **qualifying** word — a noun or adjective or adverb. The two principal divisions of this class are, as indicated above, A. **Dependent**, and B. **Descriptive**, compounds. Each class falls into two subdivisions, according as the final member, and therefore the whole compound, is noun or adjective. **
** The whole class of determinatives is called by the natives tatpurusa (the name is a specimen of the class, meaning 4 his man’); the second division, the descriptives, bears the special name karma- dhdraya, a word of obscure meaning and application.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 147
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 359. A. Dependent compounds. 1. Noun - compounds. The case-relation of the prior to the second member may be of any kind, but is oftenest **genitive**, and least often **accusative**. Thus, ‘hundreds of fools’; —(= ‘ water for the feet’ ; — ‘ money (obtained) by science’; (= ‘likeness with self’; — (= ‘fear of a thief’; —(= ^t°) ‘sport in the water’; — (- * 1°) ‘ going to the city’; ‘lord of speech’, n. pr. (§352, 6.).
359. A. Dependent compounds. 1. Noun - compounds. The case-relation of the prior to the second member may be of any kind, but is oftenest **genitive**, and least often **accusative**. Thus, ‘hundreds of fools’; —(= ‘ water for the feet’ ; — ‘ money (obtained) by science’; (= ‘likeness with self’; — (= ‘fear of a thief’; —(= ^t°) ‘sport in the water’; — (- * 1°) ‘ going to the city’; ‘lord of speech’, n. pr. (§352, 6.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 147
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The Hindus reckon these as karmadharayas (see next note). ** The whole class of determinatives is called by the natives tatpurusa (the name is a specimen of the class, meaning 4 his man’); the second division, the descriptives, bears the special name karma- dhdraya, a word of obscure meaning and application. 360. 2. Dependent adjective compounds. Only a very small proportion of the compounds of this class have an ordinary adjective as final member; usually the final member is a **participle**, or a **derivative** of **agency** with the value of a participle (§ 204). T he 138 Lesson XXXIII. prior member stands in any possible case-relation. Thus, ‘gone to the village’; ‘Veda-knowing’; —‘protected by Qiva’; (= ‘ good for the cow’; —^^t^fTTcT ‘fallen from the sky’; fcmore mobile than waves’; — (= 6 best of Brahmans’; —‘cooked in a pot’.
* The Hindus reckon these as karmadharayas (see next note). ** The whole class of determinatives is called by the natives tatpurusa (the name is a specimen of the class, meaning 4 his man’); the second division, the descriptives, bears the special name karma- dhdraya, a word of obscure meaning and application. 360. 2. Dependent adjective compounds. Only a very small proportion of the compounds of this class have an ordinary adjective as final member; usually the final member is a **participle**, or a **derivative** of **agency** with the value of a participle (§ 204). T he 138 Lesson XXXIII. prior member stands in any possible case-relation. Thus, ‘gone to the village’; ‘Veda-knowing’; —‘protected by Qiva’; (= ‘ good for the cow’; —^^t^fTTcT ‘fallen from the sky’; fcmore mobile than waves’; — (= 6 best of Brahmans’; —‘cooked in a pot’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 148
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 361. Compounds of this sort having as final member the bare root — sometimes modified in form, and, if it end originally in a **short vowel**, generally with an added c( — are very **numerous**: thus, above (§ 360); ‘standing in the wagon’ (or simply ‘in the wagon’); ‘**on the head**’; IJcfr5f ‘**only-born**’; Cx. (§ 352, 6) * **forest-dwelling** ’ ; H‘ **born in the heart** ’ (i.e. ‘ **love** ’).
361. Compounds of this sort having as final member the bare root — sometimes modified in form, and, if it end originally in a **short vowel**, generally with an added c( — are very **numerous**: thus, above (§ 360); ‘standing in the wagon’ (or simply ‘in the wagon’); ‘**on the head**’; IJcfr5f ‘**only-born**’; Cx. (§ 352, 6) * **forest-dwelling** ’ ; H‘ **born in the heart** ’ (i.e. ‘ **love** ’).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 148
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 362. B. Descriptive compounds. In this division of the determinatives, the prior member stands to the other in **no distinct caserelation**, but qualifies it **adjectively** or **adverbially**, according as the final member is noun or adjective. Thus, (§ 353, 2); ‘ well-done ’; evil-doing’ (adj.). The compounds of noun-value cannot well be separated in treatment from those of adjective-value.
362. B. Descriptive compounds. In this division of the determinatives, the prior member stands to the other in **no distinct caserelation**, but qualifies it **adjectively** or **adverbially**, according as the final member is noun or adjective. Thus, (§ 353, 2); ‘ well-done ’; evil-doing’ (adj.). The compounds of noun-value cannot well be separated in treatment from those of adjective-value.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 148
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 363. The simplest case is that in which a noun as final member is preceded by a **qualifying adjective** as prior member. Thus, î- Uli1(= ‘black horse’; ‘great man’. Instead of an adjective, the prior member is in a few cases a **noun used appositionally** or with a **quasi-adjective** value; thus, ‘priestsage ’; king-sage’.
363. The simplest case is that in which a noun as final member is preceded by a **qualifying adjective** as prior member. Thus, î- Uli1(= ‘black horse’; ‘great man’. Instead of an adjective, the prior member is in a few cases a **noun used appositionally** or with a **quasi-adjective** value; thus, ‘priestsage ’; king-sage’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 148
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Literally, a tiger which is not a tiger after all, but a man. Or, perhaps better, ‘tiger of (or among) men’ (so Whitney). 364. Sometimes compounds of this sort express a **comparison**; thus, ‘black as a thunder - cloud’ (cf. ‘coal-black’, etc.). Reversed, ‘man-tiger’, i. e., ‘a man fierce as a tiger’; * Lesson XXXIII. 139 man-lion foot-lotus’, i. e. ‘a foot lovely as a lotus’.
* Literally, a tiger which is not a tiger after all, but a man. Or, perhaps better, ‘tiger of (or among) men’ (so Whitney). 364. Sometimes compounds of this sort express a **comparison**; thus, ‘black as a thunder - cloud’ (cf. ‘coal-black’, etc.). Reversed, ‘man-tiger’, i. e., ‘a man fierce as a tiger’; * Lesson XXXIII. 139 man-lion foot-lotus’, i. e. ‘a foot lovely as a lotus’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 149
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 365. The adverbial words most commonly used as prior members of descriptive compounds, qualifying the other member, are the **verbal prefixes** (“**prepositions**”), and the words of direction related to them ; likewise the inseparable prefixes or privative, U ‘well’, "CTr 6 ill’, etc. These are combined with nouns (in £ttcm-adjectival value) as w7ell as with adjectives. Thus, ‘not done’; ‘not a scholar’; * =35r<T^ ‘misfortune’; ‘more than a god’; ‘exceedingly far’; ‘ excessive fear opposing side. ’
365. The adverbial words most commonly used as prior members of descriptive compounds, qualifying the other member, are the **verbal prefixes** (“**prepositions**”), and the words of direction related to them ; likewise the inseparable prefixes or privative, U ‘well’, "CTr 6 ill’, etc. These are combined with nouns (in £ttcm-adjectival value) as w7ell as with adjectives. Thus, ‘not done’; ‘not a scholar’; * =35r<T^ ‘misfortune’; ‘more than a god’; ‘exceedingly far’; ‘ excessive fear opposing side. ’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 149
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXIII. Verbs: T可+可(anurajyati,-te)be T可+complete. devoted to,inclined to (loc.). 习可+station,place,appoint.+牙go away(on a journey) +f return home.
Vocabulary XXXIII. Verbs: T可+可(anurajyati,-te)be T可+complete. devoted to,inclined to (loc.). 习可+station,place,appoint.+牙go away(on a journey) +f return home.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 149
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: **n**. , f_, the threefold world. m., n. pr. **m**., panther. Subst.: **m**., air, sky. m. , hermitage. **m**. , n. pr. ^TT **m**., boy, prince. sfiY **f**-, game, sport. **m**., ornament {often fig.}. **n**. , bathing-place; place of pilgrimage. * n., step; place. q^ **m**., n. pr. C" **f**., queen. TTTpqi **f** > chase. ^T^Tf, march, journey; support 111-5 race, family. **rn**-5 state of affairs; news <2 f., female friend. ni., hospitality. Adj.:f. 0x5(1. suitable. f. o^n, adopted. A
**n**. , f_, the threefold world. m., n. pr. **m**., panther. Subst.: **m**., air, sky. m. , hermitage. **m**. , n. pr. ^TT **m**., boy, prince. sfiY **f**-, game, sport. **m**., ornament {often fig.}. **n**. , bathing-place; place of pilgrimage. * n., step; place. q^ **m**., n. pr. C" **f**., queen. TTTpqi **f** > chase. ^T^Tf, march, journey; support 111-5 race, family. **rn**-5 state of affairs; news <2 f., female friend. ni., hospitality. Adj.:f. 0x5(1. suitable. f. o^n, adopted. A

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 150
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: ’n t*ae manner of, or suitable for, the Gandliarvas. f-heavenly, divine. f- human. f. ®WT, near; as neut-subst., vicinity, nearness, presence. Adv.: 5TT earlier, formerly.
’n t*ae manner of, or suitable for, the Gandliarvas. f-heavenly, divine. f- human. f. ®WT, near; as neut-subst., vicinity, nearness, presence. Adv.: 5TT earlier, formerly.

Back: 1. duṣṣanto nāma rājarṣiḥ pūruvaṃśatilakas trilokyāṃ viśrutaḥ kṛtsnāṃ pṛthivīm apālayat |
The king-sage named Duṣṣanta, who was the ornament of the Puru family and who was well-known in the threefold world, ruled the whole earth.
2. sa caikadā mantrisūtasainikānvito mṛgayākrīḍārthaṃ mahāvanaṃ praviṣṭaḥ |
And he, once, who was followed by ministers, a driver and soldiers, entered the great forest for the game of chase.
3. tasmin vane duṣṣanto" nekān vyāghrasiṃharkṣadvīpino" nyāṃś ca vanecarān prāṇinaḥ svaśarair vyāpādayat |
In the forest Duṣṣanta killed many tigers, lions, bears and panthers and other forest-dwelling living creatures with his arrows.
4. ekaṃ tu hariṇaṃ palāyamānaṃ rathastho" nusaran sa nadῑtīre divyāśramapadaṃ dṛṣṭavān |
But he, who was on the chariot, while following a fleeing deer, saw a divine hermitage on the bank of a river.
5. kaṇvasya brahmarṣer ayam āśrama iti sūtamukhāc chrutvā sainikān vane saṃsthāpyarṣiṃ nantuṃ rājā tatra praviṣṭaḥ |
“This is the hermitage of Kaṇva, the priest-sage.” : having heard thus from the charioteer, and having stationed the soldiers in the forest, the king entered the hermitage to pay respect to the seer.
6. tadā kaṇve tīrthayātrārthaṃ proṣite sati tasya kṛtrimā duhitā śakuntalā nama sakhīsametā mahārājam atithisatkāreṇa pūjayitum āśramān nirgatā ||
At that time, when Kaṇva went away for pilgrimage, Śakuntalā, his adopted daughter, went out from the hermitage with her friends to honor the great king with hospitality for the guest.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 150
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXIII. Os irfW^: I R I -gt»q?ciY "PhFP^rrerftrewsV"fa’fr ^^XT^TTftrsi: ^rc^rnri^q-fT | 3 | vî <J ^^T5T- wni ’Tqftcftx f^T3T * n^ I 8 I ^fqxxiMnnT xfa ^ngrrsrf i n-5H <nr i m i <i^t vft^nxrsl ifYfaW ^rtn ^fWr ’TT’T ^RftelWclT Tf^TXTST’Tfnf^^n^flX’ff qjrfag- TFRRnfW’hn ii $ ii
Exercise XXXIII. Os irfW^: I R I -gt»q?ciY "PhFP^rrerftrewsV"fa’fr ^^XT^TTftrsi: ^rc^rnri^q-fT | 3 | vî <J ^^T5T- wni ’Tqftcftx f^T3T * n^ I 8 I ^fqxxiMnnT xfa ^ngrrsrf i n-5H <nr i m i <i^t vft^nxrsl ifYfaW ^rtn ^fWr ’TT’T ^RftelWclT Tf^TXTST’Tfnf^^n^flX’ff qjrfag- TFRRnfW’hn ii $ ii
* «‘TO engage in the sport of hunting”; cf. below, § 375, 3.

Back: 7. When he had seen her, brilliant (rāj, pres. part.) with divine-beauty, as though (iva) more-than-human, the heart of the king-sage was inclined (pass. part.) toward her.
7. amānuṣeṇeva divyarūpeṇa rājamānāṃ tāṃ dṛṣṭvā rājarṣer hṛdayaṃ tasyām anuraktam |
8. Thereupon, having learned that she (acc.) was the daughter-of-an-Apsaras (acc.), he married her by the gāndharva-ceremony (vivāha) suitable-for-Kṣatriyas.
8. atha sa tām apsaroduhitaraṃ viditvā kṣatriyānurūpeṇa gāndharvavivāhena tāṃ paryaṇayat |
9. Duṣṣanta, after dwelling very many days-and-nights in the hermitage, abandoned Śakuntalā and returned to his-own-city.
9. duṣṣanto 'nekān ahorātrān āśrama uṣitvā śakuntalāṃ tyaktvā svanagaraṃ pratyagacchat |
10. Afterwards, when Kaṇva had finished his pilgrimage, and returned to the hermitage, learning (vid) the news⁴-of-his¹-daughter's²-marriage³, he sent her into-the-presence-of-Duṣṣanta.
10. paścāt kaṇvas tīrthayatrāṃ samāpyāśramaṃ nivṛtya svaduhitṛvivāhavṛttāntaṃ jñātvā/vidityā tāṃ duṣṣantasamīpaṃ prāsthāpayat |
11. The royal-sage at first disowned (pratyā-khyā, ger.) Śakuntalā when she was come²-to-the-city¹; but at last he put (ni-√yuj, part. in °vant) her in-the-place³-of-the-first¹-queen².
11. rājarṣirādau nagarāgatāṃ śakuntalāṃ pratyākhyāyānte tām agramahiṣīpade niyuktavān |
12. In the course of time (kālena gacchatā) a beautiful-prince, named Bharata, was born to her (loc.).
12. kālena gacchatā rūpavatkumāro bharato nāma tasyām ajāyata |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 150
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * «‘TO engage in the sport of hunting”; cf. below, § 375, 3. (Form compounds of words joined by hyphens"). 7. When he had seen her, brilliant (vnr pres, part.) with divine-beauty, as though more-than-human, the heart of the king-sage was inclined (pass. part.) toward her. 8. Thereupon, having learned that she (acc.) was the daughter-of-an-Apsaras (acc.), be married her by the gandbarva-ceremony suitable-for-Ksatriyas. 9. Dussanta, after dwelling very many days-and-nights in the hermitage, abandoned Qakuntala and returned to his-own- city. 10. Afterwards, when Kanva had finished his pilgrimage, and returned to the hermitage, learning the newsôf-his1-daughter’s2-marriage3, he sent her into-thc-presence-of-Dussanta. 11. The royal-sage at first disowned (Mger.) Qakuntala when she was come^to-the-city1; but at last he put(f^T-,g^9 part, in °^«rT ) her in-the-placeôf-the-first^queen2. 12. In the course of time Lesson XXXIIL XXXIV. 141 Î^cTT) a beautiful-prince, named Bharata, was born to her (Zoe.).
* «‘TO engage in the sport of hunting”; cf. below, § 375, 3. (Form compounds of words joined by hyphens"). 7. When he had seen her, brilliant (vnr pres, part.) with divine-beauty, as though more-than-human, the heart of the king-sage was inclined (pass. part.) toward her. 8. Thereupon, having learned that she (acc.) was the daughter-of-an-Apsaras (acc.), be married her by the gandbarva-ceremony suitable-for-Ksatriyas. 9. Dussanta, after dwelling very many days-and-nights in the hermitage, abandoned Qakuntala and returned to his-own- city. 10. Afterwards, when Kanva had finished his pilgrimage, and returned to the hermitage, learning the newsôf-his1-daughter’s2-marriage3, he sent her into-thc-presence-of-Dussanta. 11. The royal-sage at first disowned (Mger.) Qakuntala when she was come^to-the-city1; but at last he put(f^T-,g^9 part, in °^«rT ) her in-the-placeôf-the-first^queen2. 12. In the course of time Lesson XXXIIL XXXIV. 141 Î^cTT) a beautiful-prince, named Bharata, was born to her (Zoe.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 151
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXIV. 366. III. Secondary Adjective Compounds. A compound with a noun as final member very often wins secondarily the value of an **adjective**, being inflected in the three genders to agree with the noun which it qualifies, and used in all the constructions of an adjective. The two divisions of this class have been given above (§ 349).
Lesson XXXIV. 366. III. Secondary Adjective Compounds. A compound with a noun as final member very often wins secondarily the value of an **adjective**, being inflected in the three genders to agree with the noun which it qualifies, and used in all the constructions of an adjective. The two divisions of this class have been given above (§ 349).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 151
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 367. Certain changes are sometimes necessary in the stem of the final member to make possible the inflection in different genders. Masc. and neut. stems in and fem. in generally interchange; thus, from 4-comes the compound ‘with excellent hands nom. sing. ; so also (from + f^t^TT) and (from * r + xiiwn.) The same holds good for masc., fem., and neut. stems in and and stems in consonants.
367. Certain changes are sometimes necessary in the stem of the final member to make possible the inflection in different genders. Masc. and neut. stems in and fem. in generally interchange; thus, from 4-comes the compound ‘with excellent hands nom. sing. ; so also (from + f^t^TT) and (from * r + xiiwn.) The same holds good for masc., fem., and neut. stems in and and stems in consonants.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 151
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 368. But often a fem. in is used by the side of a masc. and neut. in thus, ‘ two-leaved ’, f.
368. But often a fem. in is used by the side of a masc. and neut. in thus, ‘ two-leaved ’, f.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 151
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 369. Very frequently the suffix cfi (attenuated into an element of indefinite value) is added to a pure possessive compound, to help the conversion of the compounded stem into an adjective; especially to fem. stems in and and to stems in and in general, where the final of the stem is less usual or manageable in adjective inflection. Thus, ‘ rich in rivers ‘whose husband is dead’, i. e. ‘widow nom. masc. and fem. or
369. Very frequently the suffix cfi (attenuated into an element of indefinite value) is added to a pure possessive compound, to help the conversion of the compounded stem into an adjective; especially to fem. stems in and and to stems in and in general, where the final of the stem is less usual or manageable in adjective inflection. Thus, ‘ rich in rivers ‘whose husband is dead’, i. e. ‘widow nom. masc. and fem. or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 151
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 370. Sometimes the possessive-making suffix is added to secondary adjective compounds, without effect upon the meaning; thus, (= 6 having an ass’s voice.’
370. Sometimes the possessive-making suffix is added to secondary adjective compounds, without effect upon the meaning; thus, (= 6 having an ass’s voice.’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 152
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 371. A. Possessive compounds. The possessives are determinative compounds to which are given both an adjective inflection (as just shown) , and also defined by adding ‘having’possessive °^n, m. the descriptive m., an adjective meaning of a kind best to the meaning of the determinative, n., ‘beauty of a god’, becomes the f. n., ‘having the beauty of a god’; , ‘long arm’, becomes the possessive m. f- n , ‘having long arms’. *
371. A. Possessive compounds. The possessives are determinative compounds to which are given both an adjective inflection (as just shown) , and also defined by adding ‘having’possessive °^n, m. the descriptive m., an adjective meaning of a kind best to the meaning of the determinative, n., ‘beauty of a god’, becomes the f. n., ‘having the beauty of a god’; , ‘long arm’, becomes the possessive m. f- n , ‘having long arms’. *
* This class of compounds is called by the natives bahuvrthi} the name is an example of the class, meaning ‘having much rice’. — The possessive may generally, in accented texts, be distinguished from the original determinative by a difference of accent.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 152
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 372. Dependent compounds are, by comparison, not often thus turned into possessives. But possessively used descriptives are extremely frequent and various; and some kinds of combination which are rare in proper descriptives are very common as possessives.
372. Dependent compounds are, by comparison, not often thus turned into possessives. But possessively used descriptives are extremely frequent and various; and some kinds of combination which are rare in proper descriptives are very common as possessives.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 152
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 373. An adjective as prior member takes the masculine stemform, even though referring to a feminine noun in the final member; thus, (from HT^T) ‘ possessing a beautiful wife’.
373. An adjective as prior member takes the masculine stemform, even though referring to a feminine noun in the final member; thus, (from HT^T) ‘ possessing a beautiful wife’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 152
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * This class of compounds is called by the natives bahuvrthi} the name is an example of the class, meaning ‘having much rice’. — The possessive may generally, in accented texts, be distinguished from the original determinative by a difference of accent. 374. As prior members are found: 1. Adjectives proper; thus, ‘ of other form’. — 2. Participles; thus, ‘whose mother is slain’. — 3. Numerals; thus, ‘four-faced’; ‘ three - eyed’. — 4. Nouns with quasi-adjectival value; thus, ‘gold-handed’. Especially common is the use of a noun as prior member to qualify the other appositionally, or by way of equivalence. These may well be called appositional possessives. Thus, ‘having “Krsna” as name’; ‘having men who are heroes’; using spies as eyes ‘having thee as messenger’. — 5. Adverbial elements (especially inseparable prefixes); Lesson XXXIV. 143 thus, ‘endless’; ‘**childless**’; ‘**with excellent sons**’; ‘ **ill-savored**’. The associative prefix (less often is treated like an adjective element; thus, ‘**of like form** or ‘w**ith a son**’, or 4 h**aving one’s son along with one**’; (^f + n.) ‘**favorable**’. — 6. Ordinary verbal pre-Gs x> Ox fixes; thus, ‘**of wide fame**’; ‘**limbless**’; ‘**powerless**’; ‘**with uplifted face**’. — 7. Ordinary adverbs; thus, **with mind directed hither**’.
* This class of compounds is called by the natives bahuvrthi} the name is an example of the class, meaning ‘having much rice’. — The possessive may generally, in accented texts, be distinguished from the original determinative by a difference of accent. 374. As prior members are found: 1. Adjectives proper; thus, ‘ of other form’. — 2. Participles; thus, ‘whose mother is slain’. — 3. Numerals; thus, ‘four-faced’; ‘ three - eyed’. — 4. Nouns with quasi-adjectival value; thus, ‘gold-handed’. Especially common is the use of a noun as prior member to qualify the other appositionally, or by way of equivalence. These may well be called appositional possessives. Thus, ‘having “Krsna” as name’; ‘having men who are heroes’; using spies as eyes ‘having thee as messenger’. — 5. Adverbial elements (especially inseparable prefixes); Lesson XXXIV. 143 thus, ‘endless’; ‘**childless**’; ‘**with excellent sons**’; ‘ **ill-savored**’. The associative prefix (less often is treated like an adjective element; thus, ‘**of like form** or ‘w**ith a son**’, or 4 h**aving one’s son along with one**’; (^f + n.) ‘**favorable**’. — 6. Ordinary verbal pre-Gs x> Ox fixes; thus, ‘**of wide fame**’; ‘**limbless**’; ‘**powerless**’; ‘**with uplifted face**’. — 7. Ordinary adverbs; thus, **with mind directed hither**’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 153
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 375. Certain words, very frequent in the compounds mentioned at § 374, 4, have in part won a peculiar application. 1. Thus with ‘**beginning**’ (or the derivatives or are made compounds signifying the person or thing designated along with others — such a person or thing et cetera. Thus, C **the gods having Indra as firs**t’, i. e. ‘the gods Indra, etc.’ Often the qualifying noun is omitted; thus, MI* 1 ‘**food, drink, etc**.’ — 2. Words like ("Q^cfi) etc., are used in the same way, to denote **accompaniment**; chiefly adverbially. — 3. The noun ‘**objec**t’, ‘**purpose**’, is used at the end of a compound, oftenest as a neut. subst. (acc. or instr, or loc.), to signify ‘**for the sake of**’, and the like; thus, ‘**for Damayanti’s sake**’; ‘**for a bed**’. (See below, § 379). —4. (as neut. subst.) often means ‘**other**’ in possessives; thus, n.,**another region**’ (lit. ‘**that which has a difference of region** ’).
375. Certain words, very frequent in the compounds mentioned at § 374, 4, have in part won a peculiar application. 1. Thus with ‘**beginning**’ (or the derivatives or are made compounds signifying the person or thing designated along with others — such a person or thing et cetera. Thus, C **the gods having Indra as firs**t’, i. e. ‘the gods Indra, etc.’ Often the qualifying noun is omitted; thus, MI* 1 ‘**food, drink, etc**.’ — 2. Words like ("Q^cfi) etc., are used in the same way, to denote **accompaniment**; chiefly adverbially. — 3. The noun ‘**objec**t’, ‘**purpose**’, is used at the end of a compound, oftenest as a neut. subst. (acc. or instr, or loc.), to signify ‘**for the sake of**’, and the like; thus, ‘**for Damayanti’s sake**’; ‘**for a bed**’. (See below, § 379). —4. (as neut. subst.) often means ‘**other**’ in possessives; thus, n.,**another region**’ (lit. ‘**that which has a difference of region** ’).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 153
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 376. In appositional possessives, the final member, if it designate a part of the body, sometimes signifies the part to which belongs what is designated by the prior member: that on or in which it is. Thus ‘with necklace on neck’. Such compounds are commonest with words meaning hand; thus, |ftl| ‘with sword in hand’; ‘with club in hand’.
376. In appositional possessives, the final member, if it designate a part of the body, sometimes signifies the part to which belongs what is designated by the prior member: that on or in which it is. Thus ‘with necklace on neck’. Such compounds are commonest with words meaning hand; thus, |ftl| ‘with sword in hand’; ‘with club in hand’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 153
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 377. The possessives are not always used with the simple 144 Lesson XXXIV. value of qualifying adjective. Often they have a pregnant sense, and become the equivalents of dependent clauses; or the ‘having’ implied in them becomes about equivalent to our ‘having’ as a sign of past action. Thus, ‘**possessing attained adolescence**’, i. e. ‘**having reached adolescence**’; X!! ‘**with unstudied book**si. e. ‘**one who has neglected study**’; ^TcTM l
377. The possessives are not always used with the simple 144 Lesson XXXIV. value of qualifying adjective. Often they have a pregnant sense, and become the equivalents of dependent clauses; or the ‘having’ implied in them becomes about equivalent to our ‘having’ as a sign of past action. Thus, ‘**possessing attained adolescence**’, i. e. ‘**having reached adolescence**’; X!! ‘**with unstudied book**si. e. ‘**one who has neglected study**’; ^TcTM l

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 154
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 378. B. Compounds with governed final member. 1. Participial compounds, exclusively Vedic. 2. Prepositional compounds. Thus may conveniently be called those compounds in which the prior member is a particle with true prepositional value, and the final member a noun governed by it. Thus, **Hasting over night**’; ‘**beyond measure**’, ‘**excessive**’; **next the ear**’.
378. B. Compounds with governed final member. 1. Participial compounds, exclusively Vedic. 2. Prepositional compounds. Thus may conveniently be called those compounds in which the prior member is a particle with true prepositional value, and the final member a noun governed by it. Thus, **Hasting over night**’; ‘**beyond measure**’, ‘**excessive**’; **next the ear**’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 154
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 379. Adjective compounds as nouns and adverbs. Compound adjectives, like simple ones, are freely used substantively as **abstracts** and **collectives**, especially in the **neuter**, and less often in the **feminine**; and they are also much used **adverbially**, particularly in the **acc**. **sing**, **neuter**.
379. Adjective compounds as nouns and adverbs. Compound adjectives, like simple ones, are freely used substantively as **abstracts** and **collectives**, especially in the **neuter**, and less often in the **feminine**; and they are also much used **adverbially**, particularly in the **acc**. **sing**, **neuter**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 154
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 380. The substantively used possessive compounds having a **numeral** as prior member, with some of the strictly adjective compounds, are treated by the Hindus as a separate class, and called **dvigu . Examples of such numeral abstracts and collectives are**: * * The name is a sample of the class, and means ‘of two cows’ (said to be used in the sense of ‘worth two cows’). n., ‘**the three ages**’; n., ‘**space of three leagues**’. Feminines of like use occur in the later language; thus (by the side of n.,) ‘**the three worlds**’. 381. Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary adjective
380. The substantively used possessive compounds having a **numeral** as prior member, with some of the strictly adjective compounds, are treated by the Hindus as a separate class, and called **dvigu . Examples of such numeral abstracts and collectives are**: * * The name is a sample of the class, and means ‘of two cows’ (said to be used in the sense of ‘worth two cows’). n., ‘**the three ages**’; n., ‘**space of three leagues**’. Feminines of like use occur in the later language; thus (by the side of n.,) ‘**the three worlds**’. 381. Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary adjective

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 154
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The name is a sample of the class, and means ‘of two cows’ (said to be used in the sense of ‘worth two cows’). 381. Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary adjective Besson XXXIV. 145 compounds which have an indeclinable or particle as prior member are considered by the Hindus a separate class of compounds, and called **avyayzbhava** * . 1. The prepositional compounds are especially frequent in this use; thus, ‘**at evening**’; ‘**in sight**’; ^PJ) ‘**alonS the Ganges**’; ‘**on the G**.’; ‘**every year**’. —2. A large class of avyayt-b/iavas is made up of words having a relative adverb, especially as prior member. Thus, ‘**as one chooses**’. And, with other adverbs: 4 **as long as one lives**’; ‘**whither one will**’.
* The name is a sample of the class, and means ‘of two cows’ (said to be used in the sense of ‘worth two cows’). 381. Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary adjective Besson XXXIV. 145 compounds which have an indeclinable or particle as prior member are considered by the Hindus a separate class of compounds, and called **avyayzbhava** * . 1. The prepositional compounds are especially frequent in this use; thus, ‘**at evening**’; ‘**in sight**’; ^PJ) ‘**alonS the Ganges**’; ‘**on the G**.’; ‘**every year**’. —2. A large class of avyayt-b/iavas is made up of words having a relative adverb, especially as prior member. Thus, ‘**as one chooses**’. And, with other adverbs: 4 **as long as one lives**’; ‘**whither one will**’.
* The word means 4 conversion to an indeclinable’. Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

TextBack: Anomalous Compounds.
1314. As in every language, compounds are now and then met with which are of anomalous character, as exhibiting combinations of elements not usually put together, or not after such a method, or for such a purpose. Some of these, especially of those occurring in the old language, may well be noticed here.
a. Compounds having a particle as final member: as, apratí having no equal, tuvipratí mightily opposing, átathā refusing, vitatha false, yathātathá as it really is, súsaha prosperity in companionship, aniha and anamutra having no here and no yonder, etc.
b. Agglomerations of two or more elements out of phrases: thus, ahampūrvá eager to be first, ahamuttará contest for preëminence, mamasatyá contest for possession, itihāsá legend (iti hā ”sa thus, indeed, it was), naghamārá and naghāriṣá not, surely, dying or coming to harm, kuvítsa some unknown person, tadídartha having just that as aim, kūcidarthín having errands in every direction, kācitkará doing all sorts of things, kuhacidvíd wherever found, akutaçcidbhaya out of all danger, yadbhaviṣya What-is-to-be, etc.
c. Agglomerations in which the prior member retains a syntactic form: as, anyonya and paraspara one another, avaraspara inverted.
d. Aggregations with the natural order inverted: e. g. pitāmahá and tatāmahá grandfather, putrahata with his sons slain, jānvākná and -jānvakta with bended knee, dantajāta provided with teeth, somāpahṛtá deprived of soma, pan̄ktírādhas having groups of gifts, gojara old bull, agrajihvá, agranāsikā, etc. tip of the tongue, of the nose, etc. Compare also 1291 c.
e. Aggregations of particles were pointed out above (1111 a); also (1122 e) cases in which ná and mā́ are used in composition.
f. In late Sanskrit (perhaps after the false analogy of combinations like tad anu, viewed as tadanu, with tad as stem instead of neuter accusative), a preposition is sometimes compounded as final member with the noun governed by it: e. g. vṛkṣādhas or vṛkṣādhastāt under the tree, dantāntaḥ between the teeth, bhavanopari on top of the house, satyavinā without truth.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 155
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 382. Occasionally quite anomalous compounds will be met with. For such, cf. Whitney, § 1314.
382. Occasionally quite anomalous compounds will be met with. For such, cf. Whitney, § 1314.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 155
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXIV. Verbs: f^r + determine, decide. in **caus**. (**yidarayati**) tear open. 2q (**y ar ay ate**) choose, select. + **^T** (**asidati**) approach. + **WI** in **caus**. (**samasadayati**) meet with, encounter. (**patayati**) split open. H + overpower. (**harsat**i; **hrsyati**) rejoice, be delighted.
Vocabulary XXXIV. Verbs: f^r + determine, decide. in **caus**. (**yidarayati**) tear open. 2q (**y ar ay ate**) choose, select. + **^T** (**asidati**) approach. + **WI** in **caus**. (**samasadayati**) meet with, encounter. (**patayati**) split open. H + overpower. (**harsat**i; **hrsyati**) rejoice, be delighted.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 155
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: **n**., palate. cVCCn **f**-5 thirst, desire. A **f**-» tooth. **f**., brilliancy. qqcT **m**., mountain. a tribe in India. **m**-, 8tr°ke, shot; wound. •jpllff **m**-, breath, life (often pl.). 44 **n**‘, head.
**n**., palate. cVCCn **f**-5 thirst, desire. A **f**-» tooth. **f**., brilliancy. qqcT **m**., mountain. a tribe in India. **m**-, 8tr°ke, shot; wound. •jpllff **m**-, breath, life (often pl.). 44 **n**‘, head.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 155
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **n**., limb, member, body. **m**., form, figure. **m**., banner. **f**., peak;point, tip. ^§7 **f**.. top-knot, scalp. **n**., knowledge; insight.
Subst.: **n**., limb, member, body. **m**., form, figure. **m**., banner. **f**., peak;point, tip. ^§7 **f**.. top-knot, scalp. **n**., knowledge; insight.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 156
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: **m**., fish. **n**., chest, breast. **m**-> boaT-**f**., pain. **m**-, tendon; bowstring. Adj.:f. ®**WT**> blameless, faultless. f. O’**OT**, favorable; as » <x **neut**. subst., favor. °**^T**’ inner; as **neut**. subst. , the interior, middle; interval, difference; occasion,
**m**., fish. **n**., chest, breast. **m**-> boaT-**f**., pain. **m**-, tendon; bowstring. Adj.:f. ®**WT**> blameless, faultless. f. O’**OT**, favorable; as » <x **neut**. subst., favor. °**^T**’ inner; as **neut**. subst. , the interior, middle; interval, difference; occasion,
juncture (§ 375. 4.)

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 156
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: skilled. £ °^n> young. I nd eel.: then, thereupon. (adv. acc.) therefore. so long; often merely = **done, doch**. as long as, while; as soon as. **asseverative** particle; gives to the **present** the force of an **historical** tense.
skilled. £ °^n> young. I nd eel.: then, thereupon. (adv. acc.) therefore. so long; often merely = **done, doch**. as long as, while; as soon as. **asseverative** particle; gives to the **present** the force of an **historical** tense.

Back: atitṛṣṇā na kartavyā tṛṣṇāṃ naiva parityajet | atitṛṣṇābhibhūtasya cūḍā bhavati mastake || 19 ||
One should not have excessive desire. One should not, however, abandon desire.
Top-knot exists on the head of that one who is overpowered by excessive desire.
1. kasmiṃcid vane pulindaḥ prativasati sma |
A Pulinda dwelt in a forest.
2. sa caikadā mṛgayāṃ kartuṃ prasthitaḥ |
Once he went out for hunting.
3. atha tena prasarpatā parvataśikharākāro mahāvarāhaḥ samāsāditaḥ
Then a large boar, whose form is like the summit of a mountain, was approached by him who was creeping forward.
4. taṃ dṛṣṭvā karṇāntākṛṣṭaśareṇā sa tena samāhataḥ |
After seeing it (the boar), it was shot by him with an arrow which was drawn up to his ear.
5. tenāpi varāheṇa kopāviṣṭena bālendudyutinā daṃṣṭrāgreṇa pāṭitodaraḥ pulindo gataprāṇo bhūmāv apatat |
The Pulinda, whose belly was split open with the tip of the tusk shining like the young moon, by the same boar who was very angry, and whose breath has gone, fell down on the ground.
6. atha vyādhaṃ vyāpādya varāho'pi śaraprahāravedanayā mṛtaḥ |
Then, having killed the hunter, even the boar also died by the pain due to the wound caused by an arrow.
7. etasminn antare kaścid āsannamṛtyuḥ śṛgāla itas tataḥ paribhramaṃs taṃ deśam āgataḥ |
During that time, a jackal, whose death was coming near, while wondering here and there came to the spot.
8. yāvad varāhapulindau paśyati tāvat prahṛṣṭo ‘cintayat |
As soon as he saw both boar and the Pulinda he was delighted and thought thus:
9. bhoḥ sānukūlo me vidhiḥ |
Oh fate has favor on me.
10. tenaitad acintitaṃ bhojanam upasthitam |
Therefore, this unexpected food is before me.
11. tad ahaṃ tathā bhakṣayāmi yathā bahūny ahāni me prāṇayātrā bhavati |
Therefore, I will eat it in such a way that my livelihood will last for many days.
12. tad tāvat prathamaṃ snāyupāśaṃ dhanuṣkotigataṃ bhakṣayāmi |
Therefore I would rather eat tendon-noose at the end of the bow first.
13. evaṃ manasā niścitya dhanuṣkoṭiṃ mukhe kṣiptvā snāyuṃ bhakṣayitum ārabdhaḥ |
Having decided in his mind this way, he, after throwing the end of the bow into his mouth, started to eat the tendon.
14. tataś ca kartite snāyau tālu vidārya dhanuṣkoṭir mastakamadhyena niṣkrāntā |
And thereafter, when the tendon was cut off, the end of the bow, having torn the palate (of the jackal), came out through the middle of his head.
15. so" pi mṛtaḥ |
He also died.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 156
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXIV. wfHHWT dugi i ^frfaUTTTfHHcl^r II RQ. II I R I treraHT (pr«s. Part)
Exercise XXXIV. wfHHWT dugi i ^frfaUTTTfHHcl^r II RQ. II I R I treraHT (pr«s. Part)

Back: * Secondary adj. cpds., fem. in ī.
**Dep. cpd, "skilled in speech".
16. Those-who-have-done-evil must do penance twelve-days, six-days, or three-days.
16 kṛtapāpā dvādaśāhāni ṣaḍahāni trīṇyahāni vā prāyaścittam ācareyuḥ.
17. Purūravas, Indra's-friend, married the moon-faced*, faultless-limbed* Apsaras Urvaśī.
17 indrasakhaḥ purūravāś candramukhīmanavadyāṅgīmurvaśīṃ paryaṇayat.
18. Bhṛgukaccha is situated (vṛt) on the Narmadā.
18 bhṛgucchaṃ narmadāyāṃ vartate. bhṛguccham upanarmadaṃ vartate.
19. There stands the long-armed, broad-chested king-of-the-Aṅgas, sword-in-hand.
19 dīrghabāhur vyūḍhavakṣā asipāṇir aṅgarājo ‘tra tiṣṭhati.
20. The path-of-knowledge is better than the path-of-works.
20 jñānamārgaḥ karmamārgācchreyān.
21. In-the-opinion-of-the-ancient-seers (cpd in loc. or instr.) one-whose-husband-is-dead may choose a second at-pleasure.
21 paurāṇarṣimatena (paurāṇarṣimate) mṛtabhartṛkā dvitīyaṃ svecchaṃ varayet.
22. Love is bodiless, and bears-a-fish-in-his-banner; so say the poets.
22 kāmo ‘naṅgo mīnaketuś ceti kavyo vadanti.
23. The Brāhman's-daughter, Sītā-by-name*, is lotus-eyed."
23 sītānāmā brāhmaṇaduhitā kamalākśī vartate.
24. The king, although(api) many-wived, is childless.
24 bahupatnīko ‘pi rājāputrakaḥ.
25. The eloquent** pandit has arrived with-his-scholars.
25 vākpaṭuḥ paṇḍitaḥ saśiṣya āgataḥ.
26. With-upturned-face (unmukha) Cātaka prays for rain-water.
26 unmukhaś cātako varṣājalaṃ yācate.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 156
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 16. Those-who-have-done-evil must do penance twelve-day», Lesson XXXIV. XXXV. 147 six-days, or three-days. 17. Pururavas, Indra’s-friend, married the moon-faced * , faultless-limbed * Apsaras UrvaÎ. 18. Bhrgukaccha is situated (^<^) on the Narmada. 19. There stands the long- armed, broad-chested king-of-the-Angas, sword-in-hand. 20. The path-of-knowledge is better than the path-of-works. 21. In-the- opinion-of-the-ancient-seers (cpd in loc. or instr.) one-whose-hus- band-is-dead may choose a second at-pleasure. 22. Love is bodiless, and 5ears-a-fish-in-his-banner; so say the poets. 23. The Brahman’s- daughter, Sita-by-name * , is lotus-eyed. * 24. The king, although many-wived, is childless. 25. The eloquent ** pandit has arrived with-his-scholars. 26. With-upturned-face Cataka prays for rain-water.
16. Those-who-have-done-evil must do penance twelve-day», Lesson XXXIV. XXXV. 147 six-days, or three-days. 17. Pururavas, Indra’s-friend, married the moon-faced * , faultless-limbed * Apsaras UrvaÎ. 18. Bhrgukaccha is situated (^<^) on the Narmada. 19. There stands the long- armed, broad-chested king-of-the-Angas, sword-in-hand. 20. The path-of-knowledge is better than the path-of-works. 21. In-the- opinion-of-the-ancient-seers (cpd in loc. or instr.) one-whose-hus- band-is-dead may choose a second at-pleasure. 22. Love is bodiless, and 5ears-a-fish-in-his-banner; so say the poets. 23. The Brahman’s- daughter, Sita-by-name * , is lotus-eyed. * 24. The king, although many-wived, is childless. 25. The eloquent ** pandit has arrived with-his-scholars. 26. With-upturned-face Cataka prays for rain-water.
* Secondary adj. cpds., fem. in %. ** Dep. cpd, “skilled in speech”.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 157
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXV. 383. First Conjugation of Verbs. Present System. In this conjugation the **optative** act., the **2nd** sing. **imv**. act., and the **3rd** pl. **mid**., are formed otherwise than in the a-conjugation. ***
Lesson XXXV. 383. First Conjugation of Verbs. Present System. In this conjugation the **optative** act., the **2nd** sing. **imv**. act., and the **3rd** pl. **mid**., are formed otherwise than in the a-conjugation. ***
*** For a comprehensive view of the ways of forming the presentstems of verbs following this general conjugation, see Introduction, §78.
First Conjugation. I.The root-class (second or ad-class,of the Hindus);its present-stem is coincident with the root itself;thus,ad,eat"; 夏i,‘go"；f可dwi,hate’. II.The reduplicating class (third or hu-class);the root is reduplicated to form the present-stem;thus,ju from, sacrifice";T dada from I"da,give". I1I.The nasal class (seventh or rudh-class);a nasal,extended to the syllable na [na]in strong forms,is inserted before the final consonant of the root;thus,百刊rundh(or可runadh)from 百rudh,hinder". 20 Introduction. IV.a.The nu-class (fifth or su-class);the syllable nu is added to the root;thus,sunu from 1 su,"press." h.A very small number of roots (only half-a-dozen)ending already in n,and also one very common and irregularly infected root not so ending (kr,make"),add u alone to form the present-stem.This is the eighth or tan-class of the Hindu gram- marians;it is best ranked as a sub-class,the w-class;thus,lanu from瓦tam,‘stretch." V.The na-class (ninth or kri-class);the syllable T nd (or, in weak forms,n)is added to the root;thus,krina (or krini)from/升kri,‘buy’.See note**,p.32.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 157
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 384. Strong forms. The forms in which the stem assumes its strong form are these: the three persons **sing**, of the **pres**, and **impf**. indie, act., all **first** persons of the **imv**., act. and mid., and the **3rd sing**. imv. act. All other forms of the present system are weak.
384. Strong forms. The forms in which the stem assumes its strong form are these: the three persons **sing**, of the **pres**, and **impf**. indie, act., all **first** persons of the **imv**., act. and mid., and the **3rd sing**. imv. act. All other forms of the present system are weak.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 157
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Secondary adj. cpds., fem. in %. ** Dep. cpd, “skilled in speech”. *** For a comprehensive view of the ways of forming the presentstems of verbs following this general conjugation, see Introduction, §78. 385. Endings. For the middle endings **^5T«fT**, and are substituted and ; and after reduplicated stems (and a few others) ’STfJ, and are substituted for the 148 Lesson XXXV. active endings **mfiril**, and (impf.). The 2nd sing. imv. often takes the ending or ftf- Otherwise the endings are the same as in the a-conjugation.
* Secondary adj. cpds., fem. in %. ** Dep. cpd, “skilled in speech”. *** For a comprehensive view of the ways of forming the presentstems of verbs following this general conjugation, see Introduction, §78. 385. Endings. For the middle endings **^5T«fT**, and are substituted and ; and after reduplicated stems (and a few others) ’STfJ, and are substituted for the 148 Lesson XXXV. active endings **mfiril**, and (impf.). The 2nd sing. imv. often takes the ending or ftf- Otherwise the endings are the same as in the a-conjugation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 158
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 386. Optative mode-sign * The sign of the opt. act. is **ya**, with secondary endings; but is the ending in the 3rd pl., and is dropped before it; thus,
386. Optative mode-sign * The sign of the opt. act. is **ya**, with secondary endings; but is the ending in the 3rd pl., and is dropped before it; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 158
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 387. Present participle middle. In the first conjugation this participle is made with the suffix [^Rl> before which the stem takes the same form as before the 3rd pl. pres. ind. The fem. is always in ^STT.
387. Present participle middle. In the first conjugation this participle is made with the suffix [^Rl> before which the stem takes the same form as before the 3rd pl. pres. ind. The fem. is always in ^STT.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 158
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 388. Class IV. A: **rm**-class. The present-stem is made by adding to the root the syllable «Ff nu rm], in strong forms •T| nd [uh nd]. The **xJ** of the class-sign may be dropped before and of the **1st du. and 1st pl**. endings, except when the root ends in a **consonant**; and the ^3 before a **vowel**-ending becomes or ■3^ , according as it is preceded by **one** or by **two** consonants. The ending of the 2nd. sing. imv. is dropped if the root end in a **vowel**.
388. Class IV. A: **rm**-class. The present-stem is made by adding to the root the syllable «Ff nu rm], in strong forms •T| nd [uh nd]. The **xJ** of the class-sign may be dropped before and of the **1st du. and 1st pl**. endings, except when the root ends in a **consonant**; and the ^3 before a **vowel**-ending becomes or ■3^ , according as it is preceded by **one** or by **two** consonants. The ending of the 2nd. sing. imv. is dropped if the root end in a **vowel**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 158
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 389. I. Roots in vowels. H ‘press’. Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. ’EpTTfW sun d mi 2. sundsi 3-sundti sunuvas sunuthas sunutas sunumas sunutha sunvanti sunve sunusd sunuvahe sunvathe sunvdte sunumdhe sunudhve sunvdte surmtfe The forms are alternative with those given above for 1st du. and pl., and occur oftener. 149 Lesson XXXV, Imperfect. 2. -^h^tYh 3. ^Rprn ^r^rnrRi °^h The briefer forms &re aI" lowed and more usual. L. g^r^rR sundvani sunavava Imperative. ^PTTRT X. X. sunavama sunavai sunavavahai x* sun av amah di !-sunu** sunutam j ••gjpiH sundtu** sunutam sunutd sunvantu x» X * sunusva sunutam X *sunvdtham ^TrTRl sunvatam sunudhvam sunvatain Optative. l. ih “^n’T ^pfhrflr sunuydm sunuydva sunuydma sunvzyd sunvwdhi sunvtmahi ?. garret *-i^H “•’TTH J. IdTR °^L ’g^tWTlK Participle. , f. 3^TTSf, f. °**TT**
389. I. Roots in vowels. H ‘press’. Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. ’EpTTfW sun d mi 2. sundsi 3-sundti sunuvas sunuthas sunutas sunumas sunutha sunvanti sunve sunusd sunuvahe sunvathe sunvdte sunumdhe sunudhve sunvdte surmtfe The forms are alternative with those given above for 1st du. and pl., and occur oftener. 149 Lesson XXXV, Imperfect. 2. -^h^tYh 3. ^Rprn ^r^rnrRi °^h The briefer forms &re aI" lowed and more usual. L. g^r^rR sundvani sunavava Imperative. ^PTTRT X. X. sunavama sunavai sunavavahai x* sun av amah di !-sunu** sunutam j ••gjpiH sundtu** sunutam sunutd sunvantu x» X * sunusva sunutam X *sunvdtham ^TrTRl sunvatam sunudhvam sunvatain Optative. l. ih “^n’T ^pfhrflr sunuydm sunuydva sunuydma sunvzyd sunvwdhi sunvtmahi ?. garret *-i^H “•’TTH J. IdTR °^L ’g^tWTlK Participle. , f. 3^TTSf, f. °**TT**

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 159
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The augment, without any exception in verbal conjugation, is the accented element in the verbal form of which it makes a part. ** The rare imv. in dI<T (cf- § ^6) would be formed thus: 390. II. Roots in consonants. 1 << ‘acquire’. Indicative. Active. 1. 2. ^nnYfa 3. Middle. 150 JLesson XXXV*. Imperative. 1. wrsrTrf’f ’srnrrrent 2. ’^rrgfW ^TT^rT 3. ’STTjftH Î9<HTH ^Tn^TcHH o^HTTR Participle. , f. **^TR^cft ^ng^rr^**, f- °**^rr** The other forms of this tense follow the model of 1J.
* The augment, without any exception in verbal conjugation, is the accented element in the verbal form of which it makes a part. ** The rare imv. in dI<T (cf- § ^6) would be formed thus: 390. II. Roots in consonants. 1 << ‘acquire’. Indicative. Active. 1. 2. ^nnYfa 3. Middle. 150 JLesson XXXV*. Imperative. 1. wrsrTrf’f ’srnrrrent 2. ’^rrgfW ^TT^rT 3. ’STTjftH Î9<HTH ^Tn^TcHH o^HTTR Participle. , f. **^TR^cft ^ng^rr^**, f- °**^rr** The other forms of this tense follow the model of 1J.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 160
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 391. 1. The root ‘hear’, contracts to sj before the classsign, forming 3JWt W^d and f.rnw as strong and weak stem; 2nd sing. imv. act. 3q7TT; 1st du. ind. act. or etc. * 2. The root V shortens its vowel in the present-system. Os
391. 1. The root ‘hear’, contracts to sj before the classsign, forming 3JWt W^d and f.rnw as strong and weak stem; 2nd sing. imv. act. 3q7TT; 1st du. ind. act. or etc. * 2. The root V shortens its vowel in the present-system. Os

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 160
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Verbs: ^’ST acquire, obtain. 4- obtain. ^|]q^ (**apnot**i, rarely **apnute**) acquire, reach. 4- **V**, or reach. (**ctntft**t, **cinut e**) gather. 4-TT or gather. 4-f^fHL or decide, conclude. on. 4- Ti (**pracodayati**) urge (**dundti**), **intr**., burn, feel pain or distress; **tr**., pain or distress (**acc**.)
Verbs: ^’ST acquire, obtain. 4- obtain. ^|]q^ (**apnot**i, rarely **apnute**) acquire, reach. 4- **V**, or reach. (**ctntft**t, **cinut e**) gather. 4-TT or gather. 4-f^fHL or decide, conclude. on. 4- Ti (**pracodayati**) urge (**dundti**), **intr**., burn, feel pain or distress; **tr**., pain or distress (**acc**.)

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 160
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: VJ (**dhunoti**, **dhunute**) shake. Cx (**vrnoti**, **vrnute**) cover,surround. 4- cover, etc.. 4- -**5tqT** open. 4- explain, manifest. + shut. Tjofi (**fakndti**) be able. "5T **^rnute**) hear. (**strnoti**, **strnute**) scatter, strew- d4- scatter. (**hindti**) send. <+TT^n (**pratyaharati**) bring back.
VJ (**dhunoti**, **dhunute**) shake. Cx (**vrnoti**, **vrnute**) cover,surround. 4- cover, etc.. 4- -**5tqT** open. 4- explain, manifest. + shut. Tjofi (**fakndti**) be able. "5T **^rnute**) hear. (**strnoti**, **strnute**) scatter, strew- d4- scatter. (**hindti**) send. <+TT^n (**pratyaharati**) bring back.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 160
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: •^rr?TT **m**., food. **m**., day. might, power.
Subst.: •^rr?TT **m**., food. **m**., day. might, power.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 161
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: HfT **m**., enjoyment. TT^T **n**., root. **m**., taste, feeling. **n**i., a Brahman in the third period of his life. fWw **m**., Brahman. **m**., sound; noise; word. Adj.: f. new.
HfT **m**., enjoyment. TT^T **n**., root. **m**., taste, feeling. **n**i., a Brahman in the third period of his life. fWw **m**., Brahman. **m**., sound; noise; word. Adj.: f. new.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 161
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: f. °^T, meritorious, holy, auspicious. sharing. entrancing, agreeable. f. tasteful. f. similar; worthy.
f. °^T, meritorious, holy, auspicious. sharing. entrancing, agreeable. f. tasteful. f. similar; worthy.

Back: ācārād vicyuto vipro na vedaphalam aśnute | ācāreṇa tu saṃyuktaḥ saṃpūrṇaphalabhāg bhavet || 20 ||
The Brāhman who has fallen from good conduct will not acquire the fruit of the Vedas but the one who is endowed with good conduct will have the complete fruit of the Vedas.
1. balahīnā api buddhiprabhāvena mahāntaṃ duḥkhodadhiṃ tarītuṃ śaknuvanti |
Even the persons who are without power can cross the big ocean of suffering by the power of their intelligence.
2. vānaprasthaḥ śayyārthaṃ bhūmiṃ navapattrair hariṇacarmabhiś copāstṛṇot |
The Vanaprastha spread fresh leaves and deer-hides on the ground for his bed.
3. svapitarāv udyānād āhvātuṃ bālaṃ prahiṇu |
Send the boy to summon his parents from the garden.
4. he maghavan paṇibhir apahṛtā asmadgāḥ pratyāhartuṃ marutaḥ sahāyān ādāya guhāyā dvāram apāvṛṇuyā ity ṛṣibhir indraḥ prārthyata |
“Oh Indra, please take Maruts, your companions, and open the gate of the cave to bring back our cows which were taken away by the Paṇis”: thus Indra was prayed by the seers.
5. vanavṛkṣān dhunvānasya vāyoḥ śabdaṃ pathā gacchantāv aśṛṇva |
We two, while going along the road, heard the sound of the wind shaking the trees in the forest.
6. puṇyakarmabhir dharmaṃ saṃcitya mṛtāḥ svargaṃ janmāntare ca vidyārūpādīn guṇān āpnavāma |
We, having gathered the Dharma by good deeds, having died, went to heaven and acquired qualities, such as knowledge, beauty etc. in the next birth.
7. yajñeṣu hotṛpracoditā adhvaryavaḥ somaṃ sunvatām |
In the sacrifices, let the Adhvaryus, who were urged on by the Hotṛs, press the Soma.
8. mahāvane trirātraṃ paribhramya caturthadivasasya madhyāhne giriśikharam avāpnuvata |
They, having wandered about in the great forest for three nights, reached the summit of the mountain at noon of the fourth day.
9. mūlaphalādi vana āhārarthaṃ pracinvīraṃs tapasvinaḥ |
The ascetics must gather roots, fruits, etc. for their food in the forest.
10. paṇḍitaḥ śiṣyebhyaḥ śabdaśāstraṃ vyavṛṇot ||
The Pandita explained the grammar to the students.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 161
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXV. ^rfq HiTwi erO<j * ft?T I q I Hffl ^^xraifxw^HfH^rvr^xirrci. I R I ^f’nnn^n’n^TST° H
Exercise XXXV. ^rfq HiTwi erO<j * ft?T I q I Hffl ^^xraifxw^HfH^rvr^xirrci. I R I ^f’nnn^n’n^TST° H
* Infin. of g. *ifr "it" F M XThe instr, is sometimes used to express the medium, or space or distance or road, traversed.

Back: 11. Having entered the temple of the worshipful (bhagavat)-Viṣṇu we heard the ear-entrancing (śrutimanohara) song of-the-youngwomen (use jana at end of cpd).
11. bhagavato viṣṇor devakulaṃ praviśya vayaṃ yuvatījanasya śrutimanoharaṃ gītam aśṛṇma/aśṛṇuma |
12. Listen to this word of a devoted (snih, pass, part.) friend.
12. snigdhasya suhṛda etāṃ vācaṃ (vacanam idaṃ)śṛṇu |
13. The greedy (lubh, pass. part.), who are always gathering riches, never attain the enjoyment of them.
13. sadā dhanaṃ cinvanto lubdhās tasya bhogaṃ naivāśnuvate |
14. By tasteful, well-composed poems ye may attain glory in the ten regions of the world (diś).
14. sarasaiḥ suracitaiḥ kāvyair yūyaṃ daśasu dikṣu kīrtim āpnuyāta |
15. Śakuntalā, mayest thou get (imv.) a husband worthy-of-thee.
15. śakuntale tvatsadṛśaṃ bhartāram āpnuhi |
16. My-two-brothers determined to travel to Benares.
16. madbhrātarau kāśīṃ gantuṃ viniracinutām |
17. May the king’s-sword bring grief to (du, imv, or opt.) the hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies.
17. rājāsis tadaribhāryāhṛdayāni dunotu/ dunuyāt |
18. Clouds cover the sky.
18. meghā ākāśam āvṛṇvanti |
19. Let the doorkeeper close the door.
19. dvāḥstho dvāraṃ saṃvṛṇotu |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 161
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Infin. of g. *ifr "it" F M XThe instr, is sometimes used to express the medium, or space or distance or road, traversed. 11. Having entered the temple of the worshipful(3pr^cQ- Visnu we heard the ear-entrancing (^fTTfpft^T) song of-the-young- women (use at end of cpd"). 12. Listen to this word of a devoted pass, part.) friend. 13. The greedy pass. part.)y who are always gathering riches, never attain the enjoyment of 152 Lesson XXXV. XXXVI. them. 14. By tasteful/ well-composed poems ye may attain glory in the ten regions of the world 15. Qakuntala, mayest thou get (ww.) a husband worthy-of-thee. 16. My-£wo-brothers determined to travel to Benares. 17. May the king’s-sword bring grief to (^r, imv, or opt.} the hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies. 18. Clouds cover the sky. 19. Let the doorkeeper close the door.
* Infin. of g. *ifr "it" F M XThe instr, is sometimes used to express the medium, or space or distance or road, traversed. 11. Having entered the temple of the worshipful(3pr^cQ- Visnu we heard the ear-entrancing (^fTTfpft^T) song of-the-young- women (use at end of cpd"). 12. Listen to this word of a devoted pass, part.) friend. 13. The greedy pass. part.)y who are always gathering riches, never attain the enjoyment of 152 Lesson XXXV. XXXVI. them. 14. By tasteful/ well-composed poems ye may attain glory in the ten regions of the world 15. Qakuntala, mayest thou get (ww.) a husband worthy-of-thee. 16. My-£wo-brothers determined to travel to Benares. 17. May the king’s-sword bring grief to (^r, imv, or opt.} the hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies. 18. Clouds cover the sky. 19. Let the doorkeeper close the door.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 162
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXVI. 392. Verbs. Class IV. B. **u**-class. The few roots (only six) of this sub-class end already in — except one, "3i, of considerable irregularity — and so add only as class-sign. The inflection is quite that of the rm-class, the ^3 being **gunated** in the strong forms, and dropped (optionally, but in fact nearly always) before and of 1st dual and plural.
Lesson XXXVI. 392. Verbs. Class IV. B. **u**-class. The few roots (only six) of this sub-class end already in — except one, "3i, of considerable irregularity — and so add only as class-sign. The inflection is quite that of the rm-class, the ^3 being **gunated** in the strong forms, and dropped (optionally, but in fact nearly always) before and of 1st dual and plural.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 162
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 393. Thus i stretch’, makes etc.; 1st du. (or cT5pTO;), 1st pl (or 5 mid-etc. — all like a vowel-root of the rm-class.
393. Thus i stretch’, makes etc.; 1st du. (or cT5pTO;), 1st pl (or 5 mid-etc. — all like a vowel-root of the rm-class.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 162
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 394.The root 1,make",makes the strong stem,weak the class-sign is always dropped before and in Ist du.and Ist pl.,and also before of the opt.active.Thus: Indicative. Active. Middle. 1.币t河双防时时我西2. tf何西丙双百可页可安更页对3.币f 更页可瓦f而行府前Imperfect. 1.环文开再更时荷双f度f宿2.币瓦百开两页可习更重T瓦习更寸式T可氏可更开3.习西（页开再守司西行西T可风更寸Lesson XXXVI. 153 Imperative. 1.可Tf 不文T可面文可T开币奇不t藏可TH管2.所重更夜开而可西网更可T可T开丙氏3.可更T氏司可页T瓦更T 更对氏Optative. 1.动功可T阳▣事faf屐可f和f etc. ete. etc. etc. etc. etc. Participle. 厨对司，f手升更可四，f.知.
394.The root 1,make",makes the strong stem,weak the class-sign is always dropped before and in Ist du.and Ist pl.,and also before of the opt.active.Thus: Indicative. Active. Middle. 1.币t河双防时时我西2. tf何西丙双百可页可安更页对3.币f 更页可瓦f而行府前Imperfect. 1.环文开再更时荷双f度f宿2.币瓦百开两页可习更重T瓦习更寸式T可氏可更开3.习西（页开再守司西行西T可风更寸Lesson XXXVI. 153 Imperative. 1.可Tf 不文T可面文可T开币奇不t藏可TH管2.所重更夜开而可西网更可T可T开丙氏3.可更T氏司可页T瓦更T 更对氏Optative. 1.动功可T阳▣事faf屐可f和f etc. ete. etc. etc. etc. etc. Participle. 厨对司，f手升更可四，f.知.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 163
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 395. This root sometimes assumes (or retains from a more original condition) an initial after the prefix thus, VtfH, <f«4$4«V
395. This root sometimes assumes (or retains from a more original condition) an initial after the prefix thus, VtfH, <f«4$4«V
* Also sometimes after and \3Tq.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 163
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 396. The adverbial prefixes and TH^C ‘f°rth to sight’, ‘in view ’; fHXEC ‘through’, ‘out of sight’; 6*n front, forward’; and the purely adverbial ‘enough, sufficient’, are often used with cfi, and with one or two other verbs, oftenest ^5TTF ‘be’ and H ‘become’. ©X
396. The adverbial prefixes and TH^C ‘f°rth to sight’, ‘in view ’; fHXEC ‘through’, ‘out of sight’; 6*n front, forward’; and the purely adverbial ‘enough, sufficient’, are often used with cfi, and with one or two other verbs, oftenest ^5TTF ‘be’ and H ‘become’. ©X

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 163
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 397. Any noun or adjective-stem is liable to be compounded with verbal forms or derivatives of the roots ofi and in the manner of a verbal prefix. If the final of the stem be an **a**-vowel or an **s**-vowel, it is changed to ; if an **w**-vowel, to Consonantal stems take the form which they have before consonantendings — of course with observance of the usual euphonic rules; but stems in change those letters to Thus, ‘he makes his own’, ‘appropriates’; °hOfH 4he changes to ashes’, i. e. ‘burns’: ‘becomes a post’ ; becomes pure makes holy’.
397. Any noun or adjective-stem is liable to be compounded with verbal forms or derivatives of the roots ofi and in the manner of a verbal prefix. If the final of the stem be an **a**-vowel or an **s**-vowel, it is changed to ; if an **w**-vowel, to Consonantal stems take the form which they have before consonantendings — of course with observance of the usual euphonic rules; but stems in change those letters to Thus, ‘he makes his own’, ‘appropriates’; °hOfH 4he changes to ashes’, i. e. ‘burns’: ‘becomes a post’ ; becomes pure makes holy’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 163
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Also sometimes after and \3Tq. 398. The suffixes **cH** (f-) and **<3** (n.) are very extensively used to form abstract nouns, denoting ‘the quality of being so- 154 Lesson XXXVI. and-so’, from both adjectives and nouns. Thus, f., n., ‘**the rank of a Ksatriya**’.
* Also sometimes after and \3Tq. 398. The suffixes **cH** (f-) and **<3** (n.) are very extensively used to form abstract nouns, denoting ‘the quality of being so- 154 Lesson XXXVI. and-so’, from both adjectives and nouns. Thus, f., n., ‘**the rank of a Ksatriya**’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 164
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXVI. Verbs: (**karoti**, **fcurute**) do, make. 4- do evil to, harm Q/**en**., **loc**., or **acc**.). 4 prepare, adorn + (**aviskarot**?) make known, exhibit. 4- xJXJ do good to, benefit (**gen**., **loc**.). 4- blame, find fault with (**acc**.). 4- JTUL Put at tbe head. + UfH pay, recompense; punish (**acc**. rei, **gen**., **dat**. or **loc**. pers.). 4 make known, or visible. 4- (§ 395) prepare, adorn; consecrate. (ksanoti, **ksanute**) wound. (**tanoti**, **tanute**) stretch, extend (**tr**.); perform (a sacrifice). 4 cause, bring about. 4 JJ spread abroad (tr.). (**dusyati**) be defiled. (**manute**) think, consider.
Vocabulary XXXVI. Verbs: (**karoti**, **fcurute**) do, make. 4- do evil to, harm Q/**en**., **loc**., or **acc**.). 4 prepare, adorn + (**aviskarot**?) make known, exhibit. 4- xJXJ do good to, benefit (**gen**., **loc**.). 4- blame, find fault with (**acc**.). 4- JTUL Put at tbe head. + UfH pay, recompense; punish (**acc**. rei, **gen**., **dat**. or **loc**. pers.). 4 make known, or visible. 4- (§ 395) prepare, adorn; consecrate. (ksanoti, **ksanute**) wound. (**tanoti**, **tanute**) stretch, extend (**tr**.); perform (a sacrifice). 4 cause, bring about. 4 JJ spread abroad (tr.). (**dusyati**) be defiled. (**manute**) think, consider.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 164
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **m**., fault. **m**’’ Priest of a cer- **f**., conduct of tain kind. politics. life; ethics; **m**. , progeny, descendant. ^fWffT^Tm.,pIan; view; opinion. **n**. , breast. **m**., name of a tribe, cfiffsa **f**., charm, grace. **m**-, astonishment. **n**., a certain sacrifice. **m**., name of a tribe. **f**., veil. **m**., king. Cx^* x **n** , kitchen. ITTO **n**., flesh. Refill **n**-> salt. **n**., spice. **m**., trade. **m**., doubt. **m**., cook.
Subst.: **m**., fault. **m**’’ Priest of a cer- **f**., conduct of tain kind. politics. life; ethics; **m**. , progeny, descendant. ^fWffT^Tm.,pIan; view; opinion. **n**. , breast. **m**., name of a tribe, cfiffsa **f**., charm, grace. **m**-, astonishment. **n**., a certain sacrifice. **m**., name of a tribe. **f**., veil. **m**., king. Cx^* x **n** , kitchen. ITTO **n**., flesh. Refill **n**-> salt. **n**., spice. **m**., trade. **m**., doubt. **m**., cook.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 165
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Adj.: f. °**ÎT** blind. ■41, **Adv**., necessarily, f- °^’ knowing. enjoying. f. »^T, dear. f. wrong, false. •sqH, f- good, proper. TPST, f. °**W**, ready.
Adj.: f. °**ÎT** blind. ■41, **Adv**., necessarily, f- °^’ knowing. enjoying. f. »^T, dear. f. wrong, false. •sqH, f- good, proper. TPST, f. °**W**, ready.

Back: Yo 'nadhītya dvijo vedam anyatra kurute śramam |
sa jīvann eva śrudratvam āśu gacchati sānvayaḥ || 21 ||
The priest who makes effort in other matters without studying the Vedas will quickly attain the state of a Shudra along with his progeny while he is still living.
yat karoty aśubhaṃ karma śubhaṃ vā yadi sattama |
avaśyaṃ tat samāpnoti puruṣo" tra na saṃśayaḥ || 22 ||
Oh the best among the good, a man recompenses for certain the fruit of his whatsoever action either good or bad he commits. There is no doubt about that.
kurvann api vyalīkāni yaḥ priyaḥ priya eva saḥ |
anekadoṣaduṣṭo" pi kāyaḥ kasya na vallabhaḥ || 23 ||
He who is dear will still be dear even though he does wrong. Whose body is not dear even though it is full of many faults?
1. yo brahmaṇā karṇāv āvṛṇoti taṃ pitaraṃ mātaraṃ ca manvamāno na druhyet tasmai kadācana |
One must never be hostile to him who covers his ears with Vedic mantra, thinking that he is his parents.
2. idaṃ te lobhāndhasya vṛttaṃ manasi camatkāram ātanoti |
This behavior of yours who are blind on account of greed creates astonishment in my mind.
3. bho rājan nītijñānāṃ mantriṇām abhiprāyaṃ śrutvā yaddhitaṃ tat svīkuruṣva |
Oh king, having listened to the opinion of the ministers who know politics, you must accept that which is useful.
4. asmadyaśāṃsi dikṣu pratanuyur iti matvā bhūyasīṃ śriyaṃ bhūbhujaḥ kavibhyo vibhajanti |
“They may spread our fame in all directions : thus thinking, the kings distribute their huge wealth to the poets.
5. māṃsamūlaphalādi prabhūtavyañjanaiḥ sūdā mahānase saṃskuryuḥ |
The cooks should prepare meat, roots, fruits etc. with much spices in the kitchen.
6. śatruṣūpāgateṣu śūrā yuddhāya sajjībhūya svaguṇān āviṣkurvantu |
When the enemies have approached let the brave, having prepared for battle, exhibit their own good qualities.
7. apsarasas tiraskariṇā vapus tiraskurvate" vijñātāś ca manuṣyān upāgacchanti ||
The apsarases hide their bodies with a veil and approach men unnoticed.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 165
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXVI. 升可闭f官升衣H可子行呀可开日升阿有可灭对T叉f行网可：*‖又9‖可两升网习时对时Tf侯T开1 网可对和T升f行升S行可对可：‖RR川f何可向平：f可：f何可V可：1 不动飞可f而可：恩可可冠时：‖3川升@uT对T可T可f行才f何a文T文可对阿T升可意司反T何可19l夏安守恩T可f可HT下Tafa1?1 行T元f府司faurafaaT时习闪可fir网131 阿黑ff民了可f代f行开网T寸迟可：f何f向可f司181i双f尼以可奇：T开可对④时：11 TgTg双T写T问升河网T同f可可1专1西ff网T职f和瓯粉sfTT图网T订f司9川
Exercise XXXVI. 升可闭f官升衣H可子行呀可开日升阿有可灭对T叉f行网可：*‖又9‖可两升网习时对时Tf侯T开1 网可对和T升f行升S行可对可：‖RR川f何可向平：f可：f何可V可：1 不动飞可f而可：恩可可冠时：‖3川升@uT对T可T可f行才f何a文T文可对阿T升可意司反T何可19l夏安守恩T可f可HT下Tafa1?1 行T元f府司faurafaaT时习闪可fir网131 阿黑ff民了可f代f行开网T寸迟可：f何f向可f司181i双f尼以可奇：T开可对④时：11 TgTg双T写T问升河网T同f可可1专1西ff网T职f和瓯粉sfTT图网T订f司9川
Poss, cpd, cf. § 374, 5.

Back: 8. Every-year an Agnihotrin must perform the Cāturmāsya (pl.).
8. prativarṣam agnihotrī cāturmāsyāni tanuyāt |
9. Mayest thou, O Great-King, protect thy kingdom, benefitting thy friends and harming thy enemies.
9. bho mahārāja tvanmitrāṇām upakurvan tvaddviṣām apakurvaṃś ca svarājyaṃ pālaya |
10. Brāhmans find fault with the trade-in-salt.
10. brāhmaṇā lavaṇavyavahāraṃ tiraskurvanti |
11. What thou didst (mid.), that distresses thy friends even now.
11. tvaṃ yad akuruthās tad adhunāpi tvanmitrāṇi dunoti |
12. May I recompense him (dat.) who has done me a service.
12. ahaṃ ma upakṛtavate pratikaravāṇi |
13. By the command of the great-king consecrate the four princes according to the law (vidhi, instr.).
13. mahārājasyājñayā vidhinā caturaḥ kumārān saṃskuru |
14. The Caulukyas held sway (rājyaṃ kṛ) in Anabilapāṭaka 247 years.
14. caulukyā anahilapāṭake saptacatvāriṃśadadhike dve śate varṣāṇi rājyam akurvan |
15. By-the-charm-of-her-face the lotus-eyed eclipses (tiraskṛ) even the moon.
15. padmākṣī svamukhakāntyā candramasam api tiraskaroti |
16. If one consecrates a scholar, teaches him, makes him holy, then this one becomes his child (prajā).
16. yadi śiṣyam upanayed adhyāpayet sādhuṃ ca kuryāt tadaiṣa tasya prajā bhavet |
17. The king-of-the-Kaliṅgas wounded his enemy in the breast with an arrow.
17. kaliṅgarājo ‘rim urasi śareṇākṣaṇot |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 165
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 8. Every-year an Agnihotrin must perform the Caturmasya (pl.}. 9. Mayest thou, O Great-King, protect thy kingdom, benefiting tby friends and harming thy enemies. 10. Brahmans find fault with the trade-in-salt. 11. What thou didst (mid.}, that distresses thy friends even now. 12. May I recompense him (dat.} who has done me a service. 13. By the command of the great-king consecrate the four princes according to the law instr.). 14. The Caulukyas held sway eJi) in Anahilapataka 247 years. 15. By-the-charm-of-her-face the lotus-eyed eclipses even the moon. 16. If one consecrates a scholar, teaches him, makes Poss, cpd, cf. § 374, 5. 156 Lesson XXXVI. XXXVII. him holy, then this one becomes his child (THTT). 17. The king- of-the-Kalingas wounded his enemy in the breast with an arrow.
8. Every-year an Agnihotrin must perform the Caturmasya (pl.}. 9. Mayest thou, O Great-King, protect thy kingdom, benefiting tby friends and harming thy enemies. 10. Brahmans find fault with the trade-in-salt. 11. What thou didst (mid.}, that distresses thy friends even now. 12. May I recompense him (dat.} who has done me a service. 13. By the command of the great-king consecrate the four princes according to the law instr.). 14. The Caulukyas held sway eJi) in Anahilapataka 247 years. 15. By-the-charm-of-her-face the lotus-eyed eclipses even the moon. 16. If one consecrates a scholar, teaches him, makes Poss, cpd, cf. § 374, 5. 156 Lesson XXXVI. XXXVII. him holy, then this one becomes his child (THTT). 17. The king- of-the-Kalingas wounded his enemy in the breast with an arrow.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 166
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXVII. 399. Verbs. na-class. The class-sign is in the strong forms the syllable **<n na [irTT nd**}y accented, which is added to the **root**; in the weak forms it is m ft®] ; but before an i**nitial vowel** of an ending the i of ft® m] disappears altogether.
Lesson XXXVII. 399. Verbs. na-class. The class-sign is in the strong forms the syllable **<n na [irTT nd**}y accented, which is added to the **root**; in the weak forms it is m ft®] ; but before an i**nitial vowel** of an ending the i of ft® m] disappears altogether.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 166
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 400.Thus,buy":strong stem krina,weak krini (before a vowel,krin). Indicative。 Active. Middle. L.uTf和ufa瓦升计和升奇u u升和2.uTf和fua 可升u时四T司词3.urfa una瓦uff司u u府u喻Imperfect. 1.T氏u 第开f oaf度o升Hf 2.行uT氏习u升开男u命不oT瓦o四T以T 介开3.男西T瓦T氏u可omd o可TT o可可Imperative. 1.uTf行升四T可升四T开奇四T可食uTH喉2.f信u开aufla 升网urut氏霸升升开3.uT可ataTA 西可utaT氏uTT ,分迎行T开Optative. 1.包T氏uT可升升T用u河amafs ，u升f居etc. etc. etc. ete. etc. etc. Participle. 四可，￡.四升四1可，f.oT
400.Thus,buy":strong stem krina,weak krini (before a vowel,krin). Indicative。 Active. Middle. L.uTf和ufa瓦升计和升奇u u升和2.uTf和fua 可升u时四T司词3.urfa una瓦uff司u u府u喻Imperfect. 1.T氏u 第开f oaf度o升Hf 2.行uT氏习u升开男u命不oT瓦o四T以T 介开3.男西T瓦T氏u可omd o可TT o可可Imperative. 1.uTf行升四T可升四T开奇四T可食uTH喉2.f信u开aufla 升网urut氏霸升升开3.uT可ataTA 西可utaT氏uTT ,分迎行T开Optative. 1.包T氏uT可升升T用u河amafs ，u升f居etc. etc. etc. ete. etc. etc. Participle. 四可，￡.四升四1可，f.oT

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 166
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 401. The ending of the 2nd sing. imv. act. is f^, never fM 5 and there are no examples of its omission. But roots of this class Lesson XXXVII. 157 ending in a consonant substitute for both class-sign and ending in this person the peculiar ending **ana**; thus, KFT, (see §§ 402, 403). 402. The roots ending in shorten that vowel before the class-sign ; thus, TJ, The root is weakened to thus, 403. A few roots which have a nasal in some forms outside the present-system, lose it in the **present**; thus, UW or ^TUlftT; or , ^r* nfa. Similarly, makes
401. The ending of the 2nd sing. imv. act. is f^, never fM 5 and there are no examples of its omission. But roots of this class Lesson XXXVII. 157 ending in a consonant substitute for both class-sign and ending in this person the peculiar ending **ana**; thus, KFT, (see §§ 402, 403). 402. The roots ending in shorten that vowel before the class-sign ; thus, TJ, The root is weakened to thus, 403. A few roots which have a nasal in some forms outside the present-system, lose it in the **present**; thus, UW or ^TUlftT; or , ^r* nfa. Similarly, makes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 167
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 404. Root-class. In this class there is no class-sign; the root itself is also **present-stem**, and to it are added directly the personal-endings; in the opt. (and subj.: §60, end) of course combined with the mode-sign. The root-vowel takes guna, if capable of it, in the strong forms.
404. Root-class. In this class there is no class-sign; the root itself is also **present-stem**, and to it are added directly the personal-endings; in the opt. (and subj.: §60, end) of course combined with the mode-sign. The root-vowel takes guna, if capable of it, in the strong forms.
60. Persons and Numbers. There are three persons: first, second, and third; and, as with substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, three numbers: singular, dual, and plural. All these persons and numbers are made from every tense and mode — except that the first persons of the imperative are really subjunctive forms.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 167
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 405. Roots ending in vowels. Roots in of this class are inflected only in the **active**. In the 3rd pl. impf. act. they may optionally take as ending instead of the ÎT being lost before it. *
405. Roots ending in vowels. Roots in of this class are inflected only in the **active**. In the 3rd pl. impf. act. they may optionally take as ending instead of the ÎT being lost before it. *
• The same ending is also allowed and met with in a few roots ending in consonants; viz. ‘know ’ ’

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 167
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: • The same ending is also allowed and met with in a few roots ending in consonants; viz. ‘know ’ ’406. Thus, ^TT ‘go’: Indicative. 1. ’BnfW 2. "^nrfcr 3. ^rrf^r Imperfect. ^<414 ^SKlIdR ^4 <4 I"d or 158 Lesson XXXVII. Imperative. Optative. 1. m inn 2. inHR RTH RTRTR <n iiiHR 3. in^Tcr RTRTHTR ^41 Part. , f. RI»rfV or RTcTt (260).
• The same ending is also allowed and met with in a few roots ending in consonants; viz. ‘know ’ ’406. Thus, ^TT ‘go’: Indicative. 1. ’BnfW 2. "^nrfcr 3. ^rrf^r Imperfect. ^<414 ^SKlIdR ^4 <4 I"d or 158 Lesson XXXVII. Imperative. Optative. 1. m inn 2. inHR RTH RTRTR <n iiiHR 3. in^Tcr RTRTHTR ^41 Part. , f. RI»rfV or RTcTt (260).
260.Only the present participles of verbs of the a-class,the ya-class,and causatives,invariably insert in nom.-voc.-acc. du. neut.Present participles of the d-class,of the root-class when the root ends in T,and all future participles,may either take or reject it;thus,neut.-sing.fat,du.fat orfa;afd (fut.),du.iff网升orft;可(pres.part.from,‘go), du.a or a.Participles of all other verbs,and all other stems in leave out the in the du.neut.;thus,( eat",root-class),du.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 168
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 4- ^RT (**dplavate**} drench. (**badhnati** * **badhmte**) bind; catch; join; compose, **m** (**bhdti**) gleam, glance. TFT (**mdtz**) measure. fHR work, create. TTQ (**musnatQ** steal, rob. 2^3 (^) + f^TR steal. 2^ (vrmte : choose. also **varayati**, 4- remain over. (**strndti**^ **str nite**; see also in <4Vocab. XXXV) strew. xm (**snail**) bathe. ^ * 7 + remove.
4- ^RT (**dplavate**} drench. (**badhnati** * **badhmte**) bind; catch; join; compose, **m** (**bhdti**) gleam, glance. TFT (**mdtz**) measure. fHR work, create. TTQ (**musnatQ** steal, rob. 2^3 (^) + f^TR steal. 2^ (vrmte : choose. also **varayati**, 4- remain over. (**strndti**^ **str nite**; see also in <4Vocab. XXXV) strew. xm (**snail**) bathe. ^ * 7 + remove.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 168
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Verbs: (**agndti**") eat. "§fft (**Jcrinati**, **krzmte**") buy. XI(**grathndti**) string together; compose. (**jgrhndti**, **grhnite**) take, seize. + ’Hr hold, restrain, check. + "JTfff take, receive. 1J7 (**jandt**i, **janlte**") know. + allow, permit. 2**m** (j**pdt**i) protect. 5^ make increase or grow. TJ (j**punati**, **punlte**) clean. H(\(**prindti**, **print te**), **act**., delight; **mid**., rejoice.
Verbs: (**agndti**") eat. "§fft (**Jcrinati**, **krzmte**") buy. XI(**grathndti**) string together; compose. (**jgrhndti**, **grhnite**) take, seize. + ’Hr hold, restrain, check. + "JTfff take, receive. 1J7 (**jandt**i, **janlte**") know. + allow, permit. 2**m** (j**pdt**i) protect. 5^ make increase or grow. TJ (j**punati**, **punlte**) clean. H(\(**prindti**, **print te**), **act**., delight; **mid**., rejoice.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 168
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The two hands hollowed and opened, and raised to the forehead. Subst.: **m**., a gesture of respectful greeting. * wish. **m**., rise. crescent. HifH **f**-, work (literary). <^|q **m**., treasure; treasury. **m**., **n**., moment; time. RTR^T **n**., gold.
* The two hands hollowed and opened, and raised to the forehead. Subst.: **m**., a gesture of respectful greeting. * wish. **m**., rise. crescent. HifH **f**-, work (literary). <^|q **m**., treasure; treasury. **m**., **n**., moment; time. RTR^T **n**., gold.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 169
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: ^Ta^f **m**., demon. **m**. , snake. **n**. , leading-rope, cord. (§ 278) m., stirring-stick. **m**. , **n**. pr., a mountain. ZJTJ **m**., sacrificial post. **n**. , forehead. (**yard**) **m**., suitor, bridegroom. (**ydra**) **m**., choice, privilege, favor. m., n. pr., a snake-demon **f**., b eight, elevation ; high position. Adj.:of to-day. right, just. (part of kindly disposed. knowing. shrewd. Adv.: HTTW before, in the presence of (w. gen.). who supports the earth.
^Ta^f **m**., demon. **m**. , snake. **n**. , leading-rope, cord. (§ 278) m., stirring-stick. **m**. , **n**. pr., a mountain. ZJTJ **m**., sacrificial post. **n**. , forehead. (**yard**) **m**., suitor, bridegroom. (**ydra**) **m**., choice, privilege, favor. m., n. pr., a snake-demon **f**., b eight, elevation ; high position. Adj.:of to-day. right, just. (part of kindly disposed. knowing. shrewd. Adv.: HTTW before, in the presence of (w. gen.). who supports the earth.
* With the suffix 7f«f (sometimes are made adjectives from adverbs, especially of time; thus, JTi^ ‘ancient , TTTri^tl’T early , ‘ of the morrow’.

Back: parakāvyena kavayaḥ paradravyeṇa ceśvarāḥ |
nirluṇṭhena svākṛtiṃ puṣṇanty adyatane kṣaṇe || 28 ||
In the present day, the poets make their literary works grow by the poems of others which they had stolen and the rich make their wealth grow by the wealth stolen from others.
vivekinam anuprāpya guṇāḥ yānti samunnatiṃ |
sutarāṃ ratnam ābhāti cāmīkaraniyojitam || 29 ||
Good qualities attain high position by coming into contact with the shrewd person.
Similarly, the jewel looks more beautiful when it is fitted with gold.
1. yajñaṃ vidhātum icchan yajamānaḥ prathamaṃ vedavida ṛtvijo vṛṇīṭām |
Let the sacrificer wishing to perform a sacrifice choose the priests who are well-versed in the Vedas first.
2. yajñeṣu paśūn svalaṃkṛteṣu yūpeṣu rajjubhir badhnanti |
In the sacrifices they tie animals with cords at the well-decorated sacrificial posts.
3. devānānāṃ kopāgniṃ śāntiṃ netuṃ tān stutibhir nalarājo ‘prīṇāt |
In order to extinguish the gods' fire of anger, King Nala pleased them with the songs of praise.
4. prasannā vayaṃ varaṃ vṛṇīṣveti tair ukto dharmikatvam rājā avṛṇīta |
The king, having been spoken to [by gods] thus: "We are pleased; select the boon" selected the righteousness.
5. somaṃ dṛṣadbhyāṃ sutvādhvaryavas taṃ punantu |
Having pressed Soma between two stone-slabs, let the Adhvaryus purify it.
6. mandaraparvataṃ manthānaṃ śeṣanāgaṃ ca netraṃ kṛtvā devadānavā amṛtārthaṃ kṣīrodadhim amanthnan |
Having made Mandara Mountain a churning stick and the serpent Śeṣa, a rope, gods and demons churned the milk-ocean for nectar.
7. yathā sūrya udaye bhāti tathā pāpāny apahṛtya gaṅgājalāplutā narā vibhānti |
Men who have been drenched with the water of the Ganges shine brightly after they had destroyed their sins just as the sun shines at the time of its rising.
8. lubdham arthena gṛhṇīyāt kruddham añjalikarmaṇā ||
One should win over the greedy person with wealth and the person given to anger with saluting.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 169
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXVII. T司可可可：文文司四司图T:1 f向fg分可f行g四风可奇司奇‖R8Ⅱff可两可T四T可T司可可f开↓i taarrf行可T升i文ff向a讯‖y‖司f何Tgf和更网T可：可开f行？花f何a1开191 可司g可ig四gT可f可f可！R"之q所igrf材TTf奇行aT国ffT升S升T(I31阿T寸可t时- 安f行面计T阿TTff阿可a‖公‖升开可i对网对香可g可可川y‖反q行H网T时g可时可司寸阿T食可衣T- 可阿TT进f两两T‖存‖T对分州Tf行四T T可网和T可可T图T可Tf何时Tf行‖9‖可7药开有f向iuT‖云‖
Exercise XXXVII. T司可可可：文文司四司图T:1 f向fg分可f行g四风可奇司奇‖R8Ⅱff可两可T四T可T司可可f开↓i taarrf行可T升i文ff向a讯‖y‖司f何Tgf和更网T可：可开f行？花f何a1开191 可司g可ig四gT可f可f可！R"之q所igrf材TTf奇行aT国ffT升S升T(I31阿T寸可t时- 安f行面计T阿TTff阿可a‖公‖升开可i对网对香可g可可川y‖反q行H网T时g可时可司寸阿T食可衣T- 可阿TT进f两两T‖存‖T对分州Tf行四T T可网和T可可T图T可Tf何时Tf行‖9‖可7药开有f向iuT‖云‖

Back: 9. Allow me to go now.
9. gantum mam anujānīhi |
10. Take these jewels which I have given you (pass. constr.).
10. mayā te dattāny etāni ratnāni pratigṛhyantām |
11. Let the great poet weave (√granth, √bandh) a verse-wreath of word-pearls (instr.).
11. mahākavir vāṅmuktābhiḥ ślokamālāṃ grathnātu (badhnātu)  |
12. Every-day two thieves robbed the king's treasury.
12. pratidinaṃ stenau rājñaḥ koṣam amuṣṇītām |
13. He who receives (part.) gifts from every one is polluted (duṣ).
13. pratyekebhyo dānāni pratigṛhṇan duṣyati |
14. The Creator formed the world by his will (svecchayā) alone.
14. dhātā svecchayaiva jagan niramāt |
15. Betake thyself (√yā) for salvation to the gods' protection.
15. mokṣārthaṃ devāñ śaraṇaṃ yāhi |
16. Let kings restrain the wicked by punishments.
16. rājāno daṇḍaiḥ pāpān nigṛhṇantu |
17. We saw Rāma's daughter coming out (pres. part.) of the house.
17. vayaṃ gṛhān nirgacchantīṃ rāmasya duhitaram apaśyāma |
18. Let the bridegroom grasp the maiden's hand before the fire.
18. varo’ gneḥ samakṣaṃ kanyāyāḥ pāṇiṃ gṛhṇātu |
19. An Aryan must not eat another's leavings (ud-√śiṣ, pass. part., neut. sing.).
19. dvijātir anyasyocchiṣṭaṃ māśnātu |
20. One must bathe daily in unconfined (part. from ni-√rudh) water.
20. pratidinam aniruddha udake snāyāt |
21. May the three-eyed god, the great-lord (īśvara) whose-forehead-is-adorned-with-the-crescent, protect you.
21. trinetraḥ kalālaṃkṛtalalāṭa īśvaro vaḥ pātu |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 169
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * With the suffix 7f«f (sometimes are made adjectives from adverbs, especially of time; thus, JTi^ ‘ancient , TTTri^tl’T early , ‘ of the morrow’. u n 9. Allow me to go now. 10. Take these jewels which I have 160 Lesson XXXVII. XXXVIII. given you {pass. constr.). 11. Let the great poet weave a verse-wreath of word-pearls (instr.). 12. Every-day two thieves robbed the king’s treasury. 13. He who receives (part.) gifts from every one is polluted ). 34. The Creator formed the world by his will alone. 15. Betake thyself (^JT) for salvation to the gods’ protection. 16. Let kings restrain the wicked by punishments. 17. We saw Rama’s daughter coming out (pres, part.) of the house. 18. Let the bridegroom grasp the maiden’s hand before the fire. 19. An Aryan must not eat another’s leavings , pass, part., neut. sing.). 20. One must bathe daily in unconfined (part, from ) water. 21. May the three-eyed god, the great-lord whose-forehead-is-adorned-with-tbe-crescent, protect you.
* With the suffix 7f«f (sometimes are made adjectives from adverbs, especially of time; thus, JTi^ ‘ancient , TTTri^tl’T early , ‘ of the morrow’. u n 9. Allow me to go now. 10. Take these jewels which I have 160 Lesson XXXVII. XXXVIII. given you {pass. constr.). 11. Let the great poet weave a verse-wreath of word-pearls (instr.). 12. Every-day two thieves robbed the king’s treasury. 13. He who receives (part.) gifts from every one is polluted ). 34. The Creator formed the world by his will alone. 15. Betake thyself (^JT) for salvation to the gods’ protection. 16. Let kings restrain the wicked by punishments. 17. We saw Rama’s daughter coming out (pres, part.) of the house. 18. Let the bridegroom grasp the maiden’s hand before the fire. 19. An Aryan must not eat another’s leavings , pass, part., neut. sing.). 20. One must bathe daily in unconfined (part, from ) water. 21. May the three-eyed god, the great-lord whose-forehead-is-adorned-with-tbe-crescent, protect you.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 170
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XXXVIII. 407. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. Roots ending in an t-vowel or an u-vowel (except ‘go’) change these into and before vowel-endings in weak forms, when not gunated. *
Lesson XXXVIII. 407. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. Roots ending in an t-vowel or an u-vowel (except ‘go’) change these into and before vowel-endings in weak forms, when not gunated. *
* A number of roots belonging to this class accent the rootsyllable throughout, in weak as well as in strong forms—except of course in the imperfect.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 170
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 408. Root ‘go’ (act., but used in mid. with the prep. * A number of roots belonging to this class accent the rootsyllable throughout, in weak as well as in strong forms—except of course in the imperfect. ‘go over for oneself’, i. e. ‘repeat, learn, read’; the then becomes as above). Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. VfW 2. vfv 3. VfeT Lesson XXXVIII. 161 Imperfect* (for augment cf. § 179.) Imperative. Optative. etc-> 3rd p1- etc. Participle. , f. ^Tcft f- °W
408. Root ‘go’ (act., but used in mid. with the prep. * A number of roots belonging to this class accent the rootsyllable throughout, in weak as well as in strong forms—except of course in the imperfect. ‘go over for oneself’, i. e. ‘repeat, learn, read’; the then becomes as above). Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. VfW 2. vfv 3. VfeT Lesson XXXVIII. 161 Imperfect* (for augment cf. § 179.) Imperative. Optative. etc-> 3rd p1- etc. Participle. , f. ^Tcft f- °W

Back: impf.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 171
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 409. The root ifV (**mid**.), ‘lie’, has guna throughout; thus, ifq, ipf? etc.; imPf- **^TUfST**, etc.; opt. etc., part. «T. Other irregularities are the 3rd persons pl.: indie, imv. impf.
409. The root ifV (**mid**.), ‘lie’, has guna throughout; thus, ifq, ipf? etc.; imPf- **^TUfST**, etc.; opt. etc., part. «T. Other irregularities are the 3rd persons pl.: indie, imv. impf.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 171
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 410.The roots of this class ending in have in their strong forms the **orddhi** instead of the guna-strengthening before an ending beginning with a consonant. 4ll.Thus,g‘praise": Indicative. Active. Middle. *1.升f知可可瓦可瓦可司可可度何宸2.f何可可可可可付时可可7可可商3.f行可、国可f司可分可T府可府Imperfect..Act.:l.可开，2.t,3.t,3rdpl. 国可可.Mid.:1.可f有，3rdpl.国可不Imperative..Act.:aTf,可f履，i可，qT可etc.,3rdpl. 可网可.Mid.:奇，网，，aT可etc,3rdpl.过可T. 0 ptative..etc..可可etc. *ftf前also found Perry.Sanskrit Primer. 162 Lesson XXXVIII Participle..Act.:可可，f.o可升t. Mid.:可T可.
410.The roots of this class ending in have in their strong forms the **orddhi** instead of the guna-strengthening before an ending beginning with a consonant. 4ll.Thus,g‘praise": Indicative. Active. Middle. *1.升f知可可瓦可瓦可司可可度何宸2.f何可可可可可付时可可7可可商3.f行可、国可f司可分可T府可府Imperfect..Act.:l.可开，2.t,3.t,3rdpl. 国可可.Mid.:1.可f有，3rdpl.国可不Imperative..Act.:aTf,可f履，i可，qT可etc.,3rdpl. 可网可.Mid.:奇，网，，aT可etc,3rdpl.过可T. 0 ptative..etc..可可etc. *ftf前also found Perry.Sanskrit Primer. 162 Lesson XXXVIII Participle..Act.:可可，f.o可升t. Mid.:可T可.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 172
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: X X»412. The root ‘say’, takes the union-vowel Rafter the root when strengthened, before the initial consonant of an ending." Thus: Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. MMML 3^ 2. MMtfW <5 MMTM 3. MMM; ,sj% ^MTH MMM Imperfect. Act.: etc-5 3rd pl. Mid-: ^5I5pITH etc.; 3rd pl. Imperative. Act.: MMTf’IL MMIW etc-> 3rd P1-Mid.: sP=?. etc. Optative. Act.: «144 etc. Mid.: etc. Participle. Act.: 3Fq«rTx. Mid.:
X X»412. The root ‘say’, takes the union-vowel Rafter the root when strengthened, before the initial consonant of an ending." Thus: Indicative. Active. Middle. 1. MMML 3^ 2. MMtfW <5 MMTM 3. MMM; ,sj% ^MTH MMM Imperfect. Act.: etc-5 3rd pl. Mid-: ^5I5pITH etc.; 3rd pl. Imperative. Act.: MMTf’IL MMIW etc-> 3rd P1-Mid.: sP=?. etc. Optative. Act.: «144 etc. Mid.: etc. Participle. Act.: 3Fq«rTx. Mid.:
with, allowed to be * Special irregularities in this verb are occasionally met such as Some of the verbs in ^5 are inflected like but forms so made are rare.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 172
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 413. Emphatic Pronoun. The uninflected pronominal word **1^47"4^** signifies ‘self’, ‘own self’. It is oftenest used as a nominative, along with words of all persons and numbers; but not seldom it represents other cases also.
413. Emphatic Pronoun. The uninflected pronominal word **1^47"4^** signifies ‘self’, ‘own self’. It is oftenest used as a nominative, along with words of all persons and numbers; but not seldom it represents other cases also.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 172
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXVIII. Verbs: (**e7i**) go. + (a**dhlte**) repeat, read. -f- (**apaiti**) go away, depart. + approach. + ’**41^1^** set (of heavenly bodies). 4- rise (of heavenly bodies). 4- approach. <(£**ravU**«, **brute**) speak, say, state. ©s. + **TT** explain, teach ; announce. 4- fq * explain, etc. (**rauti**) cry, scream. 4- fq scream. 1ft (**$ete**) lie, sleep. 4- lie asleep on (acc.). (**sute**) bring forth, bear. Cx-f- T( bring forth. ■^4 (**stauti**) praise.
Vocabulary XXXVIII. Verbs: (**e7i**) go. + (a**dhlte**) repeat, read. -f- (**apaiti**) go away, depart. + approach. + ’**41^1^** set (of heavenly bodies). 4- rise (of heavenly bodies). 4- approach. <(£**ravU**«, **brute**) speak, say, state. ©s. + **TT** explain, teach ; announce. 4- fq * explain, etc. (**rauti**) cry, scream. 4- fq scream. 1ft (**$ete**) lie, sleep. 4- lie asleep on (acc.). (**sute**) bring forth, bear. Cx-f- T( bring forth. ■^4 (**stauti**) praise.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 173
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst* : **in**., n.pr., a name ofBuddha. f^T^T **f**-, tongue. m., n. pr. **m**., logic. TJTT( **n**., flower. **Tf5F m**., question. **n**., sense, understanding. **m**., killing, murder. **m**., n. pr. **m**- 9 companion; wife. **m**., witness. OTTH **m**., crane. Adj.: •^cT, f- °**^T**’ ready. 73?TTf’* T. diligent, energetic. f. °^T- lamentable, making, doing. Adv.:below, down, on the ground.
Subst* : **in**., n.pr., a name ofBuddha. f^T^T **f**-, tongue. m., n. pr. **m**., logic. TJTT( **n**., flower. **Tf5F m**., question. **n**., sense, understanding. **m**., killing, murder. **m**., n. pr. **m**- 9 companion; wife. **m**., witness. OTTH **m**., crane. Adj.: •^cT, f- °**^T**’ ready. 73?TTf’* T. diligent, energetic. f. °^T- lamentable, making, doing. Adv.:below, down, on the ground.

Back: puṣpāṇīva vicinvantam anyatra gatamānasam | anavāpteṣu kāmeṣu mṛtyur abhyeti mānavaṃ || 26 ||
When the desires were not fulfilled the death approaches the man whose mind moves elsewhere like a person who is gathering flowers.
1. bho duṣkṛtakāriṇaḥ | asmād vanād apeteti krodhād ṛṣir āśramahariṇavadhodyatān vyādhān abravīt |
“Oh you, the evil doers, go away from this forest”: thus spoke the seer to the hunters who were ready to kill the deer of the hermitage in anger.
2. gurum abhivādya śiṣyas taṃ brūyād adhīṣva bho iti |
Having greeted the teacher, the pupil must speak to him thus: “Sir, please repeat (the mantras).”
3. kāni śāstrāṇi kāśyāṃ tvam adhyaithāḥ |
What sciences did you learn in Kaśī?
4. nyāyādīni ṣaḍ darśanāni śrīnīlakaṇṭhapaṇḍitasya gṛhe' ham adhyaiyi |
I learned six philosophies, namely, the logic, etc. in the house of famous Nīlakaṇṭha Paṇḍita.
5. agnīṣomāv aṣṭābhir ṛgbhir ṛṣir astaud indrāvaruṇau ca tisṛbhiḥ |
The seer praised Agni and Soma with 8 ṛcs and Indra and Varuṇa with three.
6. udyoginaṃ puruṣasiṃhaṃ svayam upaiti lakṣmīḥ |
Godess Lakṣmī approaches the diligent man-lion herself.
7. sā jihvā yā jinaṃ stauti tac cittaṃ yaj jine ratam |
That tongue which praises the Buddha is the true tongue. That mind which is attached to the Buddha is the true mind.
8. ācāryāḥ śiṣyān dharmaṃ prabruvate |
The teachers explain the law to the pupils.
9. hatasahacarāḥ sārasāḥ karuṇaṃ viruvanti |
The cranes whose companions were killed cry pitifully.
10. śrīmadbhī rājabhir āhūtāḥ paṇḍitāḥ sabhāṃ yanti dharmapraśnāṃś ca vibruvate ||
The Paṇḍitas who were summoned by the celebrated kings go to the assembly and explain the questions about the law.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 173
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXVIIl. gT升af有f句网司H可子HT阳π可T府ggg阿f行可可开‖R客川升更师Tf代迎：↓双知T哈f行Tf向T可f 可i可a网T网可f仅‖9‖fFqT阿ft四T网升(§264)置f行l?lf行Tarfa i网HT:131TaTf行飞？对Tf行升可gfg和我司f向‖8‖升T 可gTf冠f时冠f何文升f反反Ta百u阶可f阳f:‖y‖f何寸页f对何可f行可升：‖名川tf行TTf同时f行f国司f可奇a开川9川T可TT:ftT利#可行‖七川对阳可TT T又T:对f何qf司‖Q‖H升TT阿f文TT:fgT: Hi可f司f图f向可喻‖90‖
Exercise XXXVIIl. gT升af有f句网司H可子HT阳π可T府ggg阿f行可可开‖R客川升更师Tf代迎：↓双知T哈f行Tf向T可f 可i可a网T网可f仅‖9‖fFqT阿ft四T网升(§264)置f行l?lf行Tarfa i网HT:131TaTf行飞？对Tf行升可gfg和我司f向‖8‖升T 可gTf冠f时冠f何文升f反反Ta百u阶可f阳f:‖y‖f何寸页f对何可f行可升：‖名川tf行TTf同时f行f国司f可奇a开川9川T可TT:ftT利#可行‖七川对阳可TT T又T:对f何qf司‖Q‖H升TT阿f文TT:fgT: Hi可f司f图f向可喻‖90‖

Back: 11. The three wives of Daśaratha bore four sons.
11. tisro daśarathasya bhāryāś caturaḥ putrān asuvata |
12. Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa, followed-by-Sītā, went (√i) into the forest.
12. rāmo lakṣmaṇaś ca sītānvitau vanam aitām |
13. Women whose-husbands-are-dead must sleep six months on the ground.
13. mṛtabhartṛkā nāryo bhūmau ṣaṇ māsāñ śayīran |
14. A witness stating anything other-than-what-was-seen-or-heard is to be punished (fut. pass. part.).
14. sākṣī dṛṣṭaśrutānyān bruvan daṇḍitavyaḥ |
15. All guilt departs from one-who-has-done-penance.
15. sarvaṃ pāpaṃ kṛtaprāyaścittād apaiti |
16. One must not look at (pra-√īkṣ) the rising or the setting sun.
16. udyantam astamyantaṃ vā sūryaṃ na prekṣeta |
17. Why hast thou come (abhi-√i) to-my-house with-wife and with-children?
17. kiṃ tvaṃ sabhāryaḥ saputraś ca madgṛham abhyeṣi |
18. "Praise Varuṇa": thus the gods addressed Śunaḥśepa who was bound to the sacrificial post.
18. varuṇaṃ stuhīti yūpe baddhaṃ śunaḥṣepam abruvan devāḥ|
19. Always speak the truth.
19. sadā satyaṃ brūhi |
20. In a kingless land the rich do not sleep in peace (sukhéna).
20. vigatarāje deśe dhaninaḥ sukhena na śerate |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 173
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 11. The three wives of Da
11. The three wives of Da

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 174
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 414. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. Roots ending in consonants. The endings of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. are generally **dropped**, and the resulting root-final treated according to the usual rules for finals. Cf. §§ 239, 242. But a root ending in a **dental mute** sometimes drops this final mute instead of the added in the second person ; and, on the other hand, a root or stem ending in sometimes drops this instead of the added in the third person: in either case establishing the ordinary relation of and in the second and third persons. *
414. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. Roots ending in consonants. The endings of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. are generally **dropped**, and the resulting root-final treated according to the usual rules for finals. Cf. §§ 239, 242. But a root ending in a **dental mute** sometimes drops this final mute instead of the added in the second person ; and, on the other hand, a root or stem ending in sometimes drops this instead of the added in the third person: in either case establishing the ordinary relation of and in the second and third persons. *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 174
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 415. Roots in and a! substitute for those letters before and R^ (which then becomes ; and R before Thus, ‘speak’: (only these three forms used). 416. Root ifq^T ‘know, (act. only): Indicative. Imperfect. 1. "srHrer 2. Mt’ft or a. qf=a ’’rfWrrnR; imv.; "Mj; IWthu, fWTUK; ~ Opt’! etc‘
415. Roots in and a! substitute for those letters before and R^ (which then becomes ; and R before Thus, ‘speak’: (only these three forms used). 416. Root ifq^T ‘know, (act. only): Indicative. Imperfect. 1. "srHrer 2. Mt’ft or a. qf=a ’’rfWrrnR; imv.; "Mj; IWthu, fWTUK; ~ Opt’! etc‘

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 174
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * In the inflection of roots with final consonant, of this class and the reduplicating and nasal classes, euphonic rules find very frequent application. The student is therefore advised at this point to read carefully the chief rules of euphonic change in Whitney’s Grammar, §§ 139—232 (the two larger sizes of print).
* In the inflection of roots with final consonant, of this class and the reduplicating and nasal classes, euphonic rules find very frequent application. The student is therefore advised at this point to read carefully the chief rules of euphonic change in Whitney’s Grammar, §§ 139—232 (the two larger sizes of print).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 175
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 417. This root also makes a perfect **without reduplication** (but otherwise regular) which has always the value of a **present**. The forms of the indie, are: pL 1. 2. 3. lhe participle is t. (cf. § 268).
417. This root also makes a perfect **without reduplication** (but otherwise regular) which has always the value of a **present**. The forms of the indie, are: pL 1. 2. 3. lhe participle is t. (cf. § 268).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 175
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 418. The root ‘eat’ (act.), inserts before the endings of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf.; thus, I <4^? ^11
418. The root ‘eat’ (act.), inserts before the endings of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf.; thus, I <4^? ^11

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 175
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: , ‘kill’ (act.), is treated somewhat as are declension (§ 283). Thus: Imperfect. noun-stems in in Indicative. 1. 2. 3. Imv.: ^•rj. — Opt.: etc.
, ‘kill’ (act.), is treated somewhat as are declension (§ 283). Thus: Imperfect. noun-stems in in Indicative. 1. 2. 3. Imv.: ^•rj. — Opt.: etc.
* Anomalous dissimilation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 175
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: ^ 420. Roots in ’’T, Thus, ‘hate’ (act‘ and substitute efi before (which then becomes T( ), T? before and (which become 3 and ^), and before (which becomes S)- Thus, mid.): Indicative Act. Imperfect Act. 2. 3. Imv. Act.: ^THST,
^ 420. Roots in ’’T, Thus, ‘hate’ (act‘ and substitute efi before (which then becomes T( ), T? before and (which become 3 and ^), and before (which becomes S)- Thus, mid.): Indicative Act. Imperfect Act. 2. 3. Imv. Act.: ^THST,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 175
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Imv. Act.: ^THST, - 421. , ‘see’ (mid.): Pres. Ind.: ^T^t; — .ZZJLn ^^TcL
Imv. Act.: ^THST, - 421. , ‘see’ (mid.): Pres. Ind.: ^T^t; — .ZZJLn ^^TcL

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 176
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 422. 1. "§7% c rule 9 (mid.), inserts before endings beginning with and M ; thus, 2nd sing. — 2. ‘ wish’ (act.), is in weak forms contracted to "3"sr( ; thus, 3rd. pl.
422. 1. "§7% c rule 9 (mid.), inserts before endings beginning with and M ; thus, 2nd sing. — 2. ‘ wish’ (act.), is in weak forms contracted to "3"sr( ; thus, 3rd. pl.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 176
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 423. , frub’, ‘clean’ (act.), has vrddhi in the strong forms, and optionally also in weak forms when the endings begin with a vowel. In the treatment of the root-final this verb follows the roots in Thus, ind. 3rd sing. UlfSL du. pl. or
423. , frub’, ‘clean’ (act.), has vrddhi in the strong forms, and optionally also in weak forms when the endings begin with a vowel. In the treatment of the root-final this verb follows the roots in Thus, ind. 3rd sing. UlfSL du. pl. or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 176
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XXXIX. Verbs: tn (iste) rule, own (w. gen.}. (caste)-j-^n relate; call, name. + ^n explain. (dvesti, dviste) hate. 4- hate extremely. (w2<Jrs^) rub, wipe. 4-’s?m wipe away, off. 4- TT wipe off. 4- (aparadhnoti) do wrong. (vasti} wish. (yetti ; veda) know, consider. K<^4- smite. 4- kill.
Vocabulary XXXIX. Verbs: tn (iste) rule, own (w. gen.}. (caste)-j-^n relate; call, name. + ^n explain. (dvesti, dviste) hate. 4- hate extremely. (w2<Jrs^) rub, wipe. 4-’s?m wipe away, off. 4- TT wipe off. 4- (aparadhnoti) do wrong. (vasti} wish. (yetti ; veda) know, consider. K<^4- smite. 4- kill.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 176
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: m., lip. m., decay, destruction. n., eye. m., conqueror. f., compassion, pity. m., destruction. m., n. pr., a name of Qiva. 17«r^m., sacred text; spell, charm. <4 I * 1 m., watch (of the night). ^tT n., conduct. grammar. «m., pr., a Rishi. W f, hesitation. m. , n. pr., a name of Qiva. n. , 1 earning. c m., creation. f^rfrT f., condition, existence. Adj.: f. °^n, blameworthy, culpable.
Subst.: m., lip. m., decay, destruction. n., eye. m., conqueror. f., compassion, pity. m., destruction. m., n. pr., a name of Qiva. 17«r^m., sacred text; spell, charm. <4 I * 1 m., watch (of the night). ^tT n., conduct. grammar. «m., pr., a Rishi. W f, hesitation. m. , n. pr., a name of Qiva. n. , 1 earning. c m., creation. f^rfrT f., condition, existence. Adj.: f. °^n, blameworthy, culpable.

Back: karoti pāpaṃ yo' jñānān nātmano vetti ca kṣayam |
pradveṣṭi sādhuvṛttāṃś ca sa lokasyaiti vācyatām || 27 ||
He, who commits sin unknowingly and who does not Know his own destruction, and who hates those who have good conduct, is to be blamed by the people.
pañca paśvanṛte hanti daśa hanti gavānṛte |
śatam aśvānṛte hanti sahasraṃ puruṣānṛte || 28 ||
He kills five ancestors on account of untruth about animals; ten on account of untruth about cows; hundred on account of untruth about horses; and thousand on account of untruth about a man.
1. sarvaṃ vṛttāntaṃ yathāvṛttam ācaḍḍhvaṃ |
You (pl. ) must tell all matters according to the truth.
2. śarva iti prāñcaḥ śivam ācakṣate bhava ity udañcaḥ |
The eastern people call Śiva as Śarva; the northern People call him Bhava.
3. pradviṣṭīṃ bhāryāṃ kiṃ māṃ dvekṣīty abravīt patiḥ |
“Why do you hate me”: thus spoke the husband to his wife who hates him extremely.
4. purāṇeṣu tribhuvanasargasthitipralayān vyāso vyācaṣṭe |
Sage Vyāsa relates the creation, the existence and the destruction of the three worlds in the Purāṇas.
5. yo ‘smān dveṣṭi yaṃ ca vayaṃ dviṣmas tam ebhir mantrair hanāma |
Let us with these spells kill him, who hates us and whom we hate.
6. yo brahmacaryaṃ caritvā guruṇānujñāto yathāvidhi snāti taṃ sarvalokapūjyaṃ snātakaṃ viduḥ |
They know him who, after having completed the Brahmacarya (student's life), takes ablutions according the rules, as Snātaka who is worthy of worship by all people.
7. anaparāddhaṃ tavopakurvāṇaṃ kathaṃ bhoḥ pāpātmaṃs tvaṃ māṃ haṃsi |
Oh you, the evil-minded one, how can you kill me who did no wrong, and who did you a favor?
8. aśuciliptam aṅgaṃ mṛdā pramṛṣṭam adbhiḥ parimṛḍḍhi |
Clean with water the body stained with dirty things which was rub with mud.
9. bhavo divo bhava īṣṭe pṛthivyāḥ |
Śiva rules the sky; Śiva rules the earth.
10. gāṃ dhayantīṃ parasmai nācakṣīta |
One must not tell other about the cow giving milk (to its calf).
11. baddham api pṛthvīrājaṃ nirdayā yavanā asināghnan ||
The pitiless Yavanas killed Pṛthvīrāja with a sword, even though he was tied.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 177
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XXXIX. ’ft rsjT’rm-ranrr Wf^r 1 wsfe h ern* nnK n 11 irg xra^m •g^WT^W * II H ^Tf-nfi ii q u ^T^HI" w^r <75^: h 3. n ht’H * n fa: ii 3 ii f^H^^^f^?f?T3T^Rn^T€T i^ 8 i ’’h s
Exercise XXXIX. ’ft rsjT’rm-ranrr Wf^r 1 wsfe h ern* nnK n 11 irg xra^m •g^WT^W * II H ^Tf-nfi ii q u ^T^HI" w^r <75^: h 3. n ht’H * n fa: ii 3 ii f^H^^^f^?f?T3T^Rn^T€T i^ 8 i ’’h s
* Refers to false witness before a court. An untruth where small beasts (sheep, etc.) are concerned, involves the destruction of five ancestors; where cattle are concerned, of ten, etc.

Back: 12. Hear the words of the learned man who explains (pres, part.) the-science-of-grammar.
12. vyākaraṇaśāstraṃ vyācakṣāṇasya viduṣo vācaḥ śṛṇu |
13. Know that Rāma (acc.) is the son, famous in the-three-worlds, of Daśaratha, and the conqueror of Rāvaṇa, lord-of-Laṅkā.
13. rāmaṃ trilokyāṃ viśrutaṃ daśarathasya sutaṃ laṅkeśvarasya rāvaṇasya jetāraṃ viddhi |
14. Having sipped (ā-√cam) water thrice, one wipes the lips twice; according to others, once**(**sakṛdityanye).
14.  trir jalam ācamya dvir oṣṭhau mārṣṭῑty eke sakṛd ity anye |
15. Two warriors smote (abhi-√han) with arrows the king-of-the-Aṅgas, who had murdered their companions.
15. kṣatriyau svasakhīn hatavantam aṅgarājaṃ śarair abhyahatām |
16. Kill without hesitation even (api) a teacher who approaches (past. pass, part.) in order to kill you.
16. śaṅkāṃ vinā tvāṃ hantum upagataṃ gurum api jahi |
17. Why dost thou consider (√vid) me a Śūdra, though knowing (√jñā ger.) my learning-and-conduct?
17. kiṃ tvaṃ macśrutavṛttaṃ jñātvāpi māṃ śūdraṃ vetsi |
18. Do not hate the sons-of-Pāṇḍu.
18. pāṇḍuputrān mā dveḍḍhi |
19. The women whose-sons-were-dead, having lamented greatly, wiped the tears from their eyes.
19. mṛtaputrakā nāryo bhṛśaṃ vilapya netrābhyām aśrūṇy amārjan |
20. Thou, O Lord, rulest over bipeds and quadrupeds (gen.).
20.  he īśvara tvaṃ dvipadāṃ catuṣpadāṃ ceśiṣe/*?cekśe |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 177
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 12. Hear the words of the learned man who explains (pres, part.) the-scienee-of-granirnar. 13. Know that Rama (acc.) is the son, famous in the-three-worlds, of Daâratha, and the conqueror of Ravana, lord-of-Lahka. 14. Having sipped water thrice, one wipes the lips twice; according to others, once. ** 15. Two warriors smote with arrows the king-of-the-Angas, who had murdered their companions. 16. Kill without hesitation even (^rfa) a teacher who approaches (past. pass, part.) in order to kill you. 17. Why dost thou consider me a Qudra, though know-ing (^TT ger.) my learning-and-conduct? 18. Do not hate the sons- of-Pandu. 19. The women wAose-sons-were-dead, having lamented greatly, wiped the tears from their eyes. 20. Thou, O Lord, rulest over bipeds and quadrupeds (gen.).
12. Hear the words of the learned man who explains (pres, part.) the-scienee-of-granirnar. 13. Know that Rama (acc.) is the son, famous in the-three-worlds, of Daâratha, and the conqueror of Ravana, lord-of-Lahka. 14. Having sipped water thrice, one wipes the lips twice; according to others, once. ** 15. Two warriors smote with arrows the king-of-the-Angas, who had murdered their companions. 16. Kill without hesitation even (^rfa) a teacher who approaches (past. pass, part.) in order to kill you. 17. Why dost thou consider me a Qudra, though know-ing (^TT ger.) my learning-and-conduct? 18. Do not hate the sons- of-Pandu. 19. The women wAose-sons-were-dead, having lamented greatly, wiped the tears from their eyes. 20. Thou, O Lord, rulest over bipeds and quadrupeds (gen.).
米本f民网司，

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 178
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XL. 424. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. ‘s’4’ (**n»d**-)s Indic. ^TTH, -4H-W, ^Sn^%etc.; lmPf-^rrfM, VT^TK’ "-51^ etc- Imv. etc- Part. (unique).
Lesson XL. 424. Verbs. Root-class, cont’d. ‘s’4’ (**n»d**-)s Indic. ^TTH, -4H-W, ^Sn^%etc.; lmPf-^rrfM, VT^TK’ "-51^ etc- Imv. etc- Part. (unique).
* Or ^JT^. So or VTMK (imv., impf ). ** ee § 414. is s«id to be used in 2nd p

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 178
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 425. The root (R? ‘command ’ (act.), substitutes in the weak forms with consonant-endings the weakened stem ; thus, indie, sing. VFlf^T etc.; du. etc.; but 3rd pl. **uj itiflT**-impf.: etc-; but 3rd p1* * Imv. 2nd sing. **T[TfV**; 3rd pl.
425. The root (R? ‘command ’ (act.), substitutes in the weak forms with consonant-endings the weakened stem ; thus, indie, sing. VFlf^T etc.; du. etc.; but 3rd pl. **uj itiflT**-impf.: etc-; but 3rd p1* * Imv. 2nd sing. **T[TfV**; 3rd pl.
** See § 414. is s«id to be used in 2nd per8" alS°

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 178
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 426. The extremely common root 1^JR_, ‘be’ (**act**.), loses its vowel in weak forms, except when protected by the **augment**. The 2nd sing. imv. is Ijfv; in the 2nd sing, itidic. one is omitted; in the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. Thus: Indicative. 1. 2. ‘STfcl 3. ^rOtr Imperative. 1. ’ssmfM 2. xrfM 3. is inserted before the ending. Imperfect. ^TRfht. 4l* d1R WFFT. Opt.: **T5TTR** etc.; 3rd pl. ^TR.-Part.: * •
426. The extremely common root 1^JR_, ‘be’ (**act**.), loses its vowel in weak forms, except when protected by the **augment**. The 2nd sing. imv. is Ijfv; in the 2nd sing, itidic. one is omitted; in the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. Thus: Indicative. 1. 2. ‘STfcl 3. ^rOtr Imperative. 1. ’ssmfM 2. xrfM 3. is inserted before the ending. Imperfect. ^TRfht. 4l* d1R WFFT. Opt.: **T5TTR** etc.; 3rd pl. ^TR.-Part.: * •

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 178
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Or ^JT^. So or VTMK (imv., impf ). ** See § 414. is s«id to be used in 2nd per8" alS°427. Roots in |T (except and into and then lengthen preceding becomes **gK**; in 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. endings are dropped) the becomes Thus, and **mid**.): Impf. act.: -41’d^+l,»before (where the 6lick’ (**act**. Lesson XL. 169 Imv. mid.:M%, f^T, * **rteTH?> f^njnrm; ^1- ^<§k-
* Or ^JT^. So or VTMK (imv., impf ). ** See § 414. is s«id to be used in 2nd per8" alS°427. Roots in |T (except and into and then lengthen preceding becomes **gK**; in 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. endings are dropped) the becomes Thus, and **mid**.): Impf. act.: -41’d^+l,»before (where the 6lick’ (**act**. Lesson XL. 169 Imv. mid.:M%, f^T, * **rteTH?> f^njnrm; ^1- ^<§k-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 179
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 428. In the two roots ‘milk’ (**act**. and **mid**.), and ‘smear’ (**act**.), the final represents an earlier guttural which reappears in the inflection. Thus, from Indicative. Imperfect. 1- <tf^T 2. "tfrfw* 3. Ind. mid : etc- ImPf* mid" ^reU^, etc.; ’ST^TeSR, Imv. mid.: <1%, VJ^f, ^reflU; etc.;
428. In the two roots ‘milk’ (**act**. and **mid**.), and ‘smear’ (**act**.), the final represents an earlier guttural which reappears in the inflection. Thus, from Indicative. Imperfect. 1- <tf^T 2. "tfrfw* 3. Ind. mid : etc- ImPf* mid" ^reU^, etc.; ’ST^TeSR, Imv. mid.: <1%, VJ^f, ^reflU; etc.;
* cf. §§ 244, 249. ** When the final sonant aspirate of a root is followed by or of an ending, the whole group is made sonant, and the aspiration of the root-final is not lost, but is transferred to the initial of the ending.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 179
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 429. The roots ‘weep’, , ‘sleep’, , ‘breathe’, ■sjpj, ‘breathe’ (all **ac**t.), insert before all endings beginning with a consonant, except and cf^ of 2nd and 3rd sing, impf., where they insert either or Thus, Pres, indie.: **vY**- f^f»T, etc., 3rd pl. Impf.: or °ÊL °^rf. or etc.; 3rd pl. Imv.: VT-TYf^rJ etc- Opt.: etc. C^T being mode-sign).
429. The roots ‘weep’, , ‘sleep’, , ‘breathe’, ■sjpj, ‘breathe’ (all **ac**t.), insert before all endings beginning with a consonant, except and cf^ of 2nd and 3rd sing, impf., where they insert either or Thus, Pres, indie.: **vY**- f^f»T, etc., 3rd pl. Impf.: or °ÊL °^rf. or etc.; 3rd pl. Imv.: VT-TYf^rJ etc- Opt.: etc. C^T being mode-sign).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 179
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XL Verbs: (âniti) breathe. 4- TT {**prdnit**i) live. («**st**«5 be. (**^ste**) sit. + sit by; wait upon; at-tend; reverence.
Vocabulary XL Verbs: (âniti) breathe. 4- TT {**prdnit**i) live. («**st**«5 be. (**^ste**) sit. + sit by; wait upon; at-tend; reverence.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 180
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: + **T**T-**fW** (**jpravicdlati**) stir (**tr**.). move, (**degdhi**) smear. (d**dgdhi**^ **dugdhe**} milk. + **f^T** (**jiimUati**) shut (the eyes). (**roditi**) weep. (l**edh**i, **lidhe**) lick. + lick. + **HHT** approach. (**fdsb**’) command, govern. (**pvds**Ô breathe. + **ÎT** or breathe gently, revive. + be confident, trust (w. **gen**, or **loc**. of pers.) lg(* [ 4- ^3^* (u**ttisthat**i) arise.
+ **T**T-**fW** (**jpravicdlati**) stir (**tr**.). move, (**degdhi**) smear. (d**dgdhi**^ **dugdhe**} milk. + **f^T** (**jiimUati**) shut (the eyes). (**roditi**) weep. (l**edh**i, **lidhe**) lick. + lick. + **HHT** approach. (**fdsb**’) command, govern. (**pvds**Ô breathe. + **ÎT** or breathe gently, revive. + be confident, trust (w. **gen**, or **loc**. of pers.) lg(* [ 4- ^3^* (u**ttisthat**i) arise.
* After xg^r, the initial of and IjW is dropped; thus, for ^r^ng«;.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 180
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **m**., enjoyment. **m**. , hair. [ * f **n**., gift, generosity. g>rl, maiden. **m**.., **n**., club, pestle. **n**., blood. **n**. , sacrifice. **m**., **n**. pr., the sun-god o Savitar; the sun. **m**., shoulder. Adj.: ’**vffX**S f- °**^T**’ firm’ res°lute- fcfUTTF f- °**^T**L shrewd, skilled, ijrrsr, f. °^TT; right, proper. •**jnrrT**, f- °**^T**, careless. Indecl.: **TITclT** earbr> in the morning. **HUH** greatly, much.
Subst.: **m**., enjoyment. **m**. , hair. [ * f **n**., gift, generosity. g>rl, maiden. **m**.., **n**., club, pestle. **n**., blood. **n**. , sacrifice. **m**., **n**. pr., the sun-god o Savitar; the sun. **m**., shoulder. Adj.: ’**vffX**S f- °**^T**’ firm’ res°lute- fcfUTTF f- °**^T**L shrewd, skilled, ijrrsr, f. °^TT; right, proper. •**jnrrT**, f- °**^T**, careless. Indecl.: **TITclT** earbr> in the morning. **HUH** greatly, much.

Back: nindantu nītinipuṇā yadi vā stuvantu lakṣmī samāviśatu gacchatu vā yatheṣṭham |
adyaiva vā maraṇam astu yugāntare vā nyāyyāt pathaḥ pravicalanti padaṃ na dhīrāḥ || 29 ||
Let the wise criticize or praise, let fortune come or go as it pleases, let death come today or ages later, the wise will never deviate from the path of justice.
1. steno musalaṃ skandhe kṛtvā muktakeśo rājānam upetya śādhi mām iti brūyāt |
Having put the club on his shoulder, the thief, whose hair is loosen, and after approaching the king, must speak thus: “Punish me.”
2. mitradhrukṣu pāpeṣu na viśvasiti buddhimān |
The intelligent man does not trust the wicked who are friend-betrayers.
3. mahodadhimadhye śeṣnāgam adhiśayāno viṣṇuḥ sukhaṃ svapiti |
While lying on the serpent Shesha in the middle of the ocean, Vishnu sleeps peacefully.
4. pramattair ṛtvigbhir bhūmau nihitāni havīṃṣi śvānāv avālīḍhām |
The two dogs licked the oblations put on the ground by the careless priests.
5. sukhamāstāṃ bhavāniti gantumanujñāto"payansakhā sakhāyaṃ brūyāt |
A friend, who was permitted to go, while going away, must speak to his friend thus: “You must sit at ease.”
6. sundari samāśvasihīti bhayanimīlitākṣīm urvaśīṃ purūrvā abravīt |
Purūravas spoke to Urvaśī, who closed her eyes with fear, thus: “Don"t be afraid, don"t be afraid.”
7. gurukrodhabhītāḥ śiṣyā rātriṃ vedān adhyaita |
The pupils who were afraid of the teacher"s anger, studied the Vedas for the whole night.
8. astu yaśaḥ śrutavṛtte stāṃ śriyaḥ santu na tu bhaktiṃ vinā svargaṃ prāpnuyāḥ |
There may be fame; There may be learning and good conduct; and there may be wealth; but without devotion you may not go to heaven.
9. dānopabhogahīnaḥ pumāñ śvasann api na jīvati |
A man who is without giving and enjoying (his wealth) does not live even though he is breathing.
10. dīrgasattram upāsate ye brahmacaryaṃ caranti |
Those, who are leading the life of an unmarried religious student, are sitting by the long sacrifice.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 180
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XL. f行反可升ff可guT可f亿可T可可网可升：行T可订g可更可T安开I 奇网可T西可习T司术T 可T网T两：f何可@fq反可T:!e" 升冠玉对命T同T可对可两夏f何Tf和- 府T风！9川f何可识g可f有图ff行宿网1？Ⅱ同?f和@gT订f双T升f何四：对G母f何f‖3！可阳气花- *After,the initial of and is dropped;thus, 3和T可瓦for3rgT可开· Lesson XL.XLI. 171 f何ffri升ff信aTf行f何TTa可T升aT开‖公iqT时阿Tf向f行T可H可T升阿阳gT@时T‖4‖对民f代T☒f和f危开Tf和fH女f升f向升因get可T双可升川专重fr:f四TTf有民T可网川9‖何可T:习可奇if:网可可Hf常何T苛T因T:川云" Ti升初可：gT网阳京f向可升af府‖Q‖示aT闭寸可✉可进可f司川90川
Exercise XL. f行反可升ff可guT可f亿可T可可网可升：行T可订g可更可T安开I 奇网可T西可习T司术T 可T网T两：f何可@fq反可T:!e" 升冠玉对命T同T可对可两夏f何Tf和- 府T风！9川f何可识g可f有图ff行宿网1？Ⅱ同?f和@gT订f双T升f何四：对G母f何f‖3！可阳气花- *After,the initial of and is dropped;thus, 3和T可瓦for3rgT可开· Lesson XL.XLI. 171 f何ffri升ff信aTf行f何TTa可T升aT开‖公iqT时阿Tf向f行T可H可T升阿阳gT@时T‖4‖对民f代T☒f和f危开Tf和fH女f升f向升因get可T双可升川专重fr:f四TTf有民T可网川9‖何可T:习可奇if:网可可Hf常何T苛T因T:川云" Ti升初可：gT网阳京f向可升af府‖Q‖示aT闭寸可✉可进可f司川90川

Back: 11. Long may the great-king govern the earth according to law.
mahārājaściraṃ dharmamanu bhuvaṃ śāstu |
12. There was a mighty king, Nala by name (nāma), son of Vīrasena.
āsīdrājā nalo nāma vīrasenasuto balī |
13. The lion, satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle, licked his mouth with his tongue.
hatahariṇarudhiratṛptaḥ siṃho jihvayā mukhamaleṭ |
14. Let the householder say to the guest: “where didst thou sleep during the night”?
gṛhastho'tithiṃ kutra tvaṃ rātrāvasvapīriti brūyāt / rātrāvasvapeti brūyāt |
15. The cowherd milked the cows twice daily.
gopaḥ pratidinaṃ dvirgā adhok |
16. The boy, beaten by his father, wept bitterly (bhṛśam)
pitrā tāḍito bālo bhṛśamarodīt / arodat |
17. Whose daughter art thou, girl?
bāle tvaṃ kasya duhitāsi |
18. Know that that by which thou livest, and the whole world lives, is the world-spirit.
yena tvaṃ prāṇiṣi yena ca sarvaṃ jagatprāṇiti tadbrahma viddhi |
19. Having arisen in the morning, reverence the sun (savitṛ).
prātarutthāya savitāramupāssva |
20. If you do not praise Rāma, there will be no salvation for you (use √as, in pres. opt.).
yadi tvaṃ rāmaṃ na stuyāstadā mokṣaste na syāt |
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 181
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 11. Long may the great-king govern the earth according to law. 12. There was a mighty king, Nala by name (ÎPR), son of Virasena. 13. The lion, satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle, licked his mouth with his tongue. 14. Let the householder say to the guest: “where didst thou sleep during the night”? 15. The cowherd milked the cows twice daily. 16. The boy, beaten by his father, wept bitterly (’pm)- 17. Whose daughter art thou, girl? 18. Know that that by which thou livest, and the whole world lives, is the world-spirit. 19. Having arisen in the morning, reverence the sun (Hfepp. 20. If you do not praise Kama, there will be no salvation for you (use in pres. opt.).
11. Long may the great-king govern the earth according to law. 12. There was a mighty king, Nala by name (ÎPR), son of Virasena. 13. The lion, satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle, licked his mouth with his tongue. 14. Let the householder say to the guest: “where didst thou sleep during the night”? 15. The cowherd milked the cows twice daily. 16. The boy, beaten by his father, wept bitterly (’pm)- 17. Whose daughter art thou, girl? 18. Know that that by which thou livest, and the whole world lives, is the world-spirit. 19. Having arisen in the morning, reverence the sun (Hfepp. 20. If you do not praise Kama, there will be no salvation for you (use in pres. opt.).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 181
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XLI. 430. Verbs. Reduplicating Class. This class forms the presentstem by prefixing a reduplication to the root. *
Lesson XLI. 430. Verbs. Reduplicating Class. This class forms the presentstem by prefixing a reduplication to the root. *
* Only a small proportion of the roots of this class retain the accent on the root-syllable in the strong forms. In«the great majority, the accent is on the reduplication, both in the strong forms and in those weak forms whose endings begin with vowels.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 181
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Only a small proportion of the roots of this class retain the accent on the root-syllable in the strong forms. In«the great majority, the accent is on the reduplication, both in the strong forms and in those weak forms whose endings begin with vowels. 43L The rules governing the reduplication are as follows: 1. The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is in general the first consonant of the root; thus, ^T, **<^T**- But, (a) a non-as- pirate is substituted for an **aspirate**; and (b) a palatal for a **guttural** 172 Lesson XLI. or thus, VT, (
* Only a small proportion of the roots of this class retain the accent on the root-syllable in the strong forms. In«the great majority, the accent is on the reduplication, both in the strong forms and in those weak forms whose endings begin with vowels. 43L The rules governing the reduplication are as follows: 1. The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is in general the first consonant of the root; thus, ^T, **<^T**- But, (a) a non-as- pirate is substituted for an **aspirate**; and (b) a palatal for a **guttural** 172 Lesson XLI. or thus, VT, (

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 182
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 432. The present-stem gunates the root-vowel in the strong forms; thus, W* ft strong strong 433. The verbs of this class lose the from the endings of the 3rd pl. in the active as well as in the middle; and in the 3d pl. impf. act. always take ^3^, before which a final radical vowel has guna; thus,
432. The present-stem gunates the root-vowel in the strong forms; thus, W* ft strong strong 433. The verbs of this class lose the from the endings of the 3rd pl. in the active as well as in the middle; and in the 3d pl. impf. act. always take ^3^, before which a final radical vowel has guna; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 182
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 434. Root ‘bear, carry’. For 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act., A cf. §§ 122, 414. Indicative. Active. Middle. 2. 3. Imperfect. i. 3. vjff^JcTTK Imperative. s-arntv nryw. t * F ’’T’a.fSmj ftyra rtwraw ftwaw Opt. act.: fWWTlK. etc"; mld’: t^’d=tZT etc" Part, act.: fCr^ (§ 259), f. mid-- ftWTW-
434. Root ‘bear, carry’. For 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act., A cf. §§ 122, 414. Indicative. Active. Middle. 2. 3. Imperfect. i. 3. vjff^JcTTK Imperative. s-arntv nryw. t * F ’’T’a.fSmj ftyra rtwraw ftwaw Opt. act.: fWWTlK. etc"; mld’: t^’d=tZT etc" Part, act.: fCr^ (§ 259), f. mid-- ftWTW-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 182
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 435. Th1 roots l^T, ‘give’, and 15TL ‘put’, lose their radi cal vowel in the weak forms, leaving the weak stems and * 173 Lesson XLI. Indicative. Imperfect * Imperative. and Vf?- The inflection Middle. ^777^ 77^ 377* 7^ ^T7SH In the 2nd sing. imv. a of "KIT is as follows: Active. 1. 2. 3. JJVlfcf VTrT^ 1. ^^4 2. ^cTVTTH 3. 1. 2. VrTFf 3. VtTHT Opt. act.: etc-5 mid-; ^ft"4 etc-Part, act.: f- mid.: ^774-
435. Th1 roots l^T, ‘give’, and 15TL ‘put’, lose their radi cal vowel in the weak forms, leaving the weak stems and * 173 Lesson XLI. Indicative. Imperfect * Imperative. and Vf?- The inflection Middle. ^777^ 77^ 377* 7^ ^T7SH In the 2nd sing. imv. a of "KIT is as follows: Active. 1. 2. 3. JJVlfcf VTrT^ 1. ^^4 2. ^cTVTTH 3. 1. 2. VrTFf 3. VtTHT Opt. act.: etc-5 mid-; ^ft"4 etc-Part, act.: f- mid.: ^774-
* In combination with or of an ending, the of does not give but follows the general rule of aspirate and of surd and sonant combination; and the lost aspiration is thrown back upon the initial of the root.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 183
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 436. The root 1^7 is inflected in precisely the same way, but with change everywhere of to except where M belongs to the ending.
436. The root 1^7 is inflected in precisely the same way, but with change everywhere of to except where M belongs to the ending.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 183
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 437. The root 1^7, ‘quit, abandon’ (act.), drops the ^7 in weak forms where the ending begins with a vowel, and in the opt.; thus, indie. 3rd sing. îfW, pl. ; impf. 3rd. sing. pl. **^513^** 5 opt. **afgHcf**- The 2nd sing. imv. is or In the other weak forms before consonant-endings the stem is either or **5ff^**; thus, or
437. The root 1^7, ‘quit, abandon’ (act.), drops the ^7 in weak forms where the ending begins with a vowel, and in the opt.; thus, indie. 3rd sing. îfW, pl. ; impf. 3rd. sing. pl. **^513^** 5 opt. **afgHcf**- The 2nd sing. imv. is or In the other weak forms before consonant-endings the stem is either or **5ff^**; thus, or

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 183
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * In combination with or of an ending, the of does not give but follows the general rule of aspirate and of surd and sonant combination; and the lost aspiration is thrown back upon the initial of the root. 438. 17T7, ‘measure’ (mid.), and 2^7, ‘move, go’ (mid.), form 174 Lesson XLI. and before consonant-endings, "ffT^ and before vowel-endings; thus, 3rd persons indie. finfYa, fwriHi
* In combination with or of an ending, the of does not give but follows the general rule of aspirate and of surd and sonant combination; and the lost aspiration is thrown back upon the initial of the root. 438. 17T7, ‘measure’ (mid.), and 2^7, ‘move, go’ (mid.), form 174 Lesson XLI. and before consonant-endings, "ffT^ and before vowel-endings; thus, 3rd persons indie. finfYa, fwriHi

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 184
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 439. ‘pour, sacrifice’ (act. and mid.), makes the 2nd sing. imv. 3rd persons impf.
439. ‘pour, sacrifice’ (act. and mid.), makes the 2nd sing. imv. 3rd persons impf.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 184
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 440. 1. ‘fear’ (act.), may shorten its vowel in weak forms; thus, or fW»ffaTct. or farfiRn?V — 2. ‘ he ashamed’ (act.), changes its weak stem to before vowel-endings; thus, indie. 3rd persons fsrgfTT, fa-fg^rfa.
440. 1. ‘fear’ (act.), may shorten its vowel in weak forms; thus, or fW»ffaTct. or farfiRn?V — 2. ‘ he ashamed’ (act.), changes its weak stem to before vowel-endings; thus, indie. 3rd persons fsrgfTT, fa-fg^rfa.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 184
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XLI. Verbs: l**^T** (**dddati**^ (**latte**) give. + **TT** entrust. 1**^1** (**dadhati**, **dhatte**) put, place. + ^f<T close, shut. 4- put on; (mid.) take, receive. + arrange, ordain. + HR unite, put together ; lay on. igT(; **dhati**) quit, abandon, neglect. lA* (j**ihreti**) be ashamed.
Vocabulary XLI. Verbs: l**^T** (**dddati**^ (**latte**) give. + **TT** entrust. 1**^1** (**dadhati**, **dhatte**) put, place. + ^f<T close, shut. 4- put on; (mid.) take, receive. + arrange, ordain. + HR unite, put together ; lay on. igT(; **dhati**) quit, abandon, neglect. lA* (j**ihreti**) be ashamed.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 184
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **n**., safety; feeling of safety. **m**., demon. f-, oblation. m., n. pr. **m**., gazelle. **n**., possessions, wealth, in **m**., **n**., rest, remainder. **m**., one who has performed the ablution customary at the end of religious pupilage. Adj.: f. o**^**, divine. IWftTS, f. °**ÎT**, excellent, remarkable. / Adv.:at evening.
Subst.: **n**., safety; feeling of safety. **m**., demon. f-, oblation. m., n. pr. **m**., gazelle. **n**., possessions, wealth, in **m**., **n**., rest, remainder. **m**., one who has performed the ablution customary at the end of religious pupilage. Adj.: f. o**^**, divine. IWftTS, f. °**ÎT**, excellent, remarkable. / Adv.:at evening.

Back: yaddadāsi viśiṣṭebhyo yaccāśnāsi dine dine |
tatte vittamahaṃ manye śeṣaṃ kasyā̂pi rakṣasi ||30 ||
30. I think that your wealth is what you give to the excellent persons and what you enjoy everyday. For whom do you protect the rest?
yaś ca kāṣṭhamayo hastī yaś ca carmamayo mṛgaḥ |
yaś ca vipro'nadhīyānas trayas te nāma bibhrati || 31 ||
31. These three bear only the name, i.e., the elephant made of wood, the deer made of leather and the Brahmaṇa who does not learn the Vedas.
1. yaḥ sarvabhūtebhyo'bhayaṃ dattvā pravrajati tasmād yater bhūtāni na bibhyati sa ca tebhyo na bibheti |
The living beings are not afraid of that ascetic who becomes ascetic after giving the sense of safety to all living beings. He also is not afraid of those beings.
2. sāyaṃ prātar brahmacārī pratyahaṃ samidham agnāv ādadhyāt |
A brahmacārin must put fagot in the fire everyday in the evening and morning.
3. ye dve kālaṃ vidhattas te mahatī jyotiṣī stavīmi |
I praise the two heavenly bodies which make time (day and night).
4. naikaṃ putram anyasmai dadyād anyasmāt pratigṛhṇīyād vā |
One must neither give his only son to other nor should he take the only son from other.
5. yasmān mahiṣāsurāt sarve 'pi devā abibhayus taṃ śivasya patnī pārvatī nyahan |
Pārvatī, the consort of Śiva, killed that Mahiṣāsura of whom even all the gods were afraid.
6. bhikṣāṃ bhavati dehīti kṣatriyo bhikṣāṃ caran brūyāt |
A Kṣatriya while going for alms must speak thus: “Oh lady, give alms.”
7. rujā jarasā vākrāntaṃ patiṃ patnī kadāpi na jahyāt |
A wife must not abandon her husband who is old or afflicted with disease.
8. yatra bhūṣaṇālaṅkṛtāṃ kanyāṃ pitā yajñabhūmyām ṛtvije dadāti sa daivo vivāha ucyate |
That marriage, in which the father gives his fully ornamented daughter to a priest in a sacrificial ground, is called divine marriage.
9. śatrūn āyāto dṛṣṭvā kṣatriyāv iṣū dhanuṣoḥ samadhattām |
Having seen the enemies coming, the two warriors laid two arrows on their bows.
10. prāyaścittārthe 'ṣṭaśataṃ ghṛtāhutīnāṃ juhudhi ||
For expiation, pour 108/800 oblations of clarified butter.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 184
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XLI. Lesson XLI. XLII. fa (roc.sing. agurl el aiat (part., ac. l) 175
Exercise XLI. Lesson XLI. XLII. fa (roc.sing. agurl el aiat (part., ac. l) 175

Back: 11. Let the Adhvaryus pour the sacrificial offerings into the fire.
adhvaryavo 'gnāv āhutīr juhvatu |
12. The seers ordain forty sacraments in the law-books
ṛṣayaḥ smṛtiṣu catvāriṃśataṃ saṃskārān vidadhati |
13. Daśaratha entrusted his sons to Vasistha as scholars.
daśaratho vasiṣṭhāya svaputrāñ śiṣyān prādadāt |
14. Meeting a woman in the forest, one should say to her: “Sister, be not afraid ”.
vane nārīṃ paśyan svasar mā bibhīhīti tāṃ brūyāt |
15. Let a Snātaka carry (wear) a garland, and an umbrella-and-shoes.
snātakaḥ srajaṃ chattropānahaṃ ca dhattām | snātakaḥ srajaṃ chattropānahaṃ dhārayet |
16. One who takes (part.) roots-fruits-or-grain from a strange-field, is to be punished.
parakṣetrān mūlaphaladhānyam ādadad daṇḍyeta |
17. Let the two doorkeepers close the door.
dvau dvāḥsthau dvāram apidadhātām |
18. Do not neglect the teacher's command.
guror ājñāṃ mā jahihi/jahīhi |
19. The royal-sage, who wore much jewelry, shone (vi-√bhā) with great brilliancy, like the sun.
bahūni bhūṣaṇāny ādadhāno rājarṣir mahātejasā sūrya iva vyabhāt |
20. The scholars who-have-not-learned-their-lessons are ashamed before their teacher (acc. or gen.).
anadhītapāṭhāḥ śiṣyā guroḥ samakṣaṃ jihryati|
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 185
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 11. Let the Adhvaryus pour the sacrificial offerings into the fire. 12. The seers ordain forty sacraments in the law-books (^fffw). 13. Da
11. Let the Adhvaryus pour the sacrificial offerings into the fire. 12. The seers ordain forty sacraments in the law-books (^fffw). 13. Da

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 185
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XLII. 441. Verbs. Nasal class. All roots of this class end in **consonants**. As class-sign they insert a nasal before the final con-* With the suffix JpEJ, f. °^, are formed adjectives signifying 4 made or composed or consisting of’. — In the second line, ‘bear the name’ merely, i. e. are not in reality such. ** See note on § 411. 176 Lesson XLIL sonant, unless one be there already (as in ^3’); this nasal is adapted to the consonant, except in the strong forms, where it is expanded to the syllable «T [KT], which bears the accent. 442. The combination of the final radical consonants with those of the personal endings is in accordance with the rules already given for the root and reduplicating classes.
Lesson XLII. 441. Verbs. Nasal class. All roots of this class end in **consonants**. As class-sign they insert a nasal before the final con-* With the suffix JpEJ, f. °^, are formed adjectives signifying 4 made or composed or consisting of’. — In the second line, ‘bear the name’ merely, i. e. are not in reality such. ** See note on § 411. 176 Lesson XLIL sonant, unless one be there already (as in ^3’); this nasal is adapted to the consonant, except in the strong forms, where it is expanded to the syllable «T [KT], which bears the accent. 442. The combination of the final radical consonants with those of the personal endings is in accordance with the rules already given for the root and reduplicating classes.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 186
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 443. Thus, yo "join";strong stem uu, weak ya. Indicative. Active. Middle. yafo нуsон Imperfect.чуба sysoufeImperative. уитити ySTRSти Opt. act.i yoarf etc.; mid.: gaЙa etc.Part. aetos **yau**, f. gar; mid.i gaтт.
443. Thus, yo "join";strong stem uu, weak ya. Indicative. Active. Middle. yafo нуsон Imperfect.чуба sysoufeImperative. уитити ySTRSти Opt. act.i yoarf etc.; mid.: gaЙa etc.Part. aetos **yau**, f. gar; mid.i gaтт.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 186
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Root ‘obstruct’; strong stem **wj**. weak iMiddle. 444. Indicative. Active. ^TTH * Instead of and the like, it is allowed (and more usual) to write etc.; also etc., instead of etc.; in each case omitting the consonant immediately following the nasal. Lesson XLII. 177 Imperative. ^rrvrprl Import. act.: "**^HTct** ’SWT ^^* 4 etc.; mid.: etc. — Opt. act.: **V^tJlTFr** etc.; mid.; etc. — Part. act.: **^VPtT**, f- mid.: "^•VT’T
Root ‘obstruct’; strong stem **wj**. weak iMiddle. 444. Indicative. Active. ^TTH * Instead of and the like, it is allowed (and more usual) to write etc.; also etc., instead of etc.; in each case omitting the consonant immediately following the nasal. Lesson XLII. 177 Imperative. ^rrvrprl Import. act.: "**^HTct** ’SWT ^^* 4 etc.; mid.: etc. — Opt. act.: **V^tJlTFr** etc.; mid.; etc. — Part. act.: **^VPtT**, f- mid.: "^•VT’T

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 187
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 445. Roots ‘grind, crush’ (act.); and , ‘injure, destroy’ (act.): Imperfect. ^rftnrz ^rfcreiK -«or °^ ^rf^snn Ind. 2nd persons: , **f<i¥** 5 — f^^f^T, Imv. 2nd persons: ftTSH.» **fU^**; —**fW’st**-446. H|T, ‘crush’ (act.), combines HUT|T with fcf and 7f into cjirrfe and H?U<|
445. Roots ‘grind, crush’ (act.); and , ‘injure, destroy’ (act.): Imperfect. ^rftnrz ^rfcreiK -«or °^ ^rf^snn Ind. 2nd persons: , **f<i¥** 5 — f^^f^T, Imv. 2nd persons: ftTSH.» **fU^**; —**fW’st**-446. H|T, ‘crush’ (act.), combines HUT|T with fcf and 7f into cjirrfe and H?U<|

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 187
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Vocabulary XLII. Verbs: (**inddhe**) kindle, light. (**chinatti**, **chintte**) cut, off. _fr- ^**$(T** take away, remove. + **^3^** exterminate. (cans, stem) awaken. (^**pindsti**^ grind, crush. (**bhanakti**) break, destroy. (**bhindtti**, **bhintte**) split. ^(31 (**^^w?i
Vocabulary XLII. Verbs: (**inddhe**) kindle, light. (**chinatti**, **chintte**) cut, off. _fr- ^**$(T** take away, remove. + **^3^** exterminate. (cans, stem) awaken. (^**pindsti**^ grind, crush. (**bhanakti**) break, destroy. (**bhindtti**, **bhintte**) split. ^(31 (**^^w?i

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 188
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Subst.: **I**-? condition, state. **f**., dawn; also personified, Usas, the Dawn. **m**. , thorn ; enemy. **m**-> bite, mouthful. cT^^T **m**., rice. **n**. , crime. rfYq **m**., grandson. **m**., relative. **n**.» writing, copying. **m**., the Himalaya Mts. Adj.:high-suitable for Ksatriyas. domestic. TTfSTEGM, f. °^n> unfavorable. f. **^n**, splendid, beautiful, excellent.
Subst.: **I**-? condition, state. **f**., dawn; also personified, Usas, the Dawn. **m**. , thorn ; enemy. **m**-> bite, mouthful. cT^^T **m**., rice. **n**. , crime. rfYq **m**., grandson. **m**., relative. **n**.» writing, copying. **m**., the Himalaya Mts. Adj.:high-suitable for Ksatriyas. domestic. TTfSTEGM, f. °^n> unfavorable. f. **^n**, splendid, beautiful, excellent.

Back: yad dhyāyati yat kurute dhṛtiṃ badhnāti yatra ca |
tad avāpnoty ayatnena yo hinasti na kiṃcana || 32 ||
He who does not destroy anything will effortlessly obtain whatever he thinks of whatever he does and whatever object, in which he ties his determination.
yasyāṃ yasyām avasthāyāṃ yat karoti śubhāśubham |
tasyāṃ tasyām avasthāyāṃ tatphalaṃ samupāśnute || 33 ||
One will enjoy the fruit of what he does, either good or bad, in the same condition, in which he does the action.
dūta eva hi saṃdhatte bhinatty eva ca saṃhatān |
dūtas tat kurute karma yena bhidyante vā na vā || 34 ||
Indeed, a messenger both unites and separates; a messenger performs that action by which things are broken or not broken.
1. ye gā hiṃsanti teṣāṃ garīyaḥ prāyaścittaṃ vidadhati tasmād gāṃ mā hindhi |
They determine severe expiation for those who kill cows. So do not kill the cow.
2. jīvatputrapautro varṣaśataṃ niṣkaṇṭakaṃ rājyaṃ bhuṅkṣveti kavayo mahārājam astuvan |
The poets praised the great king thus: “May you, whose sons and grandsons are still living, enjoy the kingdom which is without enemies for a hundred of years.”
3. yathā vāto balena vṛkṣān bhanakty evaṃ me dviṣo bhaṅgdhi |
You must destroy my enemies in the same way as the wind breaks the trees with its power.
4. raṇe śatrubhir yuddhamānaḥ śūraḥ kāñcid iṣubhir abhinat keṣāṃcin mūrdhahastapādādikam asinācchinat |
A brave warrior while fighting with enemies in The battle destroyed some with arrows and cut Heads, hands, feet etc. of others with his sword.
5. prātar aśvināv uṣasā svasrā saha bhūtāni jāgarayituṃ tricakre rathe "śvau yuṅkta ity ṛkṣu śrūyate |
It is heard in the Rgveda thus: “In the morning the two Aśvins with Uṣas, their sister, yoke two horses to their three-wheeled chariot to awaken beings.
6. yo bhūmidānam ācchindyād ācchidyamānaṃ vānumodate sa pañcabhir mahāpātakaiḥ saṃyuktaḥ syāt |
He, who might cut part of the land-gift or approves of the act, should have a part of five great sins.
7. aho pratikūlo vidhir viśinaṣṭi manorujaṃ me |
Alas, the unfavorable fate leaves mental pain with me.
8. yatra pitrādīnāṃ bandhūnāṃ śirāṃsi bhindanto rudatīṃ kanyāṃ balād haranti taṃ kṣātraṃ vivāham ṛṣayo viduḥ ||
The seers knew that marriage, in which they take away the crying maiden, by breaking the heads of the relatives such as the fathers etc., as the marriage suitable for a Kshatriya.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 188
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Exercise XLII. ^FgTRjfa ’gfrT ^VTfrT I fr* || 3R II •qTgn’FTÎT’Eri "’qHT’JHH I cF^li <5^n’T^ÎT^T Hrqi^r WITO II 33 II <£cT f? ’q I *T II 38 II <5^ <•Thri** ’ivt"sr H^Tsn wt f^f^T II 9 II \l««< u ^n<fr W H^f^r II ? II TW ’jr: II 8 II ITTHTf^^T^ÔT wn-Hr <sn3TTf4<j fMrai n m ii ^(T<t ii $ ii ufH^yr Tnfmi ii -o ii Tpr fq^rr^t’ri ^ryri firviftr K II c II
Exercise XLII. ^FgTRjfa ’gfrT ^VTfrT I fr* || 3R II •qTgn’FTÎT’Eri "’qHT’JHH I cF^li <5^n’T^ÎT^T Hrqi^r WITO II 33 II <£cT f? ’q I *T II 38 II <5^ <•Thri** ’ivt"sr H^Tsn wt f^f^T II 9 II \l««< u ^n<fr W H^f^r II ? II TW ’jr: II 8 II ITTHTf^^T^ÔT wn-Hr <sn3TTf4<j fMrai n m ii ^(T<t ii $ ii ufH^yr Tnfmi ii -o ii Tpr fq^rr^t’ri ^ryri firviftr K II c II
* The antecedent of this relative is the subject of ** Translate as though dative.

Back: 11. jayasiṃho girinagaraṃ ciraṃ ruddhvā tam ante "bhanak |
After Jayasinha had long besieged Girinagara, he destroyed it at last.
12. tapasvī māse catvāriṃśadadhike dve śate grāsān eva bhuñjyāt |
An ascetic shall eat only 240 mouthfuls in a month (loc.).
13. agnim inddhi samidharthaṃ śākhāś chinddhi gā dugdhi dhānyaṃ piṇḍḍhy iti prātaḥ kaścid ṛtvig anyam abravīt |
“ Kindle the fire; cut branches for firewood; milk the cows; grind grain”: thus said one priest to another early in the morning.
14. guruḥ pustakalekhanāya śiṣyān nyayunak |
The teacher entrusted the scholars with the copying of the books (cpd., dat.).
15. himavān atīvocchritena svaśikhareṇa meghānāṃ panthānaṃ ruṇaddhi |
The mountain-range Himavant checks the course of the clouds with its exceedingly-high peaks.
16. dharmakṛtaḥ svakarmaphalaṃ bhuñjantaḥ svarge sukhino bhavanti |
The doers-of-right are happy in Heaven, enjoying the fruits-of-their-works.
17. rājā pararājyaṃ jitavān rajakulaṃ nocchindyāt |
A king who has conquered a foreign realm must not exterminate the royal-family.
18. dvijātayo vivāhakāle gṛhyāgnim indhīran |
Aryans must kindle the domestic-fire at the time-of-the-wedding.
19. nāryo musalais taṇḍulān apiṃṣan |
Women pounded the rice with pestles.
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 188
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The antecedent of this relative is the subject of ** Translate as though dative. 11. After Jayasinha had long besieged Girinagara, he destroyed Lesson XLIII. 179 it at last. 12. An ascetic shall eat only 240 mouthfuls in a month (Zoe.). 13. “ Kindle the fire; cut branches for firewood milk the cows; grind grain”: thus said one priest to another early in the morning. 14. The teacher entrusted ) the scholars with the copying of the books (cpd., dat.). 15. The mountain - range Himavant checks the course of the clouds with its exceedingly-high peaks. 16. The doers-of-right are happy in Heaven, enjoying the fruits-of-Âezr-works. 17. A king who has conquered a foreign realm must not exterminate the royal-family. 18. Aryans must kindle the domestic-fire at the time-of-the-wedding. 19. Women pounded the rice with pestles.
* The antecedent of this relative is the subject of ** Translate as though dative. 11. After Jayasinha had long besieged Girinagara, he destroyed Lesson XLIII. 179 it at last. 12. An ascetic shall eat only 240 mouthfuls in a month (Zoe.). 13. “ Kindle the fire; cut branches for firewood milk the cows; grind grain”: thus said one priest to another early in the morning. 14. The teacher entrusted ) the scholars with the copying of the books (cpd., dat.). 15. The mountain - range Himavant checks the course of the clouds with its exceedingly-high peaks. 16. The doers-of-right are happy in Heaven, enjoying the fruits-of-Âezr-works. 17. A king who has conquered a foreign realm must not exterminate the royal-family. 18. Aryans must kindle the domestic-fire at the time-of-the-wedding. 19. Women pounded the rice with pestles.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 189
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XLIII. 447. Verbs. Perfect-System. In the later language the perfectsystem comprises only an indicative mode and a participle, each both active and middle. Its formation is essentially alike in all verbs; its characteristics are: 1. **reduplication** ; 2. distinction of **strong** and **weak** forms; 3. endings in some respects **peculiar**; 4. the frequent use of the union-vowel **i**.
Lesson XLIII. 447. Verbs. Perfect-System. In the later language the perfectsystem comprises only an indicative mode and a participle, each both active and middle. Its formation is essentially alike in all verbs; its characteristics are: 1. **reduplication** ; 2. distinction of **strong** and **weak** forms; 3. endings in some respects **peculiar**; 4. the frequent use of the union-vowel **i**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 189
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 448. Reduplication. 1. Initial consonants are reduplicated according to the rules given in Less. XLI for the reduplicated present-stem. 2. Medial and final vowels, short and long, are represented by the **corresponding short** vowel, diphthongs by their **second element**; but (or is represented always by never by as the reduplicated present-stem. Thus, *tt, **^ptt**; 3. Initial followed by a single consonant, becomes (through thus, 4. Initial T and follow the same analogy; but in the strong 180 Lesson XLIII. forms, where the root-vowel is **gunated**, the reduplicating vowel is protected from combination by the insertion of or • thus, , strong perfect-stem (**j~y~e"f**) weak (i.e. **t-ts**) ; strong (**u-v-oc**), weak (**u-uc**). 5. Roots beginning with **vowels long** by nature or position do not in general make the ordinary perfect-system, but use instead a **periphrastic** formation (see below). But is an exception, making the constant perfect-stem and a few roots with initial or show the anomalous reduplication in the perfect. *
448. Reduplication. 1. Initial consonants are reduplicated according to the rules given in Less. XLI for the reduplicated present-stem. 2. Medial and final vowels, short and long, are represented by the **corresponding short** vowel, diphthongs by their **second element**; but (or is represented always by never by as the reduplicated present-stem. Thus, *tt, **^ptt**; 3. Initial followed by a single consonant, becomes (through thus, 4. Initial T and follow the same analogy; but in the strong 180 Lesson XLIII. forms, where the root-vowel is **gunated**, the reduplicating vowel is protected from combination by the insertion of or • thus, , strong perfect-stem (**j~y~e"f**) weak (i.e. **t-ts**) ; strong (**u-v-oc**), weak (**u-uc**). 5. Roots beginning with **vowels long** by nature or position do not in general make the ordinary perfect-system, but use instead a **periphrastic** formation (see below). But is an exception, making the constant perfect-stem and a few roots with initial or show the anomalous reduplication in the perfect. *
* The grammarians prescribe (doubtless falsely) this reduplication for all verbs beginning with or followed by more than one consonant.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 190
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 449. Strong and. weak forms In the three persons sing. act. the **root-syllable** is accented, and exhibits usually a **stronger** form. As regards the strengthening: * 1. In roots with **medial vowels long** by nature or position, and in those with initial the difference of strong and weak forms does not appear, except in **accented texts**. 2. Medial and initial vowels are gunated, if possible, in the strong forms; thus, w. 8« s‘w. s. (§ 448, 4). 3. Medial before a **single final consonant** is **vriddhied** in the **3rd** pers., and optionally in the **1st**; thus, from in 1st sing, either or in 2nd in 3rd 4. A **final** vowel takes either **guna** or **vrddhi** in the 1st person, **guna** in the 2nd, **vrddhi** in the 3rd; thus, from in 1st or fsi^T, 2nd fspr, 3rd f T^. *
449. Strong and. weak forms In the three persons sing. act. the **root-syllable** is accented, and exhibits usually a **stronger** form. As regards the strengthening: * 1. In roots with **medial vowels long** by nature or position, and in those with initial the difference of strong and weak forms does not appear, except in **accented texts**. 2. Medial and initial vowels are gunated, if possible, in the strong forms; thus, w. 8« s‘w. s. (§ 448, 4). 3. Medial before a **single final consonant** is **vriddhied** in the **3rd** pers., and optionally in the **1st**; thus, from in 1st sing, either or in 2nd in 3rd 4. A **final** vowel takes either **guna** or **vrddhi** in the 1st person, **guna** in the 2nd, **vrddhi** in the 3rd; thus, from in 1st or fsi^T, 2nd fspr, 3rd f T^. *

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 190
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 450. The root H makes, irregularly, the perfect-stem and adds q before a vowel-ending. -K
450. The root H makes, irregularly, the perfect-stem and adds q before a vowel-ending. -K

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 190
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * The grammarians prescribe (doubtless falsely) this reduplication for all verbs beginning with or followed by more than one consonant. 451. Some roots, instead of **strengthening** the vowel in the Lesson XLIII. 181 strong forms, **weaken** it in the weak forms; some few even do **both**. See below.
* The grammarians prescribe (doubtless falsely) this reduplication for all verbs beginning with or followed by more than one consonant. 451. Some roots, instead of **strengthening** the vowel in the Lesson XLIII. 181 strong forms, **weaken** it in the weak forms; some few even do **both**. See below.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 191
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 452. Personal Endings. The perfect-endings are these: Active. Middle. 1. a vd ma e vahe make 2. th a athusa se tithe dhve 3. a atus us e dte re But roots ending in a take **du** in 1st and 3rd sing, act.; thus,
452. Personal Endings. The perfect-endings are these: Active. Middle. 1. a vd ma e vahe make 2. th a athusa se tithe dhve 3. a atus us e dte re But roots ending in a take **du** in 1st and 3rd sing, act.; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 191
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 453. Union-vowel. The endings beginning with consonants are in classical Sanskrit usually joined to the base by the unionvowel The most important rules for the use of are as follows : 1. The \ of 3rd pl. mid. always has before it. 2. The other endings beginning with consonants, except VI, take it in nearly all verbs. But it is rejected throughout (except from 73) by eight verbs: viz. lî ‘make’, ‘bear’, TJ 4go\ 2^ ‘ choose 4 run ’, VJ 4 hear ’ , VJ ‘ praise ’, 6 flow ’. * 3. For its use or omission in 2nd sing. act. the rules are too complicated to be given here. 454. With the union-vowel a final radical or is not combined into but becomes **VJ** or (if more than one consonant precede) ; thus, from <ft, **ni-ny-i-va**.
453. Union-vowel. The endings beginning with consonants are in classical Sanskrit usually joined to the base by the unionvowel The most important rules for the use of are as follows : 1. The \ of 3rd pl. mid. always has before it. 2. The other endings beginning with consonants, except VI, take it in nearly all verbs. But it is rejected throughout (except from 73) by eight verbs: viz. lî ‘make’, ‘bear’, TJ 4go\ 2^ ‘ choose 4 run ’, VJ 4 hear ’ , VJ ‘ praise ’, 6 flow ’. * 3. For its use or omission in 2nd sing. act. the rules are too complicated to be given here. 454. With the union-vowel a final radical or is not combined into but becomes **VJ** or (if more than one consonant precede) ; thus, from <ft, **ni-ny-i-va**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 191
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Examples of inflection. A. Roots in final vowels. 455. I. Roots in or The V and V of gunated and vrid-dhied vowels become and before the vowel beginning an ending. See also § 454. Thus, 1. ’ft: Act.: Sing. 1. f’K* ! or f^PTT^, 2. or 3. f’t’TTST; du. 1. 2. f^TRjVT^L 3. pl. 1. 2. 3. — Mid.: Sing. 3. 182 du. 1. 2. 3- f’P’rra; pl. 1. 2. fsrfsgw, 3. fMfMr- _ 2. sft: Act.: Sing. 1. f^T or f TWTO 2. fWsrf^T or * 3. f^TTST; du. 1. 2. 3. ; pl. 1- f^-2. fSTf^T, 3-456. II. Roots in or follow the model of the last-mentioned.
Examples of inflection. A. Roots in final vowels. 455. I. Roots in or The V and V of gunated and vrid-dhied vowels become and before the vowel beginning an ending. See also § 454. Thus, 1. ’ft: Act.: Sing. 1. f’K* ! or f^PTT^, 2. or 3. f’t’TTST; du. 1. 2. f^TRjVT^L 3. pl. 1. 2. 3. — Mid.: Sing. 3. 182 du. 1. 2. 3- f’P’rra; pl. 1. 2. fsrfsgw, 3. fMfMr- _ 2. sft: Act.: Sing. 1. f^T or f TWTO 2. fWsrf^T or * 3. f^TTST; du. 1. 2. 3. ; pl. 1- f^-2. fSTf^T, 3-456. II. Roots in or follow the model of the last-mentioned.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 192
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 2. fSTf^T, 3-456. II. Roots in or follow the model of the last-mentioned. Thus, Act.: Sing. 1- or TJHT^, 2. HStW (not -see § 453, 2), 3. <JSRB du. 1. H’S^T- 2. 3. Act.: du. etc.
2. fSTf^T, 3-456. II. Roots in or follow the model of the last-mentioned. Thus, Act.: Sing. 1- or TJHT^, 2. HStW (not -see § 453, 2), 3. <JSRB du. 1. H’S^T- 2. 3. Act.: du. etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 192
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Act.: du. etc. 457. M is irregular in the perfect. (Cf. § 450): Active. Middle. 1. Cv 2. 458. III. Roots in 1- 1 5 (see § 453, 2): * 1. ^ iTT ’WWT% * * 2. ^Tî"UÎ, 3. So also IT, ^T, 2^ ‘choose’. 2. The other roots in make the first persons thus: from or ^TIT,
Act.: du. etc. 457. M is irregular in the perfect. (Cf. § 450): Active. Middle. 1. Cv 2. 458. III. Roots in 1- 1 5 (see § 453, 2): * 1. ^ iTT ’WWT% * * 2. ^Tî"UÎ, 3. So also IT, ^T, 2^ ‘choose’. 2. The other roots in make the first persons thus: from or ^TIT,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 192
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 459. If the final ^r be preceded by more than one consonant, * the formation is as follows: 1- or 3. qqnx; du. etc. — the being gunated.
459. If the final ^r be preceded by more than one consonant, * the formation is as follows: 1- or 3. qqnx; du. etc. — the being gunated.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 192
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 460. IV. Roots in WT (including those written by the natives with Wor ê or an). These take af in Ist and 3rd sing. act.; and the aT is lost before vowel-endings and 7. 1. IBTT: 1. ro ruge 2. wT, al, and similar roots, make their weak forms from the Lesson XLIII. 183 simpler root-forms , a etc.; and st makes its strong forms also from thus, etC
460. IV. Roots in WT (including those written by the natives with Wor ê or an). These take af in Ist and 3rd sing. act.; and the aT is lost before vowel-endings and 7. 1. IBTT: 1. ro ruge 2. wT, al, and similar roots, make their weak forms from the Lesson XLIII. 183 simpler root-forms , a etc.; and st makes its strong forms also from thus, etC

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 193
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: B. Roots in final consonants. 461. I. With medial vowel capable of guna. 1. f lcjr : Act: Sing. i. 2. fWT^’ar, 3. farn^; du. * etc. ; pl. etc. Mid.: etc. 2. So from •etc.; 3. from 1. 2. or 3. du. etc.
B. Roots in final consonants. 461. I. With medial vowel capable of guna. 1. f lcjr : Act: Sing. i. 2. fWT^’ar, 3. farn^; du. * etc. ; pl. etc. Mid.: etc. 2. So from •etc.; 3. from 1. 2. or 3. du. etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 193
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 462. II. With initial vowel capable of guna. 1. 1TI : Sing. 1. 2- 3. du. i. ffqcj, 2. fxTWEC, 3. flTTJK; PL E 2" 3- 2-etc. 3. The root 5^, 6 go ’, also follows this rule, forming etc., 3rd. pl. 4. makes (see §448, 5) etc.
462. II. With initial vowel capable of guna. 1. 1TI : Sing. 1. 2- 3. du. i. ffqcj, 2. fxTWEC, 3. flTTJK; PL E 2" 3- 2-etc. 3. The root 5^, 6 go ’, also follows this rule, forming etc., 3rd. pl. 4. makes (see §448, 5) etc.

Back: Perfect -
Middle | Singular | Dual | Plural
First | ānaśe | ānaśivahe | ānaśimahe
Second | ānaśiṣe | ānaśāthe | ānaśidhve
Third | ānaśe | ānaśāte | ānaśire
MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 193
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 463. III. With initial ^5T-^srra etc.; ^T, etc. But (originally ^PT) makes <T7I etc. (§ 448, 5).
463. III. With initial ^5T-^srra etc.; ^T, etc. But (originally ^PT) makes <T7I etc. (§ 448, 5).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 193
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 464. IV. With medial 1. sfiFf: Act.: sing. 1. or 2. 3. 5 du. etc. Mid.: etc. Thus all such roots beginning with more than one consonant, or with an aspirate, a guttural mute, or ^T.
464. IV. With medial 1. sfiFf: Act.: sing. 1. or 2. 3. 5 du. etc. Mid.: etc. Thus all such roots beginning with more than one consonant, or with an aspirate, a guttural mute, or ^T.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 193
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Several roots not having the form here defined are said to undergo the same contraction, most of them optionally. 465. 2. Roots in general having medial before a single final consonant, and beginning also with a single consonant which is repeated unchanged in the reduplication — i. e. not an aspirate, 3 guttural, or — contract with the reduplication into one syllable, with V as its vowel, in the weak forms; and this is allowed also in 2nd sing. act. when the union-vowel is taken. Thus, s. MU^ and TTTTF^, w. 184 Lesson XLIII. ’QT^, tTOI^T Tjq^FSI. qqiq qfqq q^ qf* rql qqi^r qqqa qfqW% qt^Kq qfWr
* Several roots not having the form here defined are said to undergo the same contraction, most of them optionally. 465. 2. Roots in general having medial before a single final consonant, and beginning also with a single consonant which is repeated unchanged in the reduplication — i. e. not an aspirate, 3 guttural, or — contract with the reduplication into one syllable, with V as its vowel, in the weak forms; and this is allowed also in 2nd sing. act. when the union-vowel is taken. Thus, s. MU^ and TTTTF^, w. 184 Lesson XLIII. ’QT^, tTOI^T Tjq^FSI. qqiq qfqq q^ qf* rql qqi^r qqqa qfqW% qt^Kq qfWr

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 194
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: qqiq466. 3. Certain roots beginningwith q va (also one with ya) and ending in one consonant, reduplicate with the syllable "3 (the one root just mentioned, with and abbreviate the q (q) of the root to q (^) in weak forms. They are treated like roots with initial q (^: § 462) but retain the full root form in the strong persons. These roots are qq\ q^T, ‘dwell , and also qq. Thus, qq: Act. sing. 1. qqq or \3qpq. 2. qq- or qqfqq, 3. qqTq; du- ^PT («-wc-i-va) etc. Mid. qffq etc. — qq: Act. sing. 1. or 2- or 3* du. ^fqq etc- Mid. etc.
qqiq466. 3. Certain roots beginningwith q va (also one with ya) and ending in one consonant, reduplicate with the syllable "3 (the one root just mentioned, with and abbreviate the q (q) of the root to q (^) in weak forms. They are treated like roots with initial q (^: § 462) but retain the full root form in the strong persons. These roots are qq\ q^T, ‘dwell , and also qq. Thus, qq: Act. sing. 1. qqq or \3qpq. 2. qq- or qqfqq, 3. qqTq; du- ^PT («-wc-i-va) etc. Mid. qffq etc. — qq: Act. sing. 1. or 2- or 3* du. ^fqq etc- Mid. etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 194
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 467. 4. Several roots which have medial qj between single consonants, but cannot follow the rule of § 465, drop out the q from the weak forms. These roots are, in the classical language, W and also qq;, which might be expected to follow §465. They form the weak stems and q^. Thus, qtqq or q^T®T etc., qfiqq etc. ?q_ makes its strong stem and
467. 4. Several roots which have medial qj between single consonants, but cannot follow the rule of § 465, drop out the q from the weak forms. These roots are, in the classical language, W and also qq;, which might be expected to follow §465. They form the weak stems and q^. Thus, qtqq or q^T®T etc., qfiqq etc. ?q_ makes its strong stem and

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 194
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 468. 5. The roots qjV ’ and One °r tW° others’ ^duplicate from the semivowel, and contract q and q to and q in weak forms. Thus, strong or qtqTR. weak Hqq,-
468. 5. The roots qjV ’ and One °r tW° others’ ^duplicate from the semivowel, and contract q and q to and q in weak forms. Thus, strong or qtqTR. weak Hqq,-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 194
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 40y. d. the root wg "speak, is found only in this tense, and only in the following forms: sing. 2. wtr, 3. wra; du. 2. aT- yq. 3. arag8; pl. 3. aTw#. These forms have only the value of the present.--2. The root Ifag, "know", makes a perfect without reduplication, but otherwise regular, which has only present-value; see § 417. 2far, "lind", forms the regular faûz.
40y. d. the root wg "speak, is found only in this tense, and only in the following forms: sing. 2. wtr, 3. wra; du. 2. aT- yq. 3. arag8; pl. 3. aTw#. These forms have only the value of the present.--2. The root Ifag, "know", makes a perfect without reduplication, but otherwise regular, which has only present-value; see § 417. 2far, "lind", forms the regular faûz.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 194
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 470. The roots fq, and form as P^ct-stems fqfWV fqf’T- and fqfq
470. The roots fq, and form as P^ct-stems fqfWV fqf’T- and fqfq

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 195
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 471. Perfect participle. 1. Active. The ending of the pf. part. active is (mid. w which is added to the weak perfect-stem. * When this is monosyllabic the union-vowel is inserted (but not in the weakest cases, before Thus, a. from strong stem of part. mid. w. from from ; from <^T, But, from f®T’Tl M 14^., fW-;from from fWf* ra^, — b- The root ’TH makes as its strong stem of pf. part. or <4* 1 «< lH_’ mid. or weakest only "SfTJjq . Similarly, from itL or or 51^^. — e- ‘ know ’, makes etc* ’ 2f^, ‘find’, etc. 2. Middle. The pf. part, middle is made with the suffix which is added to the weak stem as this appears in the middle voice; thus, 5
471. Perfect participle. 1. Active. The ending of the pf. part. active is (mid. w which is added to the weak perfect-stem. * When this is monosyllabic the union-vowel is inserted (but not in the weakest cases, before Thus, a. from strong stem of part. mid. w. from from ; from <^T, But, from f®T’Tl M 14^., fW-;from from fWf* ra^, — b- The root ’TH makes as its strong stem of pf. part. or <4* 1 «< lH_’ mid. or weakest only "SfTJjq . Similarly, from itL or or 51^^. — e- ‘ know ’, makes etc* ’ 2f^, ‘find’, etc. 2. Middle. The pf. part, middle is made with the suffix which is added to the weak stem as this appears in the middle voice; thus, 5
* Mechanically, the weakest participle-stem is identical with the 3rd pl. act. (of course, Tr instead of ^Q.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 195
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: * Mechanically, the weakest participle-stem is identical with the 3rd pl. act. (of course, Tr instead of ^Q. Periphrastic Perfect 472. Most roots beginning with a vowel long by nature or position adopt a periphrastic formation in the perfect tense; the same is also taken by the secondary conjugations, and optionally by a few primary roots not falling in the above category. It is made as follows: 473. To the accusative of a derivative noun-stem in made from the present-stem which is the general basis of each conjugation, are added, for the active, the perfect active forms of cfi or (or, very rarely, of 3j); for the middle, only the perfect middle forms 186 Lesson XLIII. XLIV. of Thus, from pf. or ^T^TÎT 5 from
* Mechanically, the weakest participle-stem is identical with the 3rd pl. act. (of course, Tr instead of ^Q. Periphrastic Perfect 472. Most roots beginning with a vowel long by nature or position adopt a periphrastic formation in the perfect tense; the same is also taken by the secondary conjugations, and optionally by a few primary roots not falling in the above category. It is made as follows: 473. To the accusative of a derivative noun-stem in made from the present-stem which is the general basis of each conjugation, are added, for the active, the perfect active forms of cfi or (or, very rarely, of 3j); for the middle, only the perfect middle forms 186 Lesson XLIII. XLIV. of Thus, from pf. or ^T^TÎT 5 from

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 196
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 474. Force of the Perfect. In classical Sanskrit the perfect coincides in meaning with the imperfect, as a tense of narration, but is less often met with.
474. Force of the Perfect. In classical Sanskrit the perfect coincides in meaning with the imperfect, as a tense of narration, but is less often met with.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 196
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XLIV. 475. Verbs. Future-System (and Conditional). The verb has two futures: I. The simple, or s-future, which is by far the older, and much more common, than the other; and II. the periphrastic future.
Lesson XLIV. 475. Verbs. Future-System (and Conditional). The verb has two futures: I. The simple, or s-future, which is by far the older, and much more common, than the other; and II. the periphrastic future.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 196
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 476. I. Simple Future. This tense contains an indicative mode and a participle, active and middle. It may be made from all verbs. The tense-sign is the syllable 1^, added to the root either directly, or by the union-vowel V Gn the latter case becoming The root has the
476. I. Simple Future. This tense contains an indicative mode and a participle, active and middle. It may be made from all verbs. The tense-sign is the syllable 1^, added to the root either directly, or by the union-vowel V Gn the latter case becoming The root has the

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 196
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 477. When V is not taken, final radical consonants suffer the same changes before as before in the inflection of the rootclass or reduplicating or nasal class. Thus, from vj) vtt fd; F?T ? ’ "O c^M"tVT5 The root ‘ dwell’, makes
477. When V is not taken, final radical consonants suffer the same changes before as before in the inflection of the rootclass or reduplicating or nasal class. Thus, from vj) vtt fd; F?T ? ’ "O c^M"tVT5 The root ‘ dwell’, makes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 196
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 478. 1. Most roots ending in vowels reject thus, ^T, *TL 2. But all roots in take T; thus, cfi, and also the roots iff (Vf^rfH) and 3. makes
478. 1. Most roots ending in vowels reject thus, ^T, *TL 2. But all roots in take T; thus, cfi, and also the roots iff (Vf^rfH) and 3. makes

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 197
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 479. In general, the verbs which take in the infinitive and periphrastic future (see below), take it also in this tense. But the accordance is far from complete; and these parts should be learned, as a matter of usage, for any given verb.
479. In general, the verbs which take in the infinitive and periphrastic future (see below), take it also in this tense. But the accordance is far from complete; and these parts should be learned, as a matter of usage, for any given verb.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 197
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 480. Stems of causative inflection, and denominatives in make their future-stems in thus,
480. Stems of causative inflection, and denominatives in make their future-stems in thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 197
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 481. Participle. The participles, act. and mid., are made from the future-stem precisely as from the present-stem; thus, ^T, (f- Cf. §§ 260, 262.
481. Participle. The participles, act. and mid., are made from the future-stem precisely as from the present-stem; thus, ^T, (f- Cf. §§ 260, 262.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 197
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 482. Conditional. A tense called the conditional (indie, only) is made from the stem of the simple future precisely as the imperfect is made from the present-stem, and similarly inflected. Thus, It is of extremely rare occurrence.
482. Conditional. A tense called the conditional (indie, only) is made from the stem of the simple future precisely as the imperfect is made from the present-stem, and similarly inflected. Thus, It is of extremely rare occurrence.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 197
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 483. II. Periphrastic Future. This tense, which is allowed to be made from all verbs, contains a single indicative tense, active, It is formed by the nomen agentis in cj, having the value of a future active participle, to the nom. sing, of which (?n) are added, in the 1st and 2nd persons of all numbers, the corresponding inflected forms of the pres, of l^R^ ‘be’. In the 3rd persons the nomen agentis is used alone, in the proper number, without the auxiliary. * 484. The root has in most cases the same form before the * The Hindus also prescribe a middle formation ; it has, however, practically no existence. suffix H which it takes before the HK °f tbe infinitive. Thus, 485. The inflection is then as follows: 188 Lesson XLIV. 1-2-3- ^nrr MitSiO
483. II. Periphrastic Future. This tense, which is allowed to be made from all verbs, contains a single indicative tense, active, It is formed by the nomen agentis in cj, having the value of a future active participle, to the nom. sing, of which (?n) are added, in the 1st and 2nd persons of all numbers, the corresponding inflected forms of the pres, of l^R^ ‘be’. In the 3rd persons the nomen agentis is used alone, in the proper number, without the auxiliary. * 484. The root has in most cases the same form before the * The Hindus also prescribe a middle formation ; it has, however, practically no existence. suffix H which it takes before the HK °f tbe infinitive. Thus, 485. The inflection is then as follows: 188 Lesson XLIV. 1-2-3- ^nrr MitSiO
* The Hindus also prescribe a middle formation ; it has, however, practically no existence.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 198
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Aorist-System. 486. The aorist comprises three quite distinct formations, each with certain sub-varieties; but all are bound together into one complex system by certain correspondences of form and meaning. In classical Sanskrit aorists are comparatively rare. Their value is quite that of impf. or pf. as tenses of narration. But they are used also (though not nearly so often as the prohibitive opt.) with the particle in **prohibitions**, the augment being then omitted; thus, ZTT <^T« cdo not give’; HTt ‘do not fear’. With this exception the aorist always has the augment in classical Sanskrit. The tense comprises, in the later language, only an **indicative** mode. The main varieties of aorist are three: I. **Simple** Aorist; II. **Reduplicated** Aorist; III. **Sibilant** Aorist. * *
Aorist-System. 486. The aorist comprises three quite distinct formations, each with certain sub-varieties; but all are bound together into one complex system by certain correspondences of form and meaning. In classical Sanskrit aorists are comparatively rare. Their value is quite that of impf. or pf. as tenses of narration. But they are used also (though not nearly so often as the prohibitive opt.) with the particle in **prohibitions**, the augment being then omitted; thus, ZTT <^T« cdo not give’; HTt ‘do not fear’. With this exception the aorist always has the augment in classical Sanskrit. The tense comprises, in the later language, only an **indicative** mode. The main varieties of aorist are three: I. **Simple** Aorist; II. **Reduplicated** Aorist; III. **Sibilant** Aorist. * *
* The precative is strictly a peculiar aor. optative; but it is so rare that its formation need not be explained here.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 198
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 487. I. Simple aorist. (1) Root aorist. This aorist is precisely like an imperfect of the root-class. It is limited to the active voice of a few roots in **^n**, and of **1J**. E. g. ^r: vt, **^r^rrcL**; nr, ’ll6 go’, ^r-1-2. 3. Like
487. I. Simple aorist. (1) Root aorist. This aorist is precisely like an imperfect of the root-class. It is limited to the active voice of a few roots in **^n**, and of **1J**. E. g. ^r: vt, **^r^rrcL**; nr, ’ll6 go’, ^r-1-2. 3. Like

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 198
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: (2) The a-aorist. This is like an imperfect of the a-class, active and middle. Thus, from 1st personsIn general the root * The precative is strictly a peculiar aor. optative; but it is so rare that its formation need not be explained here. 488. Lesson XLIV. 189 assumes a weak form ; but three or four roots in final take guna. Thus, ^rrq;, ^rr^rfj TPfi, ÎptKU — Irregular: * 5TT, wt; st, ^rsa;; ^t, vhl wfipRU -?^th ‘throw’, ^n- (anomalous). makes and Hcf., which, with one or two others, were doubtless originally **reduplicated** aorists.
(2) The a-aorist. This is like an imperfect of the a-class, active and middle. Thus, from 1st personsIn general the root * The precative is strictly a peculiar aor. optative; but it is so rare that its formation need not be explained here. 488. Lesson XLIV. 189 assumes a weak form ; but three or four roots in final take guna. Thus, ^rrq;, ^rr^rfj TPfi, ÎptKU — Irregular: * 5TT, wt; st, ^rsa;; ^t, vhl wfipRU -?^th ‘throw’, ^n- (anomalous). makes and Hcf., which, with one or two others, were doubtless originally **reduplicated** aorists.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 199
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 489. II. Reduplicated Aorist (3). This aorist differs from all others in that it has come to be attached nearly always to the derivative (cans., etc.) conjugation in ^4, as its aorist. The connection is not formal, as the aorist is not made from the stem in but from the root. Its characteristic is a reduplication, of quite peculiar character. 490. The reduplicated aorist is very unusual in classical Sanskrit, and it will be sufficient for the present to give an example or two of its formation. Thus, makes mtR1-igrr, **TSrfWf8"’7cr** • The inflection is the usual one of imper- fects of the a-conjugation.
489. II. Reduplicated Aorist (3). This aorist differs from all others in that it has come to be attached nearly always to the derivative (cans., etc.) conjugation in ^4, as its aorist. The connection is not formal, as the aorist is not made from the stem in but from the root. Its characteristic is a reduplication, of quite peculiar character. 490. The reduplicated aorist is very unusual in classical Sanskrit, and it will be sufficient for the present to give an example or two of its formation. Thus, makes mtR1-igrr, **TSrfWf8"’7cr** • The inflection is the usual one of imper- fects of the a-conjugation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 199
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 491. III. Sibilant Aorist, of four varieties. (4) The s-aorist. The tense-stem is made by adding to the **augmented** root, which usually has its vowel **strengthened**. E. g. : Act-: sing. 1. **THL** 2. ’snhfteL 3. du. i. 2. ’**SFteTL** 3. pl. 1. -**^WsJT**, 2. "**=SJ<2**. 3. Mid.: sing. 1. 2. 3. du. 1. 2. 3. Pl- 1-2. 3. (mid.only): sing. 1. 2. **^^T3£TT^**. 3. etc.
491. III. Sibilant Aorist, of four varieties. (4) The s-aorist. The tense-stem is made by adding to the **augmented** root, which usually has its vowel **strengthened**. E. g. : Act-: sing. 1. **THL** 2. ’snhfteL 3. du. i. 2. ’**SFteTL** 3. pl. 1. -**^WsJT**, 2. "**=SJ<2**. 3. Mid.: sing. 1. 2. 3. du. 1. 2. 3. Pl- 1-2. 3. (mid.only): sing. 1. 2. **^^T3£TT^**. 3. etc.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 199
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 492. (5) The fs-aorist. The tense-stem is made by adding by means of an inserted The root is generally **strengthened**. E. g. ^‘purify’: Act.: sing. 1. 2. 3. **^TTT**-du. i. 2. 3. pl e °’f * rSFr> 2- 3»Org^. — Mid. sing. 1. 2. ^tlfW^TH., 3. 190 Lesson XLIV. XLV. MHre; du. 1. o-faiErft, 2- e>fW’TnrnL 3- pi- i. 2. 3. °fqqct. — This is the only aorist of which forms are made in the **secondary** and **denominative** conjugations (but for causatives and denominatives in cf. § 489).
492. (5) The fs-aorist. The tense-stem is made by adding by means of an inserted The root is generally **strengthened**. E. g. ^‘purify’: Act.: sing. 1. 2. 3. **^TTT**-du. i. 2. 3. pl e °’f * rSFr> 2- 3»Org^. — Mid. sing. 1. 2. ^tlfW^TH., 3. 190 Lesson XLIV. XLV. MHre; du. 1. o-faiErft, 2- e>fW’TnrnL 3- pi- i. 2. 3. °fqqct. — This is the only aorist of which forms are made in the **secondary** and **denominative** conjugations (but for causatives and denominatives in cf. § 489).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 200
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 493. (6) The sz.s-aorist is **active** only, the corresponding middle being of the **s**-form. An example will suffice here. zn: sing. 1. etc., quite like the inflection of the zs-aorist.
493. (6) The sz.s-aorist is **active** only, the corresponding middle being of the **s**-form. An example will suffice here. zn: sing. 1. etc., quite like the inflection of the zs-aorist.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 200
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 494. (7) The sa-aorist. Act. sing. 1- 2. 3. ; and so on, like an impf. of the ^-conjugation. But in the mid. the grammarians prescribe the 1st. sing. and 2nd and 3rd du. and °<**TTM**-
494. (7) The sa-aorist. Act. sing. 1- 2. 3. ; and so on, like an impf. of the ^-conjugation. But in the mid. the grammarians prescribe the 1st. sing. and 2nd and 3rd du. and °<**TTM**-

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 200
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 495. Aorist Passive. Generally the middle forms of aorists **4**, **5**, or **7**, are used also for the **passive**. Roots which do not ordinarily take aorists of these forms, may make them like **4** or **5** especially for the **passive**.
495. Aorist Passive. Generally the middle forms of aorists **4**, **5**, or **7**, are used also for the **passive**. Roots which do not ordinarily take aorists of these forms, may make them like **4** or **5** especially for the **passive**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 200
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 496. But a 3rd pers. sing., of peculiar formation, has become a recognized part of the passive conjugation. It is formed by adding to the root, which takes also the augment, and is usually strengthened, in some cases by gunay in others by vrddhi. After final is added ^ * . Thus, Mt MTMlfM; ; mm\ ^rrrfM ; — but
496. But a 3rd pers. sing., of peculiar formation, has become a recognized part of the passive conjugation. It is formed by adding to the root, which takes also the augment, and is usually strengthened, in some cases by gunay in others by vrddhi. After final is added ^ * . Thus, Mt MTMlfM; ; mm\ ^rrrfM ; — but

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 200
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: Lesson XLV. Derivative or Secondary Conjugations. 497. Secondary conjugations are those in which a whole system of forms, more or less complete, is made from a **derivative conjugation**-stem, this whole system being usually connected with a certain definite modification of the original radical sense. These conjugations are: I. **Passive**. II. **Intensive**. 111. **Desiderative**. IV. **Causative**. V. **Denominative**.
Lesson XLV. Derivative or Secondary Conjugations. 497. Secondary conjugations are those in which a whole system of forms, more or less complete, is made from a **derivative conjugation**-stem, this whole system being usually connected with a certain definite modification of the original radical sense. These conjugations are: I. **Passive**. II. **Intensive**. 111. **Desiderative**. IV. **Causative**. V. **Denominative**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 201
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 498. I. Passive. The present-system of the passive has been described ; as also the peculiar 3rd pers. sing, used as aor. pass., the past pass, participle in cf or and the fut. pass, participles or gerundives. In all other parts of the verb **middle** forms are used, if necessary, with passive meaning.
498. I. Passive. The present-system of the passive has been described ; as also the peculiar 3rd pers. sing, used as aor. pass., the past pass, participle in cf or and the fut. pass, participles or gerundives. In all other parts of the verb **middle** forms are used, if necessary, with passive meaning.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 201
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 499. II. Intensive. The intensive conjugation signifies the **intensification** or the **repetition** of the action expressed by the primary conjugation of a root. Forms outside the present-system are too **rare** to need notice here; indeed, even within that system they are **by no means common** in the later language. Intensives fall into two classes.
499. II. Intensive. The intensive conjugation signifies the **intensification** or the **repetition** of the action expressed by the primary conjugation of a root. Forms outside the present-system are too **rare** to need notice here; indeed, even within that system they are **by no means common** in the later language. Intensives fall into two classes.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 201
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 500. 1. The verbs of the **first** class (only act.) form their intensive-stem by **reduplication**, and the reduplicating syllable is **strengthened**, a. Radical and are reduplicated with ^(T, and with 1J, and with thus, b. Sometimes the reduplicating syllable has a final consonant, taken from the end of the root; thus, c. Sometimes the reduplication is **dissyllabic**, an ?-vowel being inserted after the final consonant of the reduplicating syllable; thus, —The model of inflection is the present-system of the reduplicating- class, but deviations are not rare; in particular, an is sometimes inserted between stem and ending.
500. 1. The verbs of the **first** class (only act.) form their intensive-stem by **reduplication**, and the reduplicating syllable is **strengthened**, a. Radical and are reduplicated with ^(T, and with 1J, and with thus, b. Sometimes the reduplicating syllable has a final consonant, taken from the end of the root; thus, c. Sometimes the reduplication is **dissyllabic**, an ?-vowel being inserted after the final consonant of the reduplicating syllable; thus, —The model of inflection is the present-system of the reduplicating- class, but deviations are not rare; in particular, an is sometimes inserted between stem and ending.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 201
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 501. 2. From the intensive-stem as just described may be formed another , formally identical with a **passive-stem** , by the suffix It takes **middle** inflection, but has no **passive** value, being used precisely as is the intensive just mentioned. Thus,
501. 2. From the intensive-stem as just described may be formed another , formally identical with a **passive-stem** , by the suffix It takes **middle** inflection, but has no **passive** value, being used precisely as is the intensive just mentioned. Thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 201
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 502. A few intensives, having lost their value as such, come to be used as presents, and are treated by the native grammarians as simple roots. Thus rea^y intensive of ‘wake’, is assigned to the root-class: pres, etc., du. etc.; impf. i. 2- 3- etc. So 192 Lesson XLV. also intens. of 4 run \ used as a present with the sense 4 be poor’. ‘wash’, and some others, use the intensive present - system in the same way, and are assigned to the reduplicating class; thus, 3rd sing. 3rd pl. Intensive forms outside the present-system are very **rare**.
502. A few intensives, having lost their value as such, come to be used as presents, and are treated by the native grammarians as simple roots. Thus rea^y intensive of ‘wake’, is assigned to the root-class: pres, etc., du. etc.; impf. i. 2- 3- etc. So 192 Lesson XLV. also intens. of 4 run \ used as a present with the sense 4 be poor’. ‘wash’, and some others, use the intensive present - system in the same way, and are assigned to the reduplicating class; thus, 3rd sing. 3rd pl. Intensive forms outside the present-system are very **rare**.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 202
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 503. III. Desiderative. By this conjugation is denoted a **desire** for the **action** or **condition** denoted by the simple root; thus, 41 drink’, desid. fUMT4TTfÎ cI wish to drink’.
503. III. Desiderative. By this conjugation is denoted a **desire** for the **action** or **condition** denoted by the simple root; thus, 41 drink’, desid. fUMT4TTfÎ cI wish to drink’.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 202
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 504. To form the desiderative-stem the root is **reduplicated**, and adds sometimes . The consonant of the reduplication is determined by the usual rules; the vowel of reduplication is if the root has an **a**-vowel, an **t**-vowel, or and ^3 if the root has an **u**-vowel. Thus, zn, ftpirafH; H,
504. To form the desiderative-stem the root is **reduplicated**, and adds sometimes . The consonant of the reduplication is determined by the usual rules; the vowel of reduplication is if the root has an **a**-vowel, an **t**-vowel, or and ^3 if the root has an **u**-vowel. Thus, zn, ftpirafH; H,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 202
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 505. A number of roots form an abbreviated desiderative- stem; thus,
505. A number of roots form an abbreviated desiderative- stem; thus,

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 202
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 506. The conjugation in the present-system is like that of other **a**-stems. Outside of that desiderative forms are quite **infrequent**. The perfect is the **periphrastic**. The aorist is of the **€s**-form ; thus, 5 The futures are made with the auxiliary vowel thus, cl, The verbal nouns are made with in all forms where that vowel is ever taken. A passive may be made; thus, €it is desired to be obtained’; part.
506. The conjugation in the present-system is like that of other **a**-stems. Outside of that desiderative forms are quite **infrequent**. The perfect is the **periphrastic**. The aorist is of the **€s**-form ; thus, 5 The futures are made with the auxiliary vowel thus, cl, The verbal nouns are made with in all forms where that vowel is ever taken. A passive may be made; thus, €it is desired to be obtained’; part.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 202
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 507. IV. Causative. 1. The present-system of the causative has been treated of already. 2. The perfect is the **periphrastic**, the derivative noun in ^5TT being formed from the causative-stem; thus, 3. The aorist is the **reduplicated**, made in general directly from the **root**, and formally unconnected with the **causative**-stem; thus, a ^ew instances? where the root has assumed a peculiar form before the causativesign, the **reduplicated aorist** is made from **this** form, not from the Lesson LXV. 193 **simple** root; thus, IgR, ^rfTlfW^cX- 4. Both futures are made from the **causative**-stem, the auxiliary replacing the final thus, VnTf^cnf^T- 5. The verbal nouns and adjectives are in part formed from the causative-stem in the same manner as the futures, in part from the causatively strengthened root-form; thus, pass. part. fut. pass. part, (gerundive) cHf^cT^T, ÎTd; inf. i gerund °^Tn3L °’T-(§ 310).
507. IV. Causative. 1. The present-system of the causative has been treated of already. 2. The perfect is the **periphrastic**, the derivative noun in ^5TT being formed from the causative-stem; thus, 3. The aorist is the **reduplicated**, made in general directly from the **root**, and formally unconnected with the **causative**-stem; thus, a ^ew instances? where the root has assumed a peculiar form before the causativesign, the **reduplicated aorist** is made from **this** form, not from the Lesson LXV. 193 **simple** root; thus, IgR, ^rfTlfW^cX- 4. Both futures are made from the **causative**-stem, the auxiliary replacing the final thus, VnTf^cnf^T- 5. The verbal nouns and adjectives are in part formed from the causative-stem in the same manner as the futures, in part from the causatively strengthened root-form; thus, pass. part. fut. pass. part, (gerundive) cHf^cT^T, ÎTd; inf. i gerund °^Tn3L °’T-(§ 310).

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 203
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 508. Causative passive and desiderative. These may be made from the **causative**-stem as follows. 1 * The passive-stem is formed by adding the usual passive sign ZJ to the causatively **strengthened** root, the syllables being omitted; thus, 2. The desider-ative-stem is made by **reduplication** and addition of the syllables of which the replaces the final of the causative-stem; thus, This is a rare formation.
508. Causative passive and desiderative. These may be made from the **causative**-stem as follows. 1 * The passive-stem is formed by adding the usual passive sign ZJ to the causatively **strengthened** root, the syllables being omitted; thus, 2. The desider-ative-stem is made by **reduplication** and addition of the syllables of which the replaces the final of the causative-stem; thus, This is a rare formation.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 203
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 509. V. Denominative. A denominative conjugation is one that has as basis a noun-stem. In general, the base is made from the noun-stem by means of the conjugation-sign 7J, which has the **accent**. Intermediate between the denominative and causative conjugations stands a class of verbs plainly denominative in origin but having the **causative accent**. Thus, from mantrayate; from cftfa, kzrtayati. See § 76.
509. V. Denominative. A denominative conjugation is one that has as basis a noun-stem. In general, the base is made from the noun-stem by means of the conjugation-sign 7J, which has the **accent**. Intermediate between the denominative and causative conjugations stands a class of verbs plainly denominative in origin but having the **causative accent**. Thus, from mantrayate; from cftfa, kzrtayati. See § 76.

MNLink: <A Sanskrit Primer> - 203
Other fields (not shown on cards):
Remarks: 510. The denominative meaning is of the greatest variety; e. g. ‘be like’, ‘act as’, ‘regard or treat as’, ‘make into’, ‘desire, crave’ — that which is signified by the noun-stem. Examples: from 7(1^ ‘penance, asceticism’, ‘practise ascetism’; from ‘honor’; auyTqft ‘blacken’; ‘seek horses’; ^fTtTT^TfH ‘play the herdsman, protect ; • desire wealth ’; ‘ play the physician, cure’; T^frT ‘desire a son’, from the poss. cpd. ‘desiring a son’-
510. The denominative meaning is of the greatest variety; e. g. ‘be like’, ‘act as’, ‘regard or treat as’, ‘make into’, ‘desire, crave’ — that which is signified by the noun-stem. Examples: from 7(1^ ‘penance, asceticism’, ‘practise ascetism’; from ‘honor’; auyTqft ‘blacken’; ‘seek horses’; ^fTtTT^TfH ‘play the herdsman, protect ; • desire wealth ’; ‘ play the physician, cure’; T^frT ‘desire a son’, from the poss. cpd. ‘desiring a son’-